telecommunications training package ict97 · pdf filetelecommunications training package ......

Telecommunications Training Package ICT97

Technical & Call Centre Streams

Volume 1: Part D – Network Stream Endorsed Competency Standards

Associated Volume Parts not in this publication & available separately

Volume 1 - General Information, Assessment Guidelines and Qualifications

Volume 1: Part A – Cabling Stream

Volume 1: Part B – CPE Stream

Volume 1: Part C – CAN Stream

Volume 1: Part E – Call Centre Stream

Managing Agent The Training Package has been prepared on behalf of the Information Technology and Telecommunications Industry Training Advisory Body (previously InfoComP Training) located at 139 Queensberry Street, Carlton South, Victoria, 3053

Information Technology and Telecommunications Industry Training advisory Body Ltd. (IT&Titab) Suite 3, 139 Queensberry Street, Carlton South, Victoria, Australia, 3053 Telephone: +61 03 9349 4955 Facsimile: +61 03 9349 4844

Authors • The DAT Corporation Pty Ltd–Dennis Trevarthen, John Rodgers • MK and MW O’Sullivan, Human Resource Consultants • BJ Brinkworth and Associates Pty Ltd

Validity of Information

The content of this report has been validated at all stages of its development by Telecommunications Industry representatives. This validation ensures the accuracy of the information contained in this resource at the time of publication. Users are encouraged to check information with manufacturers and regulatory bodies when using this resource in the future.

Copyright © Australian National Training Authority (ANTA), 2000 Level 11, AMP Place 10 Eagle Street BRISBANE QLD 4000 Phone: (07) 3246 2300 Fax: (07) 3246 2490 All rights reserved. This work has been produced initially with the assistance of funding provided by the Commonwealth Government through ANTA. This work is copyright, but permission is given to teachers, trainers and assessors to make copies by photocopying or other duplicating processes for use within their own training organisation or in a workplace where the training is being conducted. This permission does not extend to the making of copies for use outside the immediate training environment for which they are made, nor the making of copies for hire or resale to third parties. For permission outside of these guidelines, apply in writing to Australian National Training Authority. This work is the result of wide consultations with many industry participants throughout Australia. Consequently it is a collaborative view not necessarily representing any specific body and no single body warrants its content or accepts any liability. Published by: Australian Training Products Ltd Level 25 / 150 Lonsdale St, Melbourne , 3000 PO Box 12211 A’Beckett St Post Office Melbourne, Victoria 8006, Australia Telephone +61 3 9655 0600 Facsimile +61 3 9639 4684 E-mail: [email protected]

STOCKCODE; 8050V1DS Publication history: November 1977, January 1999, March 2000 Printed by Document Printing Australia, Melbourne, Victoria, Australia Version 2.00 January 2001

Volume 1

EndorsedComponent

GeneralInfo......

Part A

Part B

Part C

Part D

Part E

General Information, Assessment Guidelines,Qualification Specifications

Competency Standards : Cabling Stream

Competency Standards : CPE Stream

Competency Standards : CAN Stream

Competency Standards : Network Stream

Competency Standards : Call Centre Stream

IT&Titab

TelecommunicationsTraining PackageICT97

Telecommunications Training Package

Endorsed Component

Part D

Competency Standards: Network Stream

Part D of the Endorsed Telecommunications Training Package contains the complete set of theTechnical Network Stream Competency Standards and details of their application, assessment andrecognition within qualifications are defined within the General Information (front section) ofvolume 1. The General Information, Assessment Guidelines and Qualifications Specificationssection of volume 1 may be purchased separately.

ICT97 (Revised 1999) Telecommunications Training Package: Network Stream Competency Standards

©Australian National Training Authority ICT97 Page 1

INDEX – Network Management (NET) Competency Standards

ICTTC029B - Plan the development and growth of the telecommunications network ................................................ 3 ICTTC030B - Forecast service demand ..................................................................................................................... 17 ICTTC031B - Prepare a project brief ......................................................................................................................... 24 ICTTC032B - Undertake a civil site survey ............................................................................................................... 36 ICTTC033B - Develop project management plan ...................................................................................................... 48 ICTTC034B - Prepare a detailed design brief ............................................................................................................ 63 ICTTC035B - Organise material supply..................................................................................................................... 77 ICTTC036B - Undertake qualification testing of new or enhanced equipment and systems ..................................... 86 ICTTC042B - Undertake system administration ...................................................................................................... 106 ICTTC043B - Undertake network traffic management ............................................................................................ 120 ICTTC044B - Co-ordinate fault rectification and restoration of service following network outages ..................... 136 ICTTC045B - Ensure that network changes are implemented as planned with minimal impact to the customer ....150 ICTTC046B - Undertake network performance analysis ......................................................................................... 165 ICTTC047B - Undertake management of the Common Channel Signalling (CCS) network .................................. 180 ICTTC054B - Provide infrastructure for telecommunications network equipment.................................................. 197 ICTTC055B - Install an antenna/wave guide ........................................................................................................... 214 ICTTC056B - Install telecommunications network equipment ................................................................................ 228 ICTTC057B - Test cable bearers .............................................................................................................................. 255 ICTTC058B - Acceptance test new systems and equipment .................................................................................... 268 ICTTC059B - Commission telecommunications network equipment ...................................................................... 286 ICTTC060B - Integrate new systems and equipment into the telecommunications network................................... 308 ICTTC061B - Cutover new and/or replacement network equipment ....................................................................... 326 ICTTC076B - Complete equipment/software upgrades ........................................................................................... 334 ICTTC085B - Monitor, analyse and action telecommunications network alarms.................................................... 359 ICTTC086B – Undertake routine maintenance of the telecommunications network ............................................... 376 ICTTC087B - Undertake remote repair of network faults........................................................................................ 393 ICTTC088B - Locate and rectify network faults on a first in basis.......................................................................... 416 ICTTC089B - Repair and replace telecommunications network hardware .............................................................. 434 ICTTC090B - Analyse and organise repair of complex telecommunications network faults .................................. 445 ICTTC091B - Analyse and organise repair of the most complex telecommunications network faults.................... 467 ICTTC092B - Undertake outage management ......................................................................................................... 491 ICTTC093B - Manage spare parts............................................................................................................................ 516 ICTTC094B - Verify new software/hardware releases............................................................................................. 524 ICTTC095B - Conduct radio frequency measurements............................................................................................ 543 ICTTC096B - Conduct field tests of radio/wireless networks.................................................................................. 560 ICTTC097B - Conduct tests on handset enhancements and international roaming agreements .............................. 574 ICTTC098B - Monitor the capacity of and recommend changes to the mobile network ......................................... 590



STREAM Technical - NET

FIELD Planning and Design

UNIT ICTTC029B - Plan the development and growth of the telecommunications network

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Prerequisite Units Assessment candidates will have a wide range of telecommunications industry skills, knowledge and competency at Diploma level or above before attempting this unit. Equivalent Units None

ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

1 Identify data related to both existing and projected network usage

1 Marketing intelligence is accessed for detail as to customer demand on the network and likely growth in network use

2 Demand data from both carriers and resellers relating to both current and proposed network growth is obtained

3 Information relating to new and emerging technologies, facilities/features and their specific applications is accessed

4 Current data relating to both traffic quantity and flow is gathered

5 Forecasts are obtained in relation to both service and traffic demand

6 Data related to current network capacity is determined

7 Relevant legislation and associated operational codes are studied and impact on planning processes analysed

2 Identify need for network growth 1 Capacity of existing network to absorb planned growth is determined

2 Need and likely timing of necessary network increments is determined

3 Use of new or alternate technologies to meet forecast growth is assessed

4 Impact of not meeting growth forecasts is established

5 Priorities relating to growth needs are determined

6 Barriers relating to planned network extensions are identified



3 Develop network plans 1 Overall planning parameters including approved business plan is studied and understood prior to commencement of planning process

2 Specific projects aimed at meeting technology change/improvement and growth are identified

3 Project details including infrastructure development are determined and preliminary costings undertaken

4 Priority related to each project is determined

5 Availability of required technology or technology feature within the specified timeframe is determined in assessing network growth plans

6 Resource requirements are clearly identified

7 Appropriate investment studies including cost/benefit analysis are undertaken where required

8 Plan is circulated for comment and approval in accordance with recognised enterprise procedures

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Marketing intelligence may include: customer projections, customer demand, customer specific technology needs, new technology impact, customer feedback Demand data from resellers may come direct or via marketing intelligence Information on new technologies and impact on existing network are obtained from vendors, enterprise forward planning groups, marketing groups or specific technology planning groups Traffic dimensioning information is derived from specific traffic dimensioning studies undertaken within network management groups Timeframes for development or growth planning are influenced both by financial capacity as determined by the business plan or via the marketing plan



Barriers to planned network growth may include: financial constraints, planning approvals, environmental considerations, heritage legislation restrictions, government policy, technology availability, land acquisition problems, building availability, material availability Planning priorities are driven by customer demand, marketing initiatives, revenue projections, legislative requirements Planning can relate to network change, network growth and network reduction and may also cover sites, buildings and structures Resource arrangements may be internal or external to the enterprise Business plan is the enterprise vehicle for planning its full resource committment within a specified period. It covers activities, finance, labour and material. Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000/9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU Recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Heritage legislation Industrial awards and conditions Australian standards applying to radiation hazards State and Federal Environment Acts National Parks Act Telecommunications Act and relevant codes Privacy act Spectrum Management Authority

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. • Details of Skills and Knowledge listed for this unit are specified in the 'Telecommunication Training Package -

Skills and Knowledge' booklet by the code indicated. Evidence Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and planning network growth and development under normal working conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in a realistic simulated environment may be substituted. Specific requirements for competency against a particular context, as defined in the range of variables, may vary between enterprises and for the particular learning strategy adopted.



Evidence of competency will include: Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor:

• identifying data including: legislative requirements, marketing intelligence, demand data, new and emerging technologies, equipment and features, current traffic data, growth forecasts, existing network capacity

• reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and documentation

• interpreting, interrogating and using relevant data bases Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor:

• interpreting growth patterns and developing options which satisfy customer and enterprise financial goals

• maintaining customer focus and consideration of customer needs Mentor/assessor observes candidate:

• implementing planning processes including the associated monitoring and control mechanisms • merging technological development and product implementation into network development

plans • developing a clearly documented network plan, both within specification and within specified

timeframes • identifying and prioritising projects aimed at meeting the development of the network within

specified planning timeframe • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors

Candidate submits a clearly documented hard copy network development plan. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CI620 Research Skill 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO630 Planning Software 6 CO640 Forecasting Software 6 CO670 Planning Applications Programming 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 DI640 Digital/Analogue Network Applications 6 EL530 Power Theory 5 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 PE610 Personal Skills 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS620 Design 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RE660 Australian Electrical Standards 6 SU610 Planning 6 SU660 Finance 6 SU690 Economics and Strategic Thinking 6 TR650 Traffic Management 6



CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,

an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document CI620 Research Skill 6 Undertake a Project • Research and analyse information specific to a project topic • Generate a range of technical solutions and select the most appropriate • Design, evaluate and finalise this solution • Organise and manage research process CO610 Computer Skills 6 Assumed - C0510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software and available data to analyse network design, manage

technical and personnel functions, and generate concepts for growth and improvement. • Identify the sources of relevant data. Collect and analyse this data using software packages to:

• determine site/channel capacity, forecast future needs • measure traffic levels and patterns • prepare a plan to indicate network growth potential • prepare a time chart to meet such growth • prepare a report e.g. project brief complete with options, costs, outcomes, budgeting, timing, maps, plans

and detailed description of project. • measure the performance of the network by trend analysis, statistical and comparative data analysis. e.g

meantime between failures is established using historical data and real time analysis of data • optimise database • prepare a business plan in line with forecast network growth, within resource capacity, timeframes,

technological advances, and impact on existing systems. • Devise methods of testing new software to verify its compliance with existing hardware.

• Install and run test programs, monitor the performance of both software/hardware to forecast potential problems.

Note: This topic has units relating to network security codes, access, system platforms - which belong to another topic C0660, Forecasting in C0640, Planning in C0630.



CO630 Planning Software 6 Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software tools to source and collate existing data • Analyse, make judgements and decisions • plan and manage large projects. • Effectively use various management applications software packages of project planning and scheduling such as

flow charts/Gant charts to: • Develop a project management plan, timeframes, resources, barriers and contingency actions, skills and

training, priorities, specifications, costing, expenditure and risk analysis of various financial options. • Produce documents of plan outlining tasks, process flow, timeframes, resource requirements and financial

details. • Prepare a project brief including various planning options, cost/benefit studies, costing estimates and profit

margins, project timing. • Use techniques such as check lists and Gant charts, which involve development and use of software based

programs. • Produce a clearly documented brief which meets the specifications of the approved network project plan,

specified timeframes, within financial capacity and policy, specified planning processes including associated monitoring and control mechanisms.

CO640 Forecasting Software 6

Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5

• Demonstrate specialist knowledge and skills in the use of forecasting software packages to: • Plan the development and growth of the Telecommunications Network by:

• accessing and gathering relevant data such as: demand from carriers and resellers, current capacity, current traffic and quantity of flow, financial capacity and resources.

• interpreting interrogating and use of relevant data bases. • identify growth patterns • develop a clearly documented plan taking into account other parameters which give rise to alternative

options, such as, new and emerging technologies, priorities, timing, other projects, marketing, financial capacity and goals.

• develop a business/marketing plan with preliminary costings. • show a cost/benefit analysis.

• Collate the data from the growth plan above to generate forecast figures using appropriate forecasting techniques e.g. trend analysis, mathematical modelling.

• Compile figures to produce various reports by changing parameters. • Review forecasts at regular intervals after each activity or amendment or technology change.

CO670 Planning Applications Programming 6

Covered fully in Planning Software 6 (CO630) and Forecasting Software 6 (CO640), and Computer Skills 6 (CO610).

CS610 Customer Relations 6

• Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are

described, and feedback sought. • Providers capacity to meet customer requirements and, where appropriate, the organisations marketing and

pricing policies. • Other workgroups which should be notified of client requirements and/or characteristics are identified and

advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided.



DI640 Digital/Analogue Network Applications 6 Assumed - DI510 Digital Theory 5 • Demonstrate in depth specialist knowledge of Digital Signal Processing (DSP) and the various applications in

the telecommunications network. • Draw a block diagram of a DSP system identifying all major blocks. • Refer to applications such as:

• Audio Response Equalisation, echo cancelling on telephone lines • tracking filters for radio communication l • ine repeaters • channel multiplexing • data encryption • digital speech interpolation • x.25 packet switching • video conferencing • security access • digital radio • voice commands • modems • ADPCK transcoders • DTMF encoding/decoding • FAX • mobile network

• Analyse the sampling process and how it changes the signal. Use Shannon's Sampling Theorem. • Calculate quantisation noise introduced by A/D and D/A signal conversion. • Define the spectrum of a sampled signal. • Use filter design packages and determine the response of any specified filter, including specialist types such as

adaptive filters, programmable filters, complementary filters and transformations. • Program a DSP to implement a filter for various applications. • Produce a circuit diagram showing how a filter interfaces to a DSP system. • Conduct appropriate tests on equipment used in the CCS network to determine the limitations of DSP

techniques. • Diagnose and resolve problems and faults which have been reported in the network related to signal

processing. DTMF = Dual Tone Multifrequency ADPCM = Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Moderation CCS = Common Channel Signalling EL530 Power Theory 5

Assumed EL430 Power Theory 4

• State requirements made of remote area power supplies. • Identify situations where RAPS would be needed. • Explain the operation of diesel generator standby sets, governors and control mechanisms. • Calculate required capacity of alternator, rectifiers for a given situation. • Make calculations on cell and battery capacities, for both discharge and recharge. • Write chemical reaction equations for cells in common usage. • Determine required sizing of solar cells for given applications. • Calculate and dimension regulators used with solar panels for a given situation. • Explain the principles involved in 'changeover' from one power supply type to another. • Describe the principles of operation of advanced UPS, and be able to dimension the equipment accordingly for

a given situation.

EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6

Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events.



IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members. MA620 Mathematics 6 Minimum • Statistical analysis

• traffic data • distribution patterns

• Traffic tables • GOS, Erlang B

• Queuing Theory - applications • Markov chains • Applications of statistical process: MTBF

• Sampling processes: • Shannon's Theorem • Hamming Window • Spectrum

• Database management systems - relational operators



Additional - Select from: • Demonstrates application of queuing theory to network problems • Formulates Markov chains and transition probability matrices from given situations • Demonstrates application of statistical processes in determining expectation of MTBF • Describe a range of DSP applications. • Draw an overall block diagram of a DSP system. • Describe the following DSP applications: Audio-response equalisation, Echo-canceling on telephone lines,

Tracking filters for radio communications, Voice compression. • Identify the way in which the sampling process changes the signal. • State Shannon's Sampling Theorem. • Calculate the quantisation noise introduced by A/D and D/A signal-conversion in a given DSP system. • Describe the spectrum of a sampled signal. • Specify the response required for the input anti-alias filter. • Specify the response required for the output reconstruction filter, including sin (x)/x compensation. • Find the impulse response of a linear-phase filter. • Draw the frequency-response (amplitude and phase) for any specified low-pass (LP), band-pass (BP) or high-

pass (HP) filter. • Draw the estimated impulse-response for any specified LP, BP or HP filter. • Calculate the approximate number of impulse-response coefficients needed in a Finite Impulse Response (FIR)

filter to meet given specified pass-band ripple, transition-band width and stop-band ripple. • Calculate the unwindowed impulse-response for a linear-phase LP, BP or HP filter. • Apply a von Hann ('Hanning') or Hamming window to the calculated unwindowed impulse-response. • Use a filter design package to determine the impulse-response coefficients for a range of LP, BP and HP filters. • Describe the process of convolution. • State the standard expression for discrete convolution. • Describe how a DSP system carries out convolution. • Describe the Least Mean Square (LMS) algorithm. • Describe two practical applications for adaptive filters. • Calculate the number of taps needed on an adaptive filter for a given application. • State the effect of coefficient rounding error on FIR filters. • Design a simple Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter. • Use the pole-zero placement method to obtain coefficients for a simple first-order and second-order low-pass

and band-pass IIR filter. • Use the bi-linear Z-transform to obtain the filter coefficients for a simple first-order and second-order low pass

IIR filter. • Show the direct-form realisation of a simple IIR filter suitable for sin(x)/x compensation. NE620 Network Architecture 6 Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4 Switching Network Architecture • Discuss network clock synchronisation and clock hierarchy structure. • Explain the concept of,

• fixed routing • dynamic non hierarchical routing • adaptive routing.

• Explain the technological reasons justifying a distributed control architecture. • Explain the implementation of a Digital Access Cross Connect System (DACS) for electronic cross connection

of customers services.



Transmission Network Architecture • Describe a typical Customer Access Network (CAN) implementation in a CBD fibre ring. • Describe the application of a long distance high capacity 1+1 optical fibre link in a two fibre ring configuration. • Describe the principles behind a layered network architecture. • Explain what is meant by partioning with respect to connectivity and topology. • State the implications of a 'trail' (as defined in the ITU recommendation G.803) in terms of information transfer

in a layered network. • Explain what is meant by a connection point, termination point and access point in a

• layered network. • Identify the standard diagrammatic symbols defined within the ITU recommendation G.803, used to represent

various layered network functionality. GSM Network Architecture • Describe the GSM network timing configuration. • Describe the implementation of the DE 34/DF 34 BTS, DX200 MSC/VLR and DX200 • HLR into a GSM network. • Describe the implementation of new generations of cellular antennas in GSM networks, namely,

• variable electrical downtilt • dual polarisation • dual band

NE630 Network Signalling 6 Common Channel Signalling Number 7 (CCS 7) • Using a diagram show the structure of CCS 7 protocol architecture and its relation to the 7 layers of OSI. • Define the following terms,

• OMAP • ASEs • ISUP • SCCP

• List and define three types of signal unit at the signalling link level, namely, • MSU • LSSU • FISU

• Describe the functions of signalling network level as signalling message handling and • Signalling network management. • List four message transfer services provided by the Signalling Connection Control Part ( SCCP), and describe

the procedure of connection establishment for the connection-oriented service. Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) signalling • Explain what is defined in the ISDN User Part (ISUP) of CCS 7 and what the difference is between the ISUP

and the ISDN call control procedure as defined in 1.451/Q.931. • Describe the functions of the basic services provided by the ISDN user part (ISUP), namely,

• calling line identification • call forwarding • direct dialling • user-to-user signalling • closed user groups

Broadband ISDN Signalling • With reference to B-ISDN architecture, describe the three different sets of signalling interactions and the types

of B-ISDN services they are to support. • Referring to the B-ISDN Protocol Reference Model, describe the functions of user plane, control plane and

management plane. • Explain how the standard data link control protocol LAPD may be used over ATM. • Describe Virtual Path (VP) and Virtual Channel (VC) connections in ATM and their characteristics as specified

by Interim Recommendation 1.450.



NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 Assumed NE620 Network Architecture 6 Network Management Models • Describe the TMN network management model. • Describe the ISO/OSI system management model. • Describe the SNMP network management model. Network Management Techniques and Standards • Describe the network management techniques and standards used for:

• Internet • SDH • ISDN • B-ISDN • GSM

Organisation and Implementation of a Managed Data Network • Structure a network management group. • Identify the job functions within a network management group. • Design a managed data network to meet an operational specification. • Locate the best positions for performance monitoring equipment within a managed network. • Demonstrate familiarity with the operation of an element managed system. Fault, Configuration, Performance and Security Management • Identify and diagnose faults in a managed data network and restore services. • Implement adds, moves and changes in a managed network and interact with a configuration management

system to maintain a consistent network view. • Interpret performance indicators to identify network performance problems and institute appropriate actions to

correct the problems. • Use logging information to identify security violations. • Take appropriate action to end security events. • Institute appropriate follow up actions to remove the security weaknesses in a network. PE610 Personal Skills 6 Covered in PE510 Personal Skills 5 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications



PS620 Design 6 Assumed PS430 Drawing Techniques • Identify requirements

• change, improvement, network plan, specific goals • demand, network growth • new technology features, innovation and development • trend analysis • statistical data

• Planning options • present and future needs • cost/benefits • outcomes/priorities • approval

• Specifications • location, route, area, product, platform • cost estimates, budget, profit • enterprise policy • commercial strategies • project timing

• Prepare brief • resources: skills, equipment, hardware/software • scheduling • maps, sketch plans • description of project

• Quotation • tenders • assessment

• Progress • monitor, control, liase • contracts • variations • quality

• Contingency plans • Completion RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns

and site costs. Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner.



Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites. Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference. RE660 Australian Electrical Standards 6 • Refer to Australian Standards • Review context of competency unit and relate to relevant standards. SU610 Planning 6 Covered in SU510 Planning 5 SU660 Finance 6 Covered in SU460 Finance 4 SU690 Economics and Strategic Thinking 6 Industry advice indicates that this type of skill and knowledge is provided to enterprises by individuals with degrees and higher degrees. TR650 Traffic Management 6 Basic Principles • Derive Equations of State from first principles • Solve queuing problems using the equation of states. • Write and demonstrate a program to simulate a single server, single queue packet system (i.e. a discrete event

simulation tool) Traffic Load Design • Use an advanced traffic management design software tool (e.g. Westbay) to model and dimension a voice

network • Solve problems involving available numbers in a numbering plan by hand calculator (simple) and computer

simulation (hard). • Calculate Network delays and throughput for a simple ATM network. • Calculate the number of agents required to maintain a particular grade of service at a call center using Erlang B

and C loss functions • Predict the growth of the traffic in a network by using the least squares method and fitting the growth to a

linear and/or an exponential equation.



Management Functions • Analyse typical day to day variations and seasonal variation in traffic flow in order to prepare a traffic

management plan to improve the traffic flow (maximise revenue) • Describe typical traffic management functions performed on a day to day basic by network operations staff.

KEY COMPETENCY LEVEL 1 Collecting, Analysing and Organising Information 3 2 Communicating Ideas and Information 3 3 Planning and Organising Activities 3 4 Working With Others and in Teams 3 5 Using Mathematical Ideas and Techniques 3 6 Solving Problems 3 7 Using Technology 3





UNIT ICTTC030B - Forecast service demand



1 Generate forecasts 1 Data is collated from appropriate organisations involved in planning initiatives and/or amendments

2 Forecasts are generated using information in reference to new developments

3 Appropriate forecasting techniques are used to calculate forecast figures

4 Forecast figures are compiled and reported upon in accordance with enterprise policy

2 Update systems with current forecasts

1 Systems are updated after each installation / amendment activity using reports received from groups involved in installation

3 Review forecasts 1 Forecasts are reviewed at regular periods according to enterprise policy

2 Forecast reviews take into consideration new developments in the area and technological changes where appropriate

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite



Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Data is collected in relation to: access transport planning, demographic changes, economic forecasts, industry trends, land developments, local industry, market conditions, marketing programs, marketing requirements, population trends, possible environmental impacts, power, re-zoning, sales forecasts, shire planning, telecommunications history in the area, traffic patterns, influence of technology on traffic demand, changing customer use patterns Data may be collected from: customers (actual and prospective), internal organisational groups, local, marketing organisations, real estate agents, sales organisations, state & federal governments, statutory bodies, economic planners, traffic management systems Forecasts are in relation to: demand for telecommunications services and traffic Methods of data collection may include: interviews, plans, maps, directories, reports, network management tools New developments include: domestic, commercial, industrial, other communications activity Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000/9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU Recommendations Occupational Health and Safety State and Federal Environment Acts National Parks Act Telecommunications Act and relevant codes Privacy act

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning.



Evidence Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing demand forecasting under normal working conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in a realistic simulated environment may be substituted. Specific requirements for competency against a particular context, as defined in the range of variables, may vary between enterprises and for the particular learning strategy adopted. Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • collecting data vital to the development of both traffic and service variation • generating forecasts in relation to both traffic and service variation using appropriate forecasting techniques

including: trend analysis, mathematical modelling • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors, with a clear customer focus and

consideration of customer needs • applying legislative and environmental conditions in forecast generation Candidate submits a detailed hard copy service demand forecast. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor: • providing forecasts relevant to specific planning periods • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO640 Forecasting Software 6 CO650 Management Information Systems 6 MA630 Mathematical Modelling 6 NE670 Forecasting Techniques 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS660 Topography 6 PS670 Town Planning Procedures and Practices 6 SU690 Economics and Strategic Thinking 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,

an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document



CO640 Forecasting Software 6 Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge and skills in the use of forecasting software packages to: • Plan the development and growth of the Telecommunications Network by:

• accessing and gathering relevant data such as: demand from carriers and resellers, current capacity, current traffic and quantity of flow, financial capacity and resources.

• interpreting interrogating and use of relevant data bases. • identify growth patterns • develop a clearly documented plan taking into account other parameters which give rise to alternative

options, such as, new and emerging technologies, priorities, timing, other projects, marketing, financial capacity and goals.

• develop a business/marketing plan with preliminary costings. • show a cost/benefit analysis.

• Collate the data from the growth plan above to generate forecast figures using appropriate forecasting techniques e.g. trend analysis, mathematical modelling.

• Compile figures to produce various reports by changing parameters. • Review forecasts at regular intervals after each activity or amendment or technology change. CO650 Management Information Systems 6 Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist programming skills in using or adapting appropriate software for data collection

methods specific to Telecommunications equipment. • Gather data from various information systems presently used: • Network condition information is obtained from:

• capacity assessment data • traffic dimensioning data • network performance data • which is available through the various network management tools associated with the network.

• Customer information is gathered from both marketing and account management sources. • Access and security for information systems. • Data processing terminology • Update systems after installation/amendment MA630 Mathematical Modelling 6 • Use techniques of statistics to analyse the presentation of data, determine confidence limits, define, design and

perform statistical tests and gather, process and present data. • Methods covered will include 'alpha' levels of confidence, H0 and H1 tests of hypotheses, etc. NE670 Forecasting Techniques 6 Assumed NE670 Forecasting Techniques 4 Blocking in PSTN and GSM Networks • Explain that forecasting traffic requires that a blocking probability that users will tolerate is known. • Compare the following typical Grades of Service (GOS),

• 0.002 to 0.05 for PSTN • 0.01 to 0.05 for GSM base station links • 0.002 to 0.001 for GSM switch to PSTN.



Dispersion measurements • Explain that sources and destinations of all traffic are required in addition to traffic volumes to aid in traffic

forecasting. • Explain that dispersion measurements involve analysing the called number to typically six digits and recording

the total holding time. • Explain that dispersion measurements provide a matrix of the originating traffic from a switch to provide the

basis of traffic forecasting.

Traffic Forecasting Models • Explain the meaning and the use of base data for forecasting of traffic. • List and describe the curve fitting models that are used to extrapolate traffic trend, namely,

• Erlang-B • Erlang-C • Poisson • Engset • IEL • GV

• For a given base data and the analysis model predict the traffic for the next, • two years • decade

• Calculate the traffic intensity during a given period of observation. • Provision the components of a loss system to meet a given GOS using Erlang-B formula. • Provision the components of a delay system to meet a given GOS using Erlang-C formula.

PS610 Plans and Specifications 6

Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications

PS660 Topography 6

• Trending data • demographic changes, population, transport • economic market, industry trends, sales • land developments, planning, re-zoning • technology changes and developments • traffic patterns, demand

• Data collection from: • customers • internal organisational, traffic management • marketing, economic planners • real estate agents • sales organisations • State and Federal governments, statutory bodies

• Methods of data collection • network management tools • reports, maps, plans • interviews • directories

• Forecasting techniques • software packages • appropriate data • compile figures • interpretation

• New developments • commercial • industrial • domestic

• Reviews • technological change • demand increases/decrease • services enhancement • traffic changes



PS670 Town Planning Procedures and Practices 6 Assumed: PS660 Topography 6 • Data collection

• demographic changes: local, national, (international) • Contacts network

• State and Federal government • statutory bodies • shire councils • real estate agents

• Legal factors • relevant legislation • codes of practice • regulations and standards

• General forecast • future traffic and service requirements

• Planning initiative • enterprise policy; planning • proposal to appropriate organisations

SU690 Economics and Strategic Thinking 6 Industry advice indicates that this type of skill and knowledge is provided to enterprises by individuals with degrees and higher degrees. TE610 Telephony Principles 6 Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.

Describe a typical application for this type of access. • Determine the purpose of the D-channel. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) in Australia, and indicate the number of B

and D channels. Describe a typical application for this type of access. Explain the function of the following devices used on the ISDN access: • Network Termination 1 (NT1) • Network Termination 2 (NT2) • Terminal Equipment type 1 (TE1) • Terminal Equipment type 2 (TE2) • Terminal Adapter (TA)

• State the characteristics of the R, S, T and U reference points. Digital ISDN Telephone • Draw the block diagram of an ISDN telephone, and indicate the following functional blocks on your diagram:-

PWC, SIC, DCC, AIU, MEU, MPU, KBU, DIU, and SP. • Describe the basic function of the functional blocks above, and indicate what ISDN layer they operate at. • List some advantages and features that are provided by this type of digital telephone. Digital PABX Principles • Describe the main differences between a digital PABX, and previous generation PABX's. • Draw the block diagram of a typical digital PABX showing the major components as the Time Division Switch

(TDSW), Port Interfaces, Port Microcontrollers, Central processing Unit, Memory and the Man-Machine Interface.

• List some of the user functions that are available using a digital handset connected to a digital PABX. • Describe the purpose of connecting a Telephone Information Management System (TIMS) to a PABX. • List some type of reports that can be provided by the TIMS.



Virtual Private Network (VPN) • Describe what is meant by a Virtual Private Network such as Centrex or CustomNet. • Describe the main features of a virtual private network, and explain what impact this private network has on the

PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility. TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 Transmission Network Impairments • Clock signal impairments.

• Discuss the categories of clock signal impairments, such as, frequency offset, clock noise, phase variation, regenerator jitter, diurnal wander, and desynchonised justification jitter.

• Sources of errors in transmission networks. • Discuss the main sources of errors in transmission networks, such as, thermal noise, aging lasers, radio

fading, electrostatic and electromagnetic interference in radio systems, high resistance connections, timing impairments and low marginal design criteria.

Transmission Error Detection in SDH Networks • Discuss the two mechanisms for error detection in SDH, namely, loss of frame phase and block error monitor. Stress testing of transmission networks for test analysis. • Discuss the merit of stressing networks elements by performing tests, such as, frequency offset, wander, auto-

jitter tolerance, auto-jitter transfer and output jitter measurements. Error Performance • Describe the various error analysis methods in use or being developed, such as, error seconds, error free

seconds, severely errored seconds, degraded minutes, unavailable seconds, threshold error seconds, background block errors, unavailable time and short interruption event.

Transmission Network Availability • Explain that Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) is defined as the mean time to the first failure only. • Explain that manufacturer supplied MTBF figures have increased considerably over the past ten years,

however, manufacturers have not standardised on MTBF measurement. • Explain the terms Mean Time To Restore (MTTR), Availability and Unavailability.




STREAM Technical - NET, CAN


UNIT ICTTC031B - Prepare a project brief



1 Identify requirements 1 Details relating to the project are identified from the approved network plan

2 Current network conditions are assessed

3 Specific customer requirements are sought and analysed

4 Site survey data is analysed where required

5 Geographical information is obtained and/or studies initiated as required

6 Barriers to plan realisation are identified

7 Information relating to new technology or technology features is obtained and studied

8 Relevant legislation and associated operational codes are studied and impact on planning processes analysed

2 Develop project brief 1 Planning options are developed and studied, considering present and future needs

2 Both current and new technology, facilities and features are considered when developing options

3 Cost/benefit studies are undertaken as a guide to the decision making process

4 Project outcomes are determined in keeping with approved planning parameters

5 Project brief is discussed with the customer is required

6 Final option is presented for approval before proceeding with project brief

7 Specifications relating to location, route, area, product and/or platform are established

8 Costing estimates are developed and an operating budget ensuring profit margins in accordance with enterprise policy are established

9 Proposed project timing is determined taking into consideration



other related projects where required

10 Brief is prepared and includes broad details of the resources required to complete project, broad scheduling data, relevant maps, sketch plan and broad project description

11 Sketch plan for area in question is drafted in accordance with enterprise practice

3 Assess tenders 1 Quotations are sought or tenders are issued for project completion

2 Quotations/tenders are examined against project criteria and and any proposed variations assessed as to impact on proposed outcomes

3 Detailed project costings are examined to ensure that budget parameters are attained

4 Competitive tenders are assessed and decision made in accordance with enterprise policy and after consideration of price, product, capacity, performance, quality and ability to meet specified timeframes

4 Monitor contract progress and completion

1 Contract is oversighted and monitored with particular attention given to progress against plan, costings, specifications and budget

2 Regular liaison with project manager is established and maintained during the period of the contract

3 Contract problems/difficulties are discussed with both project manager and contractor as required

4 Contract overuns relating to both price and time are negotiated

5 Contract variations are negotiated and implemented

6 Additional funding is sought where required

7 Completion advice is completed in conjunction with project manager, installation manager and operational staff and asset declared ready for use

8 Quality audit of the project is undertaken and recommendations for improvement are made and submitted in accordance with enterprise procedures

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite



Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Network condition information is obtained from capacity assessment data, traffic dimensioning data and network performance data which is available through the various network management tools associated with the network Customer information is gathered from both marketing and account management sources. It could be necessary for planning staff to hold direct discussion with customers, but this would be done in conjunction with marketing or account management personnel Customers may be internal or external to the organisation External customers may include: other carriers, service providers, communication consultants, enterprises, government bodies Site survey data may include: site availability, site ownership and acquisition data, building availability and/or capacity,power availability, line of sight data, geological/land surveys, regulatory and statutory requirements, earthing requirements environmental impact, weather conditions - SEE UNIT Undertake civil site survey Barriers to planned network growth may include: local planning approvals, environmental considerations, heritage legislation restrictions, government policy, community opposition New technology introduction is normally part of long term planning and is part of the overall business and forward planning process Planning processes are enterprise specific and are usually documented within enterprise process manuals Decision as to whether project will be subject to tender process, preferred supplier arrangement or undertaken by enterprise resources is governed by enterprise policy Tendering process could involve both internal organisation groups as well as external organisations Tendering process is enterprise specific and usually documented in enterprise process manuals or part of enterprise policy Quality audit is a review of process and methodology Planning approval mechanisms are enterprise specific Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000/9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU Recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Heritage legislation Industrial awards and conditions Australian standards applying to radio frequency hazards State and Federal Environment Acts National Parks Act Telecommunications Act and relevant codes



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility.

Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual.

Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning.

Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • identifying all relevant data including: planning requirements, current network conditions, technology,

performance and capacity, customer requirements, site survey data, technological innovations and development, barriers to plan realisation

• applying legislative and environmental conditions to project brief development • developing and analysing contract options • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • competently assessing tenders

Candidate submits hard copy of a clearly documented brief which: • meets specification, specified timeframes, enterprise financial systems and policy, • applies specified planning processes including associated monitoring and control mechanisms

Candidate submits a hard copy report outlining all reasons for the final tender decision.

Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—showing: • compliance with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • interaction with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors

Skills and Knowledge Summary

Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CI620 Research Skill 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO630 Planning Software 6 CO670 Planning Applications Programming 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EL530 Power Theory 5 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 PE610 Personal Skills 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RE660 Australian Electrical Standards 6 SU600 Tender Analysis 6 SU610 Planning 6 SU630 Quality Management 6 SU660 Finance 6 SU690 Economics and Strategic Thinking 6 TR650 Traffic Management 6



CO630 Planning Software 6 Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software tools to source and collate existing data • Analyse, make judgements and decisions • plan and manage large projects. • Effectively use various management applications software packages of project planning and scheduling such as







CO670 Planning Applications Programming 6 Covered fully in Planning Software 6 (CO630) and Forecasting Software 6 (CO640), and Computer Skills 6 (CO610). CS610 Customer Relations 6 • Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are



advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. EL530 Power Theory 5 Assumed EL430 Power Theory 4 • State requirements made of remote area power supplies. • Identify situations where RAPS would be needed. • Explain the operation of diesel generator standby sets, governors and control mechanisms. • Calculate required capacity of alternator, rectifiers for a given situation. • Make calculations on cell and battery capacities, for both discharge and recharge. • Write chemical reaction equations for cells in common usage. • Determine required sizing of solar cells for given applications. • Calculate and dimension regulators used with solar panels for a given situation. • Explain the principles involved in 'changeover' from one power supply type to another. • Describe the principles of operation of advanced UPS, and be able to dimension the equipment accordingly for

a given situation.



EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events. IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members.



MA620 Mathematics 6 Minimum • Statistical analysis





• Database management systems - relational operators Additional - Select from: • Demonstrates application of queuing theory to network problems • Formulates Markov chains and transition probability matrices from given situations • Demonstrates application of statistical processes in determining expectation of MTBF • Describe a range of DSP applications. • Draw an overall block diagram of a DSP system. • Describe the following DSP applications: Audio-response equalisation, Echo-canceling on telephone lines,





IIR filter. • Show the direct-form realisation of a simple IIR filter suitable for sin(x)/x compensation.



NE620 Network Architecture 6 Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4 Switching Network Architecture • Discuss network clock synchronisation and clock hierarchy structure. • Explain the concept of,



of customers services. Transmission Network Architecture • Describe a typical Customer Access Network (CAN) implementation in a CBD fibre ring. • Describe the application of a long distance high capacity 1+1 optical fibre link in a two fibre ring configuration. • Describe the principles behind a layered network architecture. • Explain what is meant by partioning with respect to connectivity and topology. • State the implications of a 'trail' (as defined in the ITU recommendation G.803) in terms of information transfer









the procedure of connection establishment for the connection-oriented service.



Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) signalling • Explain what is defined in the ISDN User Part (ISUP) of CCS 7 and what the difference is between the ISUP






by Interim Recommendation 1.450. PE610 Personal Skills 6 Covered in PE510 Personal Skills 5 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns

and site costs. Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner. Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites.



Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference. RE660 Australian Electrical Standards 6 • Refer to Australian Standards • Review context of competency unit and relate to relevant standards. SU600 Tender Analysis 6 • Review of tender specifications • Setting analysis criteria • Applying analysis criteria • Factors affecting successful outcomes SU610 Planning 6 Covered in SU510 Planning 5 SU630 Quality Management 6 Covered in SU530 Quality Management 5 SU660 Finance 6 Covered in SU460 Finance 4 SU690 Economics and Strategic Thinking 6 Industry advice indicates that this type of skill and knowledge is provided to enterprises by individuals with degrees and higher degrees. TR650 Traffic Management 6 Basic Principles • Derive Equations of State from first principles • Solve queuing problems using the equation of states. • Write and demonstrate a program to simulate a single server, single queue packet system (i.e. a discrete event





linear and/or an exponential equation.



Management Functions • Analyse typical day to day variations and seasonal variation in traffic flow in order to prepare a traffic







UNIT ICTTC032B - Undertake a civil site survey

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Prerequisite Units The need for, and extent of, site surveys is determined during the development of project briefs - refer unit ICTTC031B Equivalent Units None


1 Prepare for survey 1 Detailed requirements are discussed with planning staff

2 Need for specialist studies are determined and organised to co-ordinate with on site visit as required

3 Need for on site discussions with site owner, local staff, community or government representatives is determined and appointments made

4 Site access arrangements are determined and appropriate approvals organised if necessary

2 Undertake survey of land, buildings and facilities both new and existing

1 Existing buildings are surveyed as to capability of meeting planned changes

2 Access, security, environmental conditions and power and earthing arrangements and network connections are assessed as to capability of meeting planned growth

3 Assessments are made as to altered building infrastructure requirements in the event that the building is unsuitable

4 Building options are assessed and documented should a new structure be necessary

5 Availability and ownership of land is determined

6 Availability of commercial power is assessed

7 Title searches are organised as required

8 Special geological/land surveys and/or archaeological studies are organised

9 Soil sample studies are organised and the results analysed

10 Geographical nature of land is assessed and barriers to signalling determined

11 Work is conducted in a manner which is safe to self, fellow workers and the public at large



3 Undertake survey of environmental conditions

1 Existence of regulatory/statutory requirements is ascertained

2 Customer/community attitude to development is surveyed

3 Environmental impact of development is ascertained

4 Prevailing weather conditions and impact on planned changes is studied

4 Document and report survey findings 1 Detailed report outlining all findings is prepared

2 Various options to meet planned changes along with appropriate cost/benefit data are developed

3 Detailed recommendations are presented as to the most viable option

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Specialist studies relate to those activities requiring professionally qualified staff such as archaeologists, surveyors, environmental experts, geologists, heritage experts Building survey would include: floor space, ceiling heights, security arrangements, access, existing environmental conditions, floor loading, building design, earthing arrangements, communications options Site survey data may include: site availability, site ownership and acquisition data, building availability and/or capacity,power availability, line of sight data, geological/land surveys, regulatory and statutory requirements, earthing requirements environmental impact, weather conditions Building options may include: hut, container, new building, portable housing, underground housing Land may be crown land, government owned or private Regulatory/statutory requirements may be legislated/ordinances or operating codes developed by all levels of government



Weather impact may include: flooding, fire risk, earthquake, cyclone, wind, fog, snow, rainfall Environmental impact may include: disturbance of flora/fauna, visual impact, safety hazards e.g radio frequency hazards, pollution - air, water, noise Barriers to signal path may include: distance, line of sight, weather conditions, land or water, local features Local environmental imperatives may include: seasonal changes, habitats, heritage values, environment, legislation, traditional landowners Local geographical / topological features may include: dams, fences, access, survey marks, hazards, potential hazards, location of other services / plant, potential soil erosion areas Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards may include: ACA technical standards Australian building codes and regulations International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 Environmental Protection Fire regulations Heritage legislation Industrial relations awards and agreements ITU recommendations Local government Telecommunications Act and Telecommunications National Code Occupational Health & Safety Act Privacy Act Spectrum Management Authority Trade Practices Act

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • negotiating with customers, communities and community representatives including government officials • applying all legislative impacts on the network including relevant operational codes • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • considering both environmental and propagation needs



Candidate delivers at least one oral report: • identifying key stakeholders. • considering both existing and proposed technologies and associated building, power needs • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to consider both existing and proposed needs and comply with all related work practices. Candidate submits a clear oral, and then a hard copy report, outlining all options and including recommendations with supporting reasons. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO620 Computer Programming 6 CO630 Planning Software 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EN660 Enterprise Pricing Policy 4 EN670 Selling 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PK610 Product Knowledge 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS630 Drawing Flowcharts 6 PS640 Spare Parts Dimensioning 6 PS680 Basic Building Trades Knowledge 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RE610 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 6 SU610 Planning 6 SU670 Project Management 6 SU680 Resource Management 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TR610 Transmission Theory 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,




CO620 Computer Programming 6 Assumed - CO610 Computer Skills 6 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge of information systems used in the planning, design and installation of the

network. • Undertake system design and configuration using available software programs. • Develop project management plan using techniques such as check lists and Gant charts involving program

development and use of software packages. • Produce quality project management plans using process flow charts identifying all activities. CO630 Planning Software 6 Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software tools to source and collate existing data • Analyse, make judgements and decisions • plan and manage large projects. • Effectively use various management applications software packages of project planning and scheduling such as







CS610 Customer Relations 6 • Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are



advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. EN660 Enterprise Pricing Policy 4 Interpreting policy in workplace operations. EN670 Selling 6 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with customers



IN630 Negotiation 6 Dealing with Conflict Assumed IN440 Negotiation 4 • Describe the stages or levels of conflict • Identify signs of potential or actual conflict. • Prepare a map to identify the issues and needs. • Use active listening in conflict resolution • Give feedback assertively. • Use communication skills that facilitate constructive responses to conflict in the workplace. • Design options for constructive responses to the conflict. • Practice and employ different strategies to design options, including:

• brainstorming techniques • Dewey Reflective Thinking process • the decision making agenda • divide or channel problem into small pieces • trial and error approach.









filter to meet given specified pass-band ripple, transition-band width and stop-band ripple. • Calculate the unwindowed impulse-response for a linear-phase LP, BP or HP filter.



• Apply a von Hann ('Hanning') or Hamming window to the calculated unwindowed impulse-response. • Use a filter design package to determine the impulse-response coefficients for a range of LP, BP and HP filters. • Describe the process of convolution. • State the standard expression for discrete convolution. • Describe how a DSP system carries out convolution. • Describe the Least Mean Square (LMS) algorithm. • Describe two practical applications for adaptive filters. • Calculate the number of taps needed on an adaptive filter for a given application. • State the effect of coefficient rounding error on FIR filters. • Design a simple Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter. • Use the pole-zero placement method to obtain coefficients for a simple first-order and second-order low-pass










NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 Assumed NE620 Network Architecture 6



Network Management Models • Describe the TMN network management model. • Describe the ISO/OSI system management model. • Describe the SNMP network management model. Network Management Techniques and Standards • Describe the network management techniques and standards used for:




correct the problems. • Use logging information to identify security violations. • Take appropriate action to end security events. • Institute appropriate follow up actions to remove the security weaknesses in a network. OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 Assumed OH510 Occupational Health & Safety 5 • Develop processes, procedures and documentation to satisfy all the requirements of the Occupational Health &

Safety legislation relevant to the workplace. • Organise and select appropriate staff for First Aid training, and major functions of safety committees and

representatives. • Prepare a brief and ongoing safety awareness training program for the work force. • Evaluate site area and project plan, note all the safety aspects; list safety equipment required, resources and

skills needed and precautions to be taken. • Generate an OH&S job specification to be included as a task associated with the project. Discuss as appropriate

with builders and planners. • Provide a report to be included as part of the project plan. Monitor workforce personnel on a regular basis. • Keep records in relation to their health, occupational incidents, skills and capacity to perform their job

safely to self and others. • Manage appropriate training and re-skilling where necessary.

• Keep current records of legislation, codes, regulations and standards which relate to the enterprise work activities. These include

• Fire Regulations, OH & S, Environment Protection Act, Building Codes, Telecommunications Act and associated codes.

PK610 Product Knowledge 6 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Relative performance capabilities of alternative products.



PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications PS630 Drawing Flowcharts 6 • Project brief • Site inspection, tests and measurements • Equipment/system needs, availability, reconfiguration • Project tasks

• work breakdown • networking of tasks

• Plan • priorities • timeframe • resources • approvals

• Software and computer literacy • flow charting packages • Gautt charts • process flow charts

• Critical path • contingency plan • monitor impact of change • modifications

PS640 Spare Parts Dimensioning 6 • Equipment categories

• analogue • digital • test gear and tools

• Levels of repair • 'black box' replacement • swap: equipment/board • component level

• Running costs • storage, personnel, records (data base) • stock levels • shelf life, turnover

• New technologies • suppliers • availability • forward planning

• Enterprise policy



PS680 Basic Building Trades Knowledge 6 Assumed PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 • Documents

• plans • drawings • specifications

• Materials and products • availability • cost

• Work categories • tasks • networking of tasks

• Contractors and sub-contractors • labour contract • price contract • variations to task/contract • timely completion of task • performance and capabilities • quality assurance

• Inspections and acceptance by recognised bodies RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns

and site costs. Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner. Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites. Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference.



RE610 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 6 Covered in RE410 Laws, Policies and Guidelines SU610 Planning 6

Covered in SU510 Planning 5

SU670 Project Management 6

• Overview of project management • The three phases of project management • Roles and responsibilities within project management • Two project management tools - software • Project contract documents • Project progress–representation, tracking, budgeting • Contingency plans

SU680 Resource Management 6

• Fundamentals–labour, finance and materials • Project evaluation–resourcing assessments • Training requirements • Tendering processes • Project budgetting/costings checklist • Contingencies • Critical path analysis in the resources chain

TE610 Telephony Principles 6

Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.



• State the characteristics of the R, S, T and U reference points.

Digital ISDN Telephone • Draw the block diagram of an ISDN telephone, and indicate the following functional blocks on your diagram:-

PWC, SIC, DCC, AIU, MEU, MPU, KBU, DIU, and SP. • Describe the basic function of the functional blocks above, and indicate what ISDN layer they operate at. • List some advantages and features that are provided by this type of digital telephone.

Digital PABX Principles • Describe the main differences between a digital PABX, and previous generation PABX's. • Draw the block diagram of a typical digital PABX showing the major components as the Time Division Switch






PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility. TR610 Transmission Theory 6 • Describe the principle techniques and elements of digital signal transmission • Analyse the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Determine the requirements for digital transmission • Analyse advantages and disadvantages of codes. • Discuss the mechanisms of degradation and of control of digital signals on transmission lines • Describe DCPM, PM • Describe DSI systems • Determine BER vs S/N requirements Measurements • Perform representative PCM tests • Determine errors in measurements • Describe jitter measurements • Perform jitter measurements • Examine test procedures and relate to measurement methods. Systems • Describe SDH, PDH in detail • Describe ATM in detail • Compare representative digital transmission schemes. • Describe ISDN and its implementation. • Describe and analyse a number of recent developments in transmission techniques.






UNIT ICTTC033B - Develop project management plan



1 Evaluate and assess project 1 Documentation associated with planning project brief is checked for completeness and accuracy and further briefing from planners arranged where necessary

2 A site evaluation is undertaken or organised and all barriers to the installation identified

3 Safety aspects of the building/area are evaluated and necessary precautions noted for inclusion in job specification

4 Equipment/system needs are identified and availability assessed

5 Actual needs of the customer are verified where appropriate and any changes are further discussed with planners

2 Detail project tasks and associated timelines

1 Overall project is broken down into tasks and a work breakdown structure is developed

2 All tasks associated with the project are identified and detailed

3 The relationship between tasks is identified and a logical networking of tasks is developed

4 Critical paths are identified and planned

5 Need for and extent of network outages and restrictions imposed as a result are identified and allowed for in developing the plan and associated timeframes

6 Timeframes associated with each aspect of the project are identified

7 Resource needs are identified and built into the plan

8 Necessary planning approvals are obtained and/or organised

9 Plan is documented in a manner which facilitates ease of management of the project



10 Quality plans incorporating flow process charts are developed as appropriate

11 Plan is verified with all appropriate personnel including the customer where appropriate

12 Contingency plans are developed to account for delays or other problems experienced during the project

13 Modifications to the plan are recognised and instituted within accepted timeframes

3 Assess resource requirements 1 Standard installation times are used to develop total hours required

2 Identified barriers and difficulties are allowed for in developing installation hours required

3 Allowance for contingencies is catered for

4 Required competencies are identified and skill gaps determined

5 Special award conditions are recognised and allowed for in developing business case

6 Possible resource banks are identified

7 Use of contract versus enterprise resources is assessed

8 Project is subjected to tendering process in accordance with enterprise policy where required

9 Material requirements including spare parts are established

10 Test gear and tools necessary for the project are determined

11 Systems including man/machine communication tools are identified

4 Organise training 1 Detail of training required is ascertained given project requirements and identified skill gaps

2 Timeframe for training is established

3 Method of training delivery and location of such training are determined in a manner which gives best return to the enterprise both from a training and economic perspective

4 Resources to undertake the level of training required are identified and organised

5 Organise resources 1 A workforce with required numbers and skills is established and fully briefed as to job requirements and timeframe

2 Priorities are organised to ensure timeframe agreed with the customer is met

3 Manuals, specifications, plans and design briefs are organised and delivered to site prior to installation

4 Labour contract is let and contract documents specifying the project detail is agreed with the successful tenderer



5 Material, test gear, tools and systems are ordered and arrangements initiated to ensure delivery to site in accordance with planned timeframes

6 Transport of mechanical aids/special vehicles to the site is organised

6 Determine budgetary requirements 1 A detailed financial statement detailing costs associated with each task/phase of the project is prepared in accordance with enterprise policy

2 A project budget is prepared and submitted for approval prior to project commencement

3 Expenditure approval procedures are developed and agreed in accordance with enterprise policy

4 Costings are checked to ensure that company guidelines relating to profit margin are achieved

5 A risk analysis study is undertaken and various financial options developed

7 Document plan 1 Tasks are fully documented within the plan along with timeframes and resource requirements

2 Installation processes including test requirements are fully described in the plan

3 Project verification and monitoring and control processes are developed and detailed in the plan

4 Review processes including quality audits are planned and described within the project plan

5 Plans, drawings, system/equipment specifications, manuals both enterprise and vendor and process flow documents are included with the plan

6 All parties associated with the process are identified and their particular roles fully documented

7 A project management meeting with all parties associated with the project is organised

8 Arrange plan approval 1 Plan, outlining tasks, timeframes, resource requirements and financial details are submitted for approval prior to implementation in accordance with enterprise requirements

2 Plan is provided to design staff for detailed design upon approval

3 Plan together with design details are discussed with installation staff prior to project commencement



9 Oversight project completion 1 Plan is monitored and controlled in accordance with recognised quality principles

2 Difficulties with plan execution are identified early and contingency plans implemented

3 Project overuns are assessed from both an economic and customer impact perspective and appropriate action initiated to minimise impact

4 Completion advice is completed in conjunction with planners, installation manager and operational staff and asset declared ready for use

5 Quality audit is undertaken on project completion and recommendations made for process improvement where necessary

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Documentation may include: sales orders, quotation forms, specification lists Safety aspects of a building may include: construction type, building/equipment hazards, ceiling access. System design and configuration is undertaken using available software programmes. Customers may be dealt with directly or through a third party such as communications consultant or contractor to a major supplier. Project plans may be developed using techniques such as check lists and Gant charts and may involve development and use of software based programmes. Planning approvals may be required from: Government planning bodies, local government, Frequency Spectrum Agency



Quality plans may include: process flow charts identifying all activities including inspection, testing and related procedures, work instructions, technical standards, manufacturers technical manuals, responsibilities, dependencies and any other requirements to ensure that installation and service activities are performed under controlled conditions. Tenders are invited both by letter and through the press. Tenders could be for both contracting or sub contracting Tender assessment can involve consideration of: price, product type, capacity, performance and quality, company performance, delivery times, quality assurance processes Customer training can be undertaken by specialist trainers or installation staff. Special award conditions can include: weather allowance, site allowance, district allowance Parties to the project may include: planners, designers, installers, customer, contractor/sub contractor, operational staff, equipment manufacturer/supplier, site owner/lessee Quality audit is a review of process and methodology Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA Technical Standards International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations Australian Building Codes and Regulations Fire Regulations Occupational Health and Safety Environmental Protection Act Trade Practices Legislation Noise Abatement Heritage Legislation Industrial Awards and conditions Telecommunications Act and associated codes




Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor: • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • undertaking business planning and business case development including risk analysis Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • identifying tasks and their relationships • applying legislative and environmental conditions and application to project • developing a clearly documented plan both within specification and within specified timeframes • using project planning and scheduling tools such as flow charts/Gantt charts • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs • using project planning and scheduling tools such as flow charts/Gantt charts • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements, enterprise/customer service agreements

and work practices • reading relevant enterprise policy and completing documentation At least one oral report to mentor/assessor, and observation by mentor/assessor, of candidate's successful application of relevant planning processes and the associated monitoring and control mechanisms Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor identifying resource (labour, finance and materials) needs and the source of resources. Candidate submits a flowchart/Gantt chart to mentor/assessor for sign-off by mentor/assessor. Candidate submits a detailed hard copy project financial analysis to mentor/assessor. Candidate submits a clearly documented hard copy plan for sign-off. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO620 Computer Programming 6 CO630 Planning Software 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EN660 Enterprise Pricing Policy 6 EN670 Selling 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PK610 Product Knowledge 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS630 Drawing Flowcharts 6 PS640 Spare Parts Dimensioning 6 PS680 Basic Building Trades Knowledge 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RE610 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 6 SU610 Planning 6 SU670 Project Management 6 SU680 Resource Management 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TR610 Transmission Theory 6




an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document CO620 Computer Programming 6 Assumed - CO610 Computer Skills 6 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge of information systems used in the planning, design and installation of the

network. • Undertake system design and configuration using available software programs. • Develop project management plan using techniques such as check lists and Gant charts involving program

development and use of software packages. • Produce quality project management plans using process flow charts identifying all activities.

CO630 Planning Software 6

Assumed - CO510 Computer Skills 5

• Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software tools to source and collate existing data • Analyse, make judgements and decisions • plan and manage large projects. • Effectively use various management applications software packages of project planning and scheduling such as








• Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are






EN660 Enterprise Pricing Policy 6 Interpreting policy in workplace operations. EN670 Selling 6 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with customers IN630 Negotiation 6 Dealing with Conflict Assumed IN440 Negotiation 4 • Describe the stages or levels of conflict • Identify signs of potential or actual conflict. • Prepare a map to identify the issues and needs. • Use active listening in conflict resolution • Give feedback assertively. • Use communication skills that facilitate constructive responses to conflict in the workplace. • Design options for constructive responses to the conflict. • Practice and employ different strategies to design options, including:



















correct the problems. • Use logging information to identify security violations. • Take appropriate action to end security events. • Institute appropriate follow up actions to remove the security weaknesses in a network.



OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 Assumed OH510 Occupational Health & Safety 5 • Develop processes, procedures and documentation to satisfy all the requirements of the Occupational Health &








PK610 Product Knowledge 6 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Relative performance capabilities of alternative products. PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications PS630 Drawing Flowcharts 6 • Project brief • Site inspection, tests and measurements • Equipment/system needs, availability, reconfiguration • Project tasks







PS640 Spare Parts Dimensioning 6

• Equipment categories • analogue • digital • test gear and tools

• Levels of repair • 'black box' replacement • swap: equipment/board • component level

• Running costs • storage, personnel, records (data base) • stock levels • shelf life, turnover

• New technologies • suppliers • availability • forward planning

• Enterprise policy

PS680 Basic Building Trades Knowledge 6

Assumed PS220 Basic Building Trades 2

• Documents • plans • drawings • specifications

• Materials and products • availability • cost

• Work categories • tasks • networking of tasks

• Contractors and sub-contractors • labour contract • price contract • variations to task/contract • timely completion of task • performance and capabilities • quality assurance

• Inspections and acceptance by recognised bodies

RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6

Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns

and site costs.

Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner.



Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites. Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference. RE610 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 6 Covered in RE410 Laws, Policies and Guidelines SU610 Planning 6 Covered in SU510 Planning 5 SU670 Project Management 6 • Overview of project management • The three phases of project management • Roles and responsibilities within project management • Two project management tools - software • Project contract documents • Project progress–representation, tracking, budgeting • Contingency plans SU680 Resource Management 6 • Fundamentals–labour, finance and materials • Project evaluation–resourcing assessments • Training requirements • Tendering processes • Project budgetting/costings checklist • Contingencies • Critical path analysis in the resources chain



TE610 Telephony Principles 6 Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.






• List some of the user functions that are available using a digital handset connected to a digital PABX. • Describe the purpose of connecting a Telephone Information Management System (TIMS) to a PABX. • List some type of reports that can be provided by the TIMS. Virtual Private Network (VPN) • Describe what is meant by a Virtual Private Network such as Centrex or CustomNet. • Describe the main features of a virtual private network, and explain what impact this private network has on the

PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility. TR610 Transmission Theory 6 • Describe the principle techniques and elements of digital signal transmission • Analyse the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Determine the requirements for digital transmission • Analyse advantages and disadvantages of codes. • Discuss the mechanisms of degradation and of control of digital signals on transmission lines • Describe DCPM, PM • Describe DSI systems • Determine BER vs S/N requirements Measurements • Perform representative PCM tests • Determine errors in measurements • Describe jitter measurements • Perform jitter measurements • Examine test procedures and relate to measurement methods.



Systems • Describe SDH, PDH in detail • Describe ATM in detail • Compare representative digital transmission schemes. • Describe ISDN and its implementation. • Describe and analyse a number of recent developments in transmission techniques.






UNIT ICTTC034B - Prepare a detailed design brief



1 Evaluate design requirements 1 Initial need for enhancement to new or existing telecommunications network is determined from telecommunications project plan and associated project brief

2 Data is collated from other relevant sources and combined/collated with information from project brief where appropriate

3 Specific purpose of network growth and enhancement is determined

4 Type of network growth/enhancement is ascertained

5 Where customer has initiated the need, customer is consulted in accordance with enterprise policy

6 Timeframe for design plan is ascertained

7 Design resource requirements are established and organised

2 Gather field information 1 Smooth conduct of the project is facilitated by consultation with affected property owners where project impacts on private property

2 Physical characteristics of the site are ascertained and any impediments to smooth operations are detected from field inspection, site surveys, building inspections and existing maps/plans

3 Site access and security is ascertained

4 Existing equipment and equipment layouts including racking, power, earthing, lighting, air conditioning, cable access and existing radio frequency hazards are identified

5 Local knowledge is ascertained regarding the location and character of the area/building

6 The impact of relevant heritage/environmental and other governmental legislation is ascertained and action initiated to gain approvals or consultative processes organised according to enterprise policy



7 Field and/or building sketch detailing both existing and proposed layout, route and physical placement of equipment and facilities is prepared in accordance with enterprise requirements

8 Ownership of land to be used is checked and arrangements initiated via approved enterprise procedures to purchase/lease as appropriate

9 Solution to any obvious physical impediment to construction is identified

10 Occupational health and safety practices are fully observed during the inspection process and are catered for in the design process


3 Select design option 1 Proposed network needs are analysed taking into account existing network and conditions and planned needs, whilst heeding legislative and other barriers

2 Design options are generated that are realistic, in economic, customer service, timing and network integrity terms

3 Evaluation and selection of preferred option is undertaken in accordance with approved enterprise criteria

4 Option selected satisfies enterprise business strategy outcomes, enterprise service policy and planned project outcomes

5 Selected option is discussed with customer, where customer has initiated the need

4 Assess system compatibility 1 Compatibility of each equipment unit with other installed units and their intended use is determined from the system plans, equipment manuals, installation environment and industry knowledge

2 Modifications are made as appropriate

5 Prepare design plan 1 Design plan is prepared to enterprise requirements using appropriate techniques

2 Relevant geographical / topological information is added to design plan

3 Location and specification of works and network equipment are indicated accurately and clearly

4 Material needed to undertake the project is specified

5 Necessary planning approvals are obtained and/or organised if not already available

6 Test requirements are specified

7 Detailed cost estimates are developed in accordance with enterprise policy and procedures

8 Final designs and any variations to plan are discussed with planners and project management and final approval sought in accordance with enterprise policy



6 Prepare documentation 1 Final design brief is fully documented and submitted to installation staff

2 Material requirements are detailed and submitted to material supply staff for supply and or purchase

3 Detailed drawings are prepared and attached to design brief

4 All documentation relating to installation/modification, testing and ongoing operations and maintenance is prepared and attached to brief

5 Labelling for all equipment is developed or organised

6 Need for design changes are co-ordinated with installation staff when required

7 Quality audit process is undertaken of all stages of brief development and presentation and recommendations for process improvement made where appropriate

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Sources from which additional data may be obtained include: existing enterprise cable designs / plans, abutting enterprise development plans, interviews with field-based colleagues or organisations, enterprise databases Network growth or enhancement may be to: switch network, transmission network/path, radio network (fixed or mobile), satellite network Timeframe for design is usually dictated by the project management plan Resources may include: design personnel, tools, material, vehicles, finance Enterprise information systems may be text or image based and may be in the form of: hard copy, maps, software database, plans



Enterprise policy with respect to selection of design options may include: cost, time, resource requirements, customer demand, future maintenance, modification, equipment/system upgrades Interested parties may include: local councils, state / federal agencies, local residents / property owners, other service providers Local environmental imperatives may include: seasonal changes, habitats, heritage values, environment, legislation, traditional landowners Local geographical / topological features may include: dams, fences, access, survey marks, hazards, potential hazards, location of other services / plant, potential soil erosion areas Materials and equipment are those resources required for the projects completion and may include: cabling and terminating equipment and tools, cable support materials, hand and power tools, frame and superstructure equipment, ducting, power cables/connectors, racking, switching and transmission gear, mechanical aids, antenna/wave guide, structure, tower, radio equipment, test equipment Need for purchase / acquisition may be required and may be regulated by: local council, federal agencies, enterprise policies Notification may be in the form of: letter, phone call, personal visit Design options would consider issues relating to: labour, material, time, equipment, technologies Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards may include: ACA technical standards Australian building codes and regulations International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 Environmental Protection Fire regulations Heritage legislation Industrial relations awards and agreements ITU recommendations Local government Telecommunications Act and Telecommunications National Code Occupational Health & Safety Act Privacy Act Spectrum Management Authority




Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • developing and analysing options for production of a report outlining all reasons for final decision • Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor: • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices within service

assurance guidelines • collecting all relevant data including: property owner details, site physical characteristics, required resources • applying relevant legislative and environmental conditions to project Candidate submits hard copy design option report. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's: • development of a clearly documented brief both within specification and within specified timeframes. • notification to—and negotiation where required with—all involved parties including installers, contractors,

local councils, government bodies, local residents, environmental groups, property owners • customer focus and consideration of customer needs • preparation of documentation Candidate submits a completed hard copy design plan.

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CI620 Research Skill 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EL430 Power Theory 4 EL440 Australian Electrical Standards 4 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE610 Network Equipment 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 PE610 Personal Skills 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS620 Design 6 PS630 Drawing Flowcharts 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RE610 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 6 RE630 Land Acquisition 6 SU450 Estimating Techniques 4 RE410 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 4 SU610 Planning 6 SU660 Finance 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TR450 Signalling Principles 4 TR660 Spectrum Management 6






advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. EL430 Power Theory 4 Assumed EL310 AC/DC Theory and 3EL330 Power Installation • Define and explain power distribution principles as applicable to telecommunications installations of small,

medium and large size. • Give a general descriptive explanation of power distribution within equipment racks. • Explain and perform calculations showing the correct operation of graded or selective protection within

equipment racks and a general telecommunications installation. • Distinguish between the terms isolation and protection, and show how the principles of isolation and protection

apply to power distribution within a telecommunications installation. • State the purpose of the power earth, and state regulations governing the power earth. • Explain various methods of transformer construction and transformer types. • Calculate transformer behaviour, given parameters such as turns, primary voltage, secondary current, leakage

flux, saturation curves. • Explain the behaviour of transformers when supplying, rectifiers, and calculate and dimension a transformer

for this type of service. • Explain the operation of, and make calculations about rectifier power supplies providing heavy currents. • Detail the operation of various uninterruptable power supplies types. • Detail the theory of Switched Mode Power Supply operation. EL440 Australian Electrical Standards 4 • State the name and Australian Standard numbers and state the scope of Australian standards relating to the

drawing/drafting of electrical building services. • State the name and Australian Standard numbers and state the scope of Australian standards relating to the safe

installation of electrical wiring. • State those parts of standards (both ACA and AS) relating to the safe installation of telecommunications

services within buildings, e.g. minimum clearances, insulation strength, prohibited locations. • Read and interpret drawings using current electrical drawing/drafting symbols involving a wide range of

commonly encountered electrical components, devices and equipment. • Read and interpret drawings using current telecommunications drawing/drafting symbols for the location of

commonly encountered telecommunications equipment, outlets, etc. • Use a site plan to locate and identify building electrical services in a finished building. • From a dimensioned drawing, identify electrical and telecommunications services ducts or other provisioning

for an office building. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events.



IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members. MA620 Mathematics 6 Minimum • Statistical analysis














NE610 Network Equipment 6

Assumed NE410 Network Equipment 4

Switching Network Equipment • Identify the main Digital Switching System (DSS) manufacturers and their products. • Describe the AXE 10 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the 5ESS DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the System 12 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the DMS 100/200 DSS and functions of its main components.

Transmission Network Equipment • Identify the main transmission equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DM2 and DM8 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main components. • Describe the FLM-150, FLM-600 and FLM-2400 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main

components.

GSM Network Equipment • Identify the GSM network equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DE34 and DF34 BTS and functions of their main components. • Describe the DX200 switching system and how it is implemented in the BSC. • MSC/VLR, and HLR.











PE610 Personal Skills 6 Covered in PE510 Personal Skills 5 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications










• Contingency plans • Completion PS630 Drawing Flowcharts 6 • Project brief • Site inspection, tests and measurements • Equipment/system needs, availability, reconfiguration • Project tasks







RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access, environmental concerns

and site costs. Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner. Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites. Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference. RE610 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 6 Covered in RE410 Laws, Policies and Guidelines RE630 Land Acquisition 6 Covered in RE430 Land Acquisition 4 SU450 Estimating Techniques 4 • Tools of estimating • Methods of extracting, recording, compiling, and calculating data • Comparison of methods • Factors and conditions affecting estimating outcomes RE410 Laws, Policies and Guidelines 4 • Australian building codes and regulations • Enterprise guidelines and standards • EPA, Fire and Heritage regulations • State and local government Acts, laws and guidelines • Telecommunications National Code



SU610 Planning 6

Covered in SU510 Planning 5

SU660 Finance 6

Covered in SU460 Finance 4

TE610 Telephony Principles 6

Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.










PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility.

TR450 Signalling Principles 4

Basic Principle of Signalling • Outline the basic concepts of signalling in telecommunications networks, its purpose and functions, and identify

the signalling techniques: DC, AC, CAS and CCS. • Explain and give examples of what is meant by the following signals: Address and Supervisory; Alerting;

Information & Test and explain the terms Idle, Busy, Seizure, Disconnect • Describe the purpose of signalling in telecommunications networks, the Explain the differences between

Decadic and DTMF signals • Explain the principles of in-band and out of band signalling. • Identify and compare the characteristics of channel-associated signalling (CAS), and common channel

signalling (CCS). • Explain the signalling procedure in a PCM system (TS16).



ISDN Overview • Briefly explain the three types of services for end-to-end communications available in an ISDN. • Identify the reference points and functional groupings of ISDN user-network interface and relate the functions

of NT1, NT2 to the layers 1, 2 and 3 of OSI Reference Model. • Explain the basic service used to transport SS7 signalling over ISDN • With the aid of a diagram explain the ISDN address structure (I.330 and I.331) and its relationship to the

telephone numbering plan E.163 and to X.121. • Draw the LAPD formats and explain the role of SAPI and TEI. SS7 • Identify the functions of signalling network elements and relate the SS7 architecture to the OSI 7 layer model. • Define the functions of network and transport levels of signalling network. • Describe briefly the functions of the following signalling network elements:- signalling point-SP, signal

transfer point-STP and signalling link. • Define the following: OMAP, ASEs, ISUP,ATUP, SCCP. • List and define the function of three types of signal unit at the signalling link level (MSU, LSSU, FISU). • Describe the functions of the signalling network level and the SCCP. • Describe the functions of the basic services provided by the ISDN user part (ISUP): • Explain the content (bits and fields) of a typical test call's captured file (as provided by a protocol analyser)

over the SS7 network. TR660 Spectrum Management 6 Radio Spectrum Characteristics • Describe the propagation characteristics of the commonly used mobile radio bands and calculate expected

coverage areas and field strengths for defined transmission parameters. • Describe the principal modulation techniques used in mobile radio communications systems and calculate

various performance parameters. Media Access • Describe how channel access and resource sharing techniques enable spectrum limitations and propagation

impairments to be overcome in the design of mobile communications systems. • Describe the techniques used to solve the problem of impairments on the radio transmission medium. Calculate

improvements available through the application of various diversity techniques. • Identify the key characteristics of systems in terms of their technical implementation, as distinct from their

service functions. • Relate technical characteristics and performance limitations of systems to their location within the radio

frequency spectrum.

Radio Path • Write a program to simulate the carrier to Interference ratio for a simple cellular re-use Network • Produces graphs (from your own spreadsheet) and describe the effects of antenna height and reflection

coefficient on receiver signal strength at a particular frequency • Describe the ways of reducing fade in a typical cellular radio system.

Spectrum Management for Maximum Return on Investment • Prepare a business plan to purchase spectrum for a cellular system based on potential revenue by using a

modern simulation program (e.g. Crystal Ball Pro for Excel). Include at least two different cell size scenarios and argue the cases for the best and worst returns on investment.






UNIT ICTTC035B - Organise material supply

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Determine material needs 1 Design plans are studied as to actual material needs

2 Analysis of needs against existing stocks is undertaken and gaps determined

3 Assess the availability of relevant material from preferred suppliers as appropriate

4 Timeframe for material supply is determined from project management briefs and associated time charts

2 Organise for third party supply where existing stocks not available

1 Specifications and company criteria for material supply and purchasing are developed and included in appropriate tender documents

2 Tender documents are prepared in accordance with company policy

3 Likely material suppliers are identified and invited to tender and/or supply

4 Tenders are evaluated and accepted as appropriate

5 Price and conditions of purchase have been negotiated to company guidelines and satisfaction

6 Supplier agreements are developed and negotiated in accordance with agreed tender arrangements

3 Organise supply of equipment and material to site

1 Types and quantities of equipment available from existing stocks are identified, picked and packed for distribution

2 Equipment and material is delivered to the designated location within the specified timeframe

3 Third party supply is organised in accordance with agreed timeframe and supply agreements



4 Undertake administrative tasks 1 Warranty details are recorded and details distributed to relevant parties as required

2 Relevant financial documents are issued in accordance with enterprise policy

3 Material costings are analysed and compared to overall project management forecasts

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Enterprises enter into preferred supplier relationships and these are generally the first point of reference for material needs Tendering procedures are enterprise specific and are usually documented in enterprise process manuals Tender evaluation includes such criteria as: ability to meet planned timeframe, spares availability, price, product type, capacity, performance and quality, company performance, delivery times, quality assurance processes Warranty details are stored either manually or electronically in enterprise data bases Warranties may be distributed to: installers, maintainers, finance groups, purchasing groups, sales and marketing staff Material purchased may include: network switching, transmission, radio(both fixed and mobile) systems and equipment(including infrastructure) and relevant installation and maintenance tools and test equipment Material suppliers may be partner companies, preferred/approved suppliers or tenderers. Tenders are invited both by letter and through the press. Financial documents may include: invoices, bills, internal financial information sheets, costing documents



Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA Standards International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU Recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Act Heritage legislation Industrial awards and conditions Taxation Act and legislation Customs Act

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to: • interpret design plans • interpret, interrogate and use relevant databases • determine material needs and assessment of requirements beyond current holdings • interact with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • apply enterprise spare parts policy • maintain customer focus and consideration of customer needs • comply with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • apply the tender process in accordance with both enterprise and legislative requirements. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—analysing tenders. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and documentation Candidate submits a clearly documented hard copy report outlining all options and including recommendations with supporting reasons.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CO420 Planning Software 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 EN460 Enterprise Pricing Policy 4 IN430 Negotiation 4 MA420 Mathematics 4 NE470 Forecasting Techniques 4 RE440 Australian Content 4 RE450 Tax and Customs 4 SU410 Planning 4 SU470 Project Management 4 SU480 Materials Planning 4 SU490 Exchange Rates 4 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TE470 Communications Industry 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:

• graphs • charts • tables • maps • photographs • clip art

Communicate to Secure a Job • Investigate employment opportunities • Evaluate yourself • Prepare a professional resume • Write a letter of application • Make a telephone application • Perform effectively in a job interview



CO410 Computer Skills 4 Assumed C0310 Computer Skills 3 • Demonstrate broad knowledge of the operation of personal computers and application programs as they are

used in the Telecommunication industry. • Use peripheral devices and interfaces to a PC in order to down load and up loading files using a data transfer

and database software package. e.g. • Configure test gear in order to obtain measurement data. • Record measurements on a proforma in a central data base. • Check against set criteria, gather previous records, produce useable reports to compare and analyse records,

identify trends. • Identify the software used for a particular installation.

• Perform software upgrades, modify parts of the software program and data. • Monitor and analyse the performance of the upgraded software. • Collate data in the form of a spreadsheet to document and assess project needs, this may include personnel,

tools, materials, vehicles, finance. • Develop documents to aid planning, design, and management: e.g. materials supply, needs/stock analysis,

availability, suppliers, costing, forecasting. • Use software packages in order to develop a project plan: including timeframes, resource requirements,

material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CO420 Planning Software 4 Integrated in Computer Skills 4 (CO410), as an application of Computer Skills and further in Planning Software 6. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints • Assess customer satisfaction EN460 Enterprise Pricing Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace operations.



IN430 Negotiation 4 Effective Negotiation Skills Assumed IN330 Negotiation 3 • Differentiate between negotiation strategies and their likely outcomes:

• win-win • win-lose • lose-win • lose-lose

• Analyse Hellreigel's personal styles and the way they impact on negotiation. • Identify five power bases. • Plan for a negotiation. • Use principled bargaining and appropriate interpersonal communication skills to control the "emotional"

atmosphere during negotiations. • Analyse various negotiating options:

• compromise • collaboration • competition • accommodation • withdrawal/avoidance

• Use negotiation for problem solving. • Obtain meaningful concessions. • Secure lasing agreement. • Establish a contingency plan, which can be reverted to if negotiations are not successful. MA420 Mathematics 4 Assume MA310 Basic Maths & MA410 Basic Maths Minimum: • Trigonometry • Pythagors • Sin, Cos, and Tan functions Additional - Select from: • Manipulate surd expressions, use engineering notation, convert units of measurement and demonstrate an

awareness of errors in estimations. • Manipulate algebraic expressions and solve simple engineering problems using one independent variable. • Use 2D geometry to solve practical problems. • Graph linear functions. • Use matrix algebra and determinants to solve up to three linear equations in three unknowns, using real

numbers. • Graph quadratic functions and solve quadratic equations with real numbers • Graph exponential and logarithmic functions and solve exponential and logarithmic equations both numerically

and graphically • Graph trigonometric functions and solve trigonometric equations. • Differentiate algebraic, trigonometric, exponential and logarithmic functions and apply differentiation to

practical problems involving curve sketching, rectilinear motion, related rates and maxima minima. • Integrate algebraic, trigonometric and exponential functions and apply integration to practical problems

involving rectilinear motion and areas between curves. • Use Simpson's Rule to estimate volumes of practical piles of material, cut and fill. • Manipulate non-matrix algebraic expressions. • Re-arrange and simplify fractional expressions, involving a knowledge of the rules of algebra. • Manipulate algebraic expressions involving exponentials and logarithms. • Manipulate Boolean expressions involving a knowledge of the rules of Boolean algebra, symbolic

representations of Boolean algebra. • Use graphical techniques to obtain solutions to non-linear equations



NE470 Forecasting Techniques 4 Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4 Telephony Traffic Basics • Compare limitations of a switched network to a dedicated network. • Explain the four key attributes of traffic analysis of a telephone network as,

• demand • capacity • performance • cost

• Describe the design task as estimating the traffic demand and determining the system capacity required to satisfy the demand at minimum cost within specified performance levels.

Traffic Engineering Concepts • Define the term Grade of Service (GOS). • Define the terms, capacity and load. • Explain the term 'busy hour' to assess demand. • Define and calculate 'Erlangs'. • Interpret traffic intensity graphs and tables. • Define Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA). • Explain methods of dealing with types of congestion, namely,

• clear • queue • hold

Traffic Forecasting Techniques • Explain that traffic analysis and forecasting requires four steps,

• set service objectives • determine busy hour traffic • select correct traffic table • look up table for correct dimensioning

• Telephony Traffic Basics • Compare limitations of a switched network to a dedicated network. • Explain the four key attributes of traffic analysis of a telephone network as,

• demand • capacity • performance • cost

• Describe the design task as estimating the traffic demand and determining the system capacity required to satisfy the demand at minimum cost within specified performance levels.

Traffic Engineering Concepts • Define the term Grade of Service (GOS). • Define the terms, capacity and load. • Explain the term 'busy hour' to assess demand. • Define and calculate 'Erlangs'. • Interpret traffic intensity graphs and tables. • Define Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA). • Explain methods of dealing with types of congestion, namely,

• clear • queue • hold



Traffic Forecasting Techniques • Explain that traffic analysis and forecasting requires four steps,

• set service objectives • determine Busy Hour traffic • select correct traffic table • look up table for correct dimensioning

RE440 Australian Content 4 At the time of developing this resource the Australian Content regulations were under review. Refer to most current standards. RE450 Tax and Customs 4 • Customs Tariff–interpretation rules and structure • Tariff classification and Aids to Classification • Machinery – Chapter 84 Commodities • Machinery – Chapter 84 Section and Chapter Notes • Parts and Accessories – Section 16 & 17 • Electrical Equipment, Parts and Accessories • Chapter 90 • Schedule 4 of The Tariff SU410 Planning 4 • Organise resources and time • Set objectives • Develop work plans • Safe work practices • Employment conditions • Communicating plans to employees and customers SU470 Project Management 4 • Overview of project management • The three phases of project management • Roles and responsibilities within project management • Project documents • Resourcing • Project reporting SU480 Materials Planning 4 • Plans interpretation–materials needs • Enterprise policy on materials purchase–tendering processes • Stock levels maintenance • Materials procurement • Preferred or approved suppliers and tenderers SU490 Exchange Rates 4 • Information sources • Converting currencies values • Banking system functions • Alternative sources of foreign exchange • Charting optimum exchange options



TE410 Basic Telephony 4 Major Telephony System Components • List and describe the basic functions of the telephone set. • Draw the block diagram of a basic telephone, and describe the functions of the following sections:- ringer,

switch hook, dialer, equalizer, speech/hybrid, and handset. Telephony System Functions • Explain what is meant by line looping. • Draw the typical cadence patterns for the ring and busy signals. • Describe the operating principles of telephone transmitter and receiver transducers. • Test the performance characteristics of the carbon microphone, dynamic microphone, electret microphone,

rocking armature receiver, and the piezoelectric receiver. • Explain the difference between pulse(decadic) dialing and tone dialing. • Test the operation and observe the waveform of a pulse dialer, and a tone dialer. Telephony System Operations • State what is a hybrid, and describe its function. • Test the performance of a hybrid and show isolation across the hybrid when properly balanced. Show how this

can be modified to produce sidetone. • Draw a simplified schematic of a 2-wire and a 4-wire battery feeding circuit, and describe the operation of these

circuits. • Draw and label the diagram of a 2-wire telephone transmission and switching system, and briefly describe its

operation. • Draw and label the diagram of a 4-wire telephone transmission and switching system, and briefly describe its

operation. Electronic Telephones • Describe the basic differences in components between a conventional telephone and an electronic telephone.

List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone. Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set. TE470 Communications Industry 4 • Discuss how the emergence of such technology as Photonics, Wave Division Multiplexing, Low Earth Orbit

Satellites etc. will impact on many systems as Internet, interactive services, mobile phones, pager systems and high speed data services etc.

• Discuss the features and advantages of High Definition Television (HDTV). • Discuss the features and advantages of 'telecommuting' and SOHO. • Describe the concepts of Virtual Private Networks (VPN) such as Centrex and CustomNet, and their

implication on the provisioning of PABX's. • With regard to political issues, discuss the implication of such policies as deregulation of the

telecommunications industry, privatisation or selling off of Telstra, sharing of mobile phone towers as much as practicable, and timed local calls, HDTV etc.





FIELD Testing / Commissioning

UNIT ICTTC036B - Undertake qualification testing of new or enhanced equipment and systems



1 Ensure conformity of international design

1 Original design is checked to ensure conformity with Australian electrical and safety standards

2 Customers specific design requirements are considered

3 Negotiations are undertaken with customers in order to fully understand their needs

4 Reconfiguration of design is undertaken where necessary

5 Design specifications are rewritten to cater for configuration amendments

2 Plan and establish test regime 1 Type and number of tests is planned to ensure a full trial of new or enhanced design

2 Test environment is chosen and established to ensure total validity of chosen tests

3 Plan is designed to ensure greatest coverage for minimal tests

4 Details of tests required and desired outcome is fully documented

5 Tests are designed to not only test new or changed system but to also test impact on existing systems

3 Undertake tests 1 Test regime is studied and understood and planners questioned where doubts exist as to full requirement

2 Test instruments are checked to ensure they meet required standards

3 Tests are conducted in logical and sequential order and in accordance with planned test regime



4 Difficulties experienced during the test are discussed with system experts and/or designers

5 Trouble reports are prepared and submitted in accordance with enterprise policy where required

6 Test results are documented progressively

4 Analyse test results 1 Test results are analysed against design specifications and planned outcomes

2 Major deficiencies are referred back to designers with a full report as to results and with recommendations for design change where appropriate

3 Minor variances are analysed and solutions to problems developed

4 Changes to specifications as a result of minor changes are clearly documented

5 Retest design changes 1 Design and specification changes made as a result of original tests are retested

2 Further tests are analysed against specifications and planned outcomes

3 Results of tests are fully documented and recorded in accordance with enterprise policy

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Telecommunications equipment and systems are designed to International standards, however reconfiguration of international design is necessary to ensure conformity with Australian electrical and safety standards Opportunity exists for designs to be customised to meet the needs of potential customers



Difficulties associated with the test regime are handled in a manner specific to the enterprise, but typically they are prioritised as follows: P1 Blocking - referred to experts or trouble report issued and submitted to designers P2 Customer perception problems - test continues and trouble report sent to designers P3 Identifiable problem - work around problem or make minor changes P4 Minor - usually a specification error. - change and document Test environment usually involves trailing in a model network or alternatively in a laboratory situation Tests, both type and extent are normally detailed in the original specifications but are varied and added to as part of the test regime plan to ensure accuracy of all changes made to original design and to ensure full compatibility with customers existing network Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU Recommendations Australian Electrical and Safety standards Telecommunications Act and associated codes Occupational Health and Safety

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate's • application of Australian standards to international designs • negotiation with potential customers and identification of specific customer requirements • maintenance of customer focus and consideration of customer needs • design programs and codes At least one oral report to mentor/assessor, and observation by mentor/assessor, of candidate's demonstrated ability to establish a test regime. Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • identifying and conducting tests and interpreting results • approaching to problem diagnosis systematically—eliminating causes • applying all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices. Candidate submits at least one complete hard copy set of test results.



Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to: • prioritise problems identified during tests and apply enterprise procedures covering such priorities within

service assurance guidelines • interact with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and consideration

of customer needs • effectively use design programs and codes • Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—

demonstrating: • retest of design changes • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation Candidate submits a clear hard copy report outlining findings and including recommendations with supporting reasons.

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO660 Operating Systems 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 DI610 Digital Theory 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE610 Network Equipment 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE650 System Protocols 6 PE320 Remote Work PK610 Product Knowledge 6 PS620 Design 6 PS650 Telecommunications Equipment and Systems Design 6 RA610 Antennas 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RA630 Mobile Equipment 6 RA640 Mobile Traffic Management Principles 6 RE660 Australian Electrical Standards 6 SU630 Quality Management 6 TF610 Test Equipment 6 TF690 Advanced Diagnosis 6 TO610 Use of Tools 6 TO620 Anti-static Procedures 6 TR630 Modulation Theory 6 TR660 Spectrum Management 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,




CO660 Operating Systems 6 Assumed - CO620 Computer Programming 6 & CO680 Software Management 6 Demonstrate broad knowledge of general operating systems: • MS DOS commands, file organisation, system and BIOS calls • hierarchal directories • customising MS DOS • MS DOS batch files • pipes, filters and I/O redirection • TSRs and device drivers • new and emerging trends in operating systems Create files and directories, use the system commands to perform process operations within a multiuser, multitasking environment: • real time applications • interleaved processing techniques • multiprogramming • multitasking • time-sharing • virtual storage • multiprocessing • language translators • compilers • interpreters • assemblers File and disk organisation: • files and directories • protection and permissions • listings • file location • classification System command and calls: • commonly used commands • retrieving • saving • deleting • copying • creating • printing • linking • etc • input/output redirection • meaning of • method of achievement Batch, script or equivalent files: • purpose • structure • commands • System utilities • sorting • windowing • device drivers



Be proficient in the use of the wide ranging capabilities of an operations system to: • Devise and undertake network tests to check network performance in real time to gather data/information from

all sources. • Analyse drive test data to check for network optimisation. • Administer platform database optimisation using software redesign and hardware variations. • Interrogate system to identify error logs, aging time on processes, database checks and system loading. • Assess availability of data storage: • Initiate procedures for data backup, review for efficiency and amend. • Create/delete/modify user accounts - groups, profiles, access levels, security, verify deletions prior to action. • Make a system backup and system recovery from backup. Measure: • the platform performance • application responsiveness • system utilisation (RAM, CPU, Hard Drive) Simulate problems and faults to determine shortcomings of software/hardware. Prepare for configuration/reconfiguration of system so that there is no loss of traffic during integration or upgrade lead data for test environment. Analyse the CCS network to ensure that it operates according to specifications: • activate alarm screens • check port times • unblock ports, check integrity of data received. • activate test messages, check for receipt • investigate the causes of alarms/problems commonly reported. e.g fault on hard drives, security breaches,

software design, storage. Determine appropriate repair action. Implement software changes in accordance with planned strategy, including short term ad hoc solutions. Develop and implement appropriate strategies for performance enhancement. Investigate spare capacity of the network which can be enabled during repair. Identify route/circuit unavailability. Interrogate the system to identify traffic status/problems both real and potential. Activate controls automatically or manually to monitor traffic, collect data in real time, such as call gapping and rerouting. Identify system platforms and applications including UNIX, HP open view, SUN operating systems, Command Post. CS610 Customer Relations 6 • Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are






DI610 Digital Theory 6 Assumed - DI510 Digital Theory 5 • Analyse fault reports of existing telecommunications systems. • Devise tests and measurements to identify deficiencies in designs both software and hardware of new and

existing equipment. • Target the modules and techniques which are more likely to be the cause of trouble. They are in the area of

interfacing, data link control, synchronisation and circuit switching. • Analyse the design, construction, and features of the most complex telecommunications equipment to identify

improvements, enhancements, and compatability with existing equipment and software. • Set up a simulated environment and estabilish test conditions to verify the performance of new software and

hardware. • Examine the design and performance issues of the mobile network, present concepts in design and

recommendations for converting an unreliable transmission link. Note: This topic may overlap with Fault Finding, Test Equipment, Test Analysis and Diagnosis,Network Equipment, Network Management Principles and Capabilities. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events. MA620 Mathematics 6 Minimum • Statistical analysis







pass (HP) filter.



• Draw the estimated impulse-response for any specified LP, BP or HP filter. • Calculate the approximate number of impulse-response coefficients needed in a Finite Impulse Response (FIR)



IIR filter. • Show the direct-form realisation of a simple IIR filter suitable for sin(x)/x compensation. NE610 Network Equipment 6 Assumed NE410 Network Equipment 4 Switching Network Equipment • Identify the main Digital Switching System (DSS) manufacturers and their products. • Describe the AXE 10 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the 5ESS DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the System 12 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the DMS 100/200 DSS and functions of its main components. Transmission Network Equipment • Identify the main transmission equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DM2 and DM8 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main components. • Describe the FLM-150, FLM-600 and FLM-2400 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main

components. GSM Network Equipment • Identify the GSM network equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DE34 and DF34 BTS and functions of their main components. • Describe the DX200 switching system and how it is implemented in the BSC. • MSC/VLR, and HLR. NE620 Network Architecture 6 Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4 Switching Network Architecture • Discuss network clock synchronisation and clock hierarchy structure. • Explain the concept of,






NE650 System Protocols 6 Assumed NE620 Network Architecture 6 International Standards Setting Bodies • List the international standards setting bodies, such as:

• ITU-TSU (CCITT) • EIA • ANSI • ETSI • ECMA • ISO

• Explain the role of the standards bodies in developing system protocols.

Data Communications Protocols • List and discuss popular data communications protocols, such as:

• X-ON/X-OFF • BSC • ENQ-ACK • SDLC • HDLC • CSMA/CD Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) • Token Ring ( IEEE 802.5) • FDDI • GPIB (IEEE.488) • Token Bus (IEEE 802.4) • TCP/IP (Internet) • X.25

Telecommunications Protocols • Describe the protocols used in the following telecommunications networks and their relation to the ISO/OSI

model, such as: • common channel signalling number 7 • ISDN • B-ISDN (ATM) • Frame Relay (WAN Network) • PDH • SDH

Alarm and Network Management Protocols • Describe the use of X.25 protocol in alarm networks. • Describe the use of network management protocols, such as,

• SNMP • TMN

PE320 Remote Work

Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety

• Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary



Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PK610 Product Knowledge 6 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Relative performance capabilities of alternative products. PS620 Design 6 Assumed PS430 Drawing Techniques • Identify requirements







• Contingency plans • Completion



PS650 Telecommunications Equipment and Systems Design 6 Assumed PS620 Design 6 • Design requirements

• needs • specification

• Australian electrical and safety standards • ISO9000/9001 • TS14, ITU • OH & S

• Planning and Development • hardware • software • construction

• Trial and Test regime • test coverage • interpretation, validity • impact on existing equipment • recommendations

• Solutions to problems • diagnosis • elimination of causes • changes to specifications

• Documentation • hardware and software details • specifications • operation • product functions • test results: variances, outcomes

RA610 Antennas 6 Microwave Antenna Systems • Discuss reasons for upgrading microwave antenna systems. • Explain that variable factors in antenna parameters are gain, front-to-back ratio, cross-polar response,

polarisation, bandwidth, physical size, weight and wind loading. • Discuss the physical separation requirements for a space diversity antenna system on a radio tower. • Discuss the need for physical space when adding microwave antennas to a tower and if space is limited,

possible conversion to dual band antennas. • List the radio tower and antenna considerations of pollution, corrosion, snow, rain, heat and lighting protection. • Discuss the need for tower strengthening if wind loading of antennas is excessive. • Calculate wind loading effects on a radio tower.



Cellular antenna Systems • Discuss reasons for upgrading cellular antenna systems. • Explain that variable factors in antenna parameters are omnidirectional gain, directional gain, bandwidth,

beamwidth (horizontal and vertical), polarisation (usually vertical). • List the differences between directional sectorised antennas and panel antennas, such as, • physical size, wind loading, gain, bandwidth, beamwidth, aesthetic appeal. • Discuss the reasons for downtilt. • Compare electrical downtilt to mechanical downtilt. • Discuss the merits of diversity reception using two vertically spaced receive antennas or two horizontally

spaced receive antennas. • Explain the use of a single panel array incorporating vertical separation between two receive antennas, one

vertically polarised and the other horizontally polarised. • Explain the need for system balance. • Define the requirements for antennas in umbrella cells. • Describe the radiation characteristics of leaky coaxial cable. • Compare the effectiveness of yagi antennas and leaky coaxial cables in various situations. • Discuss intermodulation and possible causes at cellular antenna locations. RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns




RA630 Mobile Equipment 6 GSM System Architecture • Draw a block diagram of a GSM network interconnected into the PSTN. • Explain the terms GMSC, EIR, HLR, VLR, AC, OMC, MSC, BSC, BTS and MS. • Briefly describe interconnection of the GSM network. Air Interface • Define the data structures, slot, frame, multiframe and hyperframe. • List the logical channel types. • Describe the synchronisation procedure and timing advance. Mobile Station Equipment • Explain the SIM card and IMSI. • Describe power control of the MS transmitter. • Discuss the GSM frequency spectrum usage. • Describe the burst structures used in GSM. GSM Call Setup • Describe the mobile registration procedure. • Describe the call establishment procedure. • Describe mobile station handover between BTSs, BSCs and MSCs. Security Parameters • Explain the 'authentication' procedure. • Explain GSM ciphering and the application of keys and algorithms. • Describe the use of a TMSI. Layer 1–The Physical Layer • Explain FDMA, TDMA, SDMA as applied to GSM. Layer 2–The Data Link Layer. • State the tasks of the Data Link Layer • Briefly describe the four different frame formats used in Layer 2 GSM. • Briefly describe the four different fields used in Layer 2 GSM. Layer 3–The GSM Network Layer • Describe the Radio Resource Management sublayer. • Describe the Mobility Management sublayer. • Describe the Connection Management sublayer. Mobile Station Testing • Connect a GSM mobile station to a GSM mobile station test set and prepare for testing. • Perform basic tests to confirm operation of GSM mobile station. • Perform advanced tests on a GSM mobile station to evaluate operating parameters.



RA640 Mobile Traffic Management Principles 6 Assumed RA630 Mobile Equipment 6 Free Space Propagation • Calculate FSPL, EIRP and electric field strength over typical GSM radio paths. • Compare point to point and propagation prediction models. • Discuss fading variables. • Discuss fading countermeasures. GSM Frequency Spectrum • Determine the effects of noise, FSPL, obstruction effects and noise on GSM spectrum. • Compare GSM spectrum performance in rural and city environments. • Discuss the reason for 35 km maximum range with GSM. GSM Cellular Radio System Basics • Describe concepts of cellular radio frequency reuse. • Describe network planning of GSM cellular networks as capacity increases. • Explain operation of microcells and umbrella cells. • Discuss interference management of GSM cellular systems. • Calculate cell radius re-use distance. • Examine methods of increasing traffic capacity. GSM Network Management • Discuss implementation of frequency hopping. • Describe remote software down loading to GSM radio sites. • Evaluation of busy hour traffic measurements. • Evaluation of quality of service measurements. • Evaluation of availability measurements. • Describe the self checking nature of the GSM network. • Describe the role of the Operations and Maintenance Centre. • Describe the role of the Network Management Centre. • Describe the role of the Administration Centre. Computer Simulation Tasks • Determine the predicted co-channel interference using a simulation program. • Determine the predicted path loss using a simulation program. • Find the predicted traffic capacity given the necessary data using a simulation program. RE660 Australian Electrical Standards 6 • Refer to Australian Standards • Review context of competency unit and relate to relevant standards. SU630 Quality Management 6 Covered in SU530 Quality Management 5



TF610 Test Equipment 6 Network Analysers • Compare the features of scalar and vector network analysers. • List typical parameters, such as, frequency range, resolution, dynamic range, sensitivity and time domain

options. • List applications of network analysers in telecommunications, such as, group delay, swept measurements and

transmission losses/gains. • Perform a search on captured data from the output of a network analyser (SDH, CCS#7, PDH). • Perform a simple "hand" disassembly of a captured frame from a typical network analyser (PDH, SDH, CCS#7,

X25) of at least 256 bits in length. PDH Network Analysers • List the features of a typical PDH network analyser, such as BER, jitter, wander, bit rates and network alarms. • List which tests are carried out in-service and out-of-service. • List the telecommunications network equipment which can be tested using PDH network analysers. SDH Network Analysers • List the features of a typical SDH network analyser, such as, BER, jitter, wander, bit rates, WDM, add/drop

PDH payloads and network alarms. • List which tests are carried out in-service and out-of service. • List the telecommunications network equipment which can be tested using SDH network analysers. ATM/Frame Relay Network Analysers • List the features of a typical ATM/Frame Relay network analyser, such as, injected cell impairments, cell

measurements, alarms, errors and frame relay interworking. • List which tests are carried out in-service and out-of-service. • List the telecommunications network equipment which can be tested using ATM/Frame Relay network

analysers. TF690 Advanced Diagnosis 6 Automated Management Systems • Explain that every telecommunications equipment supplier has their own management system. • Explain that every carrier has to build their own management system to integrate the systems from several

suppliers. • Explain that the ITU is trying to produce a standard network management model that is common to all suppliers

equipment. Operation Support Systems (OSS) • Explain that the purpose of the OSS is to provide people with the information about the network that they need. • Explain that the OSS ties together the network design, configuration and maintenance. State that the OSS allows

a large telco network to be managed in an integrated way, by providing information for marketing,and statistics for planning.

• Explain that the OSS provides the commonality between management tools and alarms supplied by equipment suppliers.

• Explain that the OSS links three main elements, customer service, network operations and network planning. • State that trouble reporting is passed to network operations fault management via customer service. Network Operations • Explain that network operations oversee the operational status of the whole telecommunications carriers

network. • List the five key areas in network operations that provide information for advanced fault diagnosis, namely,

trouble handling, surveillance, traffic monitoring, switch management, transmission management.



Trouble Handling • Discuss the systems in place regarding customer complaints, problem analysis, remedial action and reports to

customer. Surveillance • List the various alarms which are collected from network switching and transmission equipment. Traffic Monitoring • Discuss the merit of collecting and analysing information regarding voice and data traffic capacity. Switch Management • Describe the detection of abnormal conditions in network switching and remedial action. Transmission Management Describe the detection of abnormal conditions in network transmission and remedial action. TO610 Use of Tools 6 Safety with Optical Fibres • List the three basic safety precautions when working with optical fibres, namely:

• do not look into the end of a fibre unless absolutely certain a laser is not connected to • the other end. • do not touch the end of a glass fibre as a small splinter of glass may pierce the skin and • ultimately enter the blood stream. • do not touch epoxy (used in connectors) as it is a hazardous chemical.

Fibre-Optic Hand Tools • List common fibre optic hand tools used for splicing and fitting connectors to optical fibres, such as:

• crimpers • buffer strippers • cleavers • mechanical/finger splices • inspection microscopes • polishing pucks • cable strippers • fusion splicers

• Demonstrate the correct technique for using fibre optic hand tools listed. Fibre Optic Connectors and Splices • Define a connector and a splice, as used with optic fibres. • Explain why splices are preferred in the field compared to the fitting of connectors. • Discuss the desirable features of a connector or splice, such as:

• low loss • easy installation • repeatability • consistency • economy

• Demonstrate the correct technique to mechanically splice two ends of optical fibres together. • Demonstrate the correct technique to fusion splice two ends of optical fibres together. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install a SC connector on a 0.9 mm buffered • Optical fibre patch lead. • Examine the end of the SC connector and check for correct polish and finish.



TO620 Anti-static Procedures 6 Lighting Protection for Radio Antennas • Explain the principle of lighting protection as being:

• a path of low resistance to ground for a lighting strike • a lighting conductor at the highest point on a tower.

• Define the "zone of protection" of a lighting rod as being the 90 degree cone around the lighting rod and all protected antennas should be within the cone.

• State that lighting rods should be placed so as not to interfere with antenna radiation patterns. Lightning Protection for Antenna Feeders • State that antenna feeders, coaxial and waveguide, should be earthed at,

• top of tower • bottom of tower • entry point to building.

Lightning protection for radio towers • Explain that good practice is to earth each tower leg to separate grounding rods which are connected together

with a buried bus-bar and then connected to building earth. Grounding Techniques • Explain that underground earth connections should be welded together rather that bolted. • State that all grounding conductors should be solid copper straps. • State that the lightning rod should be directly connected to ground via its own solid copper strap. • Discuss why sharp bends in earthing straps are to avoided. • State that ground resistance should be less than 5 ohms. Internal Grounding • Discuss why equipment racks should be grounded to a common bus-bar but the bases should be insulated from

the floor. • State that cable trays should be earthed at several points. Total Equipment Protection • Discuss the additional protection required at radio sites as being:

• protecting all power lines entering building • protecting all data cables and land lines entering building.

TR630 Modulation Theory 6 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits • Analyse the effect of interference on digital signals. Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits • Analyse the performance of demodulator signals in the presence of noise and interference



Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in

the presence of noise. • Calculate system requirements of modulation systems • Analyse the effect on digital signals of presence of noise and interference TDM • Describe multiplexing. • Describe the different approaches to multiplexing indicating the methods of framing, signalling and error

correction. • Describe typical system applications. Spread Spectrum • Describe the advantages of spread spectrum systems • Describe and analyse the performance of typical spread spectrum systems. Advanced Modulation Schemes • Describe and analyse the [performance of TDMA, CDMA Systems • Describe satellite systems, local area networks and GSM in detail. • Compare the performance of satellite systems, GSM, LANs and other modern implementations. TR660 Spectrum Management 6 Radio Spectrum Characteristics • Describe the propagation characteristics of the commonly used mobile radio bands and calculate expected






frequency spectrum.




coefficient on receiver signal strength at a particular frequency • Describe the ways of reducing fade in a typical cellular radio system. Spectrum Management for Maximum Return on Investment • Prepare a business plan to purchase spectrum for a cellular system based on potential revenue by using a






FIELD Network Management

UNIT ICTTC042B - Undertake system administration

This unit covers the maintenance of vendor mediation devices designed to maintain the integrity of higher order network support systems. The unit applies to both system platforms and applications. This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Undertake preventative maintenance 1 Platform data base optimisation and administration is undertaken effectively

2 Training is organised or instructions provided to ensure effective data base optimisation and administration

3 System platforms and applications are identified

4 System is interrogated and monitored to identify error logs, aging time on processes, data base checks and system loadings

5 Problems or likely problems are brought to the attention of the appropriate personnel with advice and guidance as to likely solutions

6 Measurements are undertaken from a user perspective on response times and investigations initiated as to likely problem where specifications are not being met

7 Availability of data storage space is assessed and appropriate action is initiated where required

8 Procedures for system back up are initiated, continually reviewed for efficiency of operation and amendments made where required

2 Provide application support to system users

1 Procedures for regular formal meetings with users are initiated and reviewed on a regular basis for effectiveness

2 Communication links with system users are regularly maintained and action taken to effect changes as required

3 Assistance is provided to system users in evaluation and resolution of problems



3 Create/delete user accounts 1 Customer user groups are determined

2 User profiles are created

3 System access levels are determined

4 Users are allocated to specific groups

5 Enterprise policy regarding system access is understood and adhered to on all occasions

6 Security procedures relating to access is established and monitored in accordance with policy

7 Grounds for deletion of user accounts are checked and verified prior to necessary action

4 Undertake special studies/investigations

1 Request for study/investigation is analysed and detail of action required is determined

2 Activity including timelines, specific goals and required resources are planned

3 Other parties associated with the investigation are co-opted

4 Study is undertaken methodically and in accordance with plan

5 Results are analysed and reports including recommendations are prepared and forwarded to the requesting authority

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS System platforms may include: UNIX, HP open view, SUN Operating system, Command post System specifications are vendor/platform and application specific. Such specifications define speed of response and applications System support could include: features, new equipment, faults, problems



Measurements of the system are undertaken in a simulated or live environment and consist of dummy loading of data to measure response in various situations such as adding new customers to an existing data base A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are bleary specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Problems may include: Flaky sectors on hard drive, security breaches Appropriate action in fixing data storage problems could include: Software and hardware variations, software redesign, storage rearrangements Software covers data base, operating system, and applications Special studies relate to performance of both platform and its application Data base optimisation includes use of system resources such as RAM, CPU, hard drives Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA standards as they apply to carrier operation International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations - network management series E410 Occupational Health and Safety Act Privacy Act Spectrum Management legislation




Evidence Mentor/assessor observation of candidate's ability to: • measure system (RAM, CPU, Hard drive) utilisation • start a stop application (including operation system and data base) • make a system back up • measure the platform performance • measure the application responsiveness • undertake a system recovery from back up • identify and resolve system problems • comply with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • read, interpret and use equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation Candidate submits hard copy of written reports demonstrating competence in: • measurement of platform performance • measurement of application responsiveness • undertaking of a system recovery from back up Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor about interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors in providing application support to system users. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to: • create/delete user accounts • create/modify/delete user profiles • maintain customer focus and consideration of customer needs Candidate submits hard copy of a special study or investigation undertaken, containing evidence of: analysis of problem, detail of activity required, consultation with other parties, studies undertaken and their analysis, and recommendations.

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CA520 Training CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO660 Operating Systems 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE610 Network Equipment 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PE620 Decision Making 6 PK610 Product Knowledge 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS620 Design 6 RE620 Physical Interface Standards 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TF630 Fault Finding 6



CA520 Training • New and/or modified products–customers and staff • Technical information to company staff • New and emerging technologies • Training elements of supervision and reporting CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,

an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document CO610 Computer Skills 6 Assumed - C0510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software and available data to analyse network design, manage












IIR filter. • Show the direct-form realisation of a simple IIR filter suitable for sin(x)/x compensation. NE610 Network Equipment 6 Assumed NE410 Network Equipment 4 Switching Network Equipment • Identify the main Digital Switching System (DSS) manufacturers and their products. • Describe the AXE 10 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the 5ESS DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the System 12 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the DMS 100/200 DSS and functions of its main components. Transmission Network Equipment • Identify the main transmission equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DM2 and DM8 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main components. • Describe the FLM-150, FLM-600 and FLM-2400 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main















PE620 Decision Making 6 Demonstrate Planned Problems Solving Methodology • Recognise strategic, administrative and operational types of decisions • Describe the decision making process

• identify the need for a decision • define the problem • clarify the objectives • collect data • generate alternatives • evaluate alternatives • make decision • implement and monitor decision made.

Demonstrate an Ability to Make Informed Decisions by Taking all Relevant Factors into Account • Investigate and apply the use of models in the decision process. These may be:

• breakeven model • payoff tables • expected value • decision tree • ishakawa diagrams • forcefield analysis • statistical process control

• Foster collaborative thinking and creative problem solving by using Edward de Bonos' "Six Thinking Hats". • Define a number of problem solving alternatives for given individual and team situations. PK610 Product Knowledge 6 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Relative performance capabilities of alternative products. PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications










• Contingency plans • Completion RE620 Physical Interface Standards 6 Covered in RE520 Physical Interface Standards 5 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 Transmission Network Impairments • Clock signal impairments.




Transmission Error Detection in SDH Networks • Discuss the two mechanisms for error detection in SDH, namely, loss of frame phase and block error monitor.



Stress testing of transmission networks for test analysis. • Discuss the merit of stressing networks elements by performing tests, such as, frequency offset, wander, auto-




however, manufacturers have not standardised on MTBF measurement. • Explain the terms Mean Time To Restore (MTTR), Availability and Unavailability. TF630 Fault Finding 6 Blocking in GSM • Explain that blocking (or sealing) is the term used for a channel that is temporarily taken out of service by the

base station controller. • State that blocking can occur while the channel is in use or when it is on standby. • State that the most probable cause of blocking is interference from another mobile. • State that if blocking is kept below 2% it is considered normal, however, if greater than 5% it tends to indicate

system design errors, intermodulation problems or RF interference from other equipment. • Discuss that poor system design can cause blocking by allowing excessive overlap between cells and the mobile

phone may end up on a distant co-channel station because of local congestion and hence cause interference to a local station.

Advanced System Fault Finding • State that advanced fault finding begins in the network operations centre. • List the collection of databases and support tools, available in the network operations centre, such as,

equipment, locations, services, circuits, cables, customers, bills, faults and alarms. Fault finding in the Network at the Network Operations Centre • Explain the basic fault finding approach in the network as below:

• Monitor events in each box that makes up the network. • Connect a panel of status lights to each box. • Each light represents an important parameter in the box. • When important lights go on, ring a bell. • Monitor the lights day and night. • When the bell rings look up the meaning of the lights in a data base. • Re-route traffic if not automatically carried out. • Dispatch a technician if needed.






UNIT ICTTC043B - Undertake network traffic management

This unit relates to the maximisation of all available network capacity in real time. Elements 6 and 7 of this unit can are related to traffic dimensioning and thus should be read in conjunction with the unit of competency ICTTC030B "Forecast service demand". This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Check availability of all installed network capacity

1 Network alarms are interrogated to identify any areas of route/circuit unavailability

2 Planned and unplanned outages are assessed to determine network unavailability and checks are made as to restoration times

2 Detect network traffic problems 1 System is interrogated to identify traffic status

2 System alert is analysed to identify traffic problems both real and potential

3 Controls are activated either automatically or manually and monitored where applicable

4 Traffic measurement data is used to assist identify problems

5 Customer complaints are analysed as appropriate

6 Semi permanent controls active in the network are activated and deactivated on a regular basis

3 Analyse traffic volumes 1 Circuit allocation is measured in real time in accordance with specification

2 Routes to be measured and the specific measurements to be undertaken are identified

3 Traffic measurements are undertaken across all identified routes

4 Measurement results including historical data is collected

5 Results are analysed and conclusions reached

6 Traffic patterns are established or updated as required



4 Develop strategies to overcome network traffic problems

1 All relevant data both current and historical is gathered and analysed

2 Predetermined thresholds are established

3 Loading/grading levels are determined

4 Actions necessary to alter traffic flows are determined

5 Funding parameters are sought and amendments to plans initiated to fit budgeted levels

6 Liaison is established with other involved areas both within and without the enterprise

7 Interim traffic controls are determined and allied prior to any action

8 Strategies based on traffic analyses and patterns are developed to control traffic and prevent congestion or other traffic problems

9 Develop strategies for recovery where traffic congestion/problems occur

10 Contingency plans are developed to allow for problems during network changes

5 Apply solutions both short and long term where required

1 Software changes are implemented in accordance with planned strategy

2 Network controls are activated and monitored

3 Short term ad hoc solutions are developed and implemented where temporary solution only is required

4 Action is implemented to ensure that reversal action is initiated in the case of temporary solution

5 Contingency plan is implemented where required

6 Monitoring of change is undertaken on a continual basis

7 Measurements are undertaken to assess the outcome of variations

8 Results of change are analysed and a report prepared for the appropriate authorities with recommendations for further immediate change or for later action

9 Continually review and monitor strategies and initiate corrective action where required

6 Detect and take action on potential traffic congestion

1 Traffic loads are measured and analysed

2 Potential congestion problems are identified and possible impact determined

3 Processor overloads are prevented by controlling traffic

4 Potential traffic increases are assessed for impact on the network and contingencies developed to control traffic flow if required



7 Provide traffic indicators for capacity planning

1 Relevant data on traffic patterns both current and historical are gathered

2 Data is assessed and conclusions as to necessary action are made

3 Reports complete with appropriate recommendations are completed and forwarded to enterprise planners/account managers

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Traffic measurements may include: Quality of load, quality of service, resource availability, access, faults, elements, BIDS, erlangs, answer/seizure ratio Measurements are undertaken automatically by the system in majority of cases System alerts may include: alarm information, customer identified problems, information relating to marketing campaigns which will introduce traffic flow, major civil works which may impact on network, planned outages Actions necessary to vary traffic flow may include: changing capacity levels, blocking routes, applying route and/or traffic restrictions, temporary solutions Traffic is controlled by either protective or expansive actions Activation/deactivation of semi permanent controls is necessary as large restarts or exchange reloads result in Network Terminal Management controls being deactivated Interim traffic controls limit the number of calls to a particular number or route. Such controls can be preset Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA standards as they apply to carrier operation International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU Recommendations - Network Management series E410 Occupational Health and Safety Act Privacy Act Spectrum Management legislation



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • displaying interpersonal skills related to customers, employer, work associates, team members, individuals and

other contractors • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors and carriers keeping a customer focus

and consideration of customer needs • applying and measuring impact of network controls such as call gapping and rerouting • applying traffic management principles Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—detailing: • identification and explanation of all blocked trunks in the network • identification and analysis of traffic alarms Observation by mentor/assessor, and at least two oral reports by candidate, demonstrating their ability to develop and implement appropriate strategies for performance enhancement. Candidate submits a hard copy set of measurement results, and of traffic pattern data, relevant historical data, with analysis and conclusions reached within a specified time.




Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO660 Operating Systems 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 NE660 Network Demographics 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PE620 Decision Making 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 PS620 Design 6 SU680 Resource Management 6 SW620 Packet Data Switching 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TR650 Traffic Management 6

CI610 Communication 6

Reports and Submissions

Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,

an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations

Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document

CO610 Computer Skills 6

Assumed - C0510 Computer Skills 5

• Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software and available data to analyse network design, manage technical and personnel functions, and generate concepts for growth and improvement.

• Identify the sources of relevant data. Collect and analyse this data using software packages to: • determine site/channel capacity, forecast future needs • measure traffic levels and patterns • prepare a plan to indicate network growth potential • prepare a time chart to meet such growth • prepare a report e.g. project brief complete with options, costs, outcomes, budgeting, timing, maps, plans


















by Interim Recommendation 1.450. NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 Assumed NE620 Network Architecture 6 Network Management Models • Describe the TMN network management model. • Describe the ISO/OSI system management model. • Describe the SNMP network management model. Network Management Techniques and Standards • Describe the network management techniques and standards used for:






correct the problems. • Use logging information to identify security violations. • Take appropriate action to end security events. • Institute appropriate follow up actions to remove the security weaknesses in a network. NE660 Network Demographics 6 Assumed NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 Routing in Switched Networks • Given a sketch of a circuit-switched network with alternate routing indicate which routes are high-usage

(primary and secondary) trunk groups and final trunk groups. • Define the cost factor and explain its use in dimensioning trunk groups. • Explain the principles of dynamic non-hierarchical routing strategy. • Explain the reasons for using routing and the concepts of routing in packet-switched networks. • Explain the nature of traffic on high-usage routes and on final routes. Dimensioning of High-Usage and Final Trunk Groups • Explain why the traffic on primary routes is assumed to be random, while the traffic on second choice routes

and final routes is peaky. • Explain the priniciples of dimensioning the non-routes and GOS routes. • Demonstrate how the number of circuits in a high-usage trunk group can be estimated by using the ITU-T table

indexed gy the cost factor R. Calculations of Traffic Overflow to Alternate Group • Determine the total traffic offered to the high-usage trunk group. • Use tables to find the traffic overflowing from the high-usage trunk group. • Calculate the total traffic offered to the trunk group of the secondary route. Mean traffic Adjustment Calculations • Calculate the peakedness factor of the traffic overflowing from the high-usage group. • Calculate the weighted mean peakedness factor for a number of parcels of traffic offered to the final group. Evaluation of Number of Circuits in Final Group • Determine the level of day-to-day traffic variations. • Determine the mean traffic offered to the final trunk group. • Using peaked-traffic capacity tables determine the number of circuits in the final trunk group. Reference Connections for Switched Circuits • Given the diagram of reference connections for a circuit-switched network, identify each component and its

functions. • Given a diagram of reference connections for a packet-switched network, identify each component and its

functions.



User Demands to Traffic Variables and Signalling Traffic Evaluation • List and define traffic variables in user plane and control plane as specified in the TU-T recommendations

E.711. • Explain the ISDN grade of service parameters. OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 Assumed OH510 Occupational Health & Safety 5 • Develop processes, procedures and documentation to satisfy all the requirements of the Occupational Health &












• Foster collaborative thinking and creative problem solving by using Edward de Bonos' "Six Thinking Hats". • Define a number of problem solving alternatives for given individual and team situations. PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications










• Contingency plans • Completion SU680 Resource Management 6 • Fundamentals–labour, finance and materials • Project evaluation–resourcing assessments • Training requirements • Tendering processes • Project budgetting/costings checklist • Contingencies • Critical path analysis in the resources chain SW620 Packet Data Switching 6 X25 Packet Details • List the different packet types used in X25 virtual channel communications, and show how they are employed. • Describe in detail the different fields in X25 packet headers and explain their functions. LAPB Details • List the different HDLC frames used in link layer supporting X25 packet layer. • Describe in detail the different fields in the HDLC frame header and explain their function.



Fast Packet Switching–Frame Relay • Describe the limitations of X25 in handling high speed, real time communication required with ISDN. • Explain the advances in reliable transmission technology that allow reduced overheads in packet switching. • Describe how frame relay, driven by N-ISDN, was conceived to overcome restrictions of conventional packet

switching. • Compare X25 and frame relay overheads and overall efficiencies. • Explain frame relay architecture at user - network interface, and call control procedure. • Compare processing functions for X25 and frame relay. • Explain frame relay congestion control features. Packet Switching on ISDN • Describe the packet switching provision in N-ISDN, including channel or B channel packet services. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Switching • Explain the concept of virtual path and virtual channel. • Describe the characteristics of ATM cells that allow shortcomings of X25 and frame relay to be overcome for

B-ISDN applications. • Describe the elements of the cell header and their function. • Describe the network management functions provided by OAM cells. • Explain the operation of ATM switches, including multislot, multipath switching, and describe how variable

cell delivery delay can be controlled to acceptable limits for real time voice or video applications. • Investigate the approach of major switch manufacturers, Nortel, Alcatel, ATT to integrate ATM switching (B-

ISDN) with 64Kb/s N-ISDN switching into their products. TE610 Telephony Principles 6 Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.










PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility. TR650 Traffic Management 6 Basic Principles • Derive Equations of State from first principles • Solve queuing problems using the equation of states. • Write and demonstrate a program to simulate a single server, single queue packet system (i.e. a discrete event





linear and/or an exponential equation. Management Functions • Analyse typical day to day variations and seasonal variation in traffic flow in order to prepare a traffic







UNIT ICTTC044B - Co-ordinate fault rectification and restoration of service following network outages



1 Co-ordinate resolution of customer complaints

1 Complaint is identifed and evaluated

2 Dialogue with the customer is undertaken where further information is required

3 Details of the fault/problem are determined and priorities established

4 Contractural arrangements including timeline agreements with customers are assessed and arrangements made for compliance

5 Negotiations with customer and/or account manager re repair arrangements occur where contractural arrangements cannot be met

2 Analyse alarms/indicators 1 Notification of outage situations are received and acknowledged

2 Alarm conditions are checked and acknowledged when triggered

3 Alarm conditions and the appropriate priority are identified

4 Extent of the failure is assessed and impact both on network and customers identified

5 CCS links affected are identified

3 Initiate damage control mechanisms 1 All parties both internal and external are advised of the outage in accordance with enterprise policy

2 Immediate restoration action is initiated in the event of an unplanned outage

3 Appropriate traffic controls are enacted

4 Details of outage are escalated to media through correct enterprise channels where necessary

5 Contingency plans are initiated where appropriate

6 Investigations are conducted as to spare capacity which may enable temporary repair



4 Implement action 1 Affected alarms are isolated

2 All other alarms are monitored to ensure no other problems

3 Permit to work processes are implemented in accordance with enterprise policy

4 Outage procedures are initiated in accordance with enterprise requirements

5 Restoration timeframe is validated

6 Repair activity is managed and additional expertise is sought as required

7 Resource allocations are monitored and manipulated to ensure quick and effective repair

5 Monitor outage and restoration of service

1 Customers are kept fully informed of repair progress

2 Escalation of the problem is initiated in accordance with enterprise requirements within a specified timeline

3 Action is initiated to protect the network at all times during the planned/unplanned outage

4 Different control strategies are implemented as and when required

5 Provide focal point for all restoration activity and advice as to action and progress

6 Network components are isolated as necessary

7 Network is reconfigured if necessary

6 Test/monitor network upon recovery 1 Tests as specified in equipment manuals are undertaken to ensure equipment is operating to specification

2 Alarms are reactivated and monitored to ensure normality

3 Continual monitoring of the network is undertaken for a specified period to ensure no ongoing problems

4 Low priority problems or likely perceived problems identified during the repair process are logged for future action

7 Finalise action 1 Data base is updated with details as to problem and action taken to repair

2 Problems identified during a planned outage are recorded and noted for future occasions

3 Cause/ effect studies are undertaken and results documented and forwarded to the appropriate area

4 Trending data is analysed, results documented and forwarded with appropriate recommendations to the correct authorities

5 Required administrative action is taken in accordance with enterprise instructions

6 Customers are contacted to ensure complete satisfaction with the outcome



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Alarm priorities are enterprise specific but generally consist of four (4) levels Priority 1 impact - demanding immediate attention Priority 2 degradation - decision to be made as to attention given and depends on impact on both network and customer Priority 3 hazardous - attention given as part of normal activities Priority 4 no action - alarm noted Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending on the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Network problems could include: faults, capacity, customer complaints, warnings on problems about to occur, security violations Problem indicator could include: alarm, trouble reports, customer complaints Problems may be identified by: alarms, carriers, customers, service providers Outages are classified as minor and major and whilst the definition may vary from carrier to carrier, the difference is usually about 120 customers, 15 minutes for restoration, 140 meg system



A further category of outage relates to disaster which involves flood, bushfire, loss of multiple optical fibres e.g Reaction time to alarms can vary between carriers. Normally response is influenced by time/day of the week and service level agreements with customers. Service level agreements dictate priorities Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA standards as they apply to carrier operation International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations - network management series E410 Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor: • determining service availability • adhering to service level agreements and validate of compliance • maintaining customer focus and consideration of customer needs • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • driving fault logging system Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • understanding alarm types and priorities across the whole network • analysing complex faults • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and


documentation • applying escalation procedures Mentor/assessor observes candidate monitor alarms and co-ordinate rectifying a Tier 3 fault within service assurance guidelines, while applying all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices, enterprise escalation and outage procedures, all within service assurance guidelines Candidate submits at least two hard copy reports of separate installations of varying degrees of complexity demonstrating candidate's ability to monitor and coordinate the relevant fault/problem rectification



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 EN640 Enterprise Alarms 6 EN650 Enterprise Operations Policy 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 NE660 Network Demographics 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PE620 Decision Making 6 PK610 Product Knowledge 6 PS620 Design 6 RE620 Physical Interface Standards 6 SU610 Planning 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TF630 Fault Finding 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,

an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document CS610 Customer Relations 6 • Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are



advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events.



EN640 Enterprise Alarms 6 Interpretation of alarms and initiation of action in line with policy. EN650 Enterprise Operations Policy 6 Covered in EN610 to EN640. IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members.










functions.
















• Foster collaborative thinking and creative problem solving by using Edward de Bonos' "Six Thinking Hats". • Define a number of problem solving alternatives for given individual and team situations. PK610 Product Knowledge 6 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Relative performance capabilities of alternative products.










• Contingency plans • Completion RE620 Physical Interface Standards 6 Covered in RE520 Physical Interface Standards 5 SU610 Planning 6 Covered in SU510 Planning 5















jitter tolerance, auto-jitter transfer and output jitter measurements.



Error Performance • Describe the various error analysis methods in use or being developed, such as, error seconds, error free








equipment, locations, services, circuits, cables, customers, bills, faults and alarms. Fault finding in the Network at the Network Operations Centre • Explain the basic fault finding approach in the network as below:







UNIT ICTTC045B - Ensure that network changes are implemented as planned with minimal impact to the customer

This unit relates to the increasing of network capacity, installation of new network elements and changing of existing network elements. The unit covers the control of planned activity on the network and thus should be read in conjunction with the following units: Unit ICTTC060B - "Integrate new systems and equipment into the telecommunications network". Unit ICTTC061B - "Cutover new and/or replacement network equipment". Unit ICTTC076B - "Complete equipment/software upgrades". This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Plan network changes 1 Work order and design details are checked

2 Work order is analysed and discussed as appropriate with both builders and designers

3 Impact of change including the need for outages is evaluated

4 Timing and extent of outage is determined

5 Routes impacted by the outage are identified

6 Impact of change on the network is assessed

7 Impact of change including any outage on the customer is determined and arrangements made for appropriate advice as to timing, impact and extent of impact to be provided to the customer

8 Specific network management needs are determined and plans for appropriate action are developed in conjunction with network builders

9 Action is taken to ensure that there is no circulatory routing where required

10 Work necessary prior to building is undertaken in accordance with design specifications

11 Alarms affected by the building activity are suppressed as appropriate

12 Final plans for configuration/reconfiguration are presented for approval in accordance with enterprise practice



2 Validate new or amended data 1 Data is loaded in a test environment

2 Tests are undertaken in accordance with design specifications

3 Test results are analysed and discussed with designers where problems are detected

4 Problems are rectified where within capability or escalated in accordance with enterprise procedures

3 Conduct acceptance tests of new or amended equipment/system installations

1 Customer traffic conditions are simulated in accordance with specification

2 Transmission levels are tested and action initiated to repair where prescribed standards are not being achieved

3 Integration testing is undertaken in accordance with specification

4 Test results are analysed and action initiated to effect variations as required

5 Builders are consulted where tests fail or show results outside specification

6 Reports are prepared and supplied to the appropriate area within the enterprise

7 Quality assurance procedures are initiated in accordance with enterprise policy

8 Liaison with carriers and co providers is undertaken at all stages of the project as appropriate

4 Implement changes 1 Network stability is checked prior to implementation of change and action taken to rectify problems prior to change occurring

2 Data is loaded in accordance with design specification

3 Activities of builders are managed to ensure network integrity at all times

4 Network data bases are updated

5 Appropriate documentation is prepared in accordance with enterprise requirements and forwarded to the appropriate area or filed as required

6 All appropriate alarms are activated, checked and repairs initiated where required

5 Monitor impact of change 1 Impact of change is evaluated to ensure that design requirements are fully achieved

2 Network is monitored to ensure continuing stability

3 Contingency plans are initiated in the event of problems

4 Problem rectification is managed to minimise impact both to the network and the customer



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS All planned activity on a carriers network must be approved by network management personnel in accordance with specific enterprise procedures Work order relates to the activity to be undertaken and includes the authority to proceed with change to the network Design specifications can relate to the system/equipment being installed and are vendor specific and/or to the actual installation design Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR

Data relates to the proprietary software provided by the vendor of the new or changed system

Tests required with the software/hardware release are specified in the related design pack are are undertaken at both the commissioning and integration stage of the installation

Test environment may be simulated or live and depends on availability of simulated environment, data to be tested, time and location of test

Problems identified are processed in accordance with the maintenance regime which is specific to each enterprise. This regime generally consists of four levels viz: first in, specialist, network support, vendor.

Escalation procedures are specific to enterprise and relate to nature of the problem, impact, particularly to customers, of problem, time taken for rectification of the problem

Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA standards as they apply to carrier operation International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations - network management series E410 Occupational Health and Safety Act Privacy Act Spectrum Management legislation



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and


documentation • co-ordinating of all work groups associated with network change • ensuring accuracy of all system data bases • implementing escalation procedures within enterprise guidelines • adhering to all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • validating all alarms Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor ensuring: • absence of faults on completion of activity • zero loss of both traffic and features during network integration or upgrade • identification and solution of problems experienced during the change

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO660 Operating Systems 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 CS620 Service Agreements 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE610 Network Equipment 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 NE660 Network Demographics 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PE620 Decision Making 6 PS620 Design 6 SU610 Planning 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6











Note: This topic has units relating to network security codes, access, system platforms - which belong to another topic C0660, Forecasting in C0640, Planning in C0630. CO660 Operating Systems 6 Assumed - CO620 Computer Programming 6 & CO680 Software Management 6 Demonstrate broad knowledge of general operating systems: • MS DOS commands, file organisation, system and BIOS calls • hierarchal directories • customising MS DOS • MS DOS batch files • pipes, filters and I/O redirection • TSRs and device drivers • new and emerging trends in operating systems



Create files and directories, use the system commands to perform process operations within a multiuser, multitasking environment: • real time applications • interleaved processing techniques • multiprogramming • multitasking • time-sharing • virtual storage • multiprocessing • language translators • compilers • interpreters • assemblers File and disk organisation: • files and directories • protection and permissions • listings • file location • classification System command and calls: • commonly used commands • retrieving • saving • deleting • copying • creating • printing • linking • etc • input/output redirection • meaning of • method of achievement Batch, script or equivalent files: • purpose • structure • commands • System utilities • sorting • windowing • device drivers Be proficient in the use of the wide ranging capabilities of an operations system to: • Devise and undertake network tests to check network performance in real time to gather data/information from

all sources. • Analyse drive test data to check for network optimisation. • Administer platform database optimisation using software redesign and hardware variations. • Interrogate system to identify error logs, aging time on processes, database checks and system loading. • Assess availability of data storage: • Initiate procedures for data backup, review for efficiency and amend. • Create/delete/modify user accounts - groups, profiles, access levels, security, verify deletions prior to action. • Make a system backup and system recovery from backup.



Measure: • the platform performance • application responsiveness • system utilisation (RAM, CPU, Hard Drive) Simulate problems and faults to determine shortcomings of software/hardware. Prepare for configuration/reconfiguration of system so that there is no loss of traffic during integration or upgrade lead data for test environment. Analyse the CCS network to ensure that it operates according to specifications: • activate alarm screens • check port times • unblock ports, check integrity of data received. • activate test messages, check for receipt • investigate the causes of alarms/problems commonly reported. e.g fault on hard drives, security breaches,




advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. CS620 Service Agreements 6 • Service agreements need to be implemented according to enterprise standards. • This topic is best addressed within the workplace. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events.



IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright

IN620 Teamwork 6

Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3

• Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members.

IN630 Negotiation 6

Dealing with Conflict Assumed IN440 Negotiation 4

• Describe the stages or levels of conflict • Identify signs of potential or actual conflict. • Prepare a map to identify the issues and needs. • Use active listening in conflict resolution • Give feedback assertively. • Use communication skills that facilitate constructive responses to conflict in the workplace. • Design options for constructive responses to the conflict. • Practice and employ different strategies to design options, including:




NE610 Network Equipment 6 Assumed NE410 Network Equipment 4 Switching Network Equipment • Identify the main Digital Switching System (DSS) manufacturers and their products. • Describe the AXE 10 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the 5ESS DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the System 12 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the DMS 100/200 DSS and functions of its main components. Transmission Network Equipment • Identify the main transmission equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DM2 and DM8 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main components. • Describe the FLM-150, FLM-600 and FLM-2400 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main


















functions.
















• Foster collaborative thinking and creative problem solving by using Edward de Bonos' "Six Thinking Hats". • Define a number of problem solving alternatives for given individual and team situations.










• Contingency plans • Completion SU610 Planning 6 Covered in SU510 Planning 5 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.











TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6

Transmission Network Impairments • Clock signal impairments.
















UNIT ICTTC046B - Undertake network performance analysis

This unit deals specifically with the monitoring of network performance. This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Determine service levels 1 Quality of service standards levels are established in conjunction with equipment suppliers, taking into account customer opinion and equipment capability

2 Trend analysis data is collected and analysed

3 Statistical data related to customer evidence of network degradation is gathered

4 Comparative data from across the whole network is analysed

5 Mean time between failures is established using historical data, equipment capability records and allowing for process improvement

6 Restoration times in the event of service breakdown are established

7 Resources necessary to monitor service levels is determined, organised and allocated

2 Check the integrity of the network 1 Alarm panels are monitored on an ongoing basis

2 Real time analysis of data/information from all sources, as to network health is undertaken

3 Message retrieval system is checked on a regular basis

3 Monitor the delivery of quality service

1 Service levels are continually monitored to ensure that established standards are achieved and/or improved

2 Appropriate tests are undertaken on a regular basis to ensure performance levels are within prescribed specifications

3 Network alarms relating to the overall network and the network elements are continually monitored

4 All network repair and configuration activity on the network is continually monitored and managed



5 Trouble reports are received and analysed on a regular basis

6 Active fault queues are checked and progress reports obtained as to fault status

7 Customer perception surveys are undertaken on a regular basis and information used to manage network health

8 Performance data including customer feedback is used as a regular indicator of network performance

9 Equipment performance is regularly checked against equipment vendor specifications

10 Drive test data is analysed where appropriate as an input to performance and optimisation of the network

11 Regular feedback from marketing personnel is organised as a further barometer to performance

4 Organise quality repair 1 Performance results are analysed on a regular basis and investigations initiated as to problem in the event that performance levels are not within specified standards

2 Causes of problems are analysed by testing specific network components

3 Problems are isolated where possible and repair organised or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

4 Further testing is undertaken after repair to ensure that the problem is corrected

5 Problems/faults are simulated in a captured environment where necessary

5 Co-ordinate upgrade of software/hardware

1 Features or standards lacking as a result of studies and customer feedback are determined and strategies developed to affect change

2 Costs of change proposed are assessed and a cost/benefit study undertaken and submitted for approval

3 Shortcomings in hardware are confirmed and negotiations undertaken with planners/designers for change or improvement

4 Studies are undertaken to ensure that new or modified equipment is compatible with existing equipment

5 Software and hardware changes are initiated with minimum downtime and minimum customer impact

6 Tests are undertaken following upgrade to ensure the level of performance planned as a result of the upgrade is being achieved

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor



In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Performance levels may be affected by blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, high errors, degraded performance, loss of signal, signal quality, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure,, low errors, power supply failure, transmitter quality, operating environment such as dust, power, air conditioning, switch software and data Fault escalation procedures are defined by the enterprise and usually relate to both the maintenance regime adopted by the enterprise and the associated repair times Tests may include; Telephone calls, DC/AC measurements, error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements Call success rate measures include: destination success, rate analyser, call analysis Real time analysis can include: switching and transmission statistics, call failure logs, comparative data across the whole network Analysis also includes: trending, degradation impact, statistical data Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer Alarm priorities are enterprise specific but generally consist of four (4) levels Priority 1- demanding immediate attention Priority 2 - decision to be made as to attention given and depends on impact on both network and customer Priority 3 - attention given as part of normal activities Priority 4 - alarm noted Conditions which may generate customer complaint other than problems described above may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: Australian standards AS 3901, 3902 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations - network management series E410 Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility.

Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual.

Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning.

Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • interpreting current network performance data. • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • correctly applying escalation procedures if required within service assurance guidelines • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs • liaising with vendors on network component testing and redesign • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation

Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—on current network performance data, restoration times and resources required.

Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor on: • adherence to service level agreements and validation of compliance • analysis of current data against specification and the systematic approach to problem identification both real

and potential • recognition of potential causes of problems and performance levels

Candidate submits at least one hard copy report on a proposed change strategy, including: cost/benefit analysis, equipment compatibility study and proposed testing routine.


Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO660 Operating Systems 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 NE660 Network Demographics 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PE620 Decision Making 6 PK610 Product Knowledge 6 PS620 Design 6 RE620 Physical Interface Standards 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6











Note: This topic has units relating to network security codes, access, system platforms - which belong to another topic C0660, Forecasting in C0640, Planning in C0630. CO660 Operating Systems 6 Assumed - CO620 Computer Programming 6 & CO680 Software Management 6 Demonstrate broad knowledge of general operating systems: • MS DOS commands, file organisation, system and BIOS calls • hierarchal directories • customising MS DOS • MS DOS batch files • pipes, filters and I/O redirection • TSRs and device drivers • new and emerging trends in operating systems



Create files and directories, use the system commands to perform process operations within a multiuser, multitasking environment: • real time applications • interleaved processing techniques • multiprogramming • multitasking • time-sharing • virtual storage • multiprocessing • language translators • compilers • interpreters • assemblers File and disk organisation: • files and directories • protection and permissions • listings • file location • classification System command and calls: • commonly used commands • retrieving • saving • deleting • copying • creating • printing • linking • etc • input/output redirection • meaning of • method of achievement Batch, script or equivalent files: • purpose • structure • commands • System utilities • sorting • windowing • device drivers Be proficient in the use of the wide ranging capabilities of an operations system to: • Devise and undertake network tests to check network performance in real time to gather data/information from

all sources. • Analyse drive test data to check for network optimisation. • Administer platform database optimisation using software redesign and hardware variations. • Interrogate system to identify error logs, aging time on processes, database checks and system loading. • Assess availability of data storage: • Initiate procedures for data backup, review for efficiency and amend. • Create/delete/modify user accounts - groups, profiles, access levels, security, verify deletions prior to action. • Make a system backup and system recovery from backup.



Measure: • the platform performance • application responsiveness • system utilisation (RAM, CPU, Hard Drive) Simulate problems and faults to determine shortcomings of software/hardware. Prepare for configuration/reconfiguration of system so that there is no loss of traffic during integration or upgrade lead data for test environment. Analyse the CCS network to ensure that it operates according to specifications: • activate alarm screens • check port times • unblock ports, check integrity of data received. • activate test messages, check for receipt • investigate the causes of alarms/problems commonly reported. e.g fault on hard drives, security breaches,




advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events.



IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public

Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright

IN620 Teamwork 6



IN630 Negotiation 6






NE660 Network Demographics 6 Assumed NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 Routing in Switched Networks • Given a sketch of a circuit-switched network with alternate routing indicate which routes are high-usage





functions. User Demands to Traffic Variables and Signalling Traffic Evaluation • List and define traffic variables in user plane and control plane as specified in the TU-T recommendations

E.711. • Explain the ISDN grade of service parameters.















• Foster collaborative thinking and creative problem solving by using Edward de Bonos' "Six Thinking Hats". • Define a number of problem solving alternatives for given individual and team situations. PK610 Product Knowledge 6 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Relative performance capabilities of alternative products.










• Contingency plans • Completion RE620 Physical Interface Standards 6 Covered in RE520 Physical Interface Standards 5 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.








UNIT ICTTC047B - Undertake management of the Common Channel Signalling (CCS) network



1 Analyse CCS alarms 1 Alarm/trouble report is received and acknowledged

2 Alarm management system is activated

3 Fault/problem is verified

4 Cause of alarm/problem is investigated and results analysed

5 Appropriate repair action is determined and resources with appropriate skills allocated to repair

6 Repair action is supervised and escalation action initiated in accordance with enterprise procedures where timelines will not be met

7 Clear alarms on completion of repair

8 Monitor subsequent alarms to ensure no reoccurence of the problem

2 Analyse digital path alarms 1 Alarm is received and acknowledged

2 Alarm management system is activated if single link/link set is affected

3 Alarm is verified and removed if invalid

4 Cause of alarm is determined and appropriate repair activity initiated

5 Restoration procedures are monitored to ensure commitment to specified timelines and escalation procedures are initiated as appropriate and in accordance with enterprise procedures



3 Check integrity of data received on equipment ports

1 Alarm screens are activated and port times are checked on a regular basis

2 Ports are verified to ensure that procedures are running

3 Problems are assessed to verify whether cause is as a result of either planned or unplanned activity

4 Problem is cleared on completion of planned works and logged in appropriate data base

5 Port blockage is unblocked

6 Test messages are activated and checks initiated to ensure receipt

7 Repair outcomes are verified when port or link is reactivated

8 Restoration procedures are monitored to ensure committment to specified timelines and escalation procedures are initiated as appropriate and in accordance with enterprise procedures

4 Monitor and acceptance test reparent 1 Details of reparent date are received and logged

2 Network stabilisation is verified both prior to and during reparent

3 Reparent action is supervised to ensure no impact on the overall network

4 Acceptance testing is undertaken in accordance with prescribed operating procedures

5 Network stability is monitored on completion

6 Problems during and post reparenting are referred to the appropriate area for action

5 Block alarms for circuits out of service

1 Alarms are received and acknowledged

2 Alarms are verified and prioritised

3 Alarms are removed if invalid or not affecting service

4 Cause of the alarm is determined

5 Repair action is determined, initiated and managed

6 Restoration progress is monitored and escalation arranged if problem not repaired within specified timelines

6 Co-ordinate repair of CCS link failure (Bouncing link alarms)

1 Link alarm is received and acknowledged

2 Audible alarm is removed if applicable

3 Alarm management system is activated if single link or link set

4 Alarms are verified and prioritised

5 Cause of the alarm is determined

6 Repair action is determined, initiated and managed

7 Restoration progress is monitored and escalation arranged if problem not repaired within specified timelines



7 Co-ordinate CCS relationships 1 Receive and log requests for relationship change

2 Data is verified and problems are followed up with appropriate support staff

3 Network stability is checked prior to action

4 Loading of data is initiated and/or managed

5 Data load and network stability are checked on completion

6 Models and enterprise systems are updated

8 Co-ordinate CCS rearrangements 1 Requests for rearrangements are received and logged

2 Feasibility of rearrangement is verified

3 Network stability is checked prior to action

4 Details of rearrangement are entered in appropriate system

5 System records are updated as appropriate

6 Completed work is checked for accuracy

7 Network stability is monitored on completion

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Common Channel Signalling (CCS) signalling is governed by ITU standards Most of the processes associated with the analysis and repair of CCS signalling alarms are automatic, with the manual effort associated with ensuring that the system operates according to specification Procedures for acceptance testing of any equipment/data change is detailed in vendor documents and may be supplemented by enterprise instructions Both block and bouncing link alarms may be as a result of planned or unplanned activity Systems may be equipment or enterprise related



Typical scenarios for CCS rearrangements may include: DIP running errors, link conversions, digital path alarms, CCS7 violations Regularity of checking port times may vary from enterprise to enterprise Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA standards as they apply to carrier operation International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations - network management series E410 Occupational Health and Safety, Privacy Act


consideration of customer needs • identifying and implementing repair action within service assurance guidelines • analysing and interpretation of alarms including CCS, digital path • applying enterprise fault management regime, priorities and escalation procedures • checking integrity of data received on equipment ports • resolving problems in a methodical and logical manner • conducting appropriate tests and interpreting results • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Candidate submits hard copy test results. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—demonstrating reading, interpretation and use of equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and documentation




Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CO660 Operating Systems 6 DI640 Digital/Analogue Network Applications 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 EN640 Enterprise Alarms 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN630 Negotiation 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6 NE660 Network Demographics 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PE620 Decision Making 6 SW630 Switch Networks 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TF630 Fault Finding 6

CI610 Communication 6

Reports and Submissions

Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,

an analysis of information, conclusions, recommendations

Present a report: • Deliver an oral presentation based on the document


Assumed - C0510 Computer Skills 5

• Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software and available data to analyse network design, manage technical and personnel functions, and generate concepts for growth and improvement.

• Identify the sources of relevant data. Collect and analyse this data using software packages to: • determine site/channel capacity, forecast future needs • measure traffic levels and patterns • prepare a plan to indicate network growth potential • prepare a time chart to meet such growth • prepare a report e.g. project brief complete with options, costs, outcomes, budgeting, timing, maps, plans










software design, storage. Determine appropriate repair action. Implement software changes in accordance with planned strategy, including short term ad hoc solutions. Develop and implement appropriate strategies for performance enhancement. Investigate spare capacity of the network which can be enabled during repair. Identify route/circuit unavailability. Interrogate the system to identify traffic status/problems both real and potential. Activate controls automatically or manually to monitor traffic, collect data in real time, such as call gapping and rerouting. Identify system platforms and applications including UNIX, HP open view, SUN operating systems, Command Post.



DI640 Digital/Analogue Network Applications 6 Assumed - DI510 Digital Theory 5 • Demonstrate in depth specialist knowledge of Digital Signal Processing (DSP) and the various applications in

the telecommunications network. • Draw a block diagram of a DSP system identifying all major blocks. • Refer to applications such as:

• Audio Response Equalisation, echo cancelling on telephone lines • tracking filters for radio communication l • ine repeaters • channel multiplexing • data encryption • digital speech interpolation • x.25 packet switching • video conferencing • security access • digital radio • voice commands • modems • ADPCK transcoders • DTMF encoding/decoding • FAX • mobile network

• Analyse the sampling process and how it changes the signal. Use Shannon's Sampling Theorem. • Calculate quantisation noise introduced by A/D and D/A signal conversion. • Define the spectrum of a sampled signal. • Use filter design packages and determine the response of any specified filter, including specialist types such as

adaptive filters, programmable filters, complementary filters and transformations. • Program a DSP to implement a filter for various applications. • Produce a circuit diagram showing how a filter interfaces to a DSP system. • Conduct appropriate tests on equipment used in the CCS network to determine the limitations of DSP

techniques. • Diagnose and resolve problems and faults which have been reported in the network related to signal

processing. DTMF = Dual Tone Multifrequency ADPCM = Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Moderation CCS = Common Channel Signalling EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events. EN640 Enterprise Alarms 6 Interpretation of alarms and initiation of action in line with policy.



IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright

IN620 Teamwork 6



IN630 Negotiation 6
















correct the problems. • Use logging information to identify security violations. • Take appropriate action to end security events. • Institute appropriate follow up actions to remove the security weaknesses in a network. NE660 Network Demographics 6 Assumed NE640 Network Management Principles and Capabilities 6



Routing in Switched Networks • Given a sketch of a circuit-switched network with alternate routing indicate which routes are high-usage

(primary and secondary) trunk groups and final trunk groups. • Define the cost factor and explain its use in dimensioning trunk groups. • Explain the principles of dynamic non-hierarchical routing strategy. • Explain the reasons for using routing and the concepts of routing in packet-switched networks. • Explain the nature of traffic on high-usage routes and on final routes.

Dimensioning of High-Usage and Final Trunk Groups • Explain why the traffic on primary routes is assumed to be random, while the traffic on second choice routes


indexed gy the cost factor R.

Calculations of Traffic Overflow to Alternate Group • Determine the total traffic offered to the high-usage trunk group. • Use tables to find the traffic overflowing from the high-usage trunk group. • Calculate the total traffic offered to the trunk group of the secondary route.

Mean traffic Adjustment Calculations • Calculate the peakedness factor of the traffic overflowing from the high-usage group. • Calculate the weighted mean peakedness factor for a number of parcels of traffic offered to the final group.

Evaluation of Number of Circuits in Final Group • Determine the level of day-to-day traffic variations. • Determine the mean traffic offered to the final trunk group. • Using peaked-traffic capacity tables determine the number of circuits in the final trunk group.

Reference Connections for Switched Circuits • Given the diagram of reference connections for a circuit-switched network, identify each component and its


functions.


E.711. • Explain the ISDN grade of service parameters.

OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6

Assumed OH510 Occupational Health & Safety 5

• Develop processes, procedures and documentation to satisfy all the requirements of the Occupational Health & Safety legislation relevant to the workplace.

• Organise and select appropriate staff for First Aid training, and major functions of safety committees and representatives.

• Prepare a brief and ongoing safety awareness training program for the work force. • Evaluate site area and project plan, note all the safety aspects; list safety equipment required, resources and












• Foster collaborative thinking and creative problem solving by using Edward de Bonos' "Six Thinking Hats". • Define a number of problem solving alternatives for given individual and team situations. SW630 Switch Networks 6 Narrow band ISDN Structure/Operation details • Explain ISDN protocol architecture for user-network interface and intra-network interface. • Explain services provided by ISDN. • Explain the use of ISUP signalling protocol to carry ISDN services across the network. • Identify the implications to the network of the different bearer types that can be carried as part of ISDN bearer

services. • Describe call set-up signalling procedures. Digital Switching and System Software • Describe software architecture of digital switching systems, identifying major functional modules. • Explain the evolution of switching software technology and design process. • Describe functions of Operating System, Call Handling, Administration and Maintenance software. Intelligent Networks • Explain aims of an Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of IN conceptual model. • Describe the physical components of IN. • Describe functional components of IN. • Explain the historical evolution of IN concept. • Describe IN services provided in Australia. • Explain operation of free phone, VPN, card calls and other IN services. • Explain service creation concept of IN, using SIB's. • Explain advantage and limitations of service provision by IN. • Describe signalling function, using CCS7 / TCAP to support IN. • Describe role of adjuncts and service node.



Operate a Protocol Analyser • Use a protocol analyser to analyse a protocol interaction, such as ISUP, SS7/TCAP, TUP. Draw the flow

diagram for a recorded period. • Define signalling messages of a normal call set up. • Configure information elements of a signalling message. • Emulate signalling procedures: DSSI, TUP, ISUP, TCAP. • Understand signalling procedure of a call set up. Digital Switching Systems Architecture • Explain technological reasons justifying a distributed control architecture. • Identify major DSS manufacturers and their products, worldwide and in Australia. • Describe architecture and functionality of main components of the following:

• DSS's: ATT's, 5ESS, Nortel's DMS Supernode, Ericcson's AXE10 and Alcatel's System 12. Compare main features, particularly in areas of switch matrix design, system control, network interface, remote subscriber units, control and switch block security.











TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 Transmission Network Impairments • Clock signal impairments.













equipment, locations, services, circuits, cables, customers, bills, faults and alarms.



Fault finding in the Network at the Network Operations Centre • Explain the basic fault finding approach in the network as below:






FIELD Installation

UNIT ICTTC054B - Provide infrastructure for telecommunications network equipment

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Prepare for installation 1 Installation is verified against design specifications

2 Building plans are checked to ensure physical installation requirements can be met

3 Floor layout is verified against project plans and marked with appropriate material

4 Dimensions of equipment components are checked to ensure that they can be catered for within building limitations

5 A site survey is undertaken to assess barriers to installation and to ensure relevant regulations are complied with

6 Duct and tray way layouts are determined from design specifications

7 Designers are consulted re changes to equipment layout where necessary

8 Material is checked against the design pack and variations arranged as required

9 Tools specified in the documentation are checked for appropriateness for the task

10 Resources provided are checked against needs and negotiations are undertaken for resource variations as required

11 Installation manuals are obtained and studied in detail prior to installation commencement

12 An installation activity plan is developed using appropriate quality tools and processes

13 Identify possible hazards and issue appropriate hazard advice

14 All parties including customers are advised of planned installation where appropriate



2 Build infrastructure 1 Structural deficiencies in supplied equipment are identified and rectified

2 Tasks are assigned to match the skills of the installation crew

3 Tools are obtained and checked for safety

4 Floor layouts are marked in accordance with plans and authorised amendments

5 Distribution frames are installed in accordance with both enterprise and manufacturers specifications and in accordance with plan

6 Ducts and tray ways for signal power and optical cables are built in accordance with plan/specification and after consultation with operational staff as required

7 Ironwork is measured and cut to size where appropriate

8 Superstructure is installed in accordance with manufacturers specifications

9 Earthing is installed as per specification


11 Infrastructure is checked to ensure it meets all safety and electrical requirements

3 Install batteries and rectifiers 1 Batteries are handled in a manner which is safe to all parties

2 Batteries/rectifiers are installed and connected in accordance with both manufacturer and enterprise requirements

3 Battery cables are tightened to tension level described in manufacturers specifications

4 Tests are undertaken to monitor battery discharge levels and batteries not meeting specifications are replaced and returned under warranty where required

4 Install DC power distribution 1 Hazardous activity procedures are followed completely

2 Power distribution panel is installed and cables are run in accordance with specification

3 Power cables are terminated in accordance with specification

4 Power cables are connected to equipment infrastructure

5 Electrical cabling is tested in accordance with specification

6 Faults are identified, rectified where possible or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy


8 Work is co-ordinated with external contract/sub contract staff as required



5 Complete installation 1 Hazardous activity procedures are followed completely

2 Inspection sheets are completed and located in accordance with enterprise requirements

3 Site is cleaned up and left in a manner which is suitable to operational staff

4 Relevant work documentation and administrative tasks are completed and forwarded to the appropriate area in accordance with enterprise policy

5 Asset is declared ready for next stage of installation

6 Transporting of tools and test equipment in suitable protective casing is organised where appropriate

7 All tools and test equipment are cleaned, adjusted and stored in an accessible location

8 Infrastructure labels and designations are fitted/applied in accordance with enterprise requirements

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Structural deficiencies could include: off vertical, not level, not square, bent Site surveys include: fire precautions and hazards, power arrangements, early warning systems, safety hazards, environmental issues, heat loads, power requirements, security arrangements, building dimensions, site access details Tools may include: screwdrivers, hammers, spanners, pliers, hammers, wrenches, cutters, wire strippers,wire wrap guns, cable strippers, crimpers, termination tools, splicing tools, cable tie tensioners, tape measures, hacksaws, drills, cut off saws, power tools, angle grinders, jigsaws, tension wrenches, soldering irons, knives, insulation displacement tools,tong meter, mechanical lifts/hoists, volt meters, cable testers, plumbob, level, trolleys, multi meters, humidity and temperature testers, anti static testers, load testers, blow torch/oxy acetylene



Materials can include: cable racks, lacing, twine, cable ties, MDF/DDF Blocks, Digital cross connect and laser guide cross connect (DSX/LGX), jumper wire, back shelf cards, frames, cabinets, iron support structures, cable trays, nuts, bolts Labelling is undertaken on; cabinets, racks, power cables, distribution panels Labelling of cables and frames can be manually or PC generated and can be: dymo windows, plastic windows, ready labels, vendor specific labelling Resources can include: People, finance, materials, tools and test equipment, vehicles Inter equipment cables may be connected to transmission equipment, main distribution frame, intermediate distribution frame Termination of cables may include: wire wrapping, soldering, insulation, displacement system, crimping Power faults relate to voltage and polarity and may be because of faulty termination, faulty power board, overloading of rectifiers DC power faults are repaired by the installer within capability. AC faults are escalated to qualified power personnel responsible for either the installation or supply Likely problems can include: light revision cards, faulty cards, equipment missing, wrong procedures, unsuitable location, cards, printed circuit board assemblies Faults found on testing may include: Faulty cards, faulty cabling, faulty connector, voltage levels on power Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU Standards G 703,704,707 -9, 821 Occupational Health and Safety Heritage legislation Industrial awards and conditions ACA regulations relating to functional earthing




Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs. • identifying potential earthing locations cable routes, cables trays, data cabinets, telecom. closures, cross

connects, distributors (MDF,IDF,FDP) • interpreting design specifications, including: circuit diagrams, plans and specifications • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • installing protective earth installations related to: screening, overvoltage, surges and spikes • installing termination hardware including: connectors, frames, blocks, sockets, patch panels • installing functional earth installations including equipment potential bonding • installing lightning conductors, link to MEN (Multiple Earth Neutral) • safely using general hand and power tools and general equipment normally related to these tasks • completing housekeeping including administrative effort, site cleaning, waste and debris removal, hazard

identification Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor—demonstrating installation of power equipment including: distribution panel, cables, battery and rectifier types Candidate submits hard copy report of conduct and interpretation of test results, complete with relevant documentation, showing compliance with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Candidate submits at least two hard copy reports to assessor containing: accurate record keeping and labelling of equipment, manufacturer's certification, warranty and other related documentation requirements

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CA310 Cabling Techniques 3 CI310 Communication 3 CO310 Computer Skills 3 EL310 AC/DC Theory 3 EL320 Earthing 3 EL430 Power Theory 4 EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 ET310 Electronics Principles 3 IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 IN320 Teamwork 3 NE310 Network Equipment 3 NE320 Network Architecture 3 OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 OH320 Safe Handling PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 PS320 Basic Building Trades 3 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 SU320 Leadership 3 TC310 Tower Climbing 3 TF310 Test Equipment 3 TF330 Fault Finding 3 TO310 Use of Tools 3 TO330 Installation Practices 3 TO340 Basic Ironwork 3 TO350 Cutting and Drilling 3 TR310 Basic Transmission Theory 3



CA310 Cabling Techniques 3 Identify the specific cabling skills and knowledge required from the areas of: • Metallic • Optical • Structured • Coaxial • Underground • Aerial Details will include: • Tools • Cable types and cable codes • Termination • Jointing • Installation • Testing • Safe work practices • Hauling • Specifications, Standards and Regulations See the CA200 to CA296 series for specific details in the required area/s CI310 Communication 3 Communicate • Identify how communication takes place • Select an appropriate communication channel • Recognise the barriers to communication • Interpret and comprehend information • Use non-discriminatory language Listen • Develop active listening skills • Eliminate bad listening habits Write • Draft clear, concise written communication with attention to use of words, sentences, grammar and expression • Correctly prepare different forms of short business communication including memos, letters, facsimiles and e-

mail • Draft basic reports • Employ techniques for reviewing work, including, assessing length of sentences and considering audience

needs Speak • Reflect before speaking • Develop a pleasant, effective speaking style • Adapt to audience needs • Make appropriate social and business introductions



CO310 Computer Skills 3 • State the basic features, facilities, fundamental hardware and the basic operational procedures of a typical PC. • Operate a keyboard using typing techniques and practiced manual skills. • Recognise and use terminology associated with word processing and file management. • Access the Internet to retrieve information and use e-mail for communication. • Access an established database file, use appropriate software functions to search, sort and select data.

• Apply these skills to meet the requirements of a given situation e.g. to manage spare parts: check stock, usage, ordering, surplus, audit of stock.

• Locate and access parts and display, look for alternate parts, check for compatibility and if latest issue. • Recover faulty part, send for repair and update database.

• Create a simple database to keep records of repair/replace details of Telecommunication "equipment", details of action taken, record part used/obtain or order appropriate parts. Produce useable reports from a database file according to specified criteria.

• Install software for a given application of Telecommunication equipment, configure the software and hardware according to installation documentation. Run test programs to verify proper operation.

EL310 AC/DC Theory 3 DC Theory • Describe the role of power supplies within a telecommunications installation. • Describe and draw the circuits of basic telecommunications power supplies. • Explain the terms regulation and filtering. • Calculate required components to effectively regulate and filter a rectified power supply, given necessary

parameters. • Describe the following power sources, stating their advantages and disadvantages, and common techniques

used to mitigate against the disadvantages when used: cells, batteries, solar panels, motor/generator or standby sets.

• Give the cathodic and anodic reactions for cells in common use within the telecommunications industry. • Discuss the purpose of protective electrodes, and describe the processes leading to the attrition of protective

electrodes. (E.g. sacrificial anodes, galvanising of steel, methods used to protect aluminum) AC Theory • Explain the operation of transformers, rectifiers and the purpose of rectification within telecommunications

power supplies. • Give an elementary explanation of the principle of operation of switched mode power supplies. • Describe various types of uninterruptable power supplies used within the telecommunications industry, giving

advantages and disadvantages of each, together with the likely location or usage of each type. EL320 Earthing 3 • Discuss the principles of earthing and earthing systems within telecommunications systems and installations. • State the reasons for earthing within telecommunications systems and installations. • Describe, recognise and where appropriate, install the various types of earths: protection, signal, power. • Recognise, by indication, earth cabling, and state relevant standards applicable to earthing within

telecommunications installations. • Indicate, either 'in the field' or from diagrams or written descriptions, equipment and situations requiring

earthing, and discuss methods of earthing. • State the difference between grounding and bonding. • Discuss methods and equipment used for surge diversion. • Discuss electrodes and materials used in earthing systems. • Discuss and practically implement methods of installation of an earth system within a telecommunications

facility. • Describe the processes which, after time, can compromise an earthing system. Note: All practical work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant legislation, where applicable.



EL430 Power Theory 4 Assumed EL310 AC/DC Theory and 3EL330 Power Installation • Define and explain power distribution principles as applicable to telecommunications installations of small,





for this type of service. • Explain the operation of, and make calculations about rectifier power supplies providing heavy currents. • Detail the operation of various uninterruptable power supplies types. • Detail the theory of Switched Mode Power Supply operation. EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 Information systems related directly to recording competency unit outcomes. ET310 Electronics Principles 3 • Demonstrate some theoretical knowledge of basic electrical principles and concepts in relation to current flow

from various sources of emf for various applications. • Assemble, carry out calculations and perform measurements on resistive and reactive circuits connected to AC

and DC supplies, including cells in series and parallel., and solar cells. • Describe the process of converting AC power to DC and identify various types of rectifier circuits.*

• Apply these concepts to the charging of various types of chemical cells and batteries. • Describe the correct and safe charging procedures, handling and storage of cells and batteries. • Monitor battery discharge, devise tests to determine suitable cell (including solar cells)or battery for specific

applications. • Perform measurements and tests by reading a circuit diagram to check for electrical safety, compliance to

specifications and requirements. • Trace and identify faults on power equipment, distribution panels, cables, batteries and rectifiers.

• Identify causes of malfunctions in electrical and electronic installation/equipment, including environmental hazards, human and manufacturing processes.

• Describe methods of protecting electrical/electronic installations with reference to screening, overvoltage, surges and spikes, lightning conductors, link to MEN (Multiple Earth Neutral), and equipment potential bonding.

• Identify potential earthing locations for cable routes, cable trays, data cabinets, equipment enclosures, cross connects, distributors (MDF,IDF,FDP).

IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 Create a Positive Communication Climate • Interact in a supportive way • Use assertive communication • Construct "I" statements • Use different types of feedback appropriately • Give accurate, clear and comprehensive instructions • Prepare different types of questions • Follow a set of instructions.



Develop Non-verbal Skills • Analyse non-verbal communication • Use body language to communicate • Promote a prompt, positive, professional image • Send corporate messages • Recognise cultural differences and avoid gender bias. IN320 Teamwork 3 Work-team Communication • Participate in a small group discussion to reach agreement on a workplace related issue. • Cooperate with team members to plan and prepare a simple job related presentation. • Make the presentations. NE310 Network Equipment 3 • List typical telecommunications networks and associated basic equipment elements and briefly describe their

characteristics: • Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) • Television Distribution • Pay TV • Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN)

• Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) • Packet switched data networks

• X.25 • Frame Relay • Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) • Internet

• Shared access data networks • Ethernet • Token Bus • Token Ring • Fibre Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)

• Dedicated data network • Digital Data Network (DDN)

• Packet/dedicated data network • Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) NE320 Network Architecture 3 Telecommunications Network Architecture • Define a network as a pattern or arrangement of intersecting lines. • Define a telecommunications network. • State that networks are traditionally service specific, that is, telephony or data or video. • State that networks are becoming more integrated to ultimately combine telephony and data and video over one

network. • State that there are two categories of networks, public and private. Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a hierarchical PSTN. Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a PABX network . Television Distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a TV distribution network • Via terrestrial and satellite.



Pay TV distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Pay TV distribution hybrid • Fibre-cable (HFC) network. Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a GSM network. Packet Switched Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Packet Switched Public • Data Network (PSPDN). Shared Access Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form shared access data networks in LANs using the

following topologies, • point to point • point to multipoint (mesh) • multipoint (bus and tree) • star • ring • dual ring

Dedicated Data Network Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Digital Data Network (DDN). OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 • Select the appropriate tools for the task. • Demonstrate the correct use of hand tools and operation of power tools in order to reduce the risk of injury. • Describe the causes of injuries due to incorrect work practices–ranging from personal behaviour to site

conditions, materials, machinery and equipment malfunction. • Describe the appropriate steps to follow in case of fire. • Select the correct fire extinguisher for the class of fire and demonstrate its use effectively. • Demonstrate the method of rescuing a person who may be in contact with live electrical conductors or

equipment and apply basic first aid procedures. • Recognise hazards, select and use appropriate protective clothing and other personal safety equipment for

protection to self, fellow workers and the public at large. OH320 Safe Handling • Select the appropriate ladders, scaffolding, hoists, harness and fastening to access the structures.

• Perform on-site tests to determine the hazard level of radiation from telecommunication equipment, and take preventative action to minimise risk.

• Refer to manufacturer's specifications for securing, load capacity, and installation of superstructures and structural equipment.

• Follow manufacturer's instructions for handling of batteries, hazardous gases, materials and chemicals, in relation to their transport, storage, use and first-aid procedures. • Recognise materials which cause chronic illnesses with long term exposure including asbestos, radiation

• Apply measures to prevent such substances being absorbed into the body.



PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 Types of plans:

• floor • building • reflected ceiling • schematic drawings

Standard symbols: • plumbing • structures • electrical • cables • circuits

Dimensions and Measurements Installation

• instructions • specifications • location • orientation

Interpret manuals • equipment • system • enterprise policy • documents and regulations

PS320 Basic Building Trades 3 Covered in PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 Assumed RA210 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards and Safe Working Practices at Radio Sites • Describe the electromagnetic wave. • Differentiate between and state the health risks of ionising and non-ionising radiation. • State safe levels of exposure to electromagnetic radiation. • State safe working practices when working with or near radio transmitting equipment. • Recognise hazard signs and need for barriers where safe levels may be exceeded. Applications of Radio Communication in Systems Telecommunications Networks • Draw the model diagram of a basic radio communication system. • Define the terms 'terrestrial', 'simplex', 'half-duplex' and 'full-duplex'. • List the types of radio systems found in telecommunications networks. Requirements for Modulation • Define the term baseband. • Sketch typical baseband signals in both time and frequency domains. • List the frequency bands found in the radio frequency spectrum. • State the bands used for telecommunications and commercial radio systems. • Describe the relationship between baseband signal and bandwidth. • List the needs for modulation in radio transmission systems. Effects of Noise on a Radio Transmission System • Describe the term 'signal-to-noise' ratio. • List the noise types found in radio systems. • Describe the effects of noise on a radio transmission system. • Describe the methods of overcoming the effects of noise in a radio system.



Microwave Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define the meaning of the terms 'drop and insert', 'unprotected', 'cold standby','hot stand by', 'twin-path' and

'N+1'. • Draw block diagrams of microwave radio relay systems incorporating the above terms. • Briefly describe the antenna requirements for a microwave radio system. Satellite Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define a communications satellite and a satellite communication system. • Explain the terms 'uplink', 'downlink', 'transponders', 'footprint' and 'earth station'. Cellular phone Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • State the benefits of cellular radio. • Define the terms 'cell', 'cell splitting' and 'frequency re-use'. • Draw the basic block diagram of a cellular phone interconnection with the PSTN. SU320 Leadership 3 • Role of the Supervisor • Situational leadership • Communication Skills • Motivation • Power and influence • Delegation • Enterprise specific Organisational Chart TC310 Tower Climbing 3 Fixed Gantries and Ladders • Climb fixed ladders and gantry using appropriate safety equipment • Ensure safety of site against falling objects • Ensure appropriate notifications are made to site supervisor before gaining permission to tower climb • Establish appropriate emergency procedures for communication of problem before attempting climb • Perform maintenance and safety check on all equipment before climb including hard hats, safety boots, safety

harness (for resting and emergency rescue) and fixed and or removable ladders/gantries • Demonstrate the safety ascent and descent of a fixed ladder using a resting harness to at least 10m height Movable Ladders and "Cherry Pickers" • Ensure operator has current certificate for this equipment from the appropriate licensing authority. • Observe dangers associated with live electrical wires and obtain clearance from power authorities before

climbing in a danger area • Fix portable ladders to ground and pole at safe angles according to Australian Standards • Ensure extension ladders and "cherry pickers" are not used beyond extension limits. • Demonstrate use of mobile "cherry picker" and extension ladders to climb poles of at least 10m



TF310 Test Equipment 3 Electronic Test Equipment (Basic) • Analog multimeter (AMM).

• List typical measurements that can be performed using an AMM. • Explain the terms 'accuracy', 'resolution' and 'sensitivity' relating to a DMM.

• Digital multimeter (DMM). • Define the terms 'accuracy', 'resolution' and 'sensitivity' relating to a DMM.

• Cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). • Describe the main advantages of using a CRO compared to a voltmeter. • Explain how to measure amplitude, frequency, and phase difference on a CRO. • List the typical parameters of an analog CRO.

• Function generator. • State typical uses for function generators in electronics. • List the output waveforms available from a function generator including the use of • symmetry control. • List typical output parameters such as, impedance, voltage, frequency and duty cycle.

• LCR meter. • Describe the three measurements that can be performed using a LCR meter.

• Millivoltmeter (or dB meter). • List the applications for millivoltmeters. • State that circuit output levels can be measured as volts/millivolts, dBs and dBms.

Digital Test Equipment (Basic) • Logic pulsers.

• State the applications of logic pulsers in digital circuits. • Logic probes.

• State the applications of logic probes in digital circuits. Telecommunications Test Equipment (Basic) • Cable locators and pair tracers/identifiers.

• Explain where cable locators are used. • Explain the applications of pair tracers.

• Transmission measuring set (TMS). • State the applications of a TMS. • State the circuit output level can be measured as a voltage level or a power level. • Discuss bridging and terminated measurements with a TMS.

• Buttinski. • Describe the applications and features of buttinskis.

• Visible laser fault finder. • List applications, such as, identifying breaks, bends and stress in optical fibre patch cables with a visible

laser fault finder. • Cable scanner.

• Explain the applications of cable scanners in LANs. • List the typical tests that can be performed by a cable scanner.

TF330 Fault Finding 3 Responsibility for Fault Repairs • Explain that if the organisation manages its own telecommunications system it has to fix the faults or contract

someone to do it. • Explain that if the carrier manages the network it is their problem when they know about it. • Discuss the demarcation problems at the user/carrier interface and at the interfaces between carriers.



The Telecommunications Carrier Fault Finding Process • List the steps in the fault finding process, namely,

• the user identifies the fault. • the user reports the fault. • the technician find the fault. • the technician repairs the fault. • the user is informed that the service is now available.

Fault Finding Techniques • Discuss the technique of progressively swapping suspect parts until the fault has been cleared. • Discuss the technique of using the half split method of fault finding. • Discuss the merit of using the testing method of comparing measurements of a faulty unit to measurements of a

known working model. • Discuss the merit of the testing method of comparing measurements of faulty unit/system to measurements

taken when unit/system was commissioned. • Discuss the repair method of establishing 'the main' signal path through the equipment using a block diagram or

schematic and then testing the signal path. • Examine the usefulness of a manufactured supplied fault finding flow chart. • Examine the usefulness of a fault finding flow chart prepared by the technician. TO310 Use of Tools 3 Basic Hand Tools • Identify a range of general hand tools, such as:

• spanners (open end, ring and, shifters) • wrenches (vice grips, multi grips, Stillsons, torque) • Allen keys • screwdrivers (flat, Phillips, posidrive) • sockets and accessories • hammers (claw, ball Pein and technicians) • hand rivet guns • rulers • tape measures • squares • hand drills • chisels (wood and metal) • files (hand, flat, round, half round, square, triangular) • knives (pocket, Stanley) • scissors • tinsnips and shears • bolt cutters • nibblers • saws (various hacksaws and blades, various woodsaws)

Safety with Hand Tools • List safety requirements when using hand tools, such as:

• select correct tool and size of tool for job. • check condition of tool before using. • do not use worn or damaged tools. • maintain tools in good condition • use tools in correct manner. • store and carry tools safely.

• Applications of basic hand tools. • State typical applications of general hand tools listed. • Demonstrate the correct procedure for using general hand tools listed.



TO330 Installation Practices 3 Safety in Telecommunications • List the correct lifting procedure.

• Position feet correctly • Obtain a proper hold • Maintain a straight back

• Demonstrate the correct lifting technique. • List the ladder types used in telecommunications, such as:

• step • extension • insulated.

• Discuss correct ladder selection. • Demonstrate correct ladder lifting and placement techniques. Mechanical Fitting Skills in Telecommunications • Demonstrate the correct technique to install two lengths of unistrut across a room. • Demonstrate the correct technique to join lengths of cable trays. • Demonstrate the correct method to install a cable tray on the unistrut. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install and brace a 19 inch rack. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install a catenary wire across a room. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install optical fibre channelling. TO340 Basic Ironwork 3 Sheet Metal Types • List the types of sheet metals used in the telecommunications industry, such as:

• standard • perforated • colour bond • stainless steel • zinc coated • aluminium

• State an application for each of the sheet metals listed. • Identify each of the listed sheet metals from a sample. Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment • List personal protective clothing and equipment requirements when fabricating sheet metal, such as:

• wear close fitting clothing which is buttoned • don't wear torn clothes, ties or loose belts. • wear suitable footwear which covers the toes (safety shoes/boots preferred) • keep long hair under caps or nets • wear safety glasses, goggles or face shields as required. • wear stout gloves when handling hot or sharp materials.

Care in the Use of Machinery • List the personal safety requirements when using machinery with moving parts, such as:

• never use unfamiliar equipment unless you have been instructed in its correct use. • keep fingers away from moving parts. • always use guards supplied with machinery. • concentrate on the job you are doing.



Fabrication of Sheet Metal • Demonstrate the correct procedure for accurately measuring and marking out, using:

• steel rules • callipers • squares • scribers/dividers

• Given the appropriate tools and sheet metals, correctly perform the following tasks to within prescribed dimensions: • cutting using a guillotine • bending using a bender • drilling using a drill press • punching using a turret punch • notching using a hand notcher.

TO350 Cutting and Drilling 3 Power Tools Used for Cutting and Drilling • Identify a range of power tools used for cutting and drilling, such as:

• drills (cordless, mains/portable, pedestal/variable speed, hammer, reversing) • drill bits (twist, deburring, spade, masonry, holesaw) • jigsaws • nibblers • grinders (angle/pedestal) • circular saw (various cutting blades) • guillotine (floorstanding)

Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment • List personal protective clothing and equipment requirements when cutting or drilling, such as:

• wear close fitting clothing which is buttoned. • don't wear torn clothes, ties or loose belts • wear suitable footwear which covers the toes (safety shoes/boots preferred) • keep long hair under caps or nets • wear safety glasses, goggles or face shields as required • wear stout gloves when hot, sharp or corrosive materials are being handled • wear appropriate aprons in special circumstances.

Electrical Safety with Power Tools • List the electrical safety requirements when working with portable mains powered power tools, such as:

• ensure earth connection is intact if tool is meant to be earthed • use earth leakage circuit breaker (safety switch) for additional protection • do not earth double insulated tools • do not use power tools in wet environments.


• never use unfamiliar equipment unless you have been instructed in its correct use • keep fingers away from moving parts • always use guards supplied with machinery • concentrate on the job you are doing.

Applications of Power Cutting and Drilling Tools • State typical applications of cutting and drilling power tools listed. • Demonstrate the correct procedure for using cutting and drilling power tools listed.



TR310 Basic Transmission Theory 3 History of Telecommunications Transmission Systems • List the transmission mediums available, namely,

• open-wire • twisted pair • co-axial cable • waveguide • radio • optical fibre

• Discuss the transmission medium systems presently popular. • Explain the basic principle of FDM. • Compare FDM to broadcast radio station frequency multiplexing. • Discuss problems with increasing capacity of inter-exchange junction cables in 1960s and 1970s. Comparison between Analog and Digital Transmission Systems • List the disadvantages of analog transmission systems in terms of, noise, distortion, attenuation and capacity. • Discuss problems with analog transmission as distances increase. • List the advantages of digital transmission systems in terms of, noise, distortion, attenuation and capacity. • Discuss advantages of digital transmission as distances increase. • Discuss cost, reliability and bandwidth factors of analog and digital transmission systems. • Explain that analog transmission systems can also carry digital information. • Explain that digital transmission systems can also carry analog information. • Sketch block diagram models of analog and digital communications systems. • Discuss integration of voice, data and image over one transmission network. • Discuss integration of digital switching and digital transmission in telecommunications.




STREAM Technical - NET, CAN

FIELD Installation

UNIT ICTTC055B - Install an antenna/wave guide

Antenna/ wave guide may be installed on a mast/tower/pole/building This unit applies to both fixed and mobile radio equipment Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Plan for assembly 1 All legislative requirements are considered in planning process

2 Resources with the required skills are organised and obtained/contracted to be available when required

3 Other antennae at location are identified and arrangements made for their outage where required

4 Customers and/or other affected parties are notified of works to be undertaken, where appropriate

2 Obtain tools, test equipment and installation materials

1 Tools and equipment necessary for the installation are obtained and checked to be in safe working order and adjusted to manufacturers specifications

2 Tools and materials are located to ensure ready access to the installation

3 Assemble antenna/wave guide 1 Antenna is assembled on site in sequence and in accordance with plans, specifications and enterprise guidelines

2 Aerial/wave guide is swept prior to installation, problems are identified and replacement parts are arranged as necessary

3 Waveguides are labelled to minimise crossovers

4 Cable connections are made in accordance with plans, specifications and enterprise guidelines




4 Mount antenna/wave guide 1 All personal protective equipment required for the job is worn in accordance with enterprise and occupational health and safety guidelines and manufacturers specifications

2 On site radio frequency hazard folder is obtained, relevant hazard levels assessed and appropriate preventative action taken in accordance with prescribed safety requirements

3 Tools, equipment and machinery to be used complies with all relevant standards and requirements

4 All hazards are identified and action taken to minimise hazards to both the installer, fellow operatives and the public at large

5 Pressurisation equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturers specifications where required

6 Wave guides and earth bond/drip point to waveguide are installed in accordance with plans and specifications

7 Antenna is mounted onto installed mounting arrangements in accordance with plans, specifications and enterprise guidelines

8 Wave guides are installed to antenna in a manner described in the specifications

9 Pressure is inserted in accordance with design specifications as necessary

10 Lightning protection systems are installed in accordance with plans and specifications

11 Antenna is earthed in accordance with specification


5 Connect antenna/wave guide 1 Wave guide pressure window is mated to appropriate equipment parts in accordance with manufacturers specifications and design requirements

2 Co-axial cable is connected to transceiver where required

3 Feeders are connected, tested as working accurately and repair initiated or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy


6 Align/realign antenna 1 Antenna is panned to maximise functional signal strength and considers both elevation and azimuth

2 Polarisation of antenna is undertaken considering both specifications and site/alignment conditions



7 Test antenna/wave guide operation 1 Appropriate test equipment for antenna/wave guide is set up and used in accordance with manufacturers specifications and enterprise guidelines

2 Tests are conducted in accordance with technical manuals and specifications

3 Test results are interpreted and compared with manufacturers/ design specifications

4 Depressurisation tests are undertaken in accordance with specifications and corrective action initiated where levels are outside specification

5 Earth bonds/drip points on both co-axial cable and wave guides are checked against specification and action initiated where specification limits are not met

8 Complete administrative tasks 1 All appropriate records are completed and signed in accordance with enterprise policy

2 Test results are recorded and stored in the appropriate data base with copies being left on site as required by enterprise policy

3 All feeders are labelled in accordance with manufacturers specifications and enterprise policy

4 Records are stored in accordance with enterprise guidelines

5 Customer is notified as to work completion as required

6 Relevant enterprise personnel are advised of work completion



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS



Customers may be internal or external to the enterprise and may include the public at large Legislative requirements may include; Occupational health and safety, heritage, national parks, telecommunications Act, historical buildings and sites, telecommunications codes of conduct Resources may be company staff or contract staff Outage requirements vary from enterprise to enterprise but generally require a permit to work from the relevant network management centre Initial wave guide sweeps are undertaken using dummy loads Cables in use may be: copper, optic fibre, co-axial Factors impacting on installation, may include,: signal type, frequency, height of installation, ownership of site/support Hazards may include: safety, radiation, weather, site, geography, roof top, building Hazard prevention measures may include: appropriate warning signs, road closures, equipment turn down, temporary outage, site clearances, roof guards Licenses which may be required include: riggers, winch, crane Other antennae may be operated by: other carriers, civil agencies, defence agencies, government agencies, private enterprise Personal protective equipment may include: asbestos precautions, dust protection, gear muffs, eye protection, gas monitoring equipment, gloves (plastic, rubber, leather), gumboots, hard hats, overalls, personal reflecting jackets, riggers gloves, safety boots, vests, radiation protection clothing Tools, equipment and machinery may include: winch, crane, hand and power tools elevated platform level Test equipment may include: multimeter, spectrum analyser, return loss measuring equipment, hybrid T Alignment of antenna may be influenced by elevation and azimuth Direction may be: omnidirectional , diametrically opposite Polarisation can be vertical, horizontal or circular Bands in use may be: Narrow, wide, mobile and satellite



Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards may include: ACA Standards TS 14 International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations Occupational health and safety Environmental protection acts Heritage legislation National Parks Telecommunications Act and relevant codes Historical building and site State legislation relating to road/site closures Agreements with local and state bodies

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor on planning for separate successful antenna/wave guide assemblies Mentor/assessor observes candidate planning antenna/wave guide installation, including: • assessing hazard levels including site and radio frequency and application of safety precautions for self, fellow

workers and the public at large • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs • obtaining and checking tools, test equipment and materials, and using relevant test equipment • installing assembly in accordance with plan and specification • accurately labelling of all equipment • mounting, connecting, aligning for pan and sweep at least two antenna/wave guides under instruction, and

successfully completing another procedure on at least one previously unfamiliar wave guide and one antenna, in accordance with plan and specification

• showing correct interpretation and application of relevant regulations and standards, and all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices

• demonstrating completion and storage of appropriate records including data bases • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—demonstrating successful alignment of an antenna and wave guide installation Candidate submits hard copy reports of separate installations of varying degrees of complexity demonstrating candidate's ability to: • use relevant test equipment • apply specified tests • analyse outcomes against specifications



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CA360 Co-axial Cabling CI310 Communication 3 CS310 Customer Relations 3 EL320 Earthing 3 EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 MA310 Basic Mathematics 3 NE310 Network Equipment 3 OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 OH320 Safe Handling PE320 Remote Work PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 PS320 Basic Building Trades 3 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 RC310 Riggers Certificate 3 RE310 Working on Non-enterprise Land 3 TC310 Tower Climbing 3 TF310 Test Equipment 3 TO310 Use of Tools 3 TO320 Anti-static Procedures 3 TO330 Installation Practices 3 CA360 Co-axial Cabling Identify the specific cabling skills and knowledge required from the areas of: • Installation methods and termination • Products • Testing See the CA200 to CA296 series for specific details in the required area/s CI310 Communication 3 Communicate • Identify how communication takes place • Select an appropriate communication channel • Recognise the barriers to communication • Interpret and comprehend information • Use non-discriminatory language Listen • Develop active listening skills • Eliminate bad listening habits Write • Draft clear, concise written communication with attention to use of words, sentences, grammar and expression • Correctly prepare different forms of short business communication including memos, letters, facsimiles and e-





CS310 Customer Relations 3 Dealing with Customers and Clients • Identify the needs of the customer/client. • Adopt communication that is consistent with customer needs. • Provide information regarding facilities, services and products to customers and clients. • Service customers according to workplace standards and organisation policy. • Use a telephone effectively to interact with clients. • Deal appropriately with a difficult situation involving a dissatisfied customer. • Keep accurate customer records using the appropriate organisation documentation. EL320 Earthing 3 • Discuss the principles of earthing and earthing systems within telecommunications systems and installations. • State the reasons for earthing within telecommunications systems and installations. • Describe, recognise and where appropriate, install the various types of earths: protection, signal, power. • Recognise, by indication, earth cabling, and state relevant standards applicable to earthing within



facility. • Describe the processes which, after time, can compromise an earthing system. Note: All practical work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant legislation, where applicable. EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 Information systems related directly to recording competency unit outcomes. MA310 Basic Mathematics 3

Minimum: • Four arithematic functions - with and without a calculator • Fraction arithematic • Metric units • Scientific and Engineering notation • Estimates - length, volume, area • Indices • Geometry - sketches , plans • Solve equations with a single variable

Additional - Select from: • Perform with and without a calculator decimal and fraction arithmetic involving addition, subtraction,

multiplication and division. • Solve equations in a single variable involving transposition and reciprocals • Identify and use appropriate metric units: Mass, Length, Time, Area, Volume, Current, Voltage, Resistance • Use positive, negative and fractional indices in appropriate situations • Express large and small numbers using Scientific and Engineering notations (exponents) • Manipulate numbers in multiplication and division with and without calculators where the numbers are in

Scientific or Engineering notation. • Estimate length, area and volume of everyday objects. • Apply reasonable rules for rounding off numbers and determining accuracy of measurements • Define and use units of angular measure: Degrees and radians • Trigonometry:- Pythagoras' Theorem, Sine rule, Cosine rule



NE310 Network Equipment 3 • List typical telecommunications networks and associated basic equipment elements and briefly describe their






• Packet/dedicated data network • Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 • Select the appropriate tools for the task. • Demonstrate the correct use of hand tools and operation of power tools in order to reduce the risk of injury. • Describe the causes of injuries due to incorrect work practices–ranging from personal behaviour to site










PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 Types of plans:






PS320 Basic Building Trades 3 Covered in PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 Assumed RA210 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards



Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards and Safe Working Practices at Radio Sites • Describe the electromagnetic wave. • Differentiate between and state the health risks of ionising and non-ionising radiation. • State safe levels of exposure to electromagnetic radiation. • State safe working practices when working with or near radio transmitting equipment. • Recognise hazard signs and need for barriers where safe levels may be exceeded. Applications of Radio Communication in Systems Telecommunications Networks • Draw the model diagram of a basic radio communication system. • Define the terms 'terrestrial', 'simplex', 'half-duplex' and 'full-duplex'. • List the types of radio systems found in telecommunications networks. Requirements for Modulation • Define the term baseband. • Sketch typical baseband signals in both time and frequency domains. • List the frequency bands found in the radio frequency spectrum. • State the bands used for telecommunications and commercial radio systems. • Describe the relationship between baseband signal and bandwidth. • List the needs for modulation in radio transmission systems. Effects of Noise on a Radio Transmission System • Describe the term 'signal-to-noise' ratio. • List the noise types found in radio systems. • Describe the effects of noise on a radio transmission system. • Describe the methods of overcoming the effects of noise in a radio system. Microwave Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define the meaning of the terms 'drop and insert', 'unprotected', 'cold standby','hot stand by', 'twin-path' and

'N+1'. • Draw block diagrams of microwave radio relay systems incorporating the above terms. • Briefly describe the antenna requirements for a microwave radio system. Satellite Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define a communications satellite and a satellite communication system. • Explain the terms 'uplink', 'downlink', 'transponders', 'footprint' and 'earth station'. Cellular phone Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • State the benefits of cellular radio. • Define the terms 'cell', 'cell splitting' and 'frequency re-use'. • Draw the basic block diagram of a cellular phone interconnection with the PSTN. RC310 Riggers Certificate 3 • Refer to the relevant state authority for the type of qualification and training required. • If a recognised licence or certificate is not required refer to TC310 and TC510. RE310 Working on Non-enterprise Land 3 • Enterprise policy • Local regulatory authorities • OH & S requirements • Enterprise Liability See also RE215 Legislative codes, practices and access requirements



TC310 Tower Climbing 3 Fixed Gantries and Ladders • Climb fixed ladders and gantry using appropriate safety equipment • Ensure safety of site against falling objects • Ensure appropriate notifications are made to site supervisor before gaining permission to tower climb • Establish appropriate emergency procedures for communication of problem before attempting climb • Perform maintenance and safety check on all equipment before climb including hard hats, safety boots, safety


climbing in a danger area • Fix portable ladders to ground and pole at safe angles according to Australian Standards • Ensure extension ladders and "cherry pickers" are not used beyond extension limits. • Demonstrate use of mobile "cherry picker" and extension ladders to climb poles of at least 10m TF310 Test Equipment 3 Electronic Test Equipment (Basic) • Analog multimeter (AMM).









• State the applications of logic probes in digital circuits.



Telecommunications Test Equipment (Basic) • Cable locators and pair tracers/identifiers.







TO310 Use of Tools 3 Basic Hand Tools • Identify a range of general hand tools, such as:







TO320 Anti-static Procedures 3 Generation of Static Electricity • Describe how static electricity is generated. • State how humidity affects the generation of static electricity. • Causes of static electricity in the electronic workplace. • List the causes of static electricity generation and typical voltages that can be generated, such as:

• walking across carpet 35,000 volts • walking over vinyl floor 12,000 volts • working at bench 6,000 volts • opening plastic envelopes7,000 volts • sitting at work chair 18,000 volts

• Susceptibility of common semiconductor devices to static electricity damage. • List the electronic devices which can be easily damaged by static electricity and their typical minimum

susceptibility voltage levels, such as: • VMOS 20 volts • GaAsFET20 volts • SOS20 volts • MOSFET 100 volts • EPROM 100 volts • JFET150 volts • OP-AMP200 volts • CMOS 200 volts

• State that the damage may be immediate or partial, so the device may pass manufacturer's tests but fail in the field later.

Specialised Tools and Handling Techniques for Static Sensitive Devices • List the tools developed for the electronics industry to minimise risk of static electricity damage to electronic

devices, such as, wrist straps, table and floor mats, heel grounders, anti-static garments, shielding bags, conductive foams and films, conductive containers, service kits, earthed soldering irons, anti-static sprays, air ionising devices, static safe chairs, conductive gloves and static testing devices.

• List the techniques used to minimise risk of damage to static sensitive electronic devices, other than using specialised tools listed, namely: • minimise handling. • do not overheat device when soldering. • connect all test instruments, earthing mats and equipment under test to a common earth. • do not insert devices or cards with power on. • use approved packaging labels which indicate correct handling required. • keep work stations free of plastic, styrofoam and cellophane. • follow an electrostatic control program.





• Discuss correct ladder selection. • Demonstrate correct ladder lifting and placement techniques.



Mechanical Fitting Skills in Telecommunications • Demonstrate the correct technique to install two lengths of unistrut across a room. • Demonstrate the correct technique to join lengths of cable trays. • Demonstrate the correct method to install a cable tray on the unistrut. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install and brace a 19 inch rack. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install a catenary wire across a room. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install optical fibre channelling.





FIELD Installation

UNIT ICTTC056B - Install telecommunications network equipment

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. The unit applies to installation of both new, additional and replacement equipment. Termination of cables are covered broadly in this standard and thus it should be read in conjunction with Telecommunications Cabling Competency Standards: Unit ICTTC008B -Terminate metallic conductor cable Unit ICTTC010B - Place, secure and terminate optical fibre cable Unit ICTTC011B - Place, secure and terminate coaxial cable Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Check design specifications 1 Equipment listings are checked against the design brief

2 Equipment locations are checked and confirmed

3 A detailed check of the infrastructure is made

4 All manufacturers and enterprise documents are obtained and checked for completeness

5 Installation briefs are studied in detail and problems or perceived problems are discussed with the designers and/or manufacturers

2 Obtain tools, test equipment and installation materials

1 All tools and equipment are checked to be in a safe working order and adjusted to manufacturers specification

2 Tools and materials are located to ensure ready access to the installation

3 Plan installation 1 Project management plans are studied for key events and dates

2 Planned resources are checked for appropriateness to the task and difficulties are discussed with project management

3 All affected customers are informed of the installation

4 A site survey is undertaken to assess barriers to installation and to ensure relevant regulations are complied with

5 A detailed installation strategy is developed

6 Hazards and barriers to installation are identified and appropriate enterprise hazard processes are followed

7 All occupational, health and safety implications are identified and action taken where safety of workers and plant is at risk



4 Unpack and check equipment 1 Packing list is checked against work order

2 Equipment is unloaded, unpacked and located in a location that is secure, accessible to work site and safe to staff working in that environment

3 Material and equipment is checked for damage

4 Appropriate reports are provided relative to damaged material and replacement material is ordered

5 Damaged material is returned to source of provision

6 Material is checked against packing list

7 Packaging is disposed of in accordance with accepted environmental conditions

8 Variations to material/equipment order are noted and negotiations are conducted with supplier for variations to be rectified within an agreed timeframe

9 Anti-static precautions are observed

5 Mount equipment 1 Work specifications are verified against work orders and design drawings

2 Equipment is pre wired prior to mounting if necessary

3 Equipment is positioned and installed in accordance with manufacturers specifications and design detail

4 Modifications to specifications are discussed with designers prior to implementation

5 Equipment is appropriately labelled in accordance with enterprise policy


6 Cable equipment 1 Cable is provided in accordance with manufacturers specifications and enterprise requirements

2 Minimum bending radii, appropriate cable separation and other enterprise requirements are observed to ensure the integrity of cable is observed at all times


4 Cables are secured with appropriate cable ties

5 Cables are audited and labelled in accordance with enterprise requirements

7 Terminate cables 1 Cables are stripped using appropriate tools and in accordance with manufacturers specifications

2 Conductors are identified

3 Distribution frames and blocks are labelled as per enterprise requirements

4 Conductors are fanned in accordance with work instructions



5 Spare length is provided where appropriate to enable retermination if necessary

6 Conductors are terminated in accordance with manufacturers specifications

7 Optical fibre connectors are cleaned using appropriate cleaning techniques

8 Test cables 1 Required tests are identified

2 Test equipment appropriate to the tests to be undertaken is selected

3 Test equipment is assessed for effectiveness and to ensure that it meets calibration specifications

4 Terminations are visually inspected to ensure completeness

5 Cabling is tested to ensure that it meets both manufacturers and enterprise specifications

6 Continuity tests are conducted to ensure cable integrity

7 Test failures are analysed for cause and appropriate action is taken to correct deficiency

8 Cables are plugged into equipment if necessary

9 Power up equipment 1 Power is connected following power supplier's and equipment vendor's defined procedures

2 Voltages are checked at user points to identify power faults

3 Power faults are brought to attention and rectification organised within specified time frame

10 Insert equipment cards and modules 1 Anti static precautions are observed

2 Equipment card details are recorded on appropriate data base

3 Cards are strapped, switch settings selected and then plugged into equipment as per equipment specification

4 Cards are checked against documentation to ensure that they are correct

5 Software programmes are installed as per specification

11 Install equipment accessories 1 Alarms are installed in accordance with instruction manuals and to specification

2 Operations administration and maintenance system is installed in accordance with specification

3 Communication facilities for operational staff are installed in accordance with specification, taking into account any special needs of the site and the operational staff

4 Man/machine communication facilities are installed in accordance with needs and to specification



12 Test equipment 1 Configuration of both soft and hardware is undertaken in accordance with installation documentation

2 Project documentation is checked to identify the tests to be undertaken

3 Appropriate test equipment is obtained and checked to ensure accuracy and effectiveness

4 Specified equipment tests are undertaken in accordance with specified requirements

5 Performance is measured against criteria specified for the equipment being installed

6 Detected faults are identified, analysed and either rectified or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

7 Faulty circuit boards are replaced and either disposed of or returned to the manufacturer/appropriate repair facility in accordance with enterprise policy

8 Test/inspection sheets are completed and filed in accordance with enterprise policy

13 Clean up work site 1 All tools and equipment are cleaned, adjusted and stored in an accessible location

2 Installation waste and debris are removed from work site and disposed of in accordance with environmental requirements

3 Obsolete and excess equipment is recovered, packaged and receipted and returned to an area designated by enterprise policy

4 Work is completed in a safe manner


14 Complete administrative tasks 1 Test results are recorded, test sheets are completed and located in accordance with enterprise requirements


3 Material usage is recorded and advised to the appropriate enterprise area

4 Data bases are updated in accordance with prescribed procedures

5 A quality audit of the installation is undertaken and recommendations associated with process improvement made and submitted to appropriate area within the enterprise

6 Asset is declared ready for commissioning/integration



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Tools may include: screwdrivers, hammers, spanners, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, cable strippers, crimpers, termination tools, cable tie tensioners, tape measures, hacksaws, drills, cut off saws, power tools, angle grinders, jigsaws, tension wrenches, soldering irons, knives, insulation displacement tools, mechanical lifts/hoists, volt meters, cable testers, plumbob, level, trolleys, multi meters, humidity and temperature testers, anti-static testers, load testers Test Equipment may include: multi meters, digital analysers, test leads, adaptors, power meters, optical fibre power meters, microscopes, laser source, OTDR, optical attenuators, analogue transmission measuring sets, oscillator, level meter, spectrum analysers, oscilloscopes, pattern generators, frequency measurer, GSM spectrum frequency synthesizer, R/F band noise measurer, modulator tester,error meter, light meter, lap top computer, video tester, R/F sweep tester, FWR meters, R/F microwave test sets, communication system analyzers, sweep test co-axial and wave guide antenna systems, transmitter/receiver filter combiner equipment, microwave link analyser Tests check fuctionality and range fro testing a single element to a loop back situation Material damage may include: packing errors, breakage, misshapen equipment, water damage Anti static protection can include" wrist straps that are earthed, ant static mats, anti static flooring, anti static bags for equipment, anti static dust coats, heel straps Conductors could be either copper or optical Equipment cable can be for: signal, power, alarms, miscellaneous, earth Cable tensions and cable lengths (where critical) are determined as part of the manufacturers specifications Bending ratios on cables are determined by manufacturers specifications Spare length on cable is determined locally but should be sufficient to cater for errors Optical fibre connectors are cleaned using alcohol and cleaning swabs



Test failures could include: operator error, open circuits, faulty joints, dry joints,faulty circuit boards or modules, wires and/or cables wrongly terminated, faulty earthing, broken conductors, cross talk in cables, pairs untwisted, incorrect straps/switch settings on printed circuit boards Voltage and polarity levels are predetermined by the manufacturers specifications Straps are associated with equipment cards and set parameters for card operation Installation waste may include: excess equipment, off cuts, rubbish Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Australian Standards AS 3901, 3902 Occupational Health and Safety Heritage legislation Industrial awards and conditions Australian standards applying to radiation hazards State and Federal environment Acts National Parks Act ACA regulations relating to functional earthing


documentation • interpreting design specifications, including: circuit diagrams, plans and specifications • demonstrating installation of cables including: minimum bending radii appropriate cable separation, provision

of spare length. • demonstrating termination of cables including: stripping, conductor identification and fanning, cleaning of

optical fibres connectors, provision of spare length • verifying cable continuity • conducting and interpreting test results, completing relevant documentation, determining compliance from

manufactures' certification, warranty and other related documentation requirements Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor: • applying DC principles and associated measuring techniques • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs



Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor—demonstrating successful: • safe use of general hand and power tools related to these tasks • installation to plan/specification • installation of earthing and corrosion protection • compliance with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Candidate submits a set of hard copy test results and relevant documentation. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CA310 Cabling Techniques 3 CA320 Optical Techniques 3 CA370 Cable Installation Practices CI310 Communication 3 CO310 Computer Skills 3 CS310 Customer Relations 3 DI310 Digital 3 EL310 AC/DC Theory 3 EL320 Earthing 3 EL430 Power Theory 4 EN310 Enterprise Policy and Practice 3 EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 IN320 Teamwork 3 MA310 Basic Mathematics 3 NE310 Network Equipment 3 NE320 Network Architecture 3 OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 OH320 Safe Handling PE310 Personal Skills 3 PE320 Remote Work PS214 Plan Reading, Specifications and Records–Structured Cable PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 PS320 Basic Building Trades 3 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 SU310 Basic Planning 3 SU320 Leadership 3 SU330 Quality Procedures 3 SW310 Switching Products 3 TC310 Tower Climbing 3 TF310 Test Equipment 3 TF320 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 3 TF330 Fault Finding 3 TF340 Testing Principles 3 TO310 Use of Tools 3 TO320 Anti-static Procedures 3 TO330 Installation Practices 3 TO340 Basic Ironwork 3 TO340 Basic Ironwork 3 TO350 Cutting and Drilling 3 TR320 Modulation Theory 3 TR330 Time Division Multiplexing 3 TR340 Transmission Technologies and Products 3 TR350 Transmission Software



CA310 Cabling Techniques 3 Identify the specific cabling skills and knowledge required from the areas of: • Metallic • Optical • Structured • Coaxial • Underground • Aerial Details will include: • Tools • Cable types and cable codes • Termination • Jointing • Installation • Testing • Safe work practices • Hauling • Specifications, Standards and Regulations See the CA200 to CA296 series for specific details in the required area/s CA320 Optical Techniques 3 Light Wave Propagation in Optical Fibres • Velocity of propagation in a material • Refraction and refractive index • Angles of incidence and reflection, critical angle • Total internal reflection Snell's Law • Numerical aperture, cone of acceptance, coupling • Efficiency • Single mode and multimode propagation • Step index and graded index • Advantages and disadvantages of the common mode/index • Types • Common core cladding and buffer diameters • Optical fibre construction methods Major Characteristics of the Fibre Optic Media • Main characteristics of optical fibres • The types of losses in optical fibres • Light emitting diodes • Laser diodes • Photodiodes (PIN and APD) • Coupling efficiency of light source vs light detector • Coupling efficiency of LED vs LD • Modal equilibrium of multimode fibres Key Sub Units of a Digital Optical System • Transmitter and receiver subunits and functions • Operating wavelengths, losses and regeneration limits • Industrial visit of a commercial site which uses SMOF • In the transmission of digital data



Basic Fibre Optic System Measurements • Measurement of optical power level and power loss • Bit error rate tests of a fibre optic system • Measurements using an OTDR • Construction of an equilibrated reference cable CA370 Cable Installation Practices Covered in CA310 Cabling Techniques 3 CI310 Communication 3 Communicate • Identify how communication takes place • Select an appropriate communication channel • Recognise the barriers to communication • Interpret and comprehend information • Use non-discriminatory language Listen • Develop active listening skills • Eliminate bad listening habits Write • Draft clear, concise written communication with attention to use of words, sentences, grammar and expression • Correctly prepare different forms of short business communication including memos, letters, facsimiles and e-


needs Speak • Reflect before speaking • Develop a pleasant, effective speaking style • Adapt to audience needs • Make appropriate social and business introductions CO310 Computer Skills 3 • State the basic features, facilities, fundamental hardware and the basic operational procedures of a typical PC. • Operate a keyboard using typing techniques and practiced manual skills. • Recognise and use terminology associated with word processing and file management. • Access the Internet to retrieve information and use e-mail for communication. • Access an established database file, use appropriate software functions to search, sort and select data.







CS310 Customer Relations 3 Dealing with Customers and Clients • Identify the needs of the customer/client. • Adopt communication that is consistent with customer needs. • Provide information regarding facilities, services and products to customers and clients. • Service customers according to workplace standards and organisation policy. • Use a telephone effectively to interact with clients. • Deal appropriately with a difficult situation involving a dissatisfied customer. • Keep accurate customer records using the appropriate organisation documentation. DI310 Digital 3 Assumed - TO320 Antistatic Procedures 3 • Describe the main functional units which make up telecommunication equipment such as a modem, and how it

connects to a parent network. • Outline the need for interfacing, data transfer, control and timing circuits, and the role of handshaking

(protocols) procedures as applied to telecommunication equipment. • Apply international standards for interface and connection of communications equipment. • Describe the principles and methods of encoding data, and error detection. • Perform a range of measurements and tests to ensure the correct and efficient operation of telecommunication

equipment, customise as required. • Detect faults both software and hardware and suggest remedies for common malfunctions. • Apply safety principles when handling electronic equipment in relation to personal safety and ESD protection

for electronic devices and PC boards. EL310 AC/DC Theory 3 DC Theory • Describe the role of power supplies within a telecommunications installation. • Describe and draw the circuits of basic telecommunications power supplies. • Explain the terms regulation and filtering. • Calculate required components to effectively regulate and filter a rectified power supply, given necessary

parameters. • Describe the following power sources, stating their advantages and disadvantages, and common techniques

used to mitigate against the disadvantages when used: cells, batteries, solar panels, motor/generator or standby sets.

• Give the cathodic and anodic reactions for cells in common use within the telecommunications industry. • Discuss the purpose of protective electrodes, and describe the processes leading to the attrition of protective

electrodes. (E.g. sacrificial anodes, galvanising of steel, methods used to protect aluminum) AC Theory • Explain the operation of transformers, rectifiers and the purpose of rectification within telecommunications

power supplies. • Give an elementary explanation of the principle of operation of switched mode power supplies. • Describe various types of uninterruptable power supplies used within the telecommunications industry, giving

advantages and disadvantages of each, together with the likely location or usage of each type.



EL320 Earthing 3 • Discuss the principles of earthing and earthing systems within telecommunications systems and installations. • State the reasons for earthing within telecommunications systems and installations. • Describe, recognise and where appropriate, install the various types of earths: protection, signal, power. • Recognise, by indication, earth cabling, and state relevant standards applicable to earthing within



facility. • Describe the processes which, after time, can compromise an earthing system. Note: All practical work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant legislation, where applicable. EL430 Power Theory 4 Assumed EL310 AC/DC Theory and 3EL330 Power Installation • Define and explain power distribution principles as applicable to telecommunications installations of small,





for this type of service. • Explain the operation of, and make calculations about rectifier power supplies providing heavy currents. • Detail the operation of various uninterruptable power supplies types. • Detail the theory of Switched Mode Power Supply operation. EN310 Enterprise Policy and Practice 3 Policy and practice implications for competency related outcomes. EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 Information systems related directly to recording competency unit outcomes. IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 Create a Positive Communication Climate • Interact in a supportive way • Use assertive communication • Construct "I" statements • Use different types of feedback appropriately • Give accurate, clear and comprehensive instructions • Prepare different types of questions • Follow a set of instructions.



Develop Non-verbal Skills • Analyse non-verbal communication • Use body language to communicate • Promote a prompt, positive, professional image • Send corporate messages • Recognise cultural differences and avoid gender bias. IN320 Teamwork 3 Work-team Communication • Participate in a small group discussion to reach agreement on a workplace related issue. • Cooperate with team members to plan and prepare a simple job related presentation. • Make the presentations. MA310 Basic Mathematics 3 Minimum: • Four arithematic functions - with and without a calculator • Fraction arithematic • Metric units • Scientific and Engineering notation • Estimates - length, volume, area • Indices • Geometry - sketches , plans • Solve equations with a single variable Additional - Select from: • Perform with and without a calculator decimal and fraction arithmetic involving addition, subtraction,


Scientific or Engineering notation. • Estimate length, area and volume of everyday objects. • Apply reasonable rules for rounding off numbers and determining accuracy of measurements • Define and use units of angular measure: Degrees and radians • Trigonometry:- Pythagoras' Theorem, Sine rule, Cosine rule










network. • State that there are two categories of networks, public and private. Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a hierarchical PSTN. Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a PABX network . Television Distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a TV distribution network • Via terrestrial and satellite. Pay TV distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Pay TV distribution hybrid • Fibre-cable (HFC) network. Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a GSM network. Packet Switched Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Packet Switched Public • Data Network (PSPDN).



Shared Access Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form shared access data networks in LANs using the


Dedicated Data Network Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Digital Data Network (DDN). OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 • Select the appropriate tools for the task. • Demonstrate the correct use of hand tools and operation of power tools in order to reduce the risk of injury. • Describe the causes of injuries due to incorrect work practices–ranging from personal behaviour to site










PE310 Personal Skills 3 Self Discipline Learn

• Outline training pathway and career opportunities in telecommunications industry • Understand the principles and philosophy of adult learning • Describe the learning contract and its' applications

Read • Identify main components of the reading process • Apply the 4S reading technique • Improve reading speed and efficiency • Improve comprehension and recall • Extend vocabulary

Study • Set and achieve study goals • Organise study program • Recognise the need for a good study environment • Prepare for exams

PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PS214 Plan Reading, Specifications and Records–Structured Cable • Related installation plans, cable layouts, outlet / frame locations, coding systems • Cabling Specifications • Test documentation • Compliance records



PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 Types of plans:






PS320 Basic Building Trades 3 Covered in PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 Assumed RA210 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards and Safe Working Practices at Radio Sites • Describe the electromagnetic wave. • Differentiate between and state the health risks of ionising and non-ionising radiation. • State safe levels of exposure to electromagnetic radiation. • State safe working practices when working with or near radio transmitting equipment. • Recognise hazard signs and need for barriers where safe levels may be exceeded. Applications of Radio Communication in Systems Telecommunications Networks • Draw the model diagram of a basic radio communication system. • Define the terms 'terrestrial', 'simplex', 'half-duplex' and 'full-duplex'. • List the types of radio systems found in telecommunications networks. Requirements for Modulation • Define the term baseband. • Sketch typical baseband signals in both time and frequency domains. • List the frequency bands found in the radio frequency spectrum. • State the bands used for telecommunications and commercial radio systems. • Describe the relationship between baseband signal and bandwidth. • List the needs for modulation in radio transmission systems. Effects of Noise on a Radio Transmission System • Describe the term 'signal-to-noise' ratio. • List the noise types found in radio systems. • Describe the effects of noise on a radio transmission system. • Describe the methods of overcoming the effects of noise in a radio system.



Microwave Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define the meaning of the terms 'drop and insert', 'unprotected', 'cold standby','hot stand by', 'twin-path' and

'N+1'. • Draw block diagrams of microwave radio relay systems incorporating the above terms. • Briefly describe the antenna requirements for a microwave radio system. Satellite Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define a communications satellite and a satellite communication system. • Explain the terms 'uplink', 'downlink', 'transponders', 'footprint' and 'earth station'. Cellular phone Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • State the benefits of cellular radio. • Define the terms 'cell', 'cell splitting' and 'frequency re-use'. • Draw the basic block diagram of a cellular phone interconnection with the PSTN. SU310 Basic Planning 3 • Organise resources and time • Set objectives • Safe work practices SU320 Leadership 3 • Role of the Supervisor • Situational leadership • Communication Skills • Motivation • Power and influence • Delegation • Enterprise specific Organisational Chart SU330 Quality Procedures 3 • Quality concepts • Quality Management Systems – Australian standards and International standards • Reading quality system documentation • Preparation for quality auditing SW310 Switching Products 3 Switching Function in Telecommunications Networks • Define analogue and digital communication. • Describe Switching and Transmission. • Describe the Functional blocks of a switching system. • Define private and public networks. Categories of Switching Systems • Define voice and data switching. • Describe analogue and digital switching. • Compare circuit switching and packet switching. Switching Elements of P.S.T.N. • Describe functions of local exchange, transient exchange and international gateway. • Describe functions of remote subscriber units and remote integrated multiplexers.



Architecture of P.S.T.N. Switching Elements • Describe differences in architecture of local and transit exchanges. • Describe main sub units of PSTN switching systems. • Compare architecture of analogue and digital PSTN exchanges. Features offered by PSTN • List and describe common subscriber features offered by the PSTN. Private Voice Switching Systems • Define role of PABX in a telecommunications network. • Describe functions of PABX's and PABX networks. • Compare PABX with Centrex and VPN. • Describe architecture of PABX's. • List common user features of PABX. • Describe data switching via a PABX. • Describe digital voice interface on a PABX. • Describe ISDN PRA interface from PABX to PSTN. • Explain functions of operator in PABX. Characteristics of Packet Switches • Describe operation of a virtual circuit packet switch. • Describe operation of a datagram service packet switch. • Define common user features offered by packet switches. • Describe functions of PAD concentrators and modems. Band Width Switching • Describe functions of a digital cross connect switch. • Explain basic SDH principles. Switching System Administration Describe input / output facility on switching systems , including interface for PC's, printers, disc and tape drives, remote operations access. TC310 Tower Climbing 3 Fixed Gantries and Ladders • Climb fixed ladders and gantry using appropriate safety equipment • Ensure safety of site against falling objects • Ensure appropriate notifications are made to site supervisor before gaining permission to tower climb • Establish appropriate emergency procedures for communication of problem before attempting climb • Perform maintenance and safety check on all equipment before climb including hard hats, safety boots, safety


climbing in a danger area • Fix portable ladders to ground and pole at safe angles according to Australian Standards • Ensure extension ladders and "cherry pickers" are not used beyond extension limits. • Demonstrate use of mobile "cherry picker" and extension ladders to climb poles of at least 10m



















TF320 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 3 Test Analysis Basics • Discuss the goal of test analysis as being rapid equipment/system restoration. • Explain that knowledge alone is not enough but also a logical systematic approach to test analysis is required. Three Phases of Fault Diagnosis • Explain that the three phases required to diagnose any electronic equipment fault, no matter how complex, are

as follows: • Performance evaluation. • Repairing the device. • Performance re-evaluation.



Performance Evaluation • Determine if there is a fault. • Recognise any symptoms. • Use theory knowledge to isolate fault to faulty section. • Use block diagrams and/or schematics to trace signal path. • Isolate the fault to a sub-unit by elimination of the sub-units which are functioning correctly. Repairing the Device • Replace the faulty card or component and realign if necessary. Performance Re-evaluation • Perform stringent testing of device to confirm that it is fully functional to original specifications. TF330 Fault Finding 3 Responsibility for Fault Repairs • Explain that if the organisation manages its own telecommunications system it has to fix the faults or contract

someone to do it. • Explain that if the carrier manages the network it is their problem when they know about it. • Discuss the demarcation problems at the user/carrier interface and at the interfaces between carriers. The Telecommunications Carrier Fault Finding Process • List the steps in the fault finding process, namely,





schematic and then testing the signal path. • Examine the usefulness of a manufactured supplied fault finding flow chart. • Examine the usefulness of a fault finding flow chart prepared by the technician. TF340 Testing Principles 3 Testing or Service Centre • Discuss the safety requirements of a typical service workshop. • Discuss the physical requirements of a typical service workshop. • Discuss the merits of trained technicians using appropriate test equipment. Functional Testing • Discuss the merit of the testing method of connecting up a variety of test equipment and turning on, and then

analysing performance. Use of Appropriate Test Equipment • List the test equipment used to measure DC voltages. • List the test equipment used to measure AC voltages from audio up to 20 MHz. • List the test equipment used to measure AC voltages greater than 20 MHz. • List the test equipment used to test simple digital circuits. • List the test equipment used to test complex digital circuits.



Limitations of Test Equipment • State the meter loading effects of AMMs and DMMs for DC voltage measurements, especially in high

resistance/impedance circuits. • State the loading effects of cathode ray oscilloscopes with and without 10:1 probes. • List the advantages of using of using a digital CRO when measuring a single event or non-repetitive wave. TO310 Use of Tools 3 Basic Hand Tools • Identify a range of general hand tools, such as:



















• Discuss correct ladder selection. • Demonstrate correct ladder lifting and placement techniques.



Mechanical Fitting Skills in Telecommunications • Demonstrate the correct technique to install two lengths of unistrut across a room. • Demonstrate the correct technique to join lengths of cable trays. • Demonstrate the correct method to install a cable tray on the unistrut. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install and brace a 19 inch rack. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install a catenary wire across a room. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install optical fibre channelling. TO340 Basic Ironwork 3 Sheet Metal Types • List the types of sheet metals used in the telecommunications industry, such as:











TO340 Basic Ironwork 3 Sheet Metal Types • List the types of sheet metals used in the telecommunications industry, such as:









TO350 Cutting and Drilling 3 Power Tools Used for Cutting and Drilling • Identify a range of power tools used for cutting and drilling, such as:

• drills (cordless, mains/portable, pedestal/variable speed, hammer, reversing) • drill bits (twist, deburring, spade, masonry, holesaw) • jigsaws • nibblers • grinders (angle/pedestal) • circular saw (various cutting blades) • guillotine (floorstanding)



Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment • List personal protective clothing and equipment requirements when cutting or drilling, such as:

• wear close fitting clothing which is buttoned. • don't wear torn clothes, ties or loose belts • wear suitable footwear which covers the toes (safety shoes/boots preferred) • keep long hair under caps or nets • wear safety glasses, goggles or face shields as required • wear stout gloves when hot, sharp or corrosive materials are being handled • wear appropriate aprons in special circumstances.

Electrical Safety with Power Tools • List the electrical safety requirements when working with portable mains powered power tools, such as:

• ensure earth connection is intact if tool is meant to be earthed • use earth leakage circuit breaker (safety switch) for additional protection • do not earth double insulated tools • do not use power tools in wet environments.


• never use unfamiliar equipment unless you have been instructed in its correct use • keep fingers away from moving parts • always use guards supplied with machinery • concentrate on the job you are doing.

Applications of Power Cutting and Drilling Tools • State typical applications of cutting and drilling power tools listed. • Demonstrate the correct procedure for using cutting and drilling power tools listed. TR320 Modulation Theory 3 Analog Modulation • Explain the term space division multiplexing (SDM). • Explain the need for modulation, in terms of FDM, and conversion to a frequency suitable for the transmission

medium. • Describe the basic principles of AM and FM. • State the advantages of FM compared to AM. Pulse Modulation • Describe the basic principles of PAM, PWM and PPM. Digital Modulation • Describe pulse code modulation (PCM) as a true digital system, which converts analog signals to a digital

equivalent. • Describe the encoding process, in terms of,

• sampling. • quantising. • encoding • Explain the nyquist theorem. • State the sampling rate for voice telephony. • State the word size and data rate for digitised telephone voice channels. • Explain the terms, quantisation error and quantisation noise.

• Explain companding, in terms of, A Law and m Law. • Explain minimum bandwidth requirements for 64 kbit/second as half bit rate = 32 kHz. • Sketch the block diagram of a CODEC. • Test a PCM encoder/decoder at various audio levels and frequencies, and record results.



TR330 Time Division Multiplexing 3 Time Division Multiplexing Basics • Describe the basic principle of TDM as 'time sharing'. • Explain the need for synchronisation in TDM. • Sketch a 3 channel mux-demux TDM system. PCM 30 System • Describe the PCM 30 system. • Calculate the bit rate for the E1 channel. • Sketch the frame plan for PCM 30 showing synchronisation and signalling channels. • Describe the synchronisation requirements and the bit stuffing technique in PCM 30. Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) • Explain the term PDH. • State that all local clocks in PDH are free running. • List the hierarchy structure in PDH from E1-E5, including bit rate and equivalent number of voice channels. PCM 30 System Evaluation Test a PCM 30 system and compare audio distortion levels after mux-demux with input. TR340 Transmission Technologies and Products 3 Transmission Technologies • List the information sources to be sent over a transmission network, such as:

• voice (telephone/cellular phone to telephone/cellular phone) • image (studio to studio) • music (studio to transmitter) • data (computer to computer via LAN/MAN/WAN) • facsimile (fax to fax)

• List the transmission mediums which are commonly used to send information over a • network, namely, • twisted pair • coaxial cable • radio (terrestrial/satellite) • optical fibre

• List the typical information transfer rates for the common transmission mediums. • Define the terms bearer and channel. Repeaters In Transmission Networks • Define the term repeater or regenerator in a transmission network. • Discuss the need for repeaters in various transmission networks. • Describe the basic operation of a repeater. • Draw block diagrams depicting typical distances between repeaters in commonly used transmission networks. • Discuss the term drop/insert (add/drop) used in repeaters. • Discuss the amount of hardware required to access 1 x 64 k Bit/second channel from an E4 or E5 bearer. Multiplexer Test Connect a DSO to a monitor access point and capture a trace of a few pulses and compare to pulse mask.



TR350 Transmission Software Multiplexer Configurations • List the possible inputs for an E1 multiplexer, such as,

• analog voice 2 wire subscriber end (FXS) 2 wire exchange end (FXO) 4 wire E & M signalling • data 9,600 Bits/second 19,200 Bits/second 64 k Bits /second 128 k Bits/second 256 k Bits/second

• Discuss typical alarms provided on an E1 mux - demux, such as: • 2 Mbits/second input signal missing • frame alignment lost • received signal is AIS • above BER threshold • far-end alarm received • synchronisation loss Programming a Multiplexer • Discuss methods of programming an E1 mux - demux:

• service or control terminal • PC via a maintenance interface • from network management centre via a separate data channel (service channel).

• Discuss software settings on E1 mux–demux, such as: • clock sources • AIS enabled • BER alarm levels • service channel enable • line coding

Testing a Multiplexer • Discuss various software loops that can be programmed for testing purposes, such as:

• main • tributaries • loop to equipment • loop to facility • Test an E1 mux - demux system with a remote software loop-back and perform a BER • test on one data channel.






UNIT ICTTC057B - Test cable bearers

This unit applies to the testing of all cable types - metallic, optical fibre and coaxial. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Prepare for test 1 Cable route and specifications together with all associated documentation is obtained

2 Purpose of the test and the performance to be measured is identified

3 Need for outage, extent, location and timing is determined and negotiated with network management centre

2 Obtain and set up test equipment 1 Equipment selected is suitable for the tests to be performed to ensure relevance of test data

2 Test equipment is set up in accordance with manufacturers specifications

3 Test reading error is set against a known reference where appropriate

4 Equipment calibration certification is current to reduce possibility of unreliable test data and ensure traceability where appropriate

3 Perform tests 1 Optical fibre connectors are cleaned prior to testing

2 Tests are conducted as required by both equipment and enterprise specification

3 Cable length, splice location and irregularity details are determined and recorded

4 Measurements are undertaken to determine loss associated with links, insertions, returns and splicing

4 Interpret test results and determine action

1 Test results are read accurately and compared against manufacturers and site specifications for cable performance

2 All test requirements and parameters are considered when evaluating test results

3 Test results are assessed fairly and accurately and are based on verifiable data

4 Problems are identified, location determined and arrangements are instituted for repair or modification



5 Retest faulty fibre after the faults have been rectified

5 Document test results 1 Results of tests are documented accurately in accordance with enterprise guidelines and without delay to ensure test results remain current

2 Site and installation files are updated to ensure traceability of information on system performance is maintained

3 Test result details are recorded and archived for the life of the cable

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Tests are described in manufacturers documentation Cable performance is detailed in the manufacturers specifications Tests are conducted using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), light source and meter Link loss is loss of fibre without connectors Insertion loss measures fibre with connectors - total end to end Return loss measures signal reflected of an incident or point Problems identified during testing may include: loss, faulty splices, manufacturers defect, hum, cross talk Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA Technical Standards International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors, keeping customer focus and

consideration of customer needs • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • correctly recording and storing test results

Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor on: • cleaning of optical fibre, cable balancing, impedance matching • conducting tests and interpreting of results against expected outcomes • interpreting cable plans and calculating splice, cable length and location losses.

Candidate submits a set of satisfactory hard copy test results.


Code Title CA410 Optical Techniques 4 CI410 Communication 4 EL420 Impedance Matching 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 MA410 Basic Mathematics 4 OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 OH420 Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 4 PE320 Remote Work PS216 Plan Reading, Specifications and Records – Co-Axial Cable PS217 Plan Reading, Specifications and Records – Underground PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 RE221 ACA Standards and Regulations – Optical Fibre Cable RE222 ACA Standards and Regulations: Co-axial Cable TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TF410 Test Equipment 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4



CA410 Optical Techniques 4 Covered in CA310 Optical Techniques CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:


Communicate to Secure a Job • Investigate employment opportunities • Evaluate yourself • Prepare a professional resume • Write a letter of application • Make a telephone application • Perform effectively in a job interview EL420 Impedance Matching 4 • Explain the purpose of impedance matching circuits within telecommunications installations. • Describe impedance matching techniques at various frequencies: power, HF, VHF, microwave. • (Transformers, quarter-wave, stripline, microstrip, broadband, narrowband) • Calculate required parameters, lengths, component values, sizes, given an electrical situation requiring

impedance matching. • Select an appropriate impedance matching technique for a given situation EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace operations.



MA410 Basic Mathematics 4 Minimum: • Interpret tables for locating geostationary satellites • Plot data on ploar graph • Errors in measurement and estimations • Decibels - graphical plots: log, linear OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.

• These include structural deficiencies, electrical, chemicals and gases, physical, hygiene, lighting and lightning, heat and cold, heights, ladders and scaffolding, fire and fire control, and radiation hazards.

• Recommend preventative measures and take remedial action on-site. • Analyse work methods and conditions which could lead to occupational overuse, long term, and chronic

diseases. • Identify factors which affect work performance. • Report and recommend preventative measures.

• Analyse and evaluate specific worksite situations and take safety precautions. Such situations include: • Remote areas and environmental factors • Specialist safety gear for climbing antenna installations • Safe use of ladders when working aloft • Scaffolding and guard rails • Working safely in wet weather • Electrical hazards in ceiling spaces • Confined spaces, shafts, tunnels and trenches • Correct posture for lifting and keyboard operation.

Identify the sources of RF hazards, measure and assess the safety at both occupational and non-occupational distance.

• Compare measurements of RF levels against relevant standards considered to be safe as defined by legislation.

• Perform basic first-aid functions in an emergency including EAR and CPR. OH420 Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 4 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 • Describe the general aims and objectives of existing Commonwealth and State Occupational Health & Safety

legislation. • Identify policies and agreements which are relevant to the installation, repair and testing of telecommunication

equipment. • List employer and employee responsibilities, rights and obligations relating to OH & S. • State the major functions of safety committees and representatives. • Establish a Designated Work Group in the workplace. • Keep up-to-date with policies, agreements and safety issues published by relevant Workcover Authority.



PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PS216 Plan Reading, Specifications and Records – Co-Axial Cable • Related installation plans, cable layouts, outlet / frame locations, coding systems • Cabling Specifications • Test documentation • Compliance records PS217 Plan Reading, Specifications and Records – Underground • Site, construction and building plans • Pipe and conduit diagrams • Termination diagrams • Record documentation PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 • Manufacturers specifications

• calibration • configuration • test procedures • maintenance • action to rectify faults

• Enterprise documentation • directions & instructions • policy relating to outages • work order

• Diagrams • cable layout • schematic • block • flow charts • test sequence



RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 General Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the following filter types, low pass, high pass, band stop, notch, band pass. • Explain the terms, insertion loss, bandwidth, shape factor, phase response. Describe the Principles of Series Resonant Circuits as Band Pass Filters • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a series resonant band pass filter. • Describe the principles of parallel resonant circuits as band pass filters. • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a parallel resonant band pass filters. • Explain the operation of filters using more than one resonant circuit. Specialised Band Pass Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the basic operating principle and characteristics of, quartz crystals, crystal filters, mechanical filters,

comb filters, SAW filters and cavity resonators. Oscillators Used in Radio Communication Systems • Explain the basic requirements for oscillation. • Describe the operation of LC oscillator circuits–Hartley and Colpitts. • Describe the operation of crystal oscillators–Pierce and Miller types. • Explain the operation of Phase-Locked loop block diagrams. • Describe the use of a programmable frequency-divider to provide frequency synthesis. Amplitude and Frequency Modulation Techniques • List the frequency products at the output of an amplitude modulator. • Draw the time and frequency domain diagrams of an AM signal. • Calculate the AM modulation index. • List the frequency products at the output of a frequency modulator. • Determine the bandwidth of an FM signal. • Sketch the time and frequency domain diagrams for an FM signal. • State the carrier deviations for TV sound, FM broadcasting, two-way radio and analog mobile phones. AM Transmitters and Receivers • Draw the block diagram of an AM high level modulated transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an AM superheterodyne receiver (single conversion). • List the function of each block in the receiver and output frequencies. • Calculate the output power from an AM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. RE221 ACA Standards and Regulations – Optical Fibre Cable • ACA compliance • AS/NZS 3080, AS 3084 • Performance certification RE222 ACA Standards and Regulations: Co-axial Cable • ACA compliance • AS/NZS 3080, AS 3084 • Performance certification










List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone. Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set. TF410 Test Equipment 4 Electronic Test Equipment (Advanced) • Digital storage oscilloscope (DSO).

• Compare features of a DSO to an analog storage CRO. • Advanced CRO probes.

• State the applications of a 10:1 probe in electronics. • State the applications of a differential probe in electronics. • State the applications of active probes in electronics.

• Frequency counter. • State the applications of frequency counters in electronics. • List typical parameters, such as, frequency, resolution and sensitivity.

• Noise and distortion meters. • State the applications of noise and distortion meters in audio electronics. • Explain the principle of operation of noise and distortion meters.



Radio Test Equipment (Basic) • Power meter (RF).

• List typical applications for RF power meters in telecommunications. • List typical parameters, such as, frequency range, accuracy and power range. • List power head types and precautions to be observed.

• Field strength meter. • List applications of field strength meters in telecommunications.

• RF detector probe (DMM accessory). • Describe applications of RF probes in telecommunications radio equipment.

Telecommunications Test Equipment (Advanced) • Metal time domain reflectometer (MTDR).

• List applications of MTDRs in telecommunications cabling. • Explain the principle of operation of MTDRs. • List features found in typical MTDRs.

• Optical light sources, power meters and attenuators. • List applications of optical light sources, power meters and attenuators in telecommunications. • Describe typical features found in optical light sources, power meters and attenuators.

• Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). • Compare principle of operation to MTDR. • Examine the operation of an OTDR.

• Explain application of OTDR in fibre optic cabling commissioning and fault finding.

TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4

Digital Circuitry Testing And Diagnosis • Explain that digital system level test analysis involves isolating the fault to one part of the system and may

require the use of software. • Explain that panel level fault diagnosis involves circuit board swapping. • Explain that circuit board level troubleshooting involves isolating problem to a node.( a node being any signal

line linking one or more gates ) • Explain that gate level fault diagnosis involves identifying the faulty integrated circuit. (microprocessor, ROM,

gate, etc )

Complex Signal Flow Paths • List the six different types of signal flow paths found in electronics and telecommunications, namely,

• linear • divergent • convergent • convergent-divergent • feedback • switching

• Linear signal path. • Describe the linear signal path as being a straight path and therefore the simplest, consisting of one input

and one output with no branching or joining of signals. • Divergent signal path.

• Describe the divergent signal path as when there is more than one use for the signal involved, hence, a splitting of the signal into two paths.

• Convergent signal path. • Describe the convergent signal path as when a comparison or mixing of two signal is required and a single

signal path is output. • Convergent-divergent signal path.

• Describe the convergent-divergent signal path as being a hybrid of the convergent and divergent signal types consisting of two inputs into one and then splitting into two outputs.

• Feedback signal path. • Describe the feedback signal path as sending the output signal (or portion of ) back to the input.

• Switching signal path. • Describe the switching signal path as two input signals but only one being selected to be fed to the single

output.



Complex Signal Flow Path Test Analysis • List applications of each of the six signal flow paths in telecommunications. • Discuss test analysis methods of each of the six signal flow paths TO410 Use of Tools 4 Electronic Hand Tools • Identify a range of electronic hand tools, such as:

• combination pliers • long nose pliers • bent nose pliers • flat nose pliers • side cutters • oblique cutters • IC removers

• State typical applications of electronic hand tools listed. • Demonstrate the correct procedure for using electronic hand tools listed. Soldering Tools • List the various tools used for electronic soldering and desoldering, such as:

• continuous heat irons • temperature controlled irons • gas powered irons • soldering iron tips • bevel • conical • chisel • desoldering iron • desoldering block • solder sucker • solder wick • solder • IsoPropyl alcohol

Basic Soldering Techniques • List the safe working practices to be adopted when electronic soldering. • List the advantages of soft soldering compared to alternative termination techniques. • List the effects of poor soldering techniques. • Describe the basic soldering techniques. • Demonstrate basic soldering techniques. • Describe the inspection techniques of soldered joints. • Explain how to rectify common soldering defects. • Explain how to shape electronic component leads prior to soldering onto to PC board. • Explain techniques to remove soldered electronic components from PC boards without damage to component

or board. TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 Anti-static Protection in the Telecommunications Industry • State that anti-static protection in this topic is limited to non-radio applications. • List the phenomena that are a hazard to telecommunications equipment and personnel, namely:

• atmospheric discharges including lightning • electromagnetic influences • static discharges • contact with the mains.

• State that optical fibre is immune from static hazards as it made from dielectric material. (unless metal conductors and/or metal strength members fitted to cable)



Levels of Anti-static Protection • List the three levels of communications line protection, namely:

• first level • second level • third level

• Describe the first level of line protection as shunt devices, usually gas discharge tubes (GDT). • Describe the second level of line protection as a combination of a GDT and a transient voltage suppressor which

can be a varistor, bi-directional diode or PTC resistor. • Describe the third level of line protection as a complex combination of GDTs, transient suppressors and filters. Isolation of Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) • State that all CPE which attaches to the mains and has a line connection is required to have line isolation,

usually via an • opto-isolater of 4,000 volt rating. Protection of LANs • State that coaxial cable can be protected with coaxial line filters. • State that long RS232, RS422 cables can be protected with plug in surge protectors or opto-isolators. • Protection of incoming twisted pair cables. • State that hybrid arrestors (second level) can be installed in banks at the MDF, or at the IDF if the equipment is

outside the main building. Power Line Protection • List the devices used to protect the incoming mains from excessive transients, namely:

• surge reduction filters • shunt protection • line filters • line conditioners.

TR410 Transmission Theory 4 Differentiate Analog and Digital Signals • Analog

• Describe the principles and techniques of analog transmission systems • Describe the limitations of analog systems

• Digital • Describe the principles of PCM and its application • Describe multiplexing as used in E1 and T1 systems • Describe the functions and purposes of coding. • Illustrate typical codes such as HDB3 and AMI • Compare codes • Identify sources of degradation in digital systems • Indicate and describe digital measurements methods such as BER, eye pattern and loop back tests.

Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines



TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 • Describe the principle theories of light • Perform calculations on wavelength, velocity and refraction of light • Describe chromatic dispersion Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for safety when working with fibre optics and lasers. • Apply the theory to optical fibre propagation • Identify sources of loss in optical fibres • Identify the advantages of fibre optics compared to metallic and wireless techniques. • Describe degradation of signals in fibres • Describe fibre optic types Lasers/Leds • Describe the difference between a laser and a led. • Illustrate the spectrum, beamwidth and other characteristics of lasers and eds • Describe modulation types used with Lasers and leds. Fibre Optic Systems • Explain the main uses of lasers and leds with optical fibres • Identify the main optical components of modern optical transmission systems. Systems • Identify and explain the SDH system • Explain the advantages of SDH or SONET over PDH. Skill • Perform splicing • Perform Power measurements and loss measurements. TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 Transmission Hierarchy Overview • Briefly explain the principle of pulse code modulation. • State the Nyquist sampling theorem and the sampling rate for telephony. • State the number of quantising levels for an eight bit PCM system and the data rate for telephony. • Explain, using diagrams, how compounding improves quantising error at low signal levels. • Draw the basic block diagram of a codec (one-way) and indicate which block is the anti-aliasing filter. • State the reasons for using digital line transmission codes and explain RZ, NRZ, AMI, HD3B & CMI line

codes. • Draw and label a basic diagram of a three channel mux-demux (one way) to indicate the principle of TDM. PDH Hierarchy • State the actual number of time slots in a PLM 30 mux-demux. • State the line bit rate between a PCM 30 mux-demux system. • State the three main synchronisation requirements of any TDM system. • State the frame structure method used to multiplex the tributaries of a PCM 30 system. • State why PCM 30 systems are often used between adjacent telephone exchanges in metropolitan areas. • State the meaning of the term 'plesiochronous'. • Recognise the hierarchical structure of PDH. • Draw the PDH frame structure up to E3 and calculate the bits rates from first principles • Explain the need for justification bits in PDH frames at the E2 and E3 levels. • Draw a frame plan diagram for PCM30 (E1) systems indicating the frame time, pulse duration, signalling and

synchronising time slot allocation (FAS and NFAS) • Compare the E1 frame with the T1 frame



Overview of SDH • State the meaning of 'synchronous' network. • Recognise the hierarchical structure of SDH. • State the method of accessing 2M Bit/second tributaries in a SDM optical fibre trunk network. • Describe the concept of interworking PDH derived signals across the SDH. • State the advantages and disadvantages of SDH. TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 • Describe the phases of system lifetime • Describe the difference between the operation and support functions • Describe the difference between installation, commissioning and acceptance testing and maintenance • Describe system performance requirements • List test terminology and explain the terms • Describe the levels of maintenance • Explain the purpose of a Quality system • Explain the concepts of standards, calibration and regulation • Explain the purpose of test equipment • Use a test procedure to perform measurements • Produce a test report based on measurement • Perform error analysis computations • Utilise a number of transmission test instruments to perform measurements on BER, S/N, bandwidth, loss and

crosstalk. • Use a OTDR and an optical power meter • Describe conventional instrument and specific test equipment • Use automatic test equipment • Set up and program instrument control to perform a measurement




STREAM Technical – NET


UNIT ICTTC058B - Acceptance test new systems and equipment



1 Receive installation completion advice

1 Certificate relating to job completion is received and checked for completeness

2 Documentation is received and checked

2 Visually inspect new installation 1 Physical installation is checked to ensure that it is correctly located and labelled and meets specification and design principles

2 Cabling equipment and distribution frame is checked to ensure it complies with the approved standards and is correctly labelled

3 Power/electrical equipment is checked both for operation and safety

4 The total installation is assessed for both safety and environmental safeguards

5 Ensure the availability and suitability of spare parts for maintenance purposes

3 Undertake performance tests 1 Tests are undertaken to assess error performance levels

2 Protection mechanisms are tested to ensure performance criteria meets the specified standard

3 Performance measurements are undertaken to ensure measurements are in accordance with predetermined specifications and meet approved operating margins

4 Alarms are checked for satisfactory operation

5 Identified problems are brought to the attention of installation staff for repair

6 Records, data bases and labelling are checked where appropriate and errors/omissions brought to the attention of installation staff



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Documentation would include:equipment manuals, operating instructions, design specifications, installation details Faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage, incorrect or missing labelling, records and/or straps Tests may include; DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements Test Equipment may include: multi meters, digital analysers, test leads, adaptors, power meters, optical fibre power meters, microscopes, laser source, OTDR, optical attenuators, analogue transmission measuring sets, oscillator, level meter, spectrum analysers, oscilloscopes, pattern generators, frequency measurer, GSM spectrum frequency synthesizer, R/F band noise measurer, modulator tester,error meter, light meter, lap top computer, video tester, R/F sweep tester, FWR meters, R/F microwave test sets, communication system analyzers, sweep test co-axial and wave guide antenna systems, transmitter/receiver filter combiner equipment, microwave link analyser Test failures could include: operator error, open circuits, faulty joints, dry joints, faulty circuit boards or modules, wires and/or cables wrongly terminated, faulty earthing, broken conductors, cross talk in cables, pairs untwisted, voltage levels on power, software, incorrect straps or switch settings on circuit board, faulty cables Transmission equipment has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring, have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Transmission systems are governed by international standards set by the ITU Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU Standards G 703,704,707 -9, 821 Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law




documentation • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and

consideration of customer needs Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor—describing: • making a complete check of installation against installation plans • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • inspecting cabling, cable layout and power requirements as required by different installations Candidate submits at least two sets of hard copy test results for sign-off, and observation by mentor/assessor, of candidate's ability to: • undertake relevant acceptance tests and analysis against specified performance criteria • run a test of network security arrangements

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title AT310 Acceptance Testing CI510 Communication 5 CO510 Computer Skills 5 DI510 Digital Theory 5 DI530 Digital Radio 5 EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 IN520 Teamwork 5 MA510 Mathematics 5 NE510 Network Equipment 5 NE520 Network Architecture 5 OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 PE320 Remote Work PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 RA510 Antennas 5



RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 SC510 Science 5 SU520 Leadership 5 SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 SW530 Switch Networks 5 TE510 Telephony 5 TF510 Test Equipment 5 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TO510 Use of Tools 5 TR510 Transmission Theory 5 TR540 Narrow and Wideband Principles 5 TR560 Spectrum Management 5 TR580 Transmission Hierarchy 5 TR590 Transmission Test Instruments 5 VO510 Video Network Techniques 5 AT310 Acceptance Testing This area is covered at relevant points in the Skills and Knowledge details for Network, Switching and Transmission. CI510 Communication 5 Technical Documents Identify different types of technical documents: • Technical definition • Technical descriptions • Technical instruction • Technical proposal • Tender Write a technical document: • Follow an agreed formal structure • Meet a specific purpose • Incorporate graphics where appropriate • Cite sources formally • Edit to industry standards • Meet appropriate completion deadlines CO510 Computer Skills 5 Assumed–CO410 Computer Skills 4 Demonstrate broad knowledge of applications software, with substantial expertise in: • managing databases and spreadsheets for planning, charting, forecasting • collection of test data for analysis, fault detection, trending • programming telecommunications and test equipment, run test programs. • install and use application specific software in relation to telephony/route, billing/charging and management of

accounts • simulation of network operations • simulation of electronic circuits



DI510 Digital Theory 5 Assumed - DI401 Digital Theory 4 • Develop technical skills in digital design, logic simulators, and prototype construction in the application of

PLD's, ASIC's, and single chip microcontrollers. • Use software tools to simulate and test circuits prior to construction, and debug faults. Assemble test circuits to

verify practical operation according to specification. • Apply these skills to data transmission and storage networks which employ synchronous and asynchronous data

transfers, counters, and electronic switching. • Apply microprocessor technology to perform these functions within a Telecommunications, radio and satellite

network. Suggest modifications to improve existing systems by re-design of software/hardware to meet present needs and allow for future expansion or technical development.

Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology DI530 Digital Radio 5 Assumed DI430 Digital Radio Characteristics of Line Codes • Describe the characteristics of RZ, NRZ, AMI, HDB3 and CMI line codes. • State the advantages of the various line codes. • List the applications of the various line codes. Digital Modulation Techniques • Compare bandwidth requirements between the various digital modulation techniques, • ASK, FSK, PSK, QAM. • Explain advantages of baseband, IF or RF spectrum shaping filtering. Digital Processing Sections • Explain the need for code conversion. • Explain the need for framing. • Explain the need for scrambling with reference to clock recovery and spectra of • Baseband signal. • Explain the need for interleaving. • State the advantages of forward error correction. • Describe how data is added for digital order wire.

Multiple Access Techniques • Explain the concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and ALOHA. • Compare the spectral efficiencies of the various multiple access techniques. • List the applications of the various multiple access techniques.

Effects of Noise and Interference on Digital Radio Systems • Draw BER versus carrier to noise ratio curves for various modulation schemes. • Describe how interference degrades BER. • Apply typical values of receiver noise figure to relate the receive level to carrier • To noise ratio.

Digital Tests • Use a spectrum analyser to measure the transmitter output spectrum with digital • inputs of 'all ones', 'all zeros' and 'pseudo random pattern'on NRZ codes. • Use a computer simulation to plot the spectrum of at least three different line codes • with pseudo random bit patterns and compare. • Plot the variation of BER with received signal level and obtain the receiver • threshold. • Measure the received signal levels at which the various fault alarms are activated



EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 2 and 3. EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Recognition of the impact of new information on future events. EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 Interview Skill Assumed IN330 Interpersonal Relationships 3 • Be interviewed • Plan interview procedure as an interviewer • Establish a comfortable environment • Pose appropriate questions • Conduct workplace interviews:

• data collection interviews • persuasive interviews • performance appraisal interviews • recruitment interviews • discipline or reprimand interviews • counselling interviews • problem solving interviews

• Document an interview • Evaluate an interview • Propose appropriate followup activities • Recognise common mistakes made by interviewers. IN520 Teamwork 5 See IN420 Team Work 4 MA510 Mathematics 5 Minimum • Use graphical techniques to obtain solutions of: • Linear, quadratic, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric functions • Manipulate algebraic expressions

• Fractional , logarithmic, exponential • Simultaneous equations

• Boolean algebra • Rules, symbols, manipulation

• Vectors • Complex notation, polar/rectangular forms

• Statistics • Presentation of data in various forms • Statistical tools • Probability theories



Additional - Select from: • Use calculus for the transient analysis of simple electrical circuits. • Use calculus for the steady state analysis of simple electrical circuits. • Derive the response of an R-L-C circuit, using second order differential equations. • Use a computer numeric package to: perform scalar operations, create vectors, perform scalar operations on

vectors, graph vectors, creates matrices, filter vectors from matrices. • Uses series and difference expressions to represent real processes. • Formulate, manipulate and solve Linear Ordinary Differentials Equations. • Determine bandwidth and spectra: Fourier theory, discrete, continuous • Explain why telecommunications traffic data has to be analysed using statistical measures and identify the

traffic type. • Define the traffic flow and traffic intensity, define traffic units, busy hour traffic and calling rates. • Identify the probability distributions that are used in modelling the telephone calls arrival pattern and holding

time, and perform the calculations of probability of a number of arrivals and of holding time exceeding certain time.

• Explain the meaning of grade of service, GOS, as a probability of loss and demonstrate the understanding of Erlang B formula and traffic tables derived from this formula. Identify all system components in a single-server and multi-server queue and the relationship between queuing time, waiting time and service time.

• Demonstrate the use of traffic tables based on Erlang B formula by dimensioning the trunk groups and perform simple calculations of delays in queuing systems.

• Identify and explain the difference between various types of database management systems. • Undertake data analysis and apply normalisation techniques to design databases. • Selectively query the databases using the relational operators: union, intersection, Cartesian product selection,

projection, join, division. NE510 Network Equipment 5 Assumed NE310 Network Equipment 3 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) equipment • State the ISDN user/network interface functions at the R/S/T interfaces. • State the functions of NT1 and NT2. • State the role of the ISDN access devices,

• TE1 • TE2 • TA

Intelligent Network (IN) equipment • List and describe the two basic components required in an IN, namely:

• SPC switch. • Service Switching Point (SSP).

• List and describe the main physical entities of an IN, namely, • Service Switching Point (SSP) • Service Control Point (SCP) • Intelligent Peripheral (IP) • Service Management Point (SMP) • Signalling links.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Network Equipment • Identify the ATM network equipment manufacturers and their products. • State the purpose of the 36170 ATM switch. • List and discuss the four line interface cards available for the 36170 switch. • List and discuss the two adaption interface cards available. • State the methods of controlling the 36170 node. • List the remote tasks which can be performed using the complementary 46020 Network • Management System (NMS) software.



NE520 Network Architecture 5 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Architecture • Explain the ISDN concept and its objectives. • Explain the transmission structure of the Basic Rate Access and the Primary Rate Access. • Explain the digital subscriber loop technology. • Describe the reference points of the user-network interfaces. • Explain the services provided by an ISDN. • Explain the functions of the D-channel protocols. • Explain the use of ISUP signalling protocol to carry ISDN services across the network. • Identify the implications to the network of the different bearer types that can be carried as part of ISDN Bearer

Services. • Describe the signalling procedure to set up a call. Intelligent Network (IN) Architecture • Explain the aims of the Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of the IN conceptual model. • Explain the historical evolution of the IN concept. • Explain the current international standardisation activities. • Describe the IN services provided by the PSTN. • Explain the implementation of a FreePhone service. • Explain the objectives of a Virtual Private Network. • Explain the signalling procedure to establish a 008 call. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Architecture • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaption layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options. OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health & Safety 5 & OH420 Occupational Health & Safety Regulations 4 • Record and document all accidents in the workplace which cause serious injuries.

• Identify report procedures to the appropriate area/person/authority. • Liaise with OH & S representatives, describe their roles: e.g.

• Designated Work Groups, WorkCover Authority and Inspectors. • Follow up to ensure that corrective and preventative action has taken place. • Analyse the worksite, identify and list the first aid facilities that are necessary. • Explain the purpose of workers' compensation and describe the procedures for claiming workers' compensation.

• Perform tests/routine maintenance, maintain records, on power/electrically operated tools and equipment for safety and environmental safeguards.

• Apply safe procedures in relation to isolation of electrical power: locking out of equipment, removing fuses and circuits, circuit breakers, RCD's and generally working safely with electricity.

• Transfer electrical awareness to fellow workers.



PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications RA510 Antennas 5 Electromagnetic Wave Propagation Principles • Explain the difference between reflection and refraction. • Explain the use of the radio spectrum from 10kHz to 100GHz. • Calculate the wavelength of a given frequency. • Describe the polarisation of an EM wave. • Describe the propagation of ground waves, sky waves and space waves. Antenna Radiation and Reception Characteristics • Explain the principle of operation of half wave dipole and quarter wave antennas. • Explain the characteristics of half wave dipole and quarter wave antennas. • Explain the characteristics of Yagi-Uda antennas. Directional Characteristics and Polarisation of Antennas • State the application of quarter wave, half wave dipole and Yagi-Uda antennas. • Compare the construction of various cellular antennas. • Define antenna gain, bandwidth, directivity and front-to-back ratio. Characteristics of Transmission Lines • State the function of a transmission line. • Describe the physical difference between coaxial cable and waveguide. • Explain the terms characteristic impedance, attenuation and velocity factor. • Compare the performance of coaxial cable and waveguide at microwave frequencies. • Compare the terms VSWR and return loss.



Principles of Parabolic Antennas • List the requirements for terrestrial point-to-point radio communications. • List the requirements for satellite communications. • Compare the construction of a horn antenna with a parabolic antenna. • Define the parabolic antenna terms gain, polarisation, beamwidth, bandwidth and • Front-to-back ratio. Antenna and Feeder Measurements • Measure the loss in deciBels of a 100 metre length of coaxial cable at various frequencies. • Plot the signal strength of a received signal while rotating a receiving Yagi-Uda antenna • through 360 degrees. • Measure the VSWR of a VHF antenna and feeder. • Measure the return loss of a SHF antenna and feeder. • Perform a sweep response test of a SHF antenna and feeder. RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 Assumed RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 Filter Design in Radio Networks • State the reasons for using filters in radio equipment. • Design Butterworth, Tchebychev and Bessel band pass filters using filter design tables. Signals, Spectra and Non-linearity • Use the principles of Fourier's Theorem to determine which harmonics will be present in a complex repetitive

waveform. • Determine the frequencies of harmonics which will result when a pure sinewave passes through a non-linear

network. • Determine the frequencies of the intermodulation products when two pure sine waves pass through a non-linear

network. RF Amplifiers in Radio Networks • Describe the terms 'noise figure' and 'noise factor'. • Describe characteristics of class A, B and C RF amplifiers. • List radio applications of each amplifier class type. • List impedance matching requirements for RF amplifiers. • Describe coupling methods for RF amplifiers. • Describe decoupling methods for RF amplifiers. Electronic Components Found in UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Describe the effects of stray inductance and capacitance on resistors, capacitors, inductors and filters. • Explain how inductors, capacitors, filters and RFCs can be printed onto PC boards. • Describe the principles of circuits using microstrip techniques. • List the applications of PIN diodes, Gunn diodes, GaAs transistors, TWTs and Klystrons. Passive Devices Found in UHF/SHF Radio Systems • List the applications of cavity resonators, filters, circulators, isolators and attenuators. • Sketch typical branching networks found in UHF/SHF radio systems. Commissioning Tests • Measure transmitter output spectrum. • Carry out link frequency change. • Perform IF Amplitude and Phase measurements. • Measure frequency response of transmitter and receiver filters in branching unit. • Determine the correct operation of all alarms.



SC510 Science 5 • Explain the theory and concepts of transferring energy through space. • Investigate the nature of waves and their behaviour by analysis of experimental results using sound and light.

Demonstrate the effects of environmental factors on waves, such as gases, temperature, pressure and humidity. • Identify applications of special characteristics of waves such as reflection, refraction, diffraction, interference,

Doppler Effect in technical, scientific, commercial and domestic scene. • Outline the nature and properties of electromagnetic radiation and its uses, through the whole range of the

electromagnetic spectrum. • Investigate the limitations of optical systems due to the wave properties of light. • Propose alternative means of transporting information, justify its viability in comparison to the existing

communication systems. SU520 Leadership 5 • Role of the Supervisor • Situational leadership • Communication skills • Motivation • Power and influence • Delegation • Enterprise specific Organisational Chart • Teamwork and the customer • Teamwork and problem solving • Negotiation skills • Team building skills Note: See also IN620 - Leadership In Teams SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 Packet Switching and Data Communication • Describe data communication principles via analogue and digital networks. • Explain need for communication protocols. • Describe the OSI layered protocol suite for open systems. Data Multiplexing • Explain the difference between synchronous time division multiplexing and statistical multiplexing. • List advantages and disadvantages of statistical multiplexing. Packet Switching Principles • Explain data segmentation and reassembley. • Compare packet switching with circuit switching and with message switching. • Perform calculations for optimum packet size, and message transmission time. • Define virtual circuit, logical channel, datagram, connectionless and connection oriented procedures.

Packet Switch Network Elements • Explain the function of NTU's, PAD's, PAD concentrators, packet switching nodes.

Packet Switch Networks • Explain routing and addressing and the differences for virtual circuits and datagrams. • Explain congestion, error recovery and queuing delays

SW530 Switch Networks 5

Functions of a Switching Network • Describe the switching function. • Describe the transmission function. • Describe the signalling function.



Architecture of Analogue and Digital Circuit Switched Networks • Explain structure and generalised operation of analogue telephone networks and their limitations. • Describe digital networks, including transmission and switching of signals. • State principles of TDM including synchronisation and alignment concepts. Main Sub Units in Telephone Switching Systems • Describe main functional blocks of a basic switching system. • State principles of step by step progressive control and common control as applied to switching systems, and

compare benefits. • Identify the service circuits used in a typical public Switching system - senders / receivers, echo cancellers,

tones and RVA's, conference circuits and explain their operation. Principles of System Control and Switch Modules. • State principles of SPC, and its advantage over wired logic. • Describe principles of Space Division Switching, using a cross point matrix. • Describe principles of time division switching using PAM and PCM techniques. • State principles of "concentration" as applied to customer stage of a switching system. • State principles of "distribution" in group stages of switching systems. Structure of a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Explain the analogue PSTN hierarchical structure, and the principle of hierarchical routing. • List the functions of each level of the hierarchy. • Describe the digital PSTN structure and its differences from the analogue hierarchy. • Explain the reasons for the difference between digital and analogue hierarchies. • Explain the need for network synchronisation of a digital network, and describe timing distribution technique. Network Signalling • Explain the difference between line signalling and interswitch signalling. • Explain differences between inband signalling and outband signalling, CAS and CCS signalling. • Describe basic principles of R2, CCS6 and CCS7 signalling systems. Billing Operations • Explain the process of call record generation and collection. • Describe the elements of a call record necessary for charging. • Describe the generation of charging rate via charging tables. • Define unit fee, charging rate, detailed observation, bulk billing, division of revenue, call event recording. TE510 Telephony 5 Digital and Analogue Systems • Define the terms 'analog' and 'digital' as applied to telecommunications system, and list the advantages and

disadvantages of analog and digital telecommunications system. • Draw the basic block diagram of a digital telephone, and describe the functions of the main elements. Digital and Analogue Technologies • Describe the general transmission principle and switching structure of an analog telephone network, and explain

its basic operation. • State the fundamental limitations of analog telecommunications networks. • Describe the general transmission principle and switching structure of a digital telephone network, and explain

its basic operation. • Define the following terms when applied to digital communications:- sampling, quantising, encoding,

quantisation error, PAM, PCM. • Draw a simplified diagram of a PCM based 4-wire digital switching system, and describe the function of each

section. CCSS • Draw and label a simplified diagram of a common control switching system. Briefly explain what happens

when a call is made in this system.



Signalling • List the customer 'telephone signalling' techniques. • List the 'network signalling' techniques. SPC • Describe the principle of stored program control(SPC), and state how it is achieved in switching systems. • Describe the key advantage of SPC over 'wired logic' systems. • List the features offered by SPC systems that are not available with electromechanical systems. TDM • Describe basic space division switching principles, and explain how it is achieved using a cross-point matrix. • Describe the principle of Time Division Multiplexing, and describe the need for synchronisation and alignment. TF510 Test Equipment 5 Electronic Test Equipment (Professional) • Digitising oscilloscope.

• Compare digitising oscilloscope features with digital storage oscilloscopes. • Discuss applications of digitising oscilloscopes in telecommunications.

• Logic analysers. • Compare logic analysers with oscilloscopes. • List applications of logic analysers in telecommunications.

• Chart recorders/ data loggers • List applications of chart recorders or data loggers in telecommunications.

Telecommunications Test Equipment (Professional) • RF signal generator (microwave).

• List features of microwave signal generators, such as, frequency range, stability, output range, modulation, sweep capability and input protection.

• List applications of RF signal generators in testing microwave radio equipment. • Spectrum analyser. • Explain the concept of spectrum analysis.

• Compare spectrum analyser to CRO. • Examine the operation of a spectrum analyser. • Explain the effect of decreasing sweep bandwidth on a spectrum analyser. • Explain applications of spectrum analyser in telecommunications, particularly, radio. • Explain differences between a swept spectrum analyser and an FFT spectrum analyser (or FFT optio in

digital CRO). • Eye diagram analyser.

• List applications of the use for eye diagrams and how they are generated. • List the telecommunications equipment that can be tested with an eye diagram.

• Protocol analyser. • List the data problem solving capabilities of a protocol analyser in various data networks. • Examine the operation of a protocol analyser in a data network.

• Radio communications test set. • List the test instruments found in a typical radio communications test set. • List the typical radio tests that can be performed using a radio test set. • Discuss the ability of radio test sets to simulate cellular base stations to evaluate the performance of mobile

phones. • Bit error rate testers.

• List the features of a typical BER tester, such as, bit, code, frame and CRC errors, errored seconds, error free seconds, AIS and alarm detection

• List the telecommunications equipment which can be tested with BER testers. • Constellation monitor.

• List applications of the use for constellation diagrams and how they are generated. • List the telecommunications equipment that can be tested with a constellation diagram.



TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 Anti-static Protection in the Telecommunications Industry • State that anti-static protection in this topic is limited to non-radio applications. • List the phenomena that are a hazard to telecommunications equipment and personnel, namely:










TO510 Use of Tools 5 Advanced Cleaning Techniques Prior to Hand Soldering • Explain the concept of high reliability soldering. • Identify the mechanical stresses on a PC board and its individual components. • Explain the effects of contaminants which cause long term corrosion on PC boards. • Describe the four main cleaning processes:

• solvent • aqueous • mechanical • thermal

Advanced Hand Soldering and Desoldering Techniques • Stress relief, mount and correctly solder electronic components on a double sided PC board. • Use a vacuum solder machine to desolder and remove an IC from a PC board. • Resolder a previously removed IC onto a PC board and submit for inspection.



Repair of PC Boards • Demonstrate crack, substrate and conductor repair on a single sided PC board. • Demonstrate hole and pad repair on a double sided PC board. Mass Soldering Techniques • Briefly describe the following mass soldering processes:

• wave • drag • dip

• Identify defects common to wave, drag and dip soldering. • Briefly describe the following reflow methods of mass soldering:

• vapor phase soldering (VPS) • infrared soldering (IR).

• Identify process defects of VPS and IR. Hand Soldering and Desoldering of Surface Mount Components • List types of surface mount devices. • Identify fillet characteristics of surface mount components. • Identify common reflow methods using hand soldering equipment. • Demonstrate the soldering and desoldering of surface mount components to and from a PC board. TR510 Transmission Theory 5 • Describe the principles, elements and techniques of analog and digital transmission systems. • Describe the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Calculate the requirements for digital transmission • Explain the need to code signals • Compare coding systems • Identify and explain the source of degradation of digital signals • Describe and compare higher level coding systems • Explain basic digital measurement methods • Perform and report results of basic digital measurements • Interpret digital test results using theory • Calculate spectrum of digital signals and determine spectral efficiency • Design filters for digital signals. Transmission Lines • Describe transmission lines and properties • Explain echoes, group delay, cornstalk and ISI. Measurement Skills • Perform basic digital tests • Relate test results to theoretical predictions • Perform basic interpretation of test results. TR540 Narrow and Wideband Principles 5 The Fundamental Limitations on Information Transmission Speed • State Hartley's law. and Shannon's law • Calculate maximum transmission speeds using Hartley's law and Shannon's law. • Explain inter symbol interference and its relationship to the Shannon limit on transmission speed. • Explain raised cosine/Gaussian pulse shaping, modulation and coding methods to increase transmission

speeds(e.g. T-QAM).



Signal Degradation Effects on Transmission Channels and Methods Used to Minimise these Effects • Sketch the frequency spectrum of a periodic pulse (Fourier Series) • Sketch the amplitude and phase response of an ideal transmission channel and a practical channel • Describe the effects of group delay and purpose of equalisation in practical channels. Basic Information Theory Concepts • Describe how information is measured and its relationship to the probability of an event occurring. • Define entropy of text and telemetry signals • Describe the signal redundancy inherent in human text language and that further caused by coding. • Calculate the information content of a simple text message and telemetry signal. • Describe redundancy reduction (data compression) techniques. Variable length codes, Huffman codes, adaptive

scanning, fax compression, V.42. Data Communications Basic Bandwidth Utilisation • State the Limits on RS-232 interface connection, voltage, speed, distance. • Describe interface standards that extend the serial interface capability (i.e. RS-422, RS-485, RS-449, current

loop, line drivers, opto-couplers). • State the limits on LAN standards AS4804.3, 4804.4. Error Correction and Detection • Explain the general principles and application of CRC's as FCS on data blocks. • Explain the application of FEC techniques. • Describe a 3 out of 7 Hamming code used for FEC and its error correction capabilities TR560 Spectrum Management 5 Radio Spectrum • Use a scanner to check and log "traffic" on a spot frequency. • Describe the principles of two way radio communications. • Describe the operation of a radio repeater • Describe the principles of trunked radio systems • Describe the principles of Selcal radio paging for dispatching messages and establishing a voice channel. • Use a spectrum analyser to check the performance of a two way radio. • Describe the steps to be used to find the source of a spurious radio emission. Filters–Classification • Specify the properties of band stop filters, low pass filters, high pass and band pass filters. • Define all the filter parameters of a low pass, high pass filter and band pass filter.. • Measure the frequency response of an electronic filter. • Describe the uses and characteristics of Butterworth, Tchebychev, Caur, and Bessel filters. • Sketch the circuit diagrams of low pass and high pass filters of orders up to 5 for Butterworth, Tchebychev and

Bessel. Filters–Design • Determine the required order number of a Butterworth low pass or high pass filter having been given the

required cut off frequency and the stop band attenuation performance. • Design Butterworth or Bessel low pass and high pass filters using filter design tables • Design a Butterworth, Tchebychev, or Bessel band pass filter using filter design tables • Construct a band pass filter and measure its frequency-gain response. • Verify the design of a high pass band pass and low pass filter or other linear circuits using a circuit simulation

computer program such as PSpice, Micro-Cap IV, or Electronic Workbench. • Explain the difficulties which arise from the use of practical components to construct a filter and explain the

measures which must be used to overcome these difficulties.



TR580 Transmission Hierarchy 5 Products and Services • Explain and differentiate between commonly used telecommunication products and services, including their

source characteristics. • Draw the time and frequency domain representations of audio, data and video electrical source types. • Describe the major telecommunications services or product families used in Australia to carry audio, data and

video information. • Explain and differentiate between the various transmission signal options used in networks and identify the

limits of commonly used customer premises equipment that generate these transmission signals. Transmission and Encoding Theory • Explain the factors determining the usable bandwidths of twisted pair, coaxial, satellite, microwave and fibre

optic channels. • Explain why it is necessary to accommodate source signals to channels. • Given time domain waveforms of source digital data, identify the modulation technique used as FSK, ASK,

PSK or QPSK. • Discuss why analog telephone line Modems are currently limited to data rates of less than 28kbits/sec. • Given time domain waveforms of source analog signals, identify the modulation techniques used as FSK or

ASK. • Discuss why AM radio broadcast transmission has a lesser sound quality than FM radio transmission. • Given time domain waveforms of source digital data, identify the encoding technique used as NRZ-L, NRZI,

Bipolar AMI or Manchester. Media Access Methods • Explain the role and function of transmission media access techniques. • Broadly describe the various media access methods used for telecommunications networks. Scheduling

(TDMA, polling, Token passing), Random Access (ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA/CD) • Describe the relative advantages of each media access method to justify it being chosen for a particular

application. • Provide a typical application example of each access method. • Explain why (in addition to the bandwidth of the transmission media) the chosen access method can affect the

information transfer rate. • Explain the role, function and implementation of circuit, packet and fast packet switching. • Explain why voice communications cannot use packet switching but can be accommodated on ATM.

Transmission Backbones • Explain the role and function of transmission backbones with respect to commonly used transmission mediums. • Analyse and compare the function of commonly used high speed transmission backbones. Transmission

backbones include, Digital TDM, PDH, SDH/SONET and FDDI • Describe the layout of the fixed copper and fibre optic cable infrastructure used by Australian

telecommunication carriers.

TR590 Transmission Test Instruments 5

• Outline the structure of a system • Outline Logistics support functions • Explain the role of quality systems • Describe maintenance philosophy • Describe test philosophy and the role of testing • List and explain testing terminology • List the essential elements of a quality system which relate to test equipment • Explain standards, calibration and methods to achieve these • Use a test procedure to perform measurements • Analyse measurement and produce a test report • Identify and compute errors in various transmission measuring equipment • Use various test instruments in automatic and manual modes to acquire measurements • Interpret instrument specifications for testing application • Produce a simple test procedure



VO510 Video Network Techniques 5 • Explain the differing requirements of broadcast video distribution and video telephony. • Describe the transport of digital video signals over various transmission systems and media:- SDH, ATM,

FDDI, ISDN, H channels, B-ISDN, HFC, optic fibre, copper/coax, satellite/wireless. • Investigate and write a small report on a video distribution system, e.g. Parliament House. • Investigate and write a report on the installation, commissioning and repair of any video distribution

equipment. Sources may include manufacturer's equipment manuals, work experience, attendance at training sessions or laboratory work.

• Investigate and write a report on video switching, multiplexing and transport equipment.






UNIT ICTTC059B - Commission telecommunications network equipment

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Commissioning and integration of telecommunications equipment can occur simultaneously. Integration is covered in Unit ICTTC036B. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Plan commissioning procedures 1 All parties associated with the commissioning are identified

2 Commissioning dates are established and confirmed with all parties

3 Commissioning parameters are established as per specification

4 Required resources are identified and organised

5 Test equipment is obtained and checked for suitability and accuracy

6 Customers affected by the work are informed of impending action and likely timing and impact

7 Frequency spectrum band is identified

8 Receipt of appropriate spectrum management agency licence is checked

2 Organise planned outages if necessary

1 Affected systems, traffic and customers are identified

2 Outage duration is determined

3 Outage times are negotiated with appropriate groups

4 Existence of contingency plans is checked

5 Contingency plans are developed in the event that such a plan does not already exist

6 Emergency communications are provided if appropriate

7 A detailed list is prepared of both the areas impacted and the likely effect of such impact

8 Alarm management centre is notified of action planned

9 Authority to proceed is obtained from the the relevant control centre

10 Customers affected by the outage are notified, both as to time and likely duration



3 Install software 1 Applications programmes are installed

2 Hardware data is loaded as per instructions

3 Telephony/route and network data is loaded in accordance with predetermined instructions

4 Management data is loaded in accordance with specification

5 Billing/charging data is loaded in accordance with specification

4 Connect transmission bearers 1 Distant end connection is verified with other parties

2 Intermediate connections are verified where required

3 Equipment parameters are set as per specification

4 Equipment is connected to the appropriate bearers

5 Alarms associated with the bearer and infrastructure are checked

6 Artificial links are installed where required and dismantled on completion of the commissioning process


5 Test hardware 1 Test equipment is obtained and checked for accuracy

2 Both end to end and section measurements are conducted in accordance with specification

3 Protection switching equipment is tested for operation

4 Order wires and auxiliary data channels are tested

5 Optical fibre cable connectors are cleaned as required

6 All specified performance tests are undertaken to ensure operation meets all prescribed parameters and specifications as detailed in the original design brief

7 Tests are undertaken to ensure that there is compatibility between the hardware and the software

8 Performance defects are corrected or brought to the attention of designers for corrective action

9 Test sheets are completed as per specification and test instrument usage logged as per enterprise requirements

6 Test equipment functionality 1 Alarms are tested in conjunction with network management and operational groups

2 Traffic tests are simulated through the new installation

3 Specific equipment features installed are tested

4 Billing/charging arrangements are tested

5 Operations administration maintenance system is tested

6 Faults detected are diagnosed, repaired or escalated to the appropriate area when fault cannot be clearly diagnosed or repaired

7 Vendor related tests are initiated where required



7 Complete administrative tasks 1 Test results are recorded as per enterprise instructions

2 Appropriate data bases are updated

3 Alarms triggered as a result of the commissioning process are rectified

4 Correct labelling of all equipment is checked and amendments made where required

5 Details of material usage is recorded and submitted to appropriate area in accordance with enterprise instructions

6 Job orders are completed fully and submitted to appropriate enterprise organisational unit

7 Design specifications are updated and returned to design area as required by enterprise requirements

8 Quality control procedures are followed as per enterprise policy

9 Installation briefs, documents and equipment manuals are handed over to operational staff in accordance with enterprise requirements

10 Operational staff training is undertaken where required



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Programme applications and data loading can be completed either on site or remotely. Loading can be completed by manual command or per medium of floppy disc,hard disc, magnetic tape, digital tape, optical disc, CD ROM Routing data relates to the dimensions of the route Network data relates to the routing of codes through the network



Data loaded is usually site specific Signalling (CCS 7) data loaded is undertaken in accordance with relevant ITU standard Tests are undertaken using man/machine interfaces such as P.C, Modem Distant ends may be in the same or completely different location Intermediate connections include repeaters and through frames Alarms are equipment specific and may include: power, signal, signal loss, error rate Disabling of alarms can be undertaken either manually or electronically Test Equipment may include: multi meters, digital analysers, test leads, adaptors, power meters, optical fibre power meters, microscopes, laser source, OTDR, optical attenuators, analogue transmission measuring sets, oscillator, level meter, spectrum analysers, oscilloscopes, pattern generators, frequency measurer, GSM spectrum frequency synthesizer, R/F band noise measurer, modulator tester,error meter, light meter, lap top computer, video tester, R/F sweep tester, FWR meters, R/F microwave test sets, communication system analyzers, sweep test co-axial and wave guide antenna systems, transmitter/receiver filter combiner equipment, microwave link analyser Tests check functionality and range for testing a single element to a loop back situation Optical fibre connectors are cleaned using alcohol and cleaning swabs depending on enterprise requirements Test failures could include: operator error, open circuits, faulty joints, dry joints, faulty circuit boards or modules, wires and/or cables wrongly terminated, faulty earthing, broken conductors, cross talk in cables, pairs untwisted, signal loss, power failures, incorrect harmonics, spurious signals Customers may be internal or external to the organisation Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Industrial awards and conditions Australian standards applying to radio frequency hazards State and Federal environment Acts





documentation • negotiating procedures/activity on the network/timing of commissioning • commissioning equipment to plan/specification • safely using general hand and power tools normally related to these tasks • implementing test plan, and interpreting and analysing results against expected outcomes by candidate. • testing alarms and alarm regime • analysing faults/problems/anomalies and providing solutions • maintaining accurate records and labelling of equipment • completing housekeeping including administrative effort, site cleaning, waste and debris removal, hazard

identification Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor: • applying enterprise escalation and outage procedures within service assurance guidelines • maintaining customer focus and consideration of customer needs • running an applications program. • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Candidate submits a test plan hard copy for sign-off by assessor/mentor. Candidate submits a set of hard copy test results complete with analysis of faults with solutions. Candidate submits a quality audit to mentor/assessor.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI510 Communication 5 CO510 Computer Skills 5 CS510 Customer Relations 5 CS520 Service Agreements 5 DI510 Digital Theory 5 DI530 Digital Radio 5 EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 EN540 Enterprise Operations Policy 5 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 IN520 Teamwork 5 IN530 Consulting Methods IN540 Workplace Networking 5 MA510 Mathematics 5 NE520 Network Architecture 5 OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 PE320 Remote Work PR510 Problem Solving 5 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 RA510 Antennas 5 RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 SC510 Science 5 SU520 Leadership 5 SW530 Switch Networks 5 TE510 Telephony 5 TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 TF540 Radio Tests 5 TO510 Use of Tools 5 TO620 Anti-static Procedures 6 TR510 Transmission Theory 5 TR520 Light/Laser Theory 5 TR530 Modulation Theory and Techniques 5 TR540 Narrow and Wideband Principles 5 TR560 Spectrum Management 5 TR580 Transmission Hierarchy 5 VO510 Video Network Techniques 5 VO520 Video and Sound Principles 5 CI510 Communication 5 Technical Documents Identify different types of technical documents: • Technical definition • Technical descriptions • Technical instruction • Technical proposal • Tender



Write a technical document: • Follow an agreed formal structure • Meet a specific purpose • Incorporate graphics where appropriate • Cite sources formally • Edit to industry standards • Meet appropriate completion deadlines CO510 Computer Skills 5 Assumed–CO410 Computer Skills 4 Demonstrate broad knowledge of applications software, with substantial expertise in: • managing databases and spreadsheets for planning, charting, forecasting • collection of test data for analysis, fault detection, trending • programming telecommunications and test equipment, run test programs. • install and use application specific software in relation to telephony/route, billing/charging and management of

accounts • simulation of network operations • simulation of electronic circuits CS510 Customer Relations 5 Building a Customer Focus Organisation Prepare a customer value package: • Determine what clients value • Set customer service goals • Devise strategies to achieve goals • Implement selected strategies • Inform customers of improved customer value • Seek continuous improvement through customer feedback. Create a service culture which focuses attention on the customer: • consider ways in which an organisation can make clients feel valued • develop a service strategy to deliver a quality product or service • support customer-oriented staff Develop custom-friendly systems. CS520 Service Agreements 5 • Service agreements need to be implemented according to enterprise standards. • This topic is best addressed within the workplace.

DI510 Digital Theory 5

Assumed - DI401 Digital Theory 4 • Develop technical skills in digital design, logic simulators, and prototype construction in the application of

PLD's, ASIC's, and single chip microcontrollers. • Use software tools to simulate and test circuits prior to construction, and debug faults. Assemble test circuits to

verify practical operation according to specification. • Apply these skills to data transmission and storage networks which employ synchronous and asynchronous data

transfers, counters, and electronic switching. • Apply microprocessor technology to perform these functions within a Telecommunications, radio and satellite

network. Suggest modifications to improve existing systems by re-design of software/hardware to meet present needs and allow for future expansion or technical development.

Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology



DI530 Digital Radio 5 Assumed DI430 Digital Radio Characteristics of Line Codes • Describe the characteristics of RZ, NRZ, AMI, HDB3 and CMI line codes. • State the advantages of the various line codes. • List the applications of the various line codes. Digital Modulation Techniques • Compare bandwidth requirements between the various digital modulation techniques, • ASK, FSK, PSK, QAM. • Explain advantages of baseband, IF or RF spectrum shaping filtering. Digital Processing Sections • Explain the need for code conversion. • Explain the need for framing. • Explain the need for scrambling with reference to clock recovery and spectra of • Baseband signal. • Explain the need for interleaving. • State the advantages of forward error correction. • Describe how data is added for digital order wire. Multiple Access Techniques • Explain the concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and ALOHA. • Compare the spectral efficiencies of the various multiple access techniques. • List the applications of the various multiple access techniques. Effects of Noise and Interference on Digital Radio Systems • Draw BER versus carrier to noise ratio curves for various modulation schemes. • Describe how interference degrades BER. • Apply typical values of receiver noise figure to relate the receive level to carrier • To noise ratio. Digital Tests • Use a spectrum analyser to measure the transmitter output spectrum with digital • inputs of 'all ones', 'all zeros' and 'pseudo random pattern'on NRZ codes. • Use a computer simulation to plot the spectrum of at least three different line codes • with pseudo random bit patterns and compare. • Plot the variation of BER with received signal level and obtain the receiver • threshold. • Measure the received signal levels at which the various fault alarms are activated EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 2 and 3. EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Recognition of the impact of new information on future events. EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel.



EN540 Enterprise Operations Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace operations. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as

the control signal, and the output signal as being derived from the power supply* as an amplified version of the input signal.

• Define the parameters used relating to amplifier specifications: input and output resistance, gain, bandwidth, noise, sensitivity, signal to noise ratio. • Identify the applications of various amplifier types including power, current, voltage amplifiers, pre-

amplifiers, AF and RF amplifiers, small signal and large signal amplifiers. • Draw circuits of various amplifiers using discrete components, assemble and test the circuit to verify that all

parameters are according to specifications. • Evaluate these results, perform calculations in order to improve performance by modifying circuit design,

changing components or repair. • Describe the specifications of operational amplifiers, with a view to design, analyse requirements and select

appropriate operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits for a range of applications. • Construct typical operational amplifier circuits on a breadboard with attention to selection of components,

layout, insertion and removal of components, wiring, earthing, supply decoupling and safe power-on sequence. • Devise tests and measurements in order to analyse and verify all the parameters specific to these devices. IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 Interview Skill Assumed IN330 Interpersonal Relationships 3 • Be interviewed • Plan interview procedure as an interviewer • Establish a comfortable environment • Pose appropriate questions • Conduct workplace interviews:


• Document an interview • Evaluate an interview • Propose appropriate followup activities • Recognise common mistakes made by interviewers.

IN520 Teamwork 5

See IN420 Team Work 4

IN530 Consulting Methods

• Personnel involved • Question techniques • Gather, convey and receive information/ideas • Develop trust and confidence • Build and maintain networks and relationships • Identify positive outcomes



IN540 Workplace Networking 5 Local Networking Assumed IN440 Workplace Networking 4 • Identify key personnel within and outside the organisation. • Create and maintain workplace network system to locate and access contacts. • Apply personal and corporate marketing strategies to maximise networking opportunities. • Establish links with professional associations and governing bodies affiliated with the enterprise or

organisation. • Coordinate, attend and participate in appropriate meetings and functions to facilitate workplace networking. • Use appropriate formal and informal correspondence to communicate within the workplace network. • Adopt time management techniques to network efficiently. • Document network liaisons. MA510 Mathematics 5 Minimum • Use graphical techniques to obtain solutions of: • Linear, quadratic, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric functions • Manipulate algebraic expressions












projection, join, division.




Services. • Describe the signalling procedure to set up a call. Intelligent Network (IN) Architecture • Explain the aims of the Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of the IN conceptual model. • Explain the historical evolution of the IN concept. • Explain the current international standardisation activities. • Describe the IN services provided by the PSTN. • Explain the implementation of a FreePhone service. • Explain the objectives of a Virtual Private Network. • Explain the signalling procedure to establish a 008 call. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Architecture • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaption layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options. OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health & Safety 5 & OH420 Occupational Health & Safety Regulations 4 • Record and document all accidents in the workplace which cause serious injuries.





• Transfer electrical awareness to fellow workers.



PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PR510 Problem Solving 5 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications RA510 Antennas 5 Electromagnetic Wave Propagation Principles • Explain the difference between reflection and refraction. • Explain the use of the radio spectrum from 10kHz to 100GHz. • Calculate the wavelength of a given frequency. • Describe the polarisation of an EM wave. • Describe the propagation of ground waves, sky waves and space waves. Antenna Radiation and Reception Characteristics • Explain the principle of operation of half wave dipole and quarter wave antennas. • Explain the characteristics of half wave dipole and quarter wave antennas. • Explain the characteristics of Yagi-Uda antennas. Directional Characteristics and Polarisation of Antennas • State the application of quarter wave, half wave dipole and Yagi-Uda antennas. • Compare the construction of various cellular antennas. • Define antenna gain, bandwidth, directivity and front-to-back ratio. Characteristics of Transmission Lines • State the function of a transmission line. • Describe the physical difference between coaxial cable and waveguide. • Explain the terms characteristic impedance, attenuation and velocity factor. • Compare the performance of coaxial cable and waveguide at microwave frequencies. • Compare the terms VSWR and return loss.







communication systems. SU520 Leadership 5 • Role of the Supervisor • Situational leadership • Communication skills • Motivation • Power and influence • Delegation • Enterprise specific Organisational Chart • Teamwork and the customer • Teamwork and problem solving • Negotiation skills • Team building skills Note: See also IN620 - Leadership In Teams SW530 Switch Networks 5 Functions of a Switching Network • Describe the switching function. • Describe the transmission function. • Describe the signalling function. Architecture of Analogue and Digital Circuit Switched Networks • Explain structure and generalised operation of analogue telephone networks and their limitations. • Describe digital networks, including transmission and switching of signals. • State principles of TDM including synchronisation and alignment concepts. Main Sub Units in Telephone Switching Systems • Describe main functional blocks of a basic switching system. • State principles of step by step progressive control and common control as applied to switching systems, and


tones and RVA's, conference circuits and explain their operation. Principles of System Control and Switch Modules. • State principles of SPC, and its advantage over wired logic. • Describe principles of Space Division Switching, using a cross point matrix. • Describe principles of time division switching using PAM and PCM techniques. • State principles of "concentration" as applied to customer stage of a switching system. • State principles of "distribution" in group stages of switching systems.



Structure of a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Explain the analogue PSTN hierarchical structure, and the principle of hierarchical routing. • List the functions of each level of the hierarchy. • Describe the digital PSTN structure and its differences from the analogue hierarchy. • Explain the reasons for the difference between digital and analogue hierarchies. • Explain the need for network synchronisation of a digital network, and describe timing distribution technique. Network Signalling • Explain the difference between line signalling and interswitch signalling. • Explain differences between inband signalling and outband signalling, CAS and CCS signalling. • Describe basic principles of R2, CCS6 and CCS7 signalling systems. Billing Operations • Explain the process of call record generation and collection. • Describe the elements of a call record necessary for charging. • Describe the generation of charging rate via charging tables. • Define unit fee, charging rate, detailed observation, bulk billing, division of revenue, call event recording. TE510 Telephony 5 Digital and Analogue Systems • Define the terms 'analog' and 'digital' as applied to telecommunications system, and list the advantages and






when a call is made in this system. Signalling • List the customer 'telephone signalling' techniques. • List the 'network signalling' techniques. SPC • Describe the principle of stored program control(SPC), and state how it is achieved in switching systems. • Describe the key advantage of SPC over 'wired logic' systems. • List the features offered by SPC systems that are not available with electromechanical systems. TDM • Describe basic space division switching principles, and explain how it is achieved using a cross-point matrix. • Describe the principle of Time Division Multiplexing, and describe the need for synchronisation and alignment.



TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 Cable Commissioning Tests • Copper cables.

• Keep data on MTDR printouts to provide exact locations of impedance changes and cable lengths in copper cables for acceptance/commissioning tests and for future diagnosis if problems arise.

• Optical fibre cables. • Keep data on OTDR printouts to provide exact locations of connectors and splices, losses and lengths of

optical fibre cables for acceptance/commissioning tests and for future diagnosis if problems arise. GSM Base Station Alarms • Comment on the merit of GSM base station alarms extended back to maintenance centres. • List typical GSM base station alarms, such as, VSWR out of range, TX failure, channel-blocking, power,

speech path conditions and entry alarms. GSM Loop Back Testing • Discuss the reasoning for using a GSM test mobile located at each base station, which has automatic answer and

ability to loop back the line to the switch. • Discuss the fact that after hours testing of each base station channel can be remotely carried out from the switch

using the GSM test mobile. Transmission Equipment Alarms • Comment on the merit of multiplexing, microwave radio and fibre optic alarms extended back to maintenance

centres. • List typical transmission equipment alarms, such as, BER, threshold alarms, RF signal level, waveguide

pressurisation, laser power, mains power and battery voltages. Transmission Equipment Loop Back Testing • Discuss the test analysis method of providing a software loop back at a remote transmission site for link testing. TF540 Radio Tests 5 Acceptance/ Commissioning Tests • Explain that acceptance testing is carried out by officer representing equipment operator. • Explain that commissioning is carried out by the installer (or sub-contractor). • State that commissioning tests should be comprehensive to provide records for future maintenance. • State that acceptance tests should go through a checklist which should include, power supplies, batteries,

external plant and internal plant. • State that acceptance tests should also include safety specifications (electrical, physical, personnel and public),

documentation, labeling, access requirements, inventory of installed equipment and critical spares, fault procedures, and fire and emergency shutdown information.

• Results of acceptance tests will either be nonacceptance, conditional (partial) acceptance or absolute acceptance. Microwave Link Commissioning Tests (Basic) • Bit Error Rate.

• Explain the procedure for measuring the BER of a radio link. • State the typical BERs for normal operation, and threshold.

• Received signal level. • Measure the received signal level in dBm and compare to expected level calculated from link budget

(including space diversity, if fitted). • Transmitter carrier frequency and power.

• Measure transmitter carrier frequency and check if within tolerance. • Measure unmodulated transmitter carrier power and check if within accepted range.

• Alarms. • Check all alarms are functional.

• Check all safety specifications, including signage, RF and lightning and earthing, are met and no physical hazards exist (loose bolts etc).



GSM Base Station Commissioning Tests (Basic) • Transmitter carrier powers and frequencies.

• Measure transmitter carrier power on all channels • Measure transmitter carrier frequencies on all channels

• VSWR. • Measure VSWR on all antennas (including receive antennas).

• Receiver power levels. • Measure all received power levels from a mobile station at a test distance.

• Bit Error Rate. • Measure BER at all receivers using a loop back mobile.

• Alarms. • Check all alarms are functional.

• Check all safety specifications, including signage, RF and lightning and earthing, are met and no physical hazards exist (loose bolts etc).

TO510 Use of Tools 5 Advanced Cleaning Techniques Prior to Hand Soldering • Explain the concept of high reliability soldering. • Identify the mechanical stresses on a PC board and its individual components. • Explain the effects of contaminants which cause long term corrosion on PC boards. • Describe the four main cleaning processes:


Advanced Hand Soldering and Desoldering Techniques • Stress relief, mount and correctly solder electronic components on a double sided PC board. • Use a vacuum solder machine to desolder and remove an IC from a PC board. • Resolder a previously removed IC onto a PC board and submit for inspection. Repair of PC Boards • Demonstrate crack, substrate and conductor repair on a single sided PC board. • Demonstrate hole and pad repair on a double sided PC board. Mass Soldering Techniques • Briefly describe the following mass soldering processes:




• Identify process defects of VPS and IR. Hand Soldering and Desoldering of Surface Mount Components • List types of surface mount devices. • Identify fillet characteristics of surface mount components. • Identify common reflow methods using hand soldering equipment. • Demonstrate the soldering and desoldering of surface mount components to and from a PC board.












TR510 Transmission Theory 5 • Describe the principles, elements and techniques of analog and digital transmission systems. • Describe the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Calculate the requirements for digital transmission • Explain the need to code signals • Compare coding systems • Identify and explain the source of degradation of digital signals • Describe and compare higher level coding systems • Explain basic digital measurement methods • Perform and report results of basic digital measurements • Interpret digital test results using theory • Calculate spectrum of digital signals and determine spectral efficiency • Design filters for digital signals. Transmission Lines • Describe transmission lines and properties • Explain echoes, group delay, cornstalk and ISI.



Measurement Skills • Perform basic digital tests • Relate test results to theoretical predictions • Perform basic interpretation of test results. TR520 Light/Laser Theory 5 • Describe analog and digital signals and the limitations on information transmission • Explain the main principles of light • Perform calculations on the propagation of light • Analyse optical devices such as lenses, diffraction gratings, and optical fibres. • Describe and analyse photonic devices such as Bragg cells, Etalons and filters. Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for Safety when working with optic fibres and Lasers. • Perform detailed calculations on optical fibre [propagation • Implement optical fibre system design and budgeting • Describe WDM and TDM optical systems • Indicate and ascertain optic fibre performance characteristics. Lasers/Leds • Describe performance characteristics of lasers and leds • Explain the main principle of operation of the laser • Explain the principle of operation of the Led • Relate characteristics and limitations in performance to principles of operation in the Laser and the led • List typical Laser/Led values Systems • Provide a detailed description of Networks • Describe FDDI and its operation • Explain in detail the elements of SDH, SONET and compare to PDH Skills • Characterise a Laser and a Led. • Use an OTDR • Perform loss measurements TR530 Modulation Theory and Techniques 5 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes. • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in

the presence of noise. • Calculate system requirements of modulation systems.



TDM • Describe multiplexing • Describe the different approaches to multiplexing indicating the methods of framing, signalling and error

correction. • Describe typical system applications. TR540 Narrow and Wideband Principles 5 The Fundamental Limitations on Information Transmission Speed • State Hartley's law. and Shannon's law • Calculate maximum transmission speeds using Hartley's law and Shannon's law. • Explain inter symbol interference and its relationship to the Shannon limit on transmission speed. • Explain raised cosine/Gaussian pulse shaping, modulation and coding methods to increase transmission

speeds(e.g. T-QAM). Signal Degradation Effects on Transmission Channels and Methods Used to Minimise these Effects • Sketch the frequency spectrum of a periodic pulse (Fourier Series) • Sketch the amplitude and phase response of an ideal transmission channel and a practical channel • Describe the effects of group delay and purpose of equalisation in practical channels. Basic Information Theory Concepts • Describe how information is measured and its relationship to the probability of an event occurring. • Define entropy of text and telemetry signals • Describe the signal redundancy inherent in human text language and that further caused by coding. • Calculate the information content of a simple text message and telemetry signal. • Describe redundancy reduction (data compression) techniques. Variable length codes, Huffman codes, adaptive


loop, line drivers, opto-couplers). • State the limits on LAN standards AS4804.3, 4804.4. Error Correction and Detection • Explain the general principles and application of CRC's as FCS on data blocks. • Explain the application of FEC techniques. • Describe a 3 out of 7 Hamming code used for FEC and its error correction capabilities TR560 Spectrum Management 5 Radio Spectrum • Use a scanner to check and log "traffic" on a spot frequency. • Describe the principles of two way radio communications. • Describe the operation of a radio repeater • Describe the principles of trunked radio systems • Describe the principles of Selcal radio paging for dispatching messages and establishing a voice channel. • Use a spectrum analyser to check the performance of a two way radio. • Describe the steps to be used to find the source of a spurious radio emission. Filters–Classification • Specify the properties of band stop filters, low pass filters, high pass and band pass filters. • Define all the filter parameters of a low pass, high pass filter and band pass filter.. • Measure the frequency response of an electronic filter. • Describe the uses and characteristics of Butterworth, Tchebychev, Caur, and Bessel filters. • Sketch the circuit diagrams of low pass and high pass filters of orders up to 5 for Butterworth, Tchebychev and

Bessel.



Filters–Design • Determine the required order number of a Butterworth low pass or high pass filter having been given the



measures which must be used to overcome these difficulties. TR580 Transmission Hierarchy 5 Products and Services • Explain and differentiate between commonly used telecommunication products and services, including their










information transfer rate. • Explain the role, function and implementation of circuit, packet and fast packet switching. • Explain why voice communications cannot use packet switching but can be accommodated on ATM. Transmission Backbones • Explain the role and function of transmission backbones with respect to commonly used transmission mediums. • Analyse and compare the function of commonly used high speed transmission backbones. Transmission





VO510 Video Network Techniques 5 • Explain the differing requirements of broadcast video distribution and video telephony. • Describe the transport of digital video signals over various transmission systems and media:- SDH, ATM,



• Investigate and write a report on video switching, multiplexing and transport equipment. VO520 Video and Sound Principles 5 The Perception of Light and Colour to the Eye • The Glass Prism and the Colour Spectrum

• Draw a diagram showing the splitting of white light into the colour spectrum • Explain the function of "Rods" and "Cones" in relation to Light entering the eye • Describe the following terms:

• Hue • Brightness • Saturation • Chromaticity

• Describe the eye's sensitivity to various colours using a general response curve The Electromagnetic Spectrum 1. List the groups of frequencies that make up the electromagnetic spectrum 2. State the frequencies / wavelengths of the Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue and Purple/Violet visible light The Colour Vidicon Tube • Describe the Light Characteristics of Colour Striped Filters

• Draw the four lines generated from the filters (N line, N+1line, N+2 line, line ) • Explain the development of the colour image by the vidicon tube The Charge-Coupled Device (CCD) Image Sensor • Explain the operation of the ccd sensor using a simplified diagram • "Charge Packet" transfer using digital transfer techniques • Briefly describe three (3) methods by which the image is transferred to the output terminals of the ccd camera.





FIELD Installation

UNIT ICTTC060B - Integrate new systems and equipment into the telecommunications network

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units Commissioning and integration of telecommunications equipment can occur simultaneously. Commissioning is covered in Unit ICTTC059B 'Commission telecommunications network equipment'


1 Organise planned outages if necessary

1 Integration plan is developed and documented

2 Affected systems, traffic and customers are identified

3 Outage duration is determined

4 Outage times are negotiated with appropriate groups

5 Existence of contingency plans is checked

6 Contingency plans are developed in the event that such a plan does not already exist

7 Emergency communications are provided if appropriate

8 A detailed list is prepared of all the areas impacted and the likely affect of such impact

9 Alarm management centre is notified of action planned

10 Authority to proceed is obtained from the the relevant control centre

11 Customers affected by the outage are notified, both as to time and likely duration

2 Provide alternate transmission path if possible

1 Alternative transmission paths available are examined

2 Alternative paths are discussed with appropriate control centre/design group

3 Time and duration of integration activity is planned

4 Approval to planned action is obtained from relevant authority

5 Alternative transmission paths are implemented

6 Relevant bearers are identified and tested



3 Implement integration 1 Near and distant ends and all intermediate points are jumpered as per specification

2 Operational software is loaded in accordance with specification

3 Network ports are connected in accordance with specification

4 Signalling/network synchronisation links are connected in accordance with instructions and standards

5 Data bases are updated in accordance with both manufacturers specification and enterprise policy

6 All trunks and lines/interfaces are enabled in accordance with specification

7 Success of the integration is assessed and contingency plans are implemented where appropriate


9 Alarms are analysed for fault conditions in conjunction with network management centre

10 Detected faults are located, rectified within capability or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

11 Recorded alarms are cleared and error counters built into the system are reset

12 System administration procedures are established

13 Operations administrative maintenance system and alarms are connected in accordance with the instruction manual

14 Integration is undertaken as an iterative process - point by point

4 Test integration 1 Tests are undertaken by simulating network traffic

2 Specific measurements are undertaken as described in the equipment manuals

3 Tests calls in and out of the new switch are organised with distant parties

4 All test results are analysed to ensure that the parameters established have all been met

5 Problems identified during testing phase are analysed and action taken to correct or escalation procedures activated



5 Complete administrative tasks 1 Project completion is notified to relevant authorities


3 Test results are recorded and stored in accordance with enterprise requirements

4 Work documentation is completed and returned to the appropriate area as dictated by enterprise policy


6 Equipment labelling is checked and amended as required

7 New alarms are activated and old alarms are deactivated

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Distant ends may be in the same or completely different location to the near end Distant ends may be jumpered by installation personnel or personnel allocated specifically to the task Test equipment is usually portable and have their own special carrying cases for transportation Test Equipment may include: multi meters, digital analysers, test leads, adaptors, power meters, optical fibre power meters, microscopes, laser source, OTDR, optical attenuators, analogue transmission measuring sets, oscillator, level meter, spectrum analysers, oscilloscopes, pattern generators, frequency measurer, GSM spectrum frequency synthesizer, R/F band noise measurer, modulator tester, error meter, light meter, lap top computer, video tester, PC, protocol analysers, CCS 7 signalling, switch management system, subscriber private meters, phones, load testers, line condition simulation Tests are undertaken at each point and usually involves simulated traffic conditions. Both the equipment and the specific features of the equipment is tested Tests are unique to the installation and are prescribed in the equipment installation and enterprise manuals Tests check functionality and range from testing a single element to a loop back situation



Tests can be undertaken either manually following defined procedures using a PC or automatically as part of the equipment programme Operational parameters may include: lost calls, billing, errors, alarms Network ports may include: voice, digitised, optical fibre, coaxial, radio, microwave links Measurements taken may include: signal loss, call completion, billing, performance, processor loading Alarms are equipment specific and may include: power, signal, signal loss, error rate Faults likely to occur during integration include: jumpering deficiencies, bad terminations, missing links Customers may be internal or external to the organisation Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Industrial awards and conditions Australian standards applying to radio frequency hazards State and Federal environment Acts Privacy Act


documentation • developing a contingency plan • negotiating procedures/activity on the network/timing of integration • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • keeping a customer focus and consideration of customer needs • applying and using tools and test equipment • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices



Candidate submits a written contingency plan to mentor/assessor for sign-off. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor: • running an applications program • effecting integration to plan/specification • testing network security arrangements • testing alarms and alarm regime • implementing a contingency plan • applying enterprise escalation and outage procedures Mentor/assessor observes candidate's competency in: • conducting a test plan and analysis of outcomes including interpretation of alarms, error reports and test results • testing systems/equipment and associated features being integrated, and likely impact on the rest of the network • analysing of faults/problems/anomalies and provision of solutions • accurate record keeping and labelling of equipment • completing of housekeeping including administrative effort, site cleaning, waste and debris removal, hazard

identification Candidate submits a set of hard copy test results complete with fault analysis and solutions. Candidate submits hard copy sets of records of at least two separate integrations of varying degrees of complexity, including a quality audit. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CA410 Optical Techniques 4 CI510 Communication 5 CO510 Computer Skills 5 EL510 AC/DC Theory 5 EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 EN540 Enterprise Operations Policy 5 IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 IN520 Teamwork 5 IN530 Consulting Methods IN540 Workplace Networking 5 MA510 Mathematics 5 NE520 Network Architecture 5 NE630 Network Signalling 5 OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 PE320 Remote Work PK510 Product Knowledge 5 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 RE520 Physical Interface Standards 5 SU510 Planning 5 SU520 Leadership 5 SW530 Switch Networks 5 TC510 Tower Climbing 5 TF510 Test Equipment 5 TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 TF530 Fault Finding 5 TR520 Light/Laser Theory 5 TR530 Modulation Theory and Techniques 5 TR550 Time Division Multiplexing 5



CA410 Optical Techniques 4 Covered in CA310 Optical Techniques CI510 Communication 5 Technical Documents Identify different types of technical documents: • Technical definition • Technical descriptions • Technical instruction • Technical proposal • Tender Write a technical document: • Follow an agreed formal structure • Meet a specific purpose • Incorporate graphics where appropriate • Cite sources formally • Edit to industry standards • Meet appropriate completion deadlines CO510 Computer Skills 5 Assumed–CO410 Computer Skills 4 Demonstrate broad knowledge of applications software, with substantial expertise in: • managing databases and spreadsheets for planning, charting, forecasting • collection of test data for analysis, fault detection, trending • programming telecommunications and test equipment, run test programs. • install and use application specific software in relation to telephony/route, billing/charging and management of

accounts • simulation of network operations • simulation of electronic circuits EL510 AC/DC Theory 5 • Use the principle of Norton and Thevenin equivalent circuits to solve both AC and DC circuit theory problems. • Use Kirchoff's current and voltage laws to solve both AC and DC circuit theory problems. • Give a descriptive explanation of Maxwell's equations. • Determine the transient response of LCR circuits. • Give examples of, and explain the application of this theory to practical situations, such as the behaviour of

power supply bus bars under switching transients, sudden changes in load, lightning surges, transmission lines. EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Recognition of the impact of new information on future events. EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. EN540 Enterprise Operations Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace operations.



IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 Interview Skill Assumed IN330 Interpersonal Relationships 3 • Be interviewed • Plan interview procedure as an interviewer • Establish a comfortable environment • Pose appropriate questions • Conduct workplace interviews:


• Document an interview • Evaluate an interview • Propose appropriate followup activities • Recognise common mistakes made by interviewers. IN520 Teamwork 5 See IN420 Team Work 4 IN530 Consulting Methods • Personnel involved • Question techniques • Gather, convey and receive information/ideas • Develop trust and confidence • Build and maintain networks and relationships • Identify positive outcomes IN540 Workplace Networking 5 Local Networking Assumed IN440 Workplace Networking 4 • Identify key personnel within and outside the organisation. • Create and maintain workplace network system to locate and access contacts. • Apply personal and corporate marketing strategies to maximise networking opportunities. • Establish links with professional associations and governing bodies affiliated with the enterprise or

organisation. • Coordinate, attend and participate in appropriate meetings and functions to facilitate workplace networking. • Use appropriate formal and informal correspondence to communicate within the workplace network. • Adopt time management techniques to network efficiently. • Document network liaisons.



MA510 Mathematics 5 Minimum • Use graphical techniques to obtain solutions of: • Linear, quadratic, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric functions • Manipulate algebraic expressions












projection, join, division. NE520 Network Architecture 5 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Architecture • Explain the ISDN concept and its objectives. • Explain the transmission structure of the Basic Rate Access and the Primary Rate Access. • Explain the digital subscriber loop technology. • Describe the reference points of the user-network interfaces. • Explain the services provided by an ISDN. • Explain the functions of the D-channel protocols. • Explain the use of ISUP signalling protocol to carry ISDN services across the network. • Identify the implications to the network of the different bearer types that can be carried as part of ISDN Bearer

Services. • Describe the signalling procedure to set up a call.



Intelligent Network (IN) Architecture • Explain the aims of the Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of the IN conceptual model. • Explain the historical evolution of the IN concept. • Explain the current international standardisation activities. • Describe the IN services provided by the PSTN. • Explain the implementation of a FreePhone service. • Explain the objectives of a Virtual Private Network. • Explain the signalling procedure to establish a 008 call. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Architecture • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaption layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options. NE630 Network Signalling 5 Common Channel Signalling Number 7 (CCS 7) • Using a diagram show the structure of CCS 7 protocol architecture and its relation to the 7 layers of OSI. • Define the following terms,













OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health & Safety 5 & OH420 Occupational Health & Safety Regulations 4 • Record and document all accidents in the workplace which cause serious injuries.





• Transfer electrical awareness to fellow workers. PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PK510 Product Knowledge 5 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Alternative products. PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications



RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 Assumed RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 Filter Design in Radio Networks • State the reasons for using filters in radio equipment. • Design Butterworth, Tchebychev and Bessel band pass filters using filter design tables. Signals, Spectra and Non-linearity • Use the principles of Fourier's Theorem to determine which harmonics will be present in a complex repetitive



network. RF Amplifiers in Radio Networks • Describe the terms 'noise figure' and 'noise factor'. • Describe characteristics of class A, B and C RF amplifiers. • List radio applications of each amplifier class type. • List impedance matching requirements for RF amplifiers. • Describe coupling methods for RF amplifiers. • Describe decoupling methods for RF amplifiers. Electronic Components Found in UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Describe the effects of stray inductance and capacitance on resistors, capacitors, inductors and filters. • Explain how inductors, capacitors, filters and RFCs can be printed onto PC boards. • Describe the principles of circuits using microstrip techniques. • List the applications of PIN diodes, Gunn diodes, GaAs transistors, TWTs and Klystrons. Passive Devices Found in UHF/SHF Radio Systems • List the applications of cavity resonators, filters, circulators, isolators and attenuators. • Sketch typical branching networks found in UHF/SHF radio systems. Commissioning Tests • Measure transmitter output spectrum. • Carry out link frequency change. • Perform IF Amplitude and Phase measurements. • Measure frequency response of transmitter and receiver filters in branching unit. • Determine the correct operation of all alarms. RE520 Physical Interface Standards 5 • Standards, regulations, recommendations • Major organisations and regulatory bodies • Levels of standardisation: government, telecommunication administrators, industry • Australian standards: CCITT, IEEE, 802.XX, ELA232D, RS232C, ISO • Equipment approval: role of Austel, responsibilities, licence • Technical Standard e.g. TS001: safety – user, network, equipment, protective devices • Terms used: abbreviations, definitions



SU510 Planning 5 • Time management principles • Organise resources and time • Identify objectives • Develop and document critical path • Develop work plans • Safe work practices • Employment conditions • Communicating plans to employees and customers • Delegate roles and responsibilities • Progress reporting • Planning review and evaluation SU520 Leadership 5 • Role of the Supervisor • Situational leadership • Communication skills • Motivation • Power and influence • Delegation • Enterprise specific Organisational Chart • Teamwork and the customer • Teamwork and problem solving • Negotiation skills • Team building skills Note: See also IN620 - Leadership In Teams SW530 Switch Networks 5 Functions of a Switching Network • Describe the switching function. • Describe the transmission function. • Describe the signalling function. Architecture of Analogue and Digital Circuit Switched Networks • Explain structure and generalised operation of analogue telephone networks and their limitations. • Describe digital networks, including transmission and switching of signals. • State principles of TDM including synchronisation and alignment concepts. Main Sub Units in Telephone Switching Systems • Describe main functional blocks of a basic switching system. • State principles of step by step progressive control and common control as applied to switching systems, and


tones and RVA's, conference circuits and explain their operation. Principles of System Control and Switch Modules. • State principles of SPC, and its advantage over wired logic. • Describe principles of Space Division Switching, using a cross point matrix. • Describe principles of time division switching using PAM and PCM techniques. • State principles of "concentration" as applied to customer stage of a switching system. • State principles of "distribution" in group stages of switching systems.



Structure of a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Explain the analogue PSTN hierarchical structure, and the principle of hierarchical routing. • List the functions of each level of the hierarchy. • Describe the digital PSTN structure and its differences from the analogue hierarchy. • Explain the reasons for the difference between digital and analogue hierarchies. • Explain the need for network synchronisation of a digital network, and describe timing distribution technique. Network Signalling • Explain the difference between line signalling and interswitch signalling. • Explain differences between inband signalling and outband signalling, CAS and CCS signalling. • Describe basic principles of R2, CCS6 and CCS7 signalling systems. Billing Operations • Explain the process of call record generation and collection. • Describe the elements of a call record necessary for charging. • Describe the generation of charging rate via charging tables. • Define unit fee, charging rate, detailed observation, bulk billing, division of revenue, call event recording. TC510 Tower Climbing 5 Prior Knowledge • Demonstrate all skills acquired in module TC310 as these are essential safety skills required as a pre-requisite

for this module. Ropes and Knots • Describe types of rope construction including diameter, materials used, lay of rope breaking strain, elastic limit

and uses. • Demonstrate the tying and state the efficiency and use of the following knots: Bowline, Sheet Bend, Double

Fisherman's bend, Hunters Bend, Figure of Eight, Prussic Knot and Clove Hitch. • Demonstrate the proper care and maintenance of ropes and how to minimise abrasion damage with rope

protectors and/or running belays. Belays • Demonstrate the appropriate methods of placing belays suitable for the load to be held • State the correct figures for safety factors for humans (12) and loads (5) with regard to breaking strain on

belays and knotted and un-knotted ropes. • Demonstrate the correct placement of a 2cm Loxen bolt or anchor in concrete for use in tower climbing and its

back up belay. • Demonstrate the suitable placement of a belay in metal fabricated towers. Abseiling and Ascending (Prussiking) • Demonstrate and descend with the correct use of the following descenders over at least a 10m vertical tower:

Figure Eight, Gold Tail, Rappel Rack, SRT Safety Descender. • Demonstrate and ascend with the correct use of the following ascenders over at least a 10m vertical tower:

Jumars, Gibbs Ascender, SRT ascender. • Demonstrate the changeover from ascending (Prussiking) to descending (abseiling) and back again mid way

through a free-fall rope ascent or descent. • Demonstrate the correct use of wire ladders and "pig-tails" to correct ascend or descend over edges.



TF510 Test Equipment 5 Electronic Test Equipment (Professional) • Digitising oscilloscope.

• Compare digitising oscilloscope features with digital storage oscilloscopes. • Discuss applications of digitising oscilloscopes in telecommunications.

• Logic analysers. • Compare logic analysers with oscilloscopes. • List applications of logic analysers in telecommunications.

• Chart recorders/ data loggers • List applications of chart recorders or data loggers in telecommunications.

Telecommunications Test Equipment (Professional) • RF signal generator (microwave).

• List features of microwave signal generators, such as, frequency range, stability, output range, modulation, sweep capability and input protection.

• List applications of RF signal generators in testing microwave radio equipment. • Spectrum analyser. • Explain the concept of spectrum analysis.

• Compare spectrum analyser to CRO. • Examine the operation of a spectrum analyser. • Explain the effect of decreasing sweep bandwidth on a spectrum analyser. • Explain applications of spectrum analyser in telecommunications, particularly, radio. • Explain differences between a swept spectrum analyser and an FFT spectrum analyser (or FFT optio in

digital CRO). • Eye diagram analyser.

• List applications of the use for eye diagrams and how they are generated. • List the telecommunications equipment that can be tested with an eye diagram.

• Protocol analyser. • List the data problem solving capabilities of a protocol analyser in various data networks. • Examine the operation of a protocol analyser in a data network.

• Radio communications test set. • List the test instruments found in a typical radio communications test set. • List the typical radio tests that can be performed using a radio test set. • Discuss the ability of radio test sets to simulate cellular base stations to evaluate the performance of mobile

phones. • Bit error rate testers.

• List the features of a typical BER tester, such as, bit, code, frame and CRC errors, errored seconds, error free seconds, AIS and alarm detection

• List the telecommunications equipment which can be tested with BER testers. • Constellation monitor.

• List applications of the use for constellation diagrams and how they are generated. • List the telecommunications equipment that can be tested with a constellation diagram.

TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 Cable Commissioning Tests • Copper cables.



optical fibre cables for acceptance/commissioning tests and for future diagnosis if problems arise.



GSM Base Station Alarms • Comment on the merit of GSM base station alarms extended back to maintenance centres. • List typical GSM base station alarms, such as, VSWR out of range, TX failure, channel-blocking, power,





pressurisation, laser power, mains power and battery voltages. Transmission Equipment Loop Back Testing • Discuss the test analysis method of providing a software loop back at a remote transmission site for link testing. TF530 Fault Finding 5 Cable Fault Finding • Compare MTDR/OTDR traces with commissioning traces of copper/optical fibre cables. • Discuss the problem of optical fibres being longer than the actual cables. • Discuss the technique of using a cold clamp to accurately determine an optical fibre fault. Transmission Network Fault Finding • Discuss the automatic insertion of AIS (alarm indication signal) into a digital repeater with loss of digital input

signal due to either a low RF input signal level in a radio system or a broken optical fibre. • Explain how the faulty section can be easily isolated by determining at what point AIS was inserted into the

network. Customer Complaints of Poor GSM Service • Discuss the following reasons why a customer complains of poor GSM service,

• mobile or installation is faulty. • incorrect operation of mobile equipment . • customer is outside normal coverage area. • system congested. • faulty base station. • customer attempted calls during outage of system or base station. • customer likes to complain.

• Discuss the fact that several of the problems listed can be addressed by a properly trained customer officer before being passed onto technical staff.

GSM Base Station Fault Finding • Explain that loss of quality of coverage can usually be determined by out range VSWR alarm or low TX power

alarm. • Explain that the following problems can cause reduced coverage without alarm detection,

• water in antenna. • partial lightning damage to antenna/cable. • damaged feeder. • damaged, faulty or waterlogged connectors. • obstructions since the cellular installation was completed, such as, new buildings and foliage growth.

• Discuss that a large modern city may have 100 cells (or about 400 antennas) and if the Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) of the antennas is 20 years then in an average year 20 antenna failures will occur, and most of these failures will not be detected but will result in reduced coverage.



TR520 Light/Laser Theory 5 • Describe analog and digital signals and the limitations on information transmission • Explain the main principles of light • Perform calculations on the propagation of light • Analyse optical devices such as lenses, diffraction gratings, and optical fibres. • Describe and analyse photonic devices such as Bragg cells, Etalons and filters. Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for Safety when working with optic fibres and Lasers. • Perform detailed calculations on optical fibre [propagation • Implement optical fibre system design and budgeting • Describe WDM and TDM optical systems • Indicate and ascertain optic fibre performance characteristics. Lasers/Leds • Describe performance characteristics of lasers and leds • Explain the main principle of operation of the laser • Explain the principle of operation of the Led • Relate characteristics and limitations in performance to principles of operation in the Laser and the led • List typical Laser/Led values Systems • Provide a detailed description of Networks • Describe FDDI and its operation • Explain in detail the elements of SDH, SONET and compare to PDH Skills • Characterise a Laser and a Led. • Use an OTDR • Perform loss measurements TR530 Modulation Theory and Techniques 5 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes. • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in

the presence of noise. • Calculate system requirements of modulation systems.



TDM • Describe multiplexing • Describe the different approaches to multiplexing indicating the methods of framing, signalling and error

correction. • Describe typical system applications. TR550 Time Division Multiplexing 5 ISDN • State the main features of Narrow band and Broadband ISDN. • State the CCITT (ITUT) definition of ISDN, and explain the structure of the I-series of standards. • Sketch the reference configuration for BRA and PRA showing the reference points and functional groupings. • State the functions of ISDN components TEl, TE2, NT1, NT2 and TA. • State the meaning of the abbreviations: CPE, CAN, ET, LT, NISDN, BISDN, SPCS, MSN, PSTN, and CCS7. Digital Frame Structures • Explain how an analog signal is converted to PCM and or ADPCM. • Explain how the ISDN user channel rate of 64Kb/s is derived. • Explain the concept of rate adaption. • Using appropriate telecommunications software, set up a voice call on a real or simulated PCM Network. Layer 1 • State the channel structures and data rates for Narrowband ISDN services applicable in Australia. • Explain the fundamental principles of Layer-1 of ISDN. • State two typical messages for Layer-1 of ISDN. • Explain the binary fields and bits organisation of Layer-1 (i.e. fields D, F, L, E, N, B1, B2, A, S, M). • Explain the need for line coding schemes in ISDN and state the coding schemes used for BRA and PRA. Protocols • Describe protocols for Basic Rate Access. • Draw the ISDN protocol stack in relation to the OSI seven layer model. • Explain the fields in the HDLC frame and the application of HDLC frame to X.25 and ISDN. • Give a brief conceptual overview and function of the ISDN LAPD protocol, as specified in AUSTEL standard

TS.013. • Explain the Acknowledged and Unacknowledged operations specified within the LAPD protocol. • Identify the types of LAPD frames and the fields within the frames. • Explain the concept of 'bit stuffing" and highlight some of its pitfalls. • Given the control field encoding of LAPD commands and responses (RR, RNR, SABME, UI, DISC, FRMR,

DM), explain the meaning of the LAPD messages. • For the LAPD protocol, depict typical Layer-2 messages using appropriate time sequence diagrams. • Explain the functions of ISDN Layer-3.



Sequencing • Sketch time sequence diagrams for an Intra ISDN call between subscribers showing the various Layer-3

messages for call establishment and call clearing • Analyse a captured ISDN traffic file used for telephony or data and carry out a full analysis of the calls history. ATM • Explain the key aspects of BISDN and ATM • Explain the technological transition from circuit to packet switching in a BSIDN environment, and explain the

use of frame relay in this context. • Explain the concept of ATM adaptation Layer (AAL) when ATM is used across the user-network interface of a

BISDN.





FIELD Installation

UNIT ICTTC061B - Cutover new and/or replacement network equipment



1 Plan the cutover 1 Date and timing of the cutover is determined and agreed with all relevant parties

2 Resource needs are identified

3 Impact of cutover on existing service is estimated

4 All affected customers are notified of the cutover time, duration and likely impact, all critical customers are identified

5 Cutover parameters are established, including contingency plans in the event of problems

6 Special testing required is determined

2 Organise other parties associated with cutover

1 All relevant parties to the cutover have been informed of cutover time and date

2 Contingency plans are organised with system experts in the event of problems

3 System supplier backup support is organised to be available at the appointed cutover time if required

3 Cutover the system/equipment into service

1 Cutover is achieved without undue interruption to service

2 Tests identified as part of the cutover plan are conducted in accordance with technical manuals and specifications with attention to critical elements

3 Problems identified during cutover are fixed or escalated according to enterprise procedures

4 Contingency plans are enacted in the event of major problems during cutover




4 Complete administrative tasks 1 Test result sheets are completed and handed over to operational personnel accordance with enterprise requirements

2 Site is cleaned up and left in a manner which is suitable to operational staff


RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Parties to the cutover may include: other organisational groups within the enterprise, operational personnel, other carriers, service providers, resellers, vendors, customers Tools may include software for the regeneration of customer data Tests conducted are functional only and are conducted in a systematic manner as described in equipment manuals Faults likely to occur during cutover include: jumpering deficiencies, bad terminations, incorrect customer data Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: ACA Technical Standards Australian Standards AS 3901, 3902 International Standards ISO 9001, 9002 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Heritage legislation Industrial awards and conditions



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Performance Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor on: • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • implementing a cutover plan • applying enterprise escalation and outage procedures • identifying and resolving problems Candidate submits hard copy test of knowledge of network security arrangements. Mentor/assessor observes candidate interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors keeping a customer focus and consideration of customer needs Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate submits at least two sets of test sheets and work documentation to mentor/assessor— demonstrating their ability to complete relevant administrative documentation tasks.

Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI510 Communication 5 CO510 Computer Skills 5 CS510 Customer Relations 5 EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 IN520 Teamwork 5 NE520 Network Architecture 5 OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 PK510 Product Knowledge 5 RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 SU500 Business 5 SU510 Planning 5 SU530 Quality Management 5 SU560 Finance 5 TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5



CI510 Communication 5 Technical Documents Identify different types of technical documents: • Technical definition • Technical descriptions • Technical instruction • Technical proposal • Tender Write a technical document: • Follow an agreed formal structure • Meet a specific purpose • Incorporate graphics where appropriate • Cite sources formally • Edit to industry standards • Meet appropriate completion deadlines CO510 Computer Skills 5 Assumed–CO410 Computer Skills 4 Demonstrate broad knowledge of applications software, with substantial expertise in: • managing databases and spreadsheets for planning, charting, forecasting • collection of test data for analysis, fault detection, trending • programming telecommunications and test equipment, run test programs. • install and use application specific software in relation to telephony/route, billing/charging and management of

accounts • simulation of network operations • simulation of electronic circuits CS510 Customer Relations 5 Building a Customer Focus Organisation Prepare a customer value package: • Determine what clients value • Set customer service goals • Devise strategies to achieve goals • Implement selected strategies • Inform customers of improved customer value • Seek continuous improvement through customer feedback. Create a service culture which focuses attention on the customer: • consider ways in which an organisation can make clients feel valued • develop a service strategy to deliver a quality product or service • support customer-oriented staff Develop custom-friendly systems. EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 2 and 3. EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel.



IN520 Teamwork 5 See IN420 Team Work 4 NE520 Network Architecture 5 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Architecture • Explain the ISDN concept and its objectives. • Explain the transmission structure of the Basic Rate Access and the Primary Rate Access. • Explain the digital subscriber loop technology. • Describe the reference points of the user-network interfaces. • Explain the services provided by an ISDN. • Explain the functions of the D-channel protocols. • Explain the use of ISUP signalling protocol to carry ISDN services across the network. • Identify the implications to the network of the different bearer types that can be carried as part of ISDN Bearer

Services. • Describe the signalling procedure to set up a call. Intelligent Network (IN) Architecture • Explain the aims of the Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of the IN conceptual model. • Explain the historical evolution of the IN concept. • Explain the current international standardisation activities. • Describe the IN services provided by the PSTN. • Explain the implementation of a FreePhone service. • Explain the objectives of a Virtual Private Network. • Explain the signalling procedure to establish a 008 call. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Architecture • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaption layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options. OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health & Safety 5 & OH420 Occupational Health & Safety Regulations 4 • Record and document all accidents in the workplace which cause serious injuries.





• Transfer electrical awareness to fellow workers. PK510 Product Knowledge 5 • Features, functions and limitations of products related to competency unit. • Maintenance routines appropriate to effective operation of products. • Alternative products.



RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 Assumed RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 Filter Design in Radio Networks • State the reasons for using filters in radio equipment. • Design Butterworth, Tchebychev and Bessel band pass filters using filter design tables. Signals, Spectra and Non-linearity • Use the principles of Fourier's Theorem to determine which harmonics will be present in a complex repetitive



network. RF Amplifiers in Radio Networks • Describe the terms 'noise figure' and 'noise factor'. • Describe characteristics of class A, B and C RF amplifiers. • List radio applications of each amplifier class type. • List impedance matching requirements for RF amplifiers. • Describe coupling methods for RF amplifiers. • Describe decoupling methods for RF amplifiers. Electronic Components Found in UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Describe the effects of stray inductance and capacitance on resistors, capacitors, inductors and filters. • Explain how inductors, capacitors, filters and RFCs can be printed onto PC boards. • Describe the principles of circuits using microstrip techniques. • List the applications of PIN diodes, Gunn diodes, GaAs transistors, TWTs and Klystrons. Passive Devices Found in UHF/SHF Radio Systems • List the applications of cavity resonators, filters, circulators, isolators and attenuators. • Sketch typical branching networks found in UHF/SHF radio systems. Commissioning Tests • Measure transmitter output spectrum. • Carry out link frequency change. • Perform IF Amplitude and Phase measurements. • Measure frequency response of transmitter and receiver filters in branching unit. • Determine the correct operation of all alarms. SU500 Business 5 • General business principles. • Covered in SU500 series.



SU510 Planning 5 • Time management principles • Organise resources and time • Identify objectives • Develop and document critical path • Develop work plans • Safe work practices • Employment conditions • Communicating plans to employees and customers • Delegate roles and responsibilities • Progress reporting • Planning review and evaluation SU530 Quality Management 5 • Quality concepts • Quality management systems–Australian standards and International standards • Preparing quality system documentation • Internal quality auditing • Best practice models • Continuous improvement techniques • Quality system software SU560 Finance 5 Covered in SU460 Finance 4 TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 Cable Commissioning Tests • Copper cables.






using the GSM test mobile.



Transmission Equipment Alarms • Comment on the merit of multiplexing, microwave radio and fibre optic alarms extended back to maintenance


pressurisation, laser power, mains power and battery voltages. Transmission Equipment Loop Back Testing • Discuss the test analysis method of providing a software loop back at a remote transmission site for link testing.





FIELD Operations and Maintenance

UNIT ICTTC076B - Complete equipment/software upgrades



1 Identify detail relating to upgrade 1 Work order is checked for accuracy and planners questioned in relation to both detail and clarity of design/specifications

2 Reason for the upgrade is clearly established

3 Test plan associated with upgrade is identified and relevance established

4 All hardware and/or software details are understood

2 Plan upgrade 1 Documentation is checked for completeness

2 Duration and timing of the upgrade is determined

3 Impact of the upgrade on network operation is established

4 All parties including customers both involved or affected by the upgrade are notified as to timing and impact of the upgrade

5 Resources necessary to complete the upgrade are identified and organised

6 Training needs are identified and organised

7 Specific tasks are allocated in accordance with the skill mix of staff involved

8 Pre determined contingency plans are checked for appropriateness and plan amendments are made as required

9 Need for outages are determined and timing agreed and sanctioned by approving authorities

10 Upgrade is scheduled where possible at a time appropriate to all parties



3 Prepare for upgrade 1 Software and hardware are checked to ensure they match upgrade requirements and action is taken to cover deficiencies where they occur

2 Tools and test equipment are obtained and checked for accuracy and safety

3 Hardware replacement parts are checked or ordered if not supplied

4 Equipment/network checks are made to identify any known fault situations

5 Maintenance routines are run in accordance with prescribed procedures

6 Test plan is run on current equipment and problems identified and corrected in conjunction with planners

7 Approvals for network downtime/outages are obtained from the appropriate authority prior to work commencement

4 Undertake upgrade 1 Upgrade is implemented in accordance with design specification

2 Procedures for upgrade of network are followed in sequential order as defined in instruction manuals

3 Progress of upgrade is checked periodically to ensure that plans in relation to time and duration are being met

4 Problems encountered are brought to the attention of the appropriate authority with detail as to the impact of the problem on the upgrade plan

5 Upgrade is aborted and contingency plans implemented should an upgrade plan not meet the specified criteria

6 System response is monitored during upgrade and action is taken according to instructions provided


5 Test upgrade 1 Tests are undertaken in accordance with the predetermined test plan

2 Test results are analysed and checked against specified performance levels

3 Tests are made at each point in the route as required

4 Charging/bill record applications are tested as required

5 Problems encountered are escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

6 Decision to revert to preupgrade state is undertaken where required in accordance with enterprise policy

7 Reversion is undertaken as per defined procedures

8 All affected parties including customers are notified of upgrade completion



6 Accept upgrade 1 Upgrade results/tests are recorded and provided to network management group

2 Post upgrade routines are run in accordance with documented procedures

3 All records, both system and enterprise, are updated

4 Work order documentation is completed, signed and returned to appropriate area

7 Review upgrade outcomes 1 Ongoing tests are conducted to ensure complete success of upgrade

2 Relevant alarms are monitored to measure impact of upgrade

3 Customer complaints are analysed to assess impact of upgrade on customer satisfaction

8 Undertake administrative action 1 Test result sheets are completed and located in accordance with enterprise requirements


3 Asset is declared ready for use


RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS System upgrades can include: introduction of a new facility, introduction or variations to both software and hardware, installation of large data packages, improvements to power/battery arrangements Work orders include full details of work to be undertaken including equipment/programme design and/or specification



Test plans usually accompany upgrade documentation Contingency plans are developed as part of the upgrade planning and design and usually relate to escalation and reversion procedures given problems with the upgrade Documentation can be vendor, equipment and/or enterprise specific and details implementation and testing procedures including test outcomes and network impact statement Parties impacted on by the upgrade can include: other internal organisational groups, network management, customers, other carriers, service providers public relations All enterprises have specific policies relating to outage situations and the action to be taken Maintenance routines are described in both equipment and enterprise documentation Tests are specific to the upgrade and are specified in the upgrade design package Tests may include: DC/AC measurements, error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements, as well as identifying hardware dependencies, checking processor capability and network integration Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer, spectrum analysers, frequency analysers, microwave link analysers Reversion policy is enterprise specific Training may be undertaken on the job, or external to the work group by specialist trainers Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Frequency management




Evidence • Candidate submits at least two hard copies of plans—and mentor/assessor observes candidate: • planning and identifying the components of the upgrade process, including application of enterprise

procedures, ensuring minimum downtime on the network and meeting customer requirements • developing a contingency plan Mentor/assessor observes candidate interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors, keeping a customer focus and consideration of customer needs. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor describing: • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • interpreting alarms and alarm priorities • analysing alarms and alarm conditions and knowledge of interrogation procedures • applying blocking principles. Mentor/assessor observes candidate implementing the upgrade process, and a contingency plan: • according to plans and specifications and including application of enterprise procedures • ensuring minimum downtime on the network and meeting customer requirements within service assurance

guidelines • applying enterprise escalation and outage procedures and all related occupational health and safety

requirements and work practices. Observation by mentor/assessor, and at least two hard copies of sets of test results to mentor/assessor, demonstrating the candidate's ability to: • use both vendor and enterprise specific monitoring tools • measure the impact of the upgrade on the billing process • conduct tests to measure the impact of the upgrade and interpret outcomes • analyse of the implications of hardware/software upgrade on the remainder of the network. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports describing: • monitoring and analysing alarms and alarm conditions and knowledge of interrogation procedures • conducting tests to measure the impact of the upgrade and interpreting outcomes.

Candidate submits hard copy sets of documents—and mentor/assessor observes—completion of documentation for at least two separate upgrades.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 IN440 Workplace Networking 4 MA420 Mathematics 4 NE420 Network Architecture 4 NE430 Switch Networks OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 PE320 Remote Work PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 SC410 Science 4 SU420 Leadership 4 SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 TE490 Blocking Principles 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 TR430 Modulation Theory 4 TR440 Narrow and Wideband Principles 4 TR460 Spectrum Management 4 TR470 Transmission Technologies and Products 4 TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 VO420 Video and Sound Principles 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English



Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:


Communicate to Secure a Job • Investigate employment opportunities • Evaluate yourself • Prepare a professional resume • Write a letter of application • Make a telephone application • Perform effectively in a job interview CO410 Computer Skills 4 Assumed C0310 Computer Skills 3 • Demonstrate broad knowledge of the operation of personal computers and application programs as they are







material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction



CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 • Identify and follow prescribed legal and enterprise procedures for maintenance and repairs. • Inform customers of maintenance and repair procedures • Aim to minimise customer impact. • Describe customer options for service and repairs • Explain to a customer in a competent and professional manner how a quote is derived. • State applicable charges • Update fault history records. DI410 Digital Theory 4 • Identify various digital logic Integrated Circuits and MSI packages. Outline the operation , their applications

and specific characteristics, using data sheets, truth tables, timing diagrams. • Select proper isolation and interfacing techniques between logic devices of different families considering the

limitations of logic devices such as logic level, drive/loading, propagation delay, noise, switching speed, etc. • Recognise circuits containing FF, SR, latches, decoders/encoders, multiplexers/demultiplexers, counters,

memory devices, A/D & D/A, microprocessor systems. • Analyse circuit diagrams and specifications of communication equipment including radio/wireless networks to

diagnose and identify affected elements, given a variety of common faults. Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology DI430 Digital Radio 4 Analog Radio Transmissions and Digital Radio Transmissions • List the advantages of analog radio transmission. • List the advantages of digital radio transmission. Digital Modulation Techniques for Radio Transmission • Use diagrams to describe ASK, FSK, PSK,4PSK, 8PSK, 16QAM and 64QAM • Modulation techniques. • List the advantages of the various digital modulation techniques. Factors which Influence System Implementation in Digital Radio Networks • Define the term 'free space path loss' (FSPL). • Calculate the FSPL of a single hop radio link. • Define the term 'system gain'. • Calculate the received signal level of a radio link. • Define the term 'bit-error-rate' (BER). • Determine, from a graph, the fade margin of a digital radio system and still maintain a specified BER. • Explain, using diagrams, time, space and frequency diversity. The Radio Propagation Phenomena Which Affect Space Wave Paths • Explain, using a diagram, how the space wave consists of two waves, the direct and • reflected. • State advantages of space wave over rugged terrain compared to over water or desert. • List the types of fading encountered in UHF/SHF radio systems. • State the cause and effect on digital radio performance of each type of fading. Basic Commissioning Tests of Digital UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Measure transmitter carrier frequency. • Measure transmitter carrier power. • Measure AGC level and determine receiver input signal level. • Measure receiver input level. • Measure BER.



EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as







layout, insertion and removal of components, wiring, earthing, supply decoupling and safe power-on sequence. • Devise tests and measurements in order to analyse and verify all the parameters specific to these devices. IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 • Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination IN420 Teamwork 4 Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members.



IN440 Workplace Networking 4 Meeting Procedures and Participation • Determine the meeting's purpose • Recognise the difference between formal and informal meetings • Identify the roles of chairpersons, secretary and member • Draw up and distribute an agenda that covers all the business of the meeting • Record decisions of the meeting clearly and concisely • Use meeting conversation and processes to conduct a structured meeting • Use communication skills and strategies to maintain the smooth running of the meeting • Employ problem solving strategies • Organise the venue and arrange the environment appropriately MA420 Mathematics 4 Assume MA310 Basic Maths & MA410 Basic Maths Minimum: • Trigonometry • Pythagors • Sin, Cos, and Tan functions Additional - Select from: • Manipulate surd expressions, use engineering notation, convert units of measurement and demonstrate an







NE420 Network Architecture 4

Assumed NE320 Network Architecture

Switching Network Architecture • Define local exchange functions. • Describe hierarchical PSTN architectures. • Describe star and flat switching networks. • Describe international switching networks. • Define minor and major switching centre functions. • Define tandem (trunk) exchange functions. • Draw a PSTN indicating the interconnection of the elements listed above.



GSM Network Architecture Draw and describe the interconnection of the four major components and associated sub-systems of a GSM network, namely,

• MS • BSS • BTC • BSC • NSS • MSC • AuC • HLR • VLR • EIR • OMC

List and discuss the various base station antennas in use, namely, • mechanical down tilt • electrical down tilt • variable electrical down tilt • dual polarisation.

Satellite Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of the Home Access Community Broadcast • Satellite Service (HACBSS). • Draw and describe the distribution of television programmes via satellite. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a WAN via satellite. Transmission Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of a co-axial cable transmission network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a digital microwave radio transmission • network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a fibre optic transmission network. NE430 Switch Networks Covered in the Switching series (SW codes) OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing



OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.







• Perform basic first-aid functions in an emergency including EAR and CPR. PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3



PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 • Manufacturers specifications




RA410 Antennas 4 Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields. Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate. Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors. Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and

then set up this antenna using a compass bearing, tiltmeter and a receiver signal strength reading. Faults in VHF, UHF and SHF Antennas and Coaxial and Waveguide Feeders • Perform DC tests on coaxial cables, waveguides and antennas. • Recheck antenna alignment. • Conduct physical checks on antennas, feeders and mountings and recognise potential problems. RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 General Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the following filter types, low pass, high pass, band stop, notch, band pass. • Explain the terms, insertion loss, bandwidth, shape factor, phase response.



Describe the Principles of Series Resonant Circuits as Band Pass Filters • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a series resonant band pass filter. • Describe the principles of parallel resonant circuits as band pass filters. • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a parallel resonant band pass filters. • Explain the operation of filters using more than one resonant circuit.

Specialised Band Pass Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the basic operating principle and characteristics of, quartz crystals, crystal filters, mechanical filters,

comb filters, SAW filters and cavity resonators.

Oscillators Used in Radio Communication Systems • Explain the basic requirements for oscillation. • Describe the operation of LC oscillator circuits–Hartley and Colpitts. • Describe the operation of crystal oscillators–Pierce and Miller types. • Explain the operation of Phase-Locked loop block diagrams. • Describe the use of a programmable frequency-divider to provide frequency synthesis.

Amplitude and Frequency Modulation Techniques • List the frequency products at the output of an amplitude modulator. • Draw the time and frequency domain diagrams of an AM signal. • Calculate the AM modulation index. • List the frequency products at the output of a frequency modulator. • Determine the bandwidth of an FM signal. • Sketch the time and frequency domain diagrams for an FM signal. • State the carrier deviations for TV sound, FM broadcasting, two-way radio and analogmobilephones.

AM Transmitters and Receivers • Draw the block diagram of an AM high level modulated transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an AM superheterodyne receiver (single conversion). • List the function of each block in the receiver and output frequencies. • Calculate the output power from an AM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated.

FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated.

SC410 Science 4

• Demonstrate the ability to make accurate observations and measurement on various physical quantities. Record results on a logbook, use these to plot graphs. Interpret these results to verify predictable events, and apply to solve practical problems. Develop these skills by investigating the theories of: • forces and motion • elasticity in materials • structures in equilibrium • work and energy • fluids and transport • thermodynamics • mechanical oscillations

• Analyse and assess the accuracy of measurements and data. Identify the sources of errors, from the limitations of instruments, environmental effects, to human judgements and errors.

• Develop qualitative statements using the mean and standard deviation of the spread of the data collected. • Demonstrate broad theoretical knowledge of the forces of nature: gravitational, electric, magnetic fields,

electromagnetic induction and magnetic flux. • Identify the types and characteristics of electromagnetic radiation. Evaluate both the practical applications and

the harmful effects of different types of electromagnetic radiation, in terms of concepts such as wavelength, frequency, mode of generation and its relationship to the electromagnetic spectrum.

• Conduct measurements about various sources of radiation to evaluate the degree of hazard it poses to our environment and humans.



SU420 Leadership 4 Covered in SU320 Workplace Leadership SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 Packet Switching and Data Communication • Describe data communication principles via analogue and digital networks. • Explain need for communication protocols. • Describe the OSI layered protocol suite for open systems. Data Multiplexing • Explain the difference between synchronous time division multiplexing and statistical multiplexing. • List advantages and disadvantages of statistical multiplexing. Packet Switching Principles • Explain data segmentation and reassembley. • Compare packet switching with circuit switching and with message switching. • Perform calculations for optimum packet size, and message transmission time. • Define virtual circuit, logical channel, datagram, connectionless and connection oriented procedures. Packet Switch Network Elements • Explain the function of NTU's, PAD's, PAD concentrators, packet switching nodes. Packet Switch Networks • Explain routing and addressing and the differences for virtual circuits and datagrams. • Explain congestion, error recovery and queuing delays TE410 Basic Telephony 4 Major Telephony System Components • List and describe the basic functions of the telephone set. • Draw the block diagram of a basic telephone, and describe the functions of the following sections:- ringer,







List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone.



Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set. TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 Hazard Management Operations • Describe safe working practices in the work environment. • Identify electrical/chemical/electromagnetic radiation hazards in the work environment. • State the correct procedures for the isolation of an electrical circuit. • Describe safe and appropriate methods of rescuing a shock victim who is in contact with energised conductors

or equipment. • State the reasons for earthing. • Describe the precautions and safe methods when entering large manholes which may contain some form of

poisonous or explosive gas. • Describe the safe and appropriate methods in the use of power tools. • Describe the need and ways for strengthening of radio towers to make up for excessive wind loading. • Describe some precautions that must be observed when working on a radio tower or any above ground

construction. Outage Management Operations • Determine the procedures involved in case of malfunction, for outages depending upon the telecommunication

carrier criteria, and urgency of faults. • Determine in conjunction with the various Network Operations Centres the steps involved from when a fault is

reported/detected to when it is rectified. • Determine the functions of a test desk in dealing with fault correction. • Determine some types of network alarms that may used even before a system becomes faulty. TE490 Blocking Principles 4 Blocking Principles Will Be Investigated Using Space Division Multiplexing Only Investigate the Principles of Space Division Switching Using a Single-Stage Square Matrix • Sketch the square matrix for N-inlets and outlets showing crosspoints. • Calculate the number of crosspoints required, and define it as a function of the number of inlets. • Calculate the efficiency in the usage of crosspoints. • Determine how this efficiency can be increased. • Determine the limitations of a single-stage switch, and outline some possible solutions to overcome these

limitations. Investigate the Principles of Space Division Switching Using Multiple-Stage Switching • Sketch a three-stage switching arrangement given N-inlets and outlets, the number of switches for the first and

third stage, and the number of switches for the second stage • Determine how blocking occurs in this switching arrangement. • Define the term ' Blocking Probability '. • For a blocking switch:-

• Calculate the number of crosspoints required. • Apply the 'Lee Method' to evaluate the blocking probability given the traffic per inlet, and assuming that

the network is symmetrical and that traffic is uniformly distributed. • Modify the above switch into a non-blocking switch. • For a non-blocking switch with the same given conditions as above, use the 'Clos Theorem' to determine the

number of crosspoints required for an optimal design. • Compare the number of cross points used between a blocking and a non-blocking switch, and hence determine

their usage efficiencies.



TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 Digital Circuitry Testing And Diagnosis • Explain that digital system level test analysis involves isolating the fault to one part of the system and may



gate, etc ) Complex Signal Flow Paths • List the six different types of signal flow paths found in electronics and telecommunications, namely,










output. Complex Signal Flow Path Test Analysis • List applications of each of the six signal flow paths in telecommunications. • Discuss test analysis methods of each of the six signal flow paths TO410 Use of Tools 4 Electronic Hand Tools • Identify a range of electronic hand tools, such as:


• State typical applications of electronic hand tools listed. • Demonstrate the correct procedure for using electronic hand tools listed.



Soldering Tools • List the various tools used for electronic soldering and desoldering, such as:










usually via an • opto-isolater of 4,000 volt rating.



Protection of LANs • State that coaxial cable can be protected with coaxial line filters. • State that long RS232, RS422 cables can be protected with plug in surge protectors or opto-isolators. • Protection of incoming twisted pair cables. • State that hybrid arrestors (second level) can be installed in banks at the MDF, or at the IDF if the equipment is






Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 • Describe the principle theories of light • Perform calculations on wavelength, velocity and refraction of light • Describe chromatic dispersion Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for safety when working with fibre optics and lasers. • Apply the theory to optical fibre propagation • Identify sources of loss in optical fibres • Identify the advantages of fibre optics compared to metallic and wireless techniques. • Describe degradation of signals in fibres • Describe fibre optic types Lasers/Leds • Describe the difference between a laser and a led. • Illustrate the spectrum, beamwidth and other characteristics of lasers and eds • Describe modulation types used with Lasers and leds.



Fibre Optic Systems • Explain the main uses of lasers and leds with optical fibres • Identify the main optical components of modern optical transmission systems. Systems • Identify and explain the SDH system • Explain the advantages of SDH or SONET over PDH. Skill • Perform splicing • Perform Power measurements and loss measurements. TR430 Modulation Theory 4 Describe the Communication System • Manipulate frequency and wavelength relationships • Describe the freq spectrum • Identify various communication mediums • Describe noise and its effects Modulation Concepts • Analyse signals in the time and frequency domains • Define linier modulation • Describe AM/SSB/DSB and VSB signals • Perform basic calculations on non linier modulation signals • Construct and explain the operation of linier modulation circuits • Interpret spectral and time domain waveforms of linier modulated signals • Describe non linier modulation • Describe typical non linier modulation circuits • Perform basic calculations on non linier modulated signals Demodulation Concepts • Describe demodulation • Identify and describe demodulator circuits Multiplexing • Identify and describe the basic multiplexing methods Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation using PCM • Analyse PCM performance • Compare digital and analog signals Noise • Describe methods of characterising noise • Describe the effect of noise on analog and digital signals. • Perform basic calculations on noise • Perform noise measurements TR440 Narrow and Wideband Principles 4 Characteristics and Categories of Telecommunication Systems • Define 'Transmitter/Receiver/Media' • Describe the meaning of 'wireline' and optical fibre • Describe main characteristics and components of wire-pair, coaxial cable, waveguide and optical fibre media. • Describe the functional blocks for VHF, UHF and SHF terrestrial radio systems. • Describe the functional blocks for satellite systems. • Describe the functional blocks for mobile telephone and data systems.



Typical Signal Parameters of a Telecommunication Systems • List key analogue parameters which may affect signal quality, e.g., loss, noise, delay, bandwidth. • Describe the effects of Signal-to-Noise Ratio on Voice, Data and Image signals (noise tolerance). • State the relationship between power ratio and the decibel (dB) and the expression of power levels in dBm.

Calculate dB and dBm's. Architecture of Analogue and Digital Networks • Explain the structure and generalised operation of analogue telephone networks and limitations of these

networks. • Describe digital networks, including switching and transmission of signals in two-state form • Describe sampling, quantising and encoding techniques. • State the principle of time-division multiplexing, including synchronisation and alignment concepts. • Recognise the basic architecture of a PCM-based 4-wire digital switching system. • State the role and main functional blocks of a typical 'pair-gain' system in the Customer-Access network. TR460 Spectrum Management 4 Spectrum Management Overview • Describe the principles behind managing the resource known as the radio spectrum. • Describe the general characteristics and names of the ITU approved radio bands from 30 Hz to 30 GHz • Compare where radio spectrum appears within the entire Electromagnetic Spectrum • Consult a database of allocated frequencies to find the services in use at that frequency. Filters for Managing Spectrum • Plot the frequency response and Bode approximation of a simple low pass and High pass filter • Explain the terms decade, octave, bandwidth, roll off, delay, phase plot, 3db point • Define roll off characteristics of typical filters (R-C, R-C-L, mechanical, SAW, crystal) • Determine the transfer function for a composite network of two or three single time constant networks. • Sketch the Bode plots for gain and Phase by adding together the Bode plots of gain and phase of each of the

component networks. • Use the principles of Fourier's Theorem to determine which harmonics will be present in a complex repetitive

waveform. • Define the terms "Complex Repetitive Wave', 'Harmonic' and 'Fundamental Frequency'. Fourier and Frequency Domain • State Fourier's theorem as it applies to a complex repetitive waveform. • Demonstrate the addition of the successive harmonics of a square waveform to obtain a constantly improving

approximation to the original square waveform. • Given a mathematical expression of a complex repetitive waveform in Fourier form, sketch the frequency

spectrum showing amplitude and frequency. • Explain the effect on the original waveform, if each of the harmonics is phase shifted by a different amount, and

state the effect that this may have on a data signal. • Experimentally observe or simulate the effect of phase distortion on a complex repetitive waveform. • Determine the frequencies of harmonics (up to and including the seventh) which will result when a pure

sinusoidal signal suffers non linear distortion in a non linear network. Spectrum Utilisation • Sketch a typical FDM system • Explain how frequency reuse is achieved in a digital microwave network by space division • Explain the process under which a spectrum is allocated by the SMA to a carrier • Explain the need for Guard bands • Use a program or spreadsheet to calculate the IMD products of up to order 7 and 2 or 3 main input frequencies. • Calculated the maximum bandwidth of an AM and a FM radio systems given the modulation index and Bessel

tables.



TR470 Transmission Technologies and Products 4 Optical Overview • State the relevant Occupational Health and Safety standards for Optical Systems. • Describe the development of fibre-optics and the LASER (opto-electronics). • Estimate the potential informationcarrying capacity of lightwave transmission (at a single wavelength). • List the advantages of optical fibre systems over wireline. • Define the EMR spectrum and preferred wavelengths for optical fibre devices. Optical Transmission • State the main characteristics of Single mode and Multimode fibre optic media. • Describe fibre index profiles (step and graded). • State advantages and disadvantages for Mode/Index types. • Describe types of losses in expected for fibre optic technologies • Describe operating wavelengths, losses and regeneration limits. • Describe typical configuration for SDH TDM multiplexers up to STM16 level TDM Multiplexers • State the main characteristics of TDM multiplexers • Calculate typical losses in transmission paths and multiplexer technologies • Describe typical configuration for PDH TDM multiplexers up to E3 level Terrestrial Microwave Systems • State the main characteristics of terrestrial Microwave systems • Calculate typical losses over transmission paths for terrestrial Microwave systems • Describe typical configurations for TDM multiplexers paths used with Terrestrial Microwave systems. TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 Transmission Hierarchy Overview • Briefly explain the principle of pulse code modulation. • State the Nyquist sampling theorem and the sampling rate for telephony. • State the number of quantising levels for an eight bit PCM system and the data rate for telephony. • Explain, using diagrams, how compounding improves quantising error at low signal levels. • Draw the basic block diagram of a codec (one-way) and indicate which block is the anti-aliasing filter. • State the reasons for using digital line transmission codes and explain RZ, NRZ, AMI, HD3B & CMI line


synchronising time slot allocation (FAS and NFAS) • Compare the E1 frame with the T1 frame Overview of SDH • State the meaning of 'synchronous' network. • Recognise the hierarchical structure of SDH. • State the method of accessing 2M Bit/second tributaries in a SDM optical fibre trunk network. • Describe the concept of interworking PDH derived signals across the SDH.



• State the advantages and disadvantages of SDH.



TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 • Describe the phases of system lifetime • Describe the difference between the operation and support functions • Describe the difference between installation, commissioning and acceptance testing and maintenance • Describe system performance requirements • List test terminology and explain the terms • Describe the levels of maintenance • Explain the purpose of a Quality system • Explain the concepts of standards, calibration and regulation • Explain the purpose of test equipment • Use a test procedure to perform measurements • Produce a test report based on measurement • Perform error analysis computations • Utilise a number of transmission test instruments to perform measurements on BER, S/N, bandwidth, loss and

crosstalk. • Use a OTDR and an optical power meter • Describe conventional instrument and specific test equipment • Use automatic test equipment • Set up and program instrument control to perform a measurement VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 • Describe the differences between analogue and video distribution techniques over common media, such as fibre

and metallic circuits • Describe standards for transmission of digital video signals over the telecommunications network. • Describe video distribution techniques • Describe the HFC system • Describe satellite systems • Describe typical digital video switching equipment and functions • Investigate and write a small report on current video switching equipment and techniques • Install and connect two items of video distribution equipment. Sources may be work or a teaching laboratory. VO420 Video and Sound Principles 4 Video and Sound Signal Derivation The Studio • Sketch the layout of a typical studio • Explain in simple terms the need for :

• * Lighting • * Graphics • * Microphones • * TV Cameras • * The Control Room • * Signal Transmission

The Image Conversion • Draw a diagram of the basic image converter (pickup tube) • Explain the need for :

• The Taking Lens • The Transparent Conducting Film • The Target • The Scanning Beam • The Electron Gun • The Load Resistor • The Horizontal and Vertical Yoke Assembly



The Camera Block Diagram • Draw a basic block diagram of a black & white camera • Explain the need for :

• Horizontal Deflection • Vertical Deflection • Sync Generation • Video Preamplification • Sync Mixing • Video Output • The Power Supply

The Composite Video Signal • Draw the standard output signal waveform from the camera • Describe the standard output signal waveform from the camera in termsof its :

• Polarity • Level • Source Impedance • Load Impedance

Sound to Electrical Conversion • Draw a simple sketch of a Dynamic Microphone • Describe the conversion process from sound into electrical energy. Dynamic Microphone • Draw a simple sketch of a Condenser Microphone • Describe the conversion process from sound into electrical energy of a condenser microphone






UNIT ICTTC085B - Monitor, analyse and action telecommunications network alarms



1 Identify alarms 1 Alarm presentation is checked and identified

2 Severity and level of alarm is identified

3 Specific network element affected is identified

4 Particular software and/or hardware is identified where possible

5 Likely customer impact is identified

6 Agreements with affected customers are studied and action initiated to avoid breach of the agreement

7 All appropriate areas are notified of both the alarm and the likely impact in accordance with enterprise policy

8 Alarm is acknowledged in accordance with enterprise policy where required

2 Analyse alarm conditions 1 Alarm priority is determined and actioned in accordance with enterprise policy

2 Any outage situation, its extent and impact is identified

3 Fault history is gathered and analysed

4 Service level agreements with affected customers are analysed for impact on priority determination

5 Discussions are held with other relevant organisation groups in an attempt to isolate and identify both the problem and the likely cause where applicable

6 Further reports are gathered and analysed

7 Likely areas of failures are identified and analysed

8 Enterprise policy relating to outages is implemented immediately when required



3 Locate and arrange rectification of problem

1 Fault/problem rectification is undertaken where appropriate priority applies, capability exists and time restrictions can be met

2 Remote interrogation is undertaken to further identify the problem where possible

3 Escalation procedures are enacted in accordance with alarm priority and enterprise policy

4 Faults/problems not clearly identified by an alarm or incapable of rectification remotely are allocated to appropriate area

5 Hardware faults/replacement are allocated to appropriate area

6 Instructions given to field staff are clear, concise and delivered in a manner which enables quick and effective repair

7 Fault repair progress is monitored on at regular intervals

8 Alarms requiring no further action are documented and recorded in accordance with enterprise policy

9 Advice is prepared and submitted to appropriate area in the event that further action to address the problem is required

4 Finalise action 1 Alarms are either reset or arrangements are made with the relevant authorised group to reset alarms

2 All relevant parties including customers are notified of problem rectification

3 Alarms are monitored to ensure no re-occurrence of the problem

4 Appropriate cause and effect studies are undertaken, results analysed and action taken to prevent re-occurrence

5 Reports are prepared and signed in accordance with enterprise policy




A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1- remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarm details recorded are: Colours, codes, node affected, date and time, new or old record Alarms could result from: new installation, planned outage, network failure, faulty circuits, security breaches, animal damage, traffic overloads, Customer Premises equipment problems, peak traffic loads Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR,door, over temperature Conditions which may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors Alarm priorities are enterprise specific but generally consist of four (4) levels Priority 1 impact - demanding immediate attention Priority 2 degradation - decision to be made as to attention given and depends on impact on both network and customer Priority 3 hazardous - attention given as part of normal activities Priority 4 no action - alarm noted Hardware faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Customers may be internal or external to the organisation and may include other carriers All enterprises have specific policies relating to outage situations and the action to be taken Escalation procedures are enterprise specific and can relate to both alarm type and repair time Variables that may impact on system faults may include: recent additions to system, building works, operator error, power supply, software problems, time of fault, atmospheric conditions. Service agreements are maintenance agreements between communication companies and their clients and vary from company to company and with the type of equipment owned or leased by the client.



Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: Transmission systems are governed by international standards set by the ITU Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location At least two of a switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Assessment candidates will provide evidence of their performance and underpinning skills and knowledge. Candidate submits hard copies of alarm centre fault report, system reports and fault history for at least three faults signed off by the mentor: • At least two faults to be actioned to a set program. • Another to be with no prior demonstration or experience. • Alarm and maintenance printouts. Candidate delivers oral report to mentor/assessor explaining three different action plans. Mentor/assessor observes candidate using the test results to confirm existence of three different types of faults by mentor or assessor. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's competency in fault diagnosis technique in at least three different types of faults. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to adhere to Service Level Agreements.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 CS520 Service Agreements 5 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI420 Digital Switching 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 IN440 Workplace Networking 4 NE410 Network Equipment 4 NE420 Network Architecture 4 OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 PE410 Personal Skills 4 PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 SU420 Leadership 4 SU430 Quality Procedures 4 SU440 Conflict Resolution 4 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 TE450 System Security 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 TR450 Signalling Principles 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:












material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 • Identify and follow prescribed legal and enterprise procedures for maintenance and repairs. • Inform customers of maintenance and repair procedures • Aim to minimise customer impact. • Describe customer options for service and repairs • Explain to a customer in a competent and professional manner how a quote is derived. • State applicable charges • Update fault history records. CS520 Service Agreements 5 • Service agreements need to be implemented according to enterprise standards. • This topic is best addressed within the workplace.



DI410 Digital Theory 4 • Identify various digital logic Integrated Circuits and MSI packages. Outline the operation , their applications




diagnose and identify affected elements, given a variety of common faults. Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology DI420 Digital Switching 4 Assumed DI410Digital Theory Time Division Techniques • Describe time division multiplexing, timeslot interchange. • Explain PCM encoding, E1 (32 Channel) and T1 (24 Channel) frame and multiframe structures. • Explain the difference between A law and U law encoding. • Explain the reason for synchronization and frame alignment of incoming PCM bit streams to a digital switch. • Describe the process of signalling information extraction or insertion from PCM streams at switch boundary. Space Division Technique • Explain the process of space division multiplexing and de multiplexing. Switch Elements • Describe the practical implementation of a time switch. • Explain operation of speech memory and connection memory elements of time switching. • Describe the practical implementation of digital space switch, explain the function of space memory and digital

multiplexing / de multiplexing. Combination of Time and Space Switching • Explain the need for multistage switch matrixes. • Explain the blocking probability with TS or ST 2 stage switches, and the need for TST or STS or TSSST. • Compare the performances and applications for TST or STS switch matrixes in digital switching systems. Practical Digital Switch Stages of Digital Switching Systems • Examine the operation control of TST switches, of (for example) Nortel DMS Supernode or Ericcson AXE10,

including path search, switch block security, processor / switchblock control messages, switched control bits. • Examine the operation of a multistage self searching switch matrix of combined T/S element as in Alcatel

System 12, including switched control message protocol. DI430 Digital Radio 4 Analog Radio Transmissions and Digital Radio Transmissions • List the advantages of analog radio transmission. • List the advantages of digital radio transmission. Digital Modulation Techniques for Radio Transmission • Use diagrams to describe ASK, FSK, PSK,4PSK, 8PSK, 16QAM and 64QAM • Modulation techniques. • List the advantages of the various digital modulation techniques.



Factors which Influence System Implementation in Digital Radio Networks • Define the term 'free space path loss' (FSPL). • Calculate the FSPL of a single hop radio link. • Define the term 'system gain'. • Calculate the received signal level of a radio link. • Define the term 'bit-error-rate' (BER). • Determine, from a graph, the fade margin of a digital radio system and still maintain a specified BER. • Explain, using diagrams, time, space and frequency diversity. The Radio Propagation Phenomena Which Affect Space Wave Paths • Explain, using a diagram, how the space wave consists of two waves, the direct and • reflected. • State advantages of space wave over rugged terrain compared to over water or desert. • List the types of fading encountered in UHF/SHF radio systems. • State the cause and effect on digital radio performance of each type of fading. Basic Commissioning Tests of Digital UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Measure transmitter carrier frequency. • Measure transmitter carrier power. • Measure AGC level and determine receiver input signal level. • Measure receiver input level. • Measure BER. EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace operations. IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 • Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination



IN420 Teamwork 4 Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members. IN440 Workplace Networking 4 Meeting Procedures and Participation • Determine the meeting's purpose • Recognise the difference between formal and informal meetings • Identify the roles of chairpersons, secretary and member • Draw up and distribute an agenda that covers all the business of the meeting • Record decisions of the meeting clearly and concisely • Use meeting conversation and processes to conduct a structured meeting • Use communication skills and strategies to maintain the smooth running of the meeting • Employ problem solving strategies • Organise the venue and arrange the environment appropriately NE410 Network Equipment 4 Assumed NE310 Network Equipment 3 Switching Network Equipment List and describe the seven common hardware and software characteristics of digital switching systems, namely:

• central processor for call processing • peripheral processor(s) for call control and traffic concentration • switching matrix • messaging matrix • pools of common or shared service circuits (tone generators, etc.) • access to trunks • distributed call processing control.

GSM Network Equipment • Describe the function of the Mobile Station (MS). • Describe the function of the following Base Station System (BSS) sub-systems,

• Base Transceiver Station (BTS) • Base Station Controller (BSC).

• Describe the function of the following Network Sub-System (NSS) components, • Mobile Identity Register (EIR). • Describe Switching Centre (MSC) • Authentication Centre (AuC) • Home Location Register (HLR) • Visitor Location Register (VLR) • Equipment the function of the Operation and Maintenance Centre (OMC).



Satellite Network Equipment • List the main functions provided by a Major City Earth Station (MCES). • List the main functions provided by a minor earth station. • List the main functions provided by a transportable earth station. Transmission Network Equipment • List and describe the main components of a co-axial cable transmission network. • List and describe the main components of a digital microwave radio transmission network. • List and describe the main components of a fibre optic transmission network. NE420 Network Architecture 4 Assumed NE320 Network Architecture Switching Network Architecture • Define local exchange functions. • Describe hierarchical PSTN architectures. • Describe star and flat switching networks. • Describe international switching networks. • Define minor and major switching centre functions. • Define tandem (trunk) exchange functions. • Draw a PSTN indicating the interconnection of the elements listed above. GSM Network Architecture Draw and describe the interconnection of the four major components and associated sub-systems of a GSM network, namely,



Satellite Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of the Home Access Community Broadcast • Satellite Service (HACBSS). • Draw and describe the distribution of television programmes via satellite. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a WAN via satellite. Transmission Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of a co-axial cable transmission network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a digital microwave radio transmission • network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a fibre optic transmission network.



OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.







• Perform basic first-aid functions in an emergency including EAR and CPR. PE410 Personal Skills 4 • Time Management • Increase effective use of time by applying time management skills and systems • Analyse present time usage • List time wasters and describe ways of overcoming them • Set goals • Prioritise tasks and delegate appropriately • Initiate a workable plan for organisation for daily and long term goals • List the communication factors that assist time management • Outline how correct assertiveness skills can assist time management. PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3







RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 General Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the following filter types, low pass, high pass, band stop, notch, band pass. • Explain the terms, insertion loss, bandwidth, shape factor, phase response. Describe the Principles of Series Resonant Circuits as Band Pass Filters • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a series resonant band pass filter. • Describe the principles of parallel resonant circuits as band pass filters. • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a parallel resonant band pass filters. • Explain the operation of filters using more than one resonant circuit. Specialised Band Pass Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the basic operating principle and characteristics of, quartz crystals, crystal filters, mechanical filters,

comb filters, SAW filters and cavity resonators. Oscillators Used in Radio Communication Systems • Explain the basic requirements for oscillation. • Describe the operation of LC oscillator circuits–Hartley and Colpitts. • Describe the operation of crystal oscillators–Pierce and Miller types. • Explain the operation of Phase-Locked loop block diagrams. • Describe the use of a programmable frequency-divider to provide frequency synthesis. Amplitude and Frequency Modulation Techniques • List the frequency products at the output of an amplitude modulator. • Draw the time and frequency domain diagrams of an AM signal. • Calculate the AM modulation index. • List the frequency products at the output of a frequency modulator. • Determine the bandwidth of an FM signal. • Sketch the time and frequency domain diagrams for an FM signal. • State the carrier deviations for TV sound, FM broadcasting, two-way radio and analogmobilephones. AM Transmitters and Receivers • Draw the block diagram of an AM high level modulated transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an AM superheterodyne receiver (single conversion). • List the function of each block in the receiver and output frequencies. • Calculate the output power from an AM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated.



FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. SU420 Leadership 4 Covered in SU320 Workplace Leadership SU430 Quality Procedures 4 Covered in SU330 Quality procedures SU440 Conflict Resolution 4 • Acceptance of conflict in the workplace • Seeking information • Conflict theory – values, attitudes and beliefs • Strategies for dealing with conflict – Group processes, problem solving techniques, decision making techniques • Management awareness – cultural differences, change imposition effects, industrial democracy. Note: See also IN630 - Negotiation 6 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 Major Telephony System Components • List and describe the basic functions of the telephone set. • Draw the block diagram of a basic telephone, and describe the functions of the following sections:- ringer,






operation.

Electronic Telephones • Describe the basic differences in components between a conventional telephone and an electronic telephone.

List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone.

Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set.



TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 Hazard Management Operations • Describe safe working practices in the work environment. • Identify electrical/chemical/electromagnetic radiation hazards in the work environment. • State the correct procedures for the isolation of an electrical circuit. • Describe safe and appropriate methods of rescuing a shock victim who is in contact with energised conductors





reported/detected to when it is rectified. • Determine the functions of a test desk in dealing with fault correction. • Determine some types of network alarms that may used even before a system becomes faulty. TE450 System Security 4 System Security, Privacy and Reliability Exchange Equipment • Explain the need for duplication of common equipment in the exchange, ways that the system detects a failed

partner in a duplicated system and transfers the operation to the remaining working module. • Define the terms Duplicate Synchronous Control, Duplicate Cold Stand-by Control, and Duplicate Hot Stand-

by Control. • Discuss ways for error detection and correction in digital exchanges. • Describe the importance of an accurate master clock in order to maintain system synchronisation. GSM Equipment • Describe how digital phones encrypt (code) their transmission to provide voice security. • Describe how digital phones use authentication and SIM card information to provide access security. • Describe the use of the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) to protect against a stolen mobile phone. Power Supplies • List possible methods of providing power back-up in the event of a mains failure (include battery, solar cells,

no-break power plant, UPS etc). • Discuss the possibility of using a trailer mounted diesel motor generator set in the case of extended mains

power failure. General • Discuss methods of reducing malicious damage to telecommunications equipment.
















output. Complex Signal Flow Path Test Analysis • List applications of each of the six signal flow paths in telecommunications. • Discuss test analysis methods of each of the six signal flow paths TR410 Transmission Theory 4 Differentiate Analog and Digital Signals • Analog





Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 • Describe the principle theories of light • Perform calculations on wavelength, velocity and refraction of light • Describe chromatic dispersion Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for safety when working with fibre optics and lasers. • Apply the theory to optical fibre propagation • Identify sources of loss in optical fibres • Identify the advantages of fibre optics compared to metallic and wireless techniques. • Describe degradation of signals in fibres • Describe fibre optic types Lasers/Leds • Describe the difference between a laser and a led. • Illustrate the spectrum, beamwidth and other characteristics of lasers and eds • Describe modulation types used with Lasers and leds. Fibre Optic Systems • Explain the main uses of lasers and leds with optical fibres • Identify the main optical components of modern optical transmission systems. Systems • Identify and explain the SDH system • Explain the advantages of SDH or SONET over PDH. Skill • Perform splicing • Perform Power measurements and loss measurements. TR450 Signalling Principles 4 Basic Principle of Signalling • Outline the basic concepts of signalling in telecommunications networks, its purpose and functions, and identify




signalling (CCS). • Explain the signalling procedure in a PCM system (TS16).



ISDN Overview • Briefly explain the three types of services for end-to-end communications available in an ISDN. • Identify the reference points and functional groupings of ISDN user-network interface and relate the functions




over the SS7 network.






UNIT ICTTC086B – Undertake routine maintenance of the telecommunications network



1 Identify level of maintenance to be undertaken

1 Reason for maintenance is established

2 Equipment to be maintained is identified

3 Documentation relating to the equipment is obtained

4 Routines required are identified

2 Plan/prepare routine maintenance 1 Network stability and general condition is assessed prior to routines and details of network health recorded

2 Impact of the routine is assessed and analysed and depending on outcome, decision is made on wheteher to activate the routine

3 Required resources are identified , obtained and allocated

4 Timing of the routines is established

5 Tools and test equipment are obtained and checked for appropriateness and accuracy

6 Documentation relating to the equipment is obtained

7 Detailed plans for routines are established and discussed with all relevant areas

8 Appointments are made with customers where equipment to be maintained is located on customer premises

3 Undertake maintenance 1 Contacts are made and maintained with network management centre during the running of the routines

2 Routines are undertaken in accordance with documented instructions

3 All precautions are taken to protect the network during the routines

4 Data gathered is recorded on the relevant forms

5 All problems are identified for further action



6 Work is completed in a manner which is safe to self, fellow workers and the public at large

4 Initiate corrective action as required 1 Outcomes/outputs of routines are checked to ensure they are in accordance with specification

2 Checks are made to ensure that preprogrammed software routines did in fact run

3 Problems identified are analysed for immediate or likely impact

4 Problems/faults are diagnosed and repaired within capability

5 Any necessary outages are approved by the appropriate enterprise authority and are undertaken in accordance with prescribed enterprise procedures

6 Repair action is initiated or escalated where problem is causing or likely to cause problems in the immediate future and repair is beyond capability

7 Other problems are identified and logged for future action

8 Alarms are checked to ensure routines did not generate further problems

5 Generate report 1 Routine logs are completed and stored for future reference

2 Records are completed correctly and signed in accordance with enterprise policy

3 Trending data both in relation to performance and faults is updated

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Maintenance routines may be undertaken as prescribed by equipment suppliers and for preventative, safety, enterprise requirements. They are usually prescribed in detail in vendor and/or enterprise documents and can be undertaken on a daily, weekly, monthly, 6 monthly and annual basis. Routines are usually undertaken, when traffic on the network is at a minimum.



Routines may be conducted manually or are automatically built into the system software and can cover from total system through to and individual pair of wires Network health includes: peak capacity, alarms, current faults, processor load Data gathered during routine maintenance can include: battery voltages, rectifier problems, rodent damage, occupational health and safety conditions, vandalism, general housekeeping, environmental problems, alarms and alarm systems,calls, call failure rate, blocked circuits, known fault conditions, emergency power plant Resources can include: People, finance, materials, tools and test equipment Organisational areas involved with routine maintenance include both network and element management staff, customers and field personnel. SDH technology places transmission equipment in customers premises, Network faults and problems can be identified through alarms, customer complaints, other carriers and service providers, routine maintenance, billing errors Faults may occur in either the software and/or hardware components of the equipment. Hardware faults are usually repaired by field personnel under instruction Tests may include; DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements, power and environmental conditions including emergency power plant Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer Tools may include: screwdrivers, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, soldering iron, insulation displacement tools, cable termination tools, Transmission medium may be: Fibre, cable, radio, satellite, microwave, video Alarms are centralised and relate to each single element of the network A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support Records may be maintained manually or electronically Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Assessment candidates will provide evidence of their performance and underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Candidate submits hard copies of: • At least three separate written reports showing how candidate identified maintenance required • At least three separate written test results from a range of the following: equipment and facilities checks, test of

backup equipment such as batteries, filters, system backup and alarms. Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • demonstrating safe use of general hand and power tools, and of general equipment normally related to these

tasks • applying all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Mentor/assessor observes candidate's competency in: • interaction with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • customer focus and consideration of customer needs within service assurance guidelines Candidate delivers oral reports to mentor/assessor explaining at least three separate repairs of faults/problems in system, equipment and facilities–at least one each of hardware and software, signed off by the mentor. Candidate submits hard copy of three sets of accurately completed documentation including: warranty details, system log books, pricing and billing forms.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI420 Digital Switching 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 NE410 Network Equipment 4 NE420 Network Architecture 4 NE430 Switch Networks OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 SU430 Quality Procedures 4 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TF410 Test Equipment 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR440 Narrow and Wideband Principles 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:












material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 • Identify and follow prescribed legal and enterprise procedures for maintenance and repairs. • Inform customers of maintenance and repair procedures • Aim to minimise customer impact. • Describe customer options for service and repairs • Explain to a customer in a competent and professional manner how a quote is derived. • State applicable charges • Update fault history records. DI410 Digital Theory 4 • Identify various digital logic Integrated Circuits and MSI packages. Outline the operation , their applications




diagnose and identify affected elements, given a variety of common faults. Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology



DI420 Digital Switching 4 Assumed DI410Digital Theory Time Division Techniques • Describe time division multiplexing, timeslot interchange. • Explain PCM encoding, E1 (32 Channel) and T1 (24 Channel) frame and multiframe structures. • Explain the difference between A law and U law encoding. • Explain the reason for synchronization and frame alignment of incoming PCM bit streams to a digital switch. • Describe the process of signalling information extraction or insertion from PCM streams at switch boundary. Space Division Technique • Explain the process of space division multiplexing and de multiplexing. Switch Elements • Describe the practical implementation of a time switch. • Explain operation of speech memory and connection memory elements of time switching. • Describe the practical implementation of digital space switch, explain the function of space memory and digital

multiplexing / de multiplexing. Combination of Time and Space Switching • Explain the need for multistage switch matrixes. • Explain the blocking probability with TS or ST 2 stage switches, and the need for TST or STS or TSSST. • Compare the performances and applications for TST or STS switch matrixes in digital switching systems. Practical Digital Switch Stages of Digital Switching Systems • Examine the operation control of TST switches, of (for example) Nortel DMS Supernode or Ericcson AXE10,

including path search, switch block security, processor / switchblock control messages, switched control bits. • Examine the operation of a multistage self searching switch matrix of combined T/S element as in Alcatel

System 12, including switched control message protocol. DI430 Digital Radio 4 Analog Radio Transmissions and Digital Radio Transmissions • List the advantages of analog radio transmission. • List the advantages of digital radio transmission. Digital Modulation Techniques for Radio Transmission • Use diagrams to describe ASK, FSK, PSK,4PSK, 8PSK, 16QAM and 64QAM • Modulation techniques. • List the advantages of the various digital modulation techniques. Factors which Influence System Implementation in Digital Radio Networks • Define the term 'free space path loss' (FSPL). • Calculate the FSPL of a single hop radio link. • Define the term 'system gain'. • Calculate the received signal level of a radio link. • Define the term 'bit-error-rate' (BER). • Determine, from a graph, the fade margin of a digital radio system and still maintain a specified BER. • Explain, using diagrams, time, space and frequency diversity. The Radio Propagation Phenomena Which Affect Space Wave Paths • Explain, using a diagram, how the space wave consists of two waves, the direct and • reflected. • State advantages of space wave over rugged terrain compared to over water or desert. • List the types of fading encountered in UHF/SHF radio systems. • State the cause and effect on digital radio performance of each type of fading.



Basic Commissioning Tests of Digital UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Measure transmitter carrier frequency. • Measure transmitter carrier power. • Measure AGC level and determine receiver input signal level. • Measure receiver input level. • Measure BER. EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 • Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination IN420 Teamwork 4 Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members. NE410 Network Equipment 4 Assumed NE310 Network Equipment 3 Switching Network Equipment List and describe the seven common hardware and software characteristics of digital switching systems, namely:




Satellite Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of the Home Access Community Broadcast • Satellite Service (HACBSS). • Draw and describe the distribution of television programmes via satellite. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a WAN via satellite. Transmission Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of a co-axial cable transmission network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a digital microwave radio transmission • network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a fibre optic transmission network. NE430 Switch Networks Covered in the Switching series (SW codes) OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.







• Perform basic first-aid functions in an emergency including EAR and CPR. PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3







RA410 Antennas 4 Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields. Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate. Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors. Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and




Describe the Principles of Series Resonant Circuits as Band Pass Filters • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a series resonant band pass filter. • Describe the principles of parallel resonant circuits as band pass filters. • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a parallel resonant band pass filters. • Explain the operation of filters using more than one resonant circuit. Specialised Band Pass Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the basic operating principle and characteristics of, quartz crystals, crystal filters, mechanical filters,

comb filters, SAW filters and cavity resonators. Oscillators Used in Radio Communication Systems • Explain the basic requirements for oscillation. • Describe the operation of LC oscillator circuits–Hartley and Colpitts. • Describe the operation of crystal oscillators–Pierce and Miller types. • Explain the operation of Phase-Locked loop block diagrams. • Describe the use of a programmable frequency-divider to provide frequency synthesis. Amplitude and Frequency Modulation Techniques • List the frequency products at the output of an amplitude modulator. • Draw the time and frequency domain diagrams of an AM signal. • Calculate the AM modulation index. • List the frequency products at the output of a frequency modulator. • Determine the bandwidth of an FM signal. • Sketch the time and frequency domain diagrams for an FM signal. • State the carrier deviations for TV sound, FM broadcasting, two-way radio and analog mobile phones. AM Transmitters and Receivers • Draw the block diagram of an AM high level modulated transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an AM superheterodyne receiver (single conversion). • List the function of each block in the receiver and output frequencies. • Calculate the output power from an AM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. SU430 Quality Procedures 4 Covered in SU330 Quality procedures TE410 Basic Telephony 4 Major Telephony System Components • List and describe the basic functions of the telephone set. • Draw the block diagram of a basic telephone, and describe the functions of the following sections:- ringer,


rocking armature receiver, and the piezoelectric receiver. • Explain the difference between pulse(decadic) dialing and tone dialing. • Test the operation and observe the waveform of a pulse dialer, and a tone dialer.



Telephony System Operations • State what is a hybrid, and describe its function. • Test the performance of a hybrid and show isolation across the hybrid when properly balanced. Show how this





List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone. Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set. TF410 Test Equipment 4 Electronic Test Equipment (Advanced) • Digital storage oscilloscope (DSO).













• Explain application of OTDR in fibre optic cabling commissioning and fault finding.









Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR410 Transmission Theory 4 Differentiate Analog and Digital Signals • Analog





Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR440 Narrow and Wideband Principles 4 Characteristics and Categories of Telecommunication Systems • Define 'Transmitter/Receiver/Media' • Describe the meaning of 'wireline' and optical fibre • Describe main characteristics and components of wire-pair, coaxial cable, waveguide and optical fibre media. • Describe the functional blocks for VHF, UHF and SHF terrestrial radio systems. • Describe the functional blocks for satellite systems. • Describe the functional blocks for mobile telephone and data systems. Typical Signal Parameters of a Telecommunication Systems • List key analogue parameters which may affect signal quality, e.g., loss, noise, delay, bandwidth. • Describe the effects of Signal-to-Noise Ratio on Voice, Data and Image signals (noise tolerance). • State the relationship between power ratio and the decibel (dB) and the expression of power levels in dBm.


networks. • Describe digital networks, including switching and transmission of signals in two-state form • Describe sampling, quantising and encoding techniques. • State the principle of time-division multiplexing, including synchronisation and alignment concepts. • Recognise the basic architecture of a PCM-based 4-wire digital switching system. • State the role and main functional blocks of a typical 'pair-gain' system in the Customer-Access network.






UNIT ICTTC087B - Undertake remote repair of network faults



1 Establish context and background information

1 Alarm conditions are identified and type, location and priority noted

2 Customer information is received and analysed

3 Alarm information is analysed and previous alarm history is gathered to assist with fault identification

4 Previous reports are gathered and used in the fault analysis process

5 Impact of environmental factors is assessed

6 Appropriate design drawings are obtained

7 Appropriate procedural documents relevant to the alarm or customer identified condition are gathered

8 Fault history and trending data are accessed

2 Identify/verify fault 1 Problem is fully discussed with the customer where applicable

2 Remote interrogation is undertaken to further identify the problem where possible

3 Appropriate tests are conducted and results analysed

4 Other associated alarms are monitored

5 Most probable causes of fault are determined from available data and historical trends where available

6 Likely causes are ranked in order of probability to ensure a methodical approach to fault identification is used

7 Ranking of causes work from system wide impacts to specific impacts where relevant to fault

8 Level of service degradation is measured



3 Diagnose faults 1 Approach to fault identification is methodical and suitable for system and problem type

2 Fault is progressively isolated to remove likely variables from assessment

3 Continued existence of problem is verified regularly

4 Fault is identified without undue interruption to other activity and in the shortest time possible

4 Repair fault 1 Options to rectify fault are determined and strategies for repair are established

2 Repair outcomes are determined and strategies developed for achievement

3 Traffic is rerouted during repair if possible

4 Hardware faults are advised to on-site operatives for repair

5 Instructions to on-site personnel for repair are clear and concise and address the problem accurately for repair

6 Software programme is varied and amended as required

7 Data changes are enacted in accordance with specification

8 Equipment is reconfigured and appropriate data reloaded on completion of the repair

9 Customers are fully informed of repair progress where fault is in customer end equipment

10 Unresolved faults are escalated in accordance with established enterprise procedure

5 Document results 1 Advice of fault/problem rectification is provided to all relevant parties including customers

2 New or changed network conditions are recorded and notified to all relevant parties

3 Details relating to any outage caused is recorded and advised as per enterprise procedures

4 Equipment faults are noted, recorded and filed in the appropriate data base for future reference

5 Details as to usage of spare parts are recorded and notified to relevant parties in accordance with enterprise procedure

6 Fault history records are updated

7 Cause and effect studies are undertaken, weaknesses in system or process noted and advised to the relevant body

8 Recommendations for change to system or process are prepared and on forwarded as appropriate

9 Network normalisation checks are undertaken to assess ongoing network health and the likelihood of further problems



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1- remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage, software and data changes Fault escalation procedures are defined by the enterprise and usually relate to appropriate repair times Tests may include: DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements, loopback (transmission only) Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer Tools may include: screwdrivers, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, soldering iron, insulation displacement tools, cable termination tools Transmission medium may be: Fibre, cable, radio, satellite, microwave, video



Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarms could result from: new installation, planned outage, network failure, faulty circuits, security breaches, animal damage Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR,door, over temperature Conditions which may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors Environmental factors may include: weather, disasters, safety issues Conditions that may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors, animal damage Transmission systems are governed by international standards set by the ITU Relevant parties may include: network management centre, vendor, customer, account manager Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law Environment Legislation

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Assessment candidates will provide evidence of their performance and underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor describing—adhering to security procedures related to system access. Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor—demonstrating a methodical approach to fault identification; including use of fault history and ranking of likely causes.



Mentor/assessor observes candidate testing, and candidate submits hard copy of three sets of tests results appropriate to the type of fault identified, and ranging from common to more complex.

Mentor/assessor observes candidate applying enterprise escalation and outage procedures, to include demonstration of all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices.

Mentor/assessor observes candidate giving staff engaged in on-site repair of a Tier X fault clear and precise instructions, including specific instructions designed to avoid circular routing.

Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to interact with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors, including a clear customer focus and consideration of customer needs within service assurance guidelines.

Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor describing—reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and documentation.


Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 IN440 Workplace Networking 4 MA420 Mathematics 4 NE410 Network Equipment 4 NE420 Network Architecture 4 NE430 Switch Networks OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 PE320 Remote Work PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 SC410 Science 4 SU420 Leadership 4 SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 TR430 Modulation Theory 4 TR440 Narrow and Wideband Principles 4 TR450 Signalling Principles 4 TR460 Spectrum Management 4 TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 VO420 Video and Sound Principles 4



CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:




Assumed C0310 Computer Skills 3

• Demonstrate broad knowledge of the operation of personal computers and application programs as they are used in the Telecommunication industry.

• Use peripheral devices and interfaces to a PC in order to down load and up loading files using a data transfer and database software package. e.g. • Configure test gear in order to obtain measurement data. • Record measurements on a proforma in a central data base. • Check against set criteria, gather previous records, produce useable reports to compare and analyse records,





material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data.


Client Interaction

Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction



EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4

Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel.

EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4

Observing policy in workplace operations.

ET420 Amplifiers 4

Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4

• Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as the control signal, and the output signal as being derived from the power supply* as an amplified version of the input signal.






layout, insertion and removal of components, wiring, earthing, supply decoupling and safe power-on sequence. • Devise tests and measurements in order to analyse and verify all the parameters specific to these devices.

IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4

• Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination

IN420 Teamwork 4

Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members.



IN440 Workplace Networking 4 Meeting Procedures and Participation • Determine the meeting's purpose • Recognise the difference between formal and informal meetings • Identify the roles of chairpersons, secretary and member • Draw up and distribute an agenda that covers all the business of the meeting • Record decisions of the meeting clearly and concisely • Use meeting conversation and processes to conduct a structured meeting • Use communication skills and strategies to maintain the smooth running of the meeting • Employ problem solving strategies • Organise the venue and arrange the environment appropriately MA420 Mathematics 4

Assume MA310 Basic Maths & MA410 Basic Maths

Minimum: • Trigonometry • Pythagors • Sin, Cos, and Tan functions

Additional - Select from: • Manipulate surd expressions, use engineering notation, convert units of measurement and demonstrate an









Switching Network Equipment List and describe the seven common hardware and software characteristics of digital switching systems, namely:




Satellite Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of the Home Access Community Broadcast • Satellite Service (HACBSS). • Draw and describe the distribution of television programmes via satellite. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a WAN via satellite. Transmission Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of a co-axial cable transmission network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a digital microwave radio transmission • network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a fibre optic transmission network. NE430 Switch Networks Covered in the Switching series (SW codes) OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.







• Perform basic first-aid functions in an emergency including EAR and CPR.



PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 • Manufacturers specifications




RA410 Antennas 4 Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields. Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate.



Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors. Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and

then set up this antenna using a compass bearing, tiltmeter and a receiver signal strength reading. Faults in VHF, UHF and SHF Antennas and Coaxial and Waveguide Feeders • Perform DC tests on coaxial cables, waveguides and antennas. • Recheck antenna alignment. • Conduct physical checks on antennas, feeders and mountings and recognise potential problems. RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 General Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the following filter types, low pass, high pass, band stop, notch, band pass. • Explain the terms, insertion loss, bandwidth, shape factor, phase response. Describe the Principles of Series Resonant Circuits as Band Pass Filters • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a series resonant band pass filter. • Describe the principles of parallel resonant circuits as band pass filters. • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a parallel resonant band pass filters. • Explain the operation of filters using more than one resonant circuit. Specialised Band Pass Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the basic operating principle and characteristics of, quartz crystals, crystal filters, mechanical filters,




FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. SC410 Science 4 • Demonstrate the ability to make accurate observations and measurement on various physical quantities. Record

results on a logbook, use these to plot graphs. Interpret these results to verify predictable events, and apply to solve practical problems. Develop these skills by investigating the theories of: • forces and motion • elasticity in materials • structures in equilibrium • work and energy • fluids and transport • thermodynamics • mechanical oscillations






SU420 Leadership 4 Covered in SU320 Workplace Leadership SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 Packet Switching and Data Communication • Describe data communication principles via analogue and digital networks. • Explain need for communication protocols. • Describe the OSI layered protocol suite for open systems. Data Multiplexing • Explain the difference between synchronous time division multiplexing and statistical multiplexing. • List advantages and disadvantages of statistical multiplexing. Packet Switching Principles • Explain data segmentation and reassembley. • Compare packet switching with circuit switching and with message switching. • Perform calculations for optimum packet size, and message transmission time. • Define virtual circuit, logical channel, datagram, connectionless and connection oriented procedures. Packet Switch Network Elements • Explain the function of NTU's, PAD's, PAD concentrators, packet switching nodes. Packet Switch Networks • Explain routing and addressing and the differences for virtual circuits and datagrams. • Explain congestion, error recovery and queuing delays










List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone. Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set. TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 Hazard Management Operations • Describe safe working practices in the work environment. • Identify electrical/chemical/electromagnetic radiation hazards in the work environment. • State the correct procedures for the isolation of an electrical circuit. • Describe safe and appropriate methods of rescuing a shock victim who is in contact with energised conductors





reported/detected to when it is rectified. • Determine the functions of a test desk in dealing with fault correction. • Determine some types of network alarms that may used even before a system becomes faulty.









Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 • Describe the principle theories of light • Perform calculations on wavelength, velocity and refraction of light • Describe chromatic dispersion Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for safety when working with fibre optics and lasers. • Apply the theory to optical fibre propagation • Identify sources of loss in optical fibres • Identify the advantages of fibre optics compared to metallic and wireless techniques. • Describe degradation of signals in fibres • Describe fibre optic types Lasers/Leds • Describe the difference between a laser and a led. • Illustrate the spectrum, beamwidth and other characteristics of lasers and eds • Describe modulation types used with Lasers and leds.





networks. • Describe digital networks, including switching and transmission of signals in two-state form • Describe sampling, quantising and encoding techniques. • State the principle of time-division multiplexing, including synchronisation and alignment concepts. • Recognise the basic architecture of a PCM-based 4-wire digital switching system. • State the role and main functional blocks of a typical 'pair-gain' system in the Customer-Access network. TR450 Signalling Principles 4 Basic Principle of Signalling • Outline the basic concepts of signalling in telecommunications networks, its purpose and functions, and identify




signalling (CCS). • Explain the signalling procedure in a PCM system (TS16). ISDN Overview • Briefly explain the three types of services for end-to-end communications available in an ISDN. • Identify the reference points and functional groupings of ISDN user-network interface and relate the functions




over the SS7 network. TR460 Spectrum Management 4 Spectrum Management Overview • Describe the principles behind managing the resource known as the radio spectrum. • Describe the general characteristics and names of the ITU approved radio bands from 30 Hz to 30 GHz • Compare where radio spectrum appears within the entire Electromagnetic Spectrum • Consult a database of allocated frequencies to find the services in use at that frequency.



Filters for Managing Spectrum • Plot the frequency response and Bode approximation of a simple low pass and High pass filter • Explain the terms decade, octave, bandwidth, roll off, delay, phase plot, 3db point • Define roll off characteristics of typical filters (R-C, R-C-L, mechanical, SAW, crystal) • Determine the transfer function for a composite network of two or three single time constant networks. • Sketch the Bode plots for gain and Phase by adding together the Bode plots of gain and phase of each of the







tables. TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 Transmission Hierarchy Overview • Briefly explain the principle of pulse code modulation. • State the Nyquist sampling theorem and the sampling rate for telephony. • State the number of quantising levels for an eight bit PCM system and the data rate for telephony. • Explain, using diagrams, how compounding improves quantising error at low signal levels. • Draw the basic block diagram of a codec (one-way) and indicate which block is the anti-aliasing filter. • State the reasons for using digital line transmission codes and explain RZ, NRZ, AMI, HD3B & CMI line





Overview of SDH • State the meaning of 'synchronous' network. • Recognise the hierarchical structure of SDH. • State the method of accessing 2M Bit/second tributaries in a SDM optical fibre trunk network. • Describe the concept of interworking PDH derived signals across the SDH. • State the advantages and disadvantages of SDH. TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 • Describe the phases of system lifetime • Describe the difference between the operation and support functions • Describe the difference between installation, commissioning and acceptance testing and maintenance • Describe system performance requirements • List test terminology and explain the terms • Describe the levels of maintenance • Explain the purpose of a Quality system • Explain the concepts of standards, calibration and regulation • Explain the purpose of test equipment • Use a test procedure to perform measurements • Produce a test report based on measurement • Perform error analysis computations • Utilise a number of transmission test instruments to perform measurements on BER, S/N, bandwidth, loss and

crosstalk. • Use a OTDR and an optical power meter • Describe conventional instrument and specific test equipment • Use automatic test equipment • Set up and program instrument control to perform a measurement VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 • Describe the differences between analogue and video distribution techniques over common media, such as fibre







UNIT ICTTC088B - Locate and rectify network faults on a first in basis

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths, i.e., cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. All work undertaken on a first in basis is under instruction from the network management/control centre. Responsibility for the fault/problem rests with that centre. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Establish context and background information

1 Details of the alarm and likely fault condition are obtained from alarm centre

2 Customer information is received and analysed

3 Appropriate design drawings are obtained

4 Fault history and trending data are accessed

2 Identify and clarify fault 1 Problem is fully discussed with either the customer or the alarm centre as appropriate

2 All available information is used to identify the problem where appropriate

3 Determine and rank likely causes of fault


2 Most probable causes of fault are determined from available data and historical trends where available

3 Likely causes are ranked in order of probability to ensure a methodical approach to fault identification is used

4 Ranking of causes work from system wide impacts to specific impacts where relevant to fault

5 Strategies for fault repair are established



4 Perform tests 1 Continued existence of problem is confirmed

2 Relevant documentation, tools and test equipment are obtained

3 Tools and test equipment are checked for accuracy, are in safe working order and are modified or reprogrammed as required

4 Cable terminations are checked for completeness

5 A functional test of basic facilities is undertaken


5 Diagnose faults 1 Approach to fault identification is methodical and suitable for system and problem type



4 Site installation records and manufacturers documentation is obtained and reviewed to identify likely solutions

5 Fault is identified without undue interruption to other network activity and in the shortest time possible

6 Fault identification is escalated to a higher level within a specified timeframe

7 Customer is provided with regular progress reports where appropriate

6 Rectify fault 1 Options to rectify fault are determined and discussed with alarm centre as appropriate

2 Faulty parts and/or equipment are identified and replaced or repaired as per service agreement

3 Equipment is reprogrammed if required


5 Unresolved faults are referred to other parties for a second opinion where required

6 Routine checks are undertaken to identify likelihood of further or likely problems



7 Clean up work site as appropriate 1 All tools and equipment are cleaned, adjusted and stored in an accessible location

2 Waste and debris are removed from work site and disposed of in accordance with environmental requirements


4 Changes made to the work area during fault repair are restored to original condition


6 Fault logs are completed in accordance with enterprise policy

7 Fault/alarm centre is notified of fault clearance and checks are made to ensure no active alarms

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation All work undertaken on a first in basis is under instruction from the network management/control centre. Advice to repairer is communicated either by phone or ticket of work, dependent on nature of the problem and its priority



Faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Fault escalation procedures are defined by the enterprise and usually relate to appropriate repair times Tests may include; DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements, transposition of equipment Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer Tools may include: screwdrivers, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, soldering iron, insulation displacement tools, cable termination tools Transmission medium may be: Fibre, cable, radio, satellite, microwave, video Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarms could result from: new installation, planned outage, network failure, faulty circuits, security breaches, animal damage Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR,door, over temperature Conditions which may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors Conditions that may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors, animal damage Transmission systems are governed by international standards set by the ITU Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Assessment candidates will provide evidence of their performance and underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Performance Evidence • Alarm centre fault report, system reports and fault history for at least three faults signed off by the mentor. • Alarm and maintenance printouts. • Oral report of three different action plans delivered to mentor and assessor. • Observation of candidate using test results to confirm existence of three different types of faults by mentor or

assessor. • Observation by mentor or assessor of fault diagnosis technique in at least three different types of faults. • Observation by mentor or assessor of fault rectification in at least three different types of faults. • Accurate logs and documents.


Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 IN320 Teamwork 3 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN440 Workplace Networking 4 MA310 Basic Mathematics 3 NE320 Network Architecture 3 NE430 Switch Networks OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 TE310 Basic Telephony 3 TE420 Outage & Hazard Processes 4 TF410 Test Equipment 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO310 Use of Tools 3 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR430 Modulation Theory 4 TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 US488 Additional Unit Specific Learning VO410 Video Network Techniques 4



CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:




Assumed C0310 Computer Skills 3

• Demonstrate broad knowledge of the operation of personal computers and application programs as they are used in the Telecommunication industry.

• Use peripheral devices and interfaces to a PC in order to down load and up loading files using a data transfer and database software package. e.g. • Configure test gear in order to obtain measurement data. • Record measurements on a proforma in a central data base. • Check against set criteria, gather previous records, produce useable reports to compare and analyse records,





material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data.


Client Interaction

Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction



EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. IN320 Teamwork 3 Work-team Communication • Participate in a small group discussion to reach agreement on a workplace related issue. • Cooperate with team members to plan and prepare a simple job related presentation. • Make the presentations. IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 • Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination IN440 Workplace Networking 4 Meeting Procedures and Participation • Determine the meeting's purpose • Recognise the difference between formal and informal meetings • Identify the roles of chairpersons, secretary and member • Draw up and distribute an agenda that covers all the business of the meeting • Record decisions of the meeting clearly and concisely • Use meeting conversation and processes to conduct a structured meeting • Use communication skills and strategies to maintain the smooth running of the meeting • Employ problem solving strategies • Organise the venue and arrange the environment appropriately MA310 Basic Mathematics 3 Minimum: • Four arithematic functions - with and without a calculator • Fraction arithematic • Metric units • Scientific and Engineering notation • Estimates - length, volume, area • Indices • Geometry - sketches , plans • Solve equations with a single variable



Additional - Select from: • Perform with and without a calculator decimal and fraction arithmetic involving addition, subtraction,


Scientific or Engineering notation. • Estimate length, area and volume of everyday objects. • Apply reasonable rules for rounding off numbers and determining accuracy of measurements • Define and use units of angular measure: Degrees and radians • Trigonometry:- Pythagoras' Theorem, Sine rule, Cosine rule NE320 Network Architecture 3 Telecommunications Network Architecture • Define a network as a pattern or arrangement of intersecting lines. • Define a telecommunications network. • State that networks are traditionally service specific, that is, telephony or data or video. • State that networks are becoming more integrated to ultimately combine telephony and data and video over one

network. • State that there are two categories of networks, public and private. Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a hierarchical PSTN. Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a PABX network . Television Distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a TV distribution network • Via terrestrial and satellite. Pay TV distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Pay TV distribution hybrid • Fibre-cable (HFC) network. Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a GSM network. Packet Switched Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Packet Switched Public • Data Network (PSPDN). Shared Access Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form shared access data networks in LANs using the


Dedicated Data Network Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Digital Data Network (DDN).



NE430 Switch Networks Covered in the Switching series (SW codes) OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 • Select the appropriate tools for the task. • Demonstrate the correct use of hand tools and operation of power tools in order to reduce the risk of injury. • Describe the causes of injuries due to incorrect work practices–ranging from personal behaviour to site



protection to self, fellow workers and the public at large. PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 • Manufacturers specifications




RA410 Antennas 4

Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields.

Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate.

Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors.



Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and


comb filters, SAW filters and cavity resonators. Oscillators Used in Radio Communication Systems • Explain the basic requirements for oscillation. • Describe the operation of LC oscillator circuits–Hartley and Colpitts. • Describe the operation of crystal oscillators–Pierce and Miller types. • Explain the operation of Phase-Locked loop block diagrams. • Describe the use of a programmable frequency-divider to provide frequency synthesis. Amplitude and Frequency Modulation Techniques • List the frequency products at the output of an amplitude modulator. • Draw the time and frequency domain diagrams of an AM signal. • Calculate the AM modulation index. • List the frequency products at the output of a frequency modulator. • Determine the bandwidth of an FM signal. • Sketch the time and frequency domain diagrams for an FM signal. • State the carrier deviations for TV sound, FM broadcasting, two-way radio and analogmobilephones. AM Transmitters and Receivers • Draw the block diagram of an AM high level modulated transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an AM superheterodyne receiver (single conversion). • List the function of each block in the receiver and output frequencies. • Calculate the output power from an AM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated.



SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 Packet Switching and Data Communication • Describe data communication principles via analogue and digital networks. • Explain need for communication protocols. • Describe the OSI layered protocol suite for open systems. Data Multiplexing • Explain the difference between synchronous time division multiplexing and statistical multiplexing. • List advantages and disadvantages of statistical multiplexing. Packet Switching Principles • Explain data segmentation and reassembley. • Compare packet switching with circuit switching and with message switching. • Perform calculations for optimum packet size, and message transmission time. • Define virtual circuit, logical channel, datagram, connectionless and connection oriented procedures. Packet Switch Network Elements • Explain the function of NTU's, PAD's, PAD concentrators, packet switching nodes. Packet Switch Networks • Explain routing and addressing and the differences for virtual circuits and datagrams. • Explain congestion, error recovery and queuing delays TE310 Basic Telephony 3 Major Telephony System Components • List the three categories of information signals which can be carried in a telecommunications system. • List the four main roles for an electronic telecommunications system. • Sketch and label the block diagram of a basic voice telephone communications system consisting of handsets,

switches, transmission media. Specific System Components • Sketch and label the block diagram of a basic data communications system consisting of DTE's, MUX's,

DEMUX's, transmission media. • Define the following:- local loop, local switch (CO), tandem (toll) switch, transmitter, receiver, modulator,

demodulator, DTE, CPE, MUX/DEMUX. Specialised Telephony Systems • Draw a simplified block diagram of a satellite communications system showing the major functional sections,

and describe the basic operation of the satellite communication system • Draw a simplified block diagram of a mobile telephone system showing the major functional sections, and

describe the basic operation of the mobile telephone system. Functions Telephony System Technology • Describe the terms 'transmission' and 'switching' as applied to a telecommunications system. • List and describe the types of transmission media used for information transfer. • State the characteristics of each transmission medium, and describe the type of medium which may be used by

each form of information transmission.



TE420 Outage & Hazard Processes 4 Hazard Management Operations • Describe safe working practices in the work environment. • Identify electrical/chemical/electromagnetic radiation hazards in the work environment. • State the correct procedures for the isolation of an electrical circuit. • Describe safe and appropriate methods of rescuing a shock victim who is in contact with energised conductors





reported/detected to when it is rectified. • Determine the functions of a test desk in dealing with fault correction. • Determine some types of network alarms that may used even before a system becomes faulty. TF410 Test Equipment 4 Electronic Test Equipment (Advanced) • Digital storage oscilloscope (DSO).















• Explain application of OTDR in fibre optic cabling commissioning and fault finding. TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 Digital Circuitry Testing And Diagnosis • Explain that digital system level test analysis involves isolating the fault to one part of the system and may













output. Complex Signal Flow Path Test Analysis • List applications of each of the six signal flow paths in telecommunications. • Discuss test analysis methods of each of the six signal flow paths



TO310 Use of Tools 3 Basic Hand Tools • Identify a range of general hand tools, such as:




• Applications of basic hand tools. • State typical applications of general hand tools listed. • Demonstrate the correct procedure for using general hand tools listed. TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 Anti-static Protection in the Telecommunications Industry • State that anti-static protection in this topic is limited to non-radio applications. • List the phenomena that are a hazard to telecommunications equipment and personnel, namely:






can be a varistor, bi-directional diode or PTC resistor. • Describe the third level of line protection as a complex combination of GDTs, transient suppressors and filters.



Isolation of Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) • State that all CPE which attaches to the mains and has a line connection is required to have line isolation,







Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR430 Modulation Theory 4 Describe the Communication System • Manipulate frequency and wavelength relationships • Describe the freq spectrum • Identify various communication mediums • Describe noise and its effects



Modulation Concepts • Analyse signals in the time and frequency domains • Define linier modulation • Describe AM/SSB/DSB and VSB signals • Perform basic calculations on non linier modulation signals • Construct and explain the operation of linier modulation circuits • Interpret spectral and time domain waveforms of linier modulated signals • Describe non linier modulation • Describe typical non linier modulation circuits • Perform basic calculations on non linier modulated signals Demodulation Concepts • Describe demodulation • Identify and describe demodulator circuits Multiplexing • Identify and describe the basic multiplexing methods Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation using PCM • Analyse PCM performance • Compare digital and analog signals Noise • Describe methods of characterising noise • Describe the effect of noise on analog and digital signals. • Perform basic calculations on noise • Perform noise measurements TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 Transmission Hierarchy Overview • Briefly explain the principle of pulse code modulation. • State the Nyquist sampling theorem and the sampling rate for telephony. • State the number of quantising levels for an eight bit PCM system and the data rate for telephony. • Explain, using diagrams, how compounding improves quantising error at low signal levels. • Draw the basic block diagram of a codec (one-way) and indicate which block is the anti-aliasing filter. • State the reasons for using digital line transmission codes and explain RZ, NRZ, AMI, HD3B & CMI line





Overview of SDH • State the meaning of 'synchronous' network. • Recognise the hierarchical structure of SDH. • State the method of accessing 2M Bit/second tributaries in a SDM optical fibre trunk network. • Describe the concept of interworking PDH derived signals across the SDH. • State the advantages and disadvantages of SDH. US488 Additional Unit Specific Learning RTO to determine content relevant to workplace operations. VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 • Describe the differences between analogue and video distribution techniques over common media, such as fibre

and metallic circuits • Describe standards for transmission of digital video signals over the telecommunications network. • Describe video distribution techniques • Describe the HFC system • Describe satellite systems • Describe typical digital video switching equipment and functions • Investigate and write a small report on current video switching equipment and techniques • Install and connect two items of video distribution equipment. Sources may be work or a teaching laboratory.






UNIT ICTTC089B - Repair and replace telecommunications network hardware

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. All work undertaken on site is under instruction from the network management/control centre. Responsibility for the fault/problem rests with that centre. Unit 89 covers work at escalation tier 1. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units Units ICTTC088B and ICTTC090B cover similar work at escalation tiers 2 and 3.


1 Identify and clarify fault 1 Problem is fully discussed with alarm centre

2 Location of the problem is clearly identified

3 Nature of repair/replacement is clearly understood

4 Clarity of instruction is sought from alarm centre personnel as required

2 Prepare for fault/problem repair 1 Appropriate parts are obtained and checked for suitability

2 Tools and documentation are obtained and checked to be in good working order

3 Anti static precautions are taken in accordance with recommended practices

4 Hardware replacement arrangements and impact are assessed and discussed with alarm centre

3 Rectify fault 1 Faulty parts and or equipment are replaced as instructed

2 Equipment repair is undertaken as directed by alarm centre staff

3 Problems with repair replacement are discussed with alarm centre staff at all stages through the process

4 Tests are undertaken in accordance with directions to ensure satisfactory repair

5 Further discussions ensue with alarm staff where repair proves unsatisfactory



4 Clean up work site 1 All tools and equipment are cleaned, adjusted and stored in an accessible location

2 Waste and debris are removed from work site and disposed of in accordance with environmental requirements

3 Obsolete equipment is recovered, packaged receipted and returned to appropriate point for refurbishment or disposal


5 Changes made to the work area during fault repair are restored to the customers satisfaction

5 Complete administrative work 1 Documentation relating to work undertaken is prepared and filed in the event of problem escalation

2 All records relating to the job are completed and signed in accordance with enterprise policy

3 Details of parts used are recorded and action taken to provide replacement in accordance with enterprise policy

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS All faults and problems are identified within specified alarm centres. Personnel in these centres diagnose the problem and in the case of hardware problems within a switching centre, personnel are informed of the need for repair and usually guide the appropriate repair personnel through the problem. Faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Tools may include: screwdrivers, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, soldering iron, insulation displacement tools, cable termination tools, lap top computers, circuit board puller, multi meter, plug separator Parts may consist of; printed circuit boards, batteries, fuses, magnetic media, cables, fan units



Tests could include: phone calls, strapping, switch setting, voltage measurement Variables that may impact on hardware faults may include: recent additions to system, building works, operator error, power supply, software problems, time of fault, atmospheric conditions, weather, vandalism Hardware faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards, card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Mentor, enterprise specific documentation–covering procedures and practices, vendor documentation, enterprise specific systems–information systems, operations and maintenance systems including alarms, test instruments–see range of variables, tools–see range of variables Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence • Print out of fault record. • Interaction with enterprise personnel. • Observation by mentor/assessor of rectification strategy development. • Work in accordance with enterprise procedures. • Observation by mentor/assessor of rectification of Tier 1 fault within service assurance guidelines. • Observation by mentor/assessor of demonstrated good physical housekeeping. • A fault rectification report including enterprise common fault code, time taken for service restoration.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI310 Communication 3 CO310 Computer Skills 3 CS310 Customer Relations 3 EN310 Enterprise Policy and Practice 3 EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 IN320 Teamwork 3 MA320 Mathematics 3 NE310 Network Equipment 3 OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 TE310 Basic Telephony 3 TF310 Test Equipment 3 TF330 Fault Finding 3 TO310 Use of Tools 3 TO320 Anti-static Procedures 3 CI310 Communication 3 Communicate • Identify how communication takes place • Select an appropriate communication channel • Recognise the barriers to communication • Interpret and comprehend information • Use non-discriminatory language Listen • Develop active listening skills • Eliminate bad listening habits Write • Draft clear, concise written communication with attention to use of words, sentences, grammar and expression • Correctly prepare different forms of short business communication including memos, letters, facsimiles and e-





CO310 Computer Skills 3 • State the basic features, facilities, fundamental hardware and the basic operational procedures of a typical PC. • Operate a keyboard using typing techniques and practiced manual skills. • Recognise and use terminology associated with word processing and file management. • Access the Internet to retrieve information and use e-mail for communication. • Access an established database file, use appropriate software functions to search, sort and select data.





CS310 Customer Relations 3 Dealing with Customers and Clients • Identify the needs of the customer/client. • Adopt communication that is consistent with customer needs. • Provide information regarding facilities, services and products to customers and clients. • Service customers according to workplace standards and organisation policy. • Use a telephone effectively to interact with clients. • Deal appropriately with a difficult situation involving a dissatisfied customer. • Keep accurate customer records using the appropriate organisation documentation. EN310 Enterprise Policy and Practice 3 Policy and practice implications for competency related outcomes. EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 Information systems related directly to recording competency unit outcomes. IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 Create a Positive Communication Climate • Interact in a supportive way • Use assertive communication • Construct "I" statements • Use different types of feedback appropriately • Give accurate, clear and comprehensive instructions • Prepare different types of questions • Follow a set of instructions. Develop Non-verbal Skills • Analyse non-verbal communication • Use body language to communicate • Promote a prompt, positive, professional image • Send corporate messages • Recognise cultural differences and avoid gender bias.



IN320 Teamwork 3 Work-team Communication • Participate in a small group discussion to reach agreement on a workplace related issue. • Cooperate with team members to plan and prepare a simple job related presentation. • Make the presentations. MA320 Mathematics 3 Minimum: • Use charts, graphs and tables to analyse data • Use paper and electronic spreadsheets to record information • Estimate and measure lengths, volumes and area Additional - Select from: • Use charts and graphs to obtain data / information: tally, histogram, pie • Use charts and graphs to present data / information: tally, histogram, pie • Use tables to obtain required information: conversion, nomogram • Use paper and electronic spreadsheets to record information: Excel, Works, Lotus or equivalent • Use co-ordinate geometry: Cartesian • Solve linear equations in 2 variables • Plot linear and quadratic information on graphs • Sketch objects • Sketch visualisations of objects in plan and elevation • Use geometry to interpret simple plans: parallel lines, interior angles, opposite angles • Use geometry to estimate areas enclosed by triangles: Cosine rule, sine rule, ½.b.h • Use circumference formula to calculate length of circumference, partial circumference: degrees and radians • Use volume formulas: cube, cylinder, sphere, cone, pyramids, cubic centimetres, litres, cubic metres • Estimate and measure volumes of various common objects and piles of material: litres, cubic metres. • Use co-ordinate geometry and terms: Polar, azimuth, elevation • Plot data on polar paper • Interpret tables for locating geostationary satellites and aiming receiving dishes • Interpret tables for locating LEO satellites and tracking


• List typical telecommunications networks and associated basic equipment elements and briefly describe their characteristics:

• Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) • Television Distribution • Pay TV • Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN)





• Packet/dedicated data network • Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)



OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 • Select the appropriate tools for the task. • Demonstrate the correct use of hand tools and operation of power tools in order to reduce the risk of injury. • Describe the causes of injuries due to incorrect work practices–ranging from personal behaviour to site



protection to self, fellow workers and the public at large. PS310 Plans and Specifications 3 Types of plans:






RA310 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 3 Assumed RA210 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards and Safe Working Practices at Radio Sites • Describe the electromagnetic wave. • Differentiate between and state the health risks of ionising and non-ionising radiation. • State safe levels of exposure to electromagnetic radiation. • State safe working practices when working with or near radio transmitting equipment. • Recognise hazard signs and need for barriers where safe levels may be exceeded. Applications of Radio Communication in Systems Telecommunications Networks • Draw the model diagram of a basic radio communication system. • Define the terms 'terrestrial', 'simplex', 'half-duplex' and 'full-duplex'. • List the types of radio systems found in telecommunications networks.



Requirements for Modulation • Define the term baseband. • Sketch typical baseband signals in both time and frequency domains. • List the frequency bands found in the radio frequency spectrum. • State the bands used for telecommunications and commercial radio systems. • Describe the relationship between baseband signal and bandwidth. • List the needs for modulation in radio transmission systems. Effects of Noise on a Radio Transmission System • Describe the term 'signal-to-noise' ratio. • List the noise types found in radio systems. • Describe the effects of noise on a radio transmission system. • Describe the methods of overcoming the effects of noise in a radio system. Microwave Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define the meaning of the terms 'drop and insert', 'unprotected', 'cold standby','hot stand by', 'twin-path' and

'N+1'. • Draw block diagrams of microwave radio relay systems incorporating the above terms. • Briefly describe the antenna requirements for a microwave radio system. Satellite Radio Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • Define a communications satellite and a satellite communication system. • Explain the terms 'uplink', 'downlink', 'transponders', 'footprint' and 'earth station'. Cellular phone Communication Systems • List frequency bands used. • State the benefits of cellular radio. • Define the terms 'cell', 'cell splitting' and 'frequency re-use'. • Draw the basic block diagram of a cellular phone interconnection with the PSTN. TE310 Basic Telephony 3 Major Telephony System Components • List the three categories of information signals which can be carried in a telecommunications system. • List the four main roles for an electronic telecommunications system. • Sketch and label the block diagram of a basic voice telephone communications system consisting of handsets,

switches, transmission media. Specific System Components • Sketch and label the block diagram of a basic data communications system consisting of DTE's, MUX's,

DEMUX's, transmission media. • Define the following:- local loop, local switch (CO), tandem (toll) switch, transmitter, receiver, modulator,

demodulator, DTE, CPE, MUX/DEMUX. Specialised Telephony Systems • Draw a simplified block diagram of a satellite communications system showing the major functional sections,

and describe the basic operation of the satellite communication system • Draw a simplified block diagram of a mobile telephone system showing the major functional sections, and

describe the basic operation of the mobile telephone system. Functions Telephony System Technology • Describe the terms 'transmission' and 'switching' as applied to a telecommunications system. • List and describe the types of transmission media used for information transfer. • State the characteristics of each transmission medium, and describe the type of medium which may be used by

each form of information transmission.



















TF330 Fault Finding 3 Responsibility for Fault Repairs • Explain that if the organisation manages its own telecommunications system it has to fix the faults or contract

someone to do it. • Explain that if the carrier manages the network it is their problem when they know about it. • Discuss the demarcation problems at the user/carrier interface and at the interfaces between carriers.



The Telecommunications Carrier Fault Finding Process • List the steps in the fault finding process, namely,





schematic and then testing the signal path. • Examine the usefulness of a manufactured supplied fault finding flow chart. • Examine the usefulness of a fault finding flow chart prepared by the technician. TO310 Use of Tools 3 Basic Hand Tools • Identify a range of general hand tools, such as:









UNIT ICTTC090B - Analyse and organise repair of complex telecommunications network faults



1 Establish background information 1 Information provided by first in fault repairer as to action taken and subsequent result identified is analysed

2 Fault history is obtained and examined in order to establish any fault patterns

3 All available data is obtained and used to assist with fault diagnosis

4 Problem is discussed with other engineering and technical personnel and strategies developed for identification and repair

5 Problem is discussed in detail with the customer as required

2 Obtain suitable fault testing tools and equipment

1 Tools and test equipment relevant to the identified system type and fault are obtained

2 Equipment is setup in accordance with manufacturers specifications, checked to be accurate and in safe working order and modified or reprogrammed as required

3 Diagnose faults 1 Approach to fault identification is methodical and suitable for system and problem type and takes into account action taken on a first in basis



4 Fault is identified with minimum inconvenience to other network activity, in the shortest time possible

5 Customer/network management centre is provided with regular progress reports where required

6 Fault identification is escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

7 Any necessary system downtime is negotiated with network management centre



4 Rectify fault 1 Options to rectify fault including any system downtime are determined and presented to network management centre


3 Fault is rectified totally, partially or temporary solution provided

4 Faulty parts and/or equipment are identified and arrangements made for replacement or repair

5 Equipment is reprogrammed as required


7 Repair is performed under network management guidance as required

8 Escalation processes are activated where required in accordance with enterprise procedure

9 Routine checks are undertaken to identify likelihood of further or likely problems

10 Further problems are either attended to or brought to attention of relevant enterprise personnel for decision as to action necessary

11 All parties including customers are notified of fault/problem rectification

5 Document fault details 1 Details of fault and actions taken are recorded and stored for future reference

2 Trending data is captured and recorded in appropriate data base

3 Cause and effect studies are undertaken and results forwarded to the appropriate area for necessary action

4 Fault details and details of repair action are provided to all areas associated with fault/problem action

5 Final tests are undertaken to ensure ongoing repair and to check other likely faults in the system

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks.

Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor

In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite

Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite

Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM



Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Fault escalation procedures are defined by the enterprise and usually relate to appropriate repair times Tests may include; DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer Tools may include: screwdrivers, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, soldering iron, insulation displacement tools, cable termination tools Transmission medium may be: Fibre, cable, radio, satellite, microwave, video Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarms could result from: new installation, planned outage, network failure, faulty circuits, security breaches, animal damage Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR,door, over temperature Conditions which may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors Hardware faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Conditions which may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors, animal damage



Transmission systems are governed by international standards set by the ITU Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate's competency in: • methodical approach, identification and ranking of likely causes of faults • using fault history, including details of all investigations undertaken on a first in basis, in fault identification Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to read, interpret and use equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and documentation Mentor/assessor observes candidate interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors and maintaining customer focus and consideration of customer needs within service assurance guidelines Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate submits at least three written reports demonstrating: • analysis of tests already undertaken • conduct of further tests appropriate to the type of fault identified • interpretation of test results • recognition of potential causes Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to operate in a timely manner, report progress, prioritise, and consider financial/commercial implications



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI510 Communication 5 CO510 Computer Skills 5 CS510 Customer Relations 5 CS520 Service Agreements 5 DI510 Digital Theory 5 DI530 Digital Radio 5 EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 EN540 Enterprise Operations Policy 5 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 IN520 Teamwork 5 IN540 Workplace Networking 5 MA510 Mathematics 5 NE520 Network Architecture 5 NE530 Network Signalling 5 OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 PR510 Problem Solving 5 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 RA510 Antennas 5 RA520 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 5 SC510 Science 5 SU520 Leadership 5 SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 SW530 Switch Networks 5 TE510 Telephony 5 TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 TO510 Use of Tools 5 TO620 Anti-static Procedures 6 TR510 Transmission Theory 5 TR520 Light/Laser Theory 5 TR530 Modulation Theory and Techniques 5 TR540 Narrow and Wideband Principles 5 TR560 Spectrum Management 5 TR570 Transmission Technologies and Products 5 TR580 Transmission Hierarchy 5 TR590 Transmission Test Instruments 5 VO510 Video Network Techniques 5 VO520 Video and Sound Principles 5 CI510 Communication 5 Technical Documents Identify different types of technical documents: • Technical definition • Technical descriptions • Technical instruction • Technical proposal • Tender



Write a technical document: • Follow an agreed formal structure • Meet a specific purpose • Incorporate graphics where appropriate • Cite sources formally • Edit to industry standards • Meet appropriate completion deadlines CO510 Computer Skills 5 Assumed–CO410 Computer Skills 4 Demonstrate broad knowledge of applications software, with substantial expertise in: • managing databases and spreadsheets for planning, charting, forecasting • collection of test data for analysis, fault detection, trending • programming telecommunications and test equipment, run test programs. • install and use application specific software in relation to telephony/route, billing/charging and management of

accounts • simulation of network operations • simulation of electronic circuits CS510 Customer Relations 5 Building a Customer Focus Organisation Prepare a customer value package: • Determine what clients value • Set customer service goals • Devise strategies to achieve goals • Implement selected strategies • Inform customers of improved customer value • Seek continuous improvement through customer feedback. Create a service culture which focuses attention on the customer: • consider ways in which an organisation can make clients feel valued • develop a service strategy to deliver a quality product or service • support customer-oriented staff Develop custom-friendly systems. CS520 Service Agreements 5 • Service agreements need to be implemented according to enterprise standards. • This topic is best addressed within the workplace.

DI510 Digital Theory 5

Assumed - DI401 Digital Theory 4

• Develop technical skills in digital design, logic simulators, and prototype construction in the application of PLD's, ASIC's, and single chip microcontrollers.

• Use software tools to simulate and test circuits prior to construction, and debug faults. Assemble test circuits to verify practical operation according to specification.

• Apply these skills to data transmission and storage networks which employ synchronous and asynchronous data transfers, counters, and electronic switching.

• Apply microprocessor technology to perform these functions within a Telecommunications, radio and satellite network. Suggest modifications to improve existing systems by re-design of software/hardware to meet present needs and allow for future expansion or technical development.

Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology



DI530 Digital Radio 5 Assumed DI430 Digital Radio Characteristics of Line Codes • Describe the characteristics of RZ, NRZ, AMI, HDB3 and CMI line codes. • State the advantages of the various line codes. • List the applications of the various line codes. Digital Modulation Techniques • Compare bandwidth requirements between the various digital modulation techniques, • ASK, FSK, PSK, QAM. • Explain advantages of baseband, IF or RF spectrum shaping filtering. Digital Processing Sections • Explain the need for code conversion. • Explain the need for framing. • Explain the need for scrambling with reference to clock recovery and spectra of • Baseband signal. • Explain the need for interleaving. • State the advantages of forward error correction. • Describe how data is added for digital order wire. Multiple Access Techniques • Explain the concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and ALOHA. • Compare the spectral efficiencies of the various multiple access techniques. • List the applications of the various multiple access techniques. Effects of Noise and Interference on Digital Radio Systems • Draw BER versus carrier to noise ratio curves for various modulation schemes. • Describe how interference degrades BER. • Apply typical values of receiver noise figure to relate the receive level to carrier • To noise ratio. Digital Tests • Use a spectrum analyser to measure the transmitter output spectrum with digital • inputs of 'all ones', 'all zeros' and 'pseudo random pattern'on NRZ codes. • Use a computer simulation to plot the spectrum of at least three different line codes • with pseudo random bit patterns and compare. • Plot the variation of BER with received signal level and obtain the receiver • threshold. • Measure the received signal levels at which the various fault alarms are activated EN510 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 5 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 2 and 3. EN520 Enterprise Information Systems 5 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Recognition of the impact of new information on future events. EN530 Enterprise Organisational Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel.



EN540 Enterprise Operations Policy 5 Interpreting policy in workplace operations. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as







layout, insertion and removal of components, wiring, earthing, supply decoupling and safe power-on sequence. • Devise tests and measurements in order to analyse and verify all the parameters specific to these devices. IN510 Interpersonal Relationships 5 Interview Skill Assumed IN330 Interpersonal Relationships 3 • Be interviewed • Plan interview procedure as an interviewer • Establish a comfortable environment • Pose appropriate questions • Conduct workplace interviews:


• Document an interview • Evaluate an interview • Propose appropriate followup activities • Recognise common mistakes made by interviewers. IN520 Teamwork 5 See IN420 Team Work 4



IN540 Workplace Networking 5 Local Networking Assumed IN440 Workplace Networking 4 • Identify key personnel within and outside the organisation. • Create and maintain workplace network system to locate and access contacts. • Apply personal and corporate marketing strategies to maximise networking opportunities. • Establish links with professional associations and governing bodies affiliated with the enterprise or

organisation. • Coordinate, attend and participate in appropriate meetings and functions to facilitate workplace networking. • Use appropriate formal and informal correspondence to communicate within the workplace network. • Adopt time management techniques to network efficiently. • Document network liaisons. MA510 Mathematics 5 Minimum • Use graphical techniques to obtain solutions of: • Linear, quadratic, exponential, logarithmic and trigonometric functions • Manipulate algebraic expressions












projection, join, division.




Services. • Describe the signalling procedure to set up a call. Intelligent Network (IN) Architecture • Explain the aims of the Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of the IN conceptual model. • Explain the historical evolution of the IN concept. • Explain the current international standardisation activities. • Describe the IN services provided by the PSTN. • Explain the implementation of a FreePhone service. • Explain the objectives of a Virtual Private Network. • Explain the signalling procedure to establish a 008 call. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Architecture • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaption layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options. NE530 Network Signalling 5 Network Signalling Methods • Compare access signalling with network signalling. • Compare in-band with out-of-band signalling. • Compare Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) with Common Channel Signalling • (CCS). • Compare inter-exchange signalling systems. Common Channel Signalling Number 7 (CCS 7) • Explain the reasons for introducing CCS 7 into the PSTN. • State the bit rate for CCS 7. • Explain the terms,

• signalling point (SP) • signalling transfer point (STP) • signalling link • signalling point code (SPC) • destination point code (DPC) • originating point code (OPC) • telephone user part (TUP) • data user part (DUP) • message transfer part (MTP)

• Draw functional diagrams which describe the interconnection of the CCS 7 network. Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Model • Explain the seven layered levels of the OSI reference model for data communications. • Explain the relevance of the OSI model to CCS 7.



OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH510 Occupational Health and Safety 5 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health & Safety 5 & OH420 Occupational Health & Safety Regulations 4 • Record and document all accidents in the workplace which cause serious injuries.





• Transfer electrical awareness to fellow workers. PR510 Problem Solving 5 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS510 Plans and Specifications 5 Covered in PS410 Plans & Specifications RA510 Antennas 5 Electromagnetic Wave Propagation Principles • Explain the difference between reflection and refraction. • Explain the use of the radio spectrum from 10kHz to 100GHz. • Calculate the wavelength of a given frequency. • Describe the polarisation of an EM wave. • Describe the propagation of ground waves, sky waves and space waves. Antenna Radiation and Reception Characteristics • Explain the principle of operation of half wave dipole and quarter wave antennas. • Explain the characteristics of half wave dipole and quarter wave antennas. • Explain the characteristics of Yagi-Uda antennas. Directional Characteristics and Polarisation of Antennas • State the application of quarter wave, half wave dipole and Yagi-Uda antennas. • Compare the construction of various cellular antennas. • Define antenna gain, bandwidth, directivity and front-to-back ratio. Characteristics of Transmission Lines • State the function of a transmission line. • Describe the physical difference between coaxial cable and waveguide. • Explain the terms characteristic impedance, attenuation and velocity factor. • Compare the performance of coaxial cable and waveguide at microwave frequencies. • Compare the terms VSWR and return loss.







communication systems. SU520 Leadership 5 • Role of the Supervisor • Situational leadership • Communication skills • Motivation • Power and influence • Delegation • Enterprise specific Organisational Chart • Teamwork and the customer • Teamwork and problem solving • Negotiation skills • Team building skills Note: See also IN620 - Leadership In Teams SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 Packet Switching and Data Communication • Describe data communication principles via analogue and digital networks. • Explain need for communication protocols. • Describe the OSI layered protocol suite for open systems. Data Multiplexing • Explain the difference between synchronous time division multiplexing and statistical multiplexing. • List advantages and disadvantages of statistical multiplexing. Packet Switching Principles • Explain data segmentation and reassembley. • Compare packet switching with circuit switching and with message switching. • Perform calculations for optimum packet size, and message transmission time. • Define virtual circuit, logical channel, datagram, connectionless and connection oriented procedures. Packet Switch Network Elements • Explain the function of NTU's, PAD's, PAD concentrators, packet switching nodes. Packet Switch Networks • Explain routing and addressing and the differences for virtual circuits and datagrams. • Explain congestion, error recovery and queuing delays


Functions of a Switching Network • Describe the switching function. • Describe the transmission function. • Describe the signalling function.



Architecture of Analogue and Digital Circuit Switched Networks • Explain structure and generalised operation of analogue telephone networks and their limitations. • Describe digital networks, including transmission and switching of signals. • State principles of TDM including synchronisation and alignment concepts. Main Sub Units in Telephone Switching Systems • Describe main functional blocks of a basic switching system. • State principles of step by step progressive control and common control as applied to switching systems, and


tones and RVA's, conference circuits and explain their operation. Principles of System Control and Switch Modules. • State principles of SPC, and its advantage over wired logic. • Describe principles of Space Division Switching, using a cross point matrix. • Describe principles of time division switching using PAM and PCM techniques. • State principles of "concentration" as applied to customer stage of a switching system. • State principles of "distribution" in group stages of switching systems. Structure of a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Explain the analogue PSTN hierarchical structure, and the principle of hierarchical routing. • List the functions of each level of the hierarchy. • Describe the digital PSTN structure and its differences from the analogue hierarchy. • Explain the reasons for the difference between digital and analogue hierarchies. • Explain the need for network synchronisation of a digital network, and describe timing distribution technique. Network Signalling • Explain the difference between line signalling and interswitch signalling. • Explain differences between inband signalling and outband signalling, CAS and CCS signalling. • Describe basic principles of R2, CCS6 and CCS7 signalling systems. Billing Operations • Explain the process of call record generation and collection. • Describe the elements of a call record necessary for charging. • Describe the generation of charging rate via charging tables. • Define unit fee, charging rate, detailed observation, bulk billing, division of revenue, call event recording. TE510 Telephony 5 Digital and Analogue Systems • Define the terms 'analog' and 'digital' as applied to telecommunications system, and list the advantages and






when a call is made in this system.



Signalling • List the customer 'telephone signalling' techniques. • List the 'network signalling' techniques. SPC • Describe the principle of stored program control(SPC), and state how it is achieved in switching systems. • Describe the key advantage of SPC over 'wired logic' systems. • List the features offered by SPC systems that are not available with electromechanical systems. TDM • Describe basic space division switching principles, and explain how it is achieved using a cross-point matrix. • Describe the principle of Time Division Multiplexing, and describe the need for synchronisation and alignment. TF520 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 5 Cable Commissioning Tests • Copper cables.








pressurisation, laser power, mains power and battery voltages. Transmission Equipment Loop Back Testing • Discuss the test analysis method of providing a software loop back at a remote transmission site for link testing.

TO510 Use of Tools 5

Advanced Cleaning Techniques Prior to Hand Soldering • Explain the concept of high reliability soldering. • Identify the mechanical stresses on a PC board and its individual components. • Explain the effects of contaminants which cause long term corrosion on PC boards. • Describe the four main cleaning processes:


Advanced Hand Soldering and Desoldering Techniques • Stress relief, mount and correctly solder electronic components on a double sided PC board. • Use a vacuum solder machine to desolder and remove an IC from a PC board. • Resolder a previously removed IC onto a PC board and submit for inspection.



Repair of PC Boards • Demonstrate crack, substrate and conductor repair on a single sided PC board. • Demonstrate hole and pad repair on a double sided PC board. Mass Soldering Techniques • Briefly describe the following mass soldering processes:




• Identify process defects of VPS and IR. Hand Soldering and Desoldering of Surface Mount Components • List types of surface mount devices. • Identify fillet characteristics of surface mount components. • Identify common reflow methods using hand soldering equipment. • Demonstrate the soldering and desoldering of surface mount components to and from a PC board. TO620 Anti-static Procedures 6 Lighting Protection for Radio Antennas • Explain the principle of lighting protection as being:






with a buried bus-bar and then connected to building earth.

Grounding Techniques • Explain that underground earth connections should be welded together rather that bolted. • State that all grounding conductors should be solid copper straps. • State that the lightning rod should be directly connected to ground via its own solid copper strap. • Discuss why sharp bends in earthing straps are to avoided. • State that ground resistance should be less than 5 ohms.

Internal Grounding • Discuss why equipment racks should be grounded to a common bus-bar but the bases should be insulated from

the floor. • State that cable trays should be earthed at several points.

Total Equipment Protection • Discuss the additional protection required at radio sites as being:




TR510 Transmission Theory 5 • Describe the principles, elements and techniques of analog and digital transmission systems. • Describe the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Calculate the requirements for digital transmission • Explain the need to code signals • Compare coding systems • Identify and explain the source of degradation of digital signals • Describe and compare higher level coding systems • Explain basic digital measurement methods • Perform and report results of basic digital measurements • Interpret digital test results using theory • Calculate spectrum of digital signals and determine spectral efficiency • Design filters for digital signals. Transmission Lines • Describe transmission lines and properties • Explain echoes, group delay, cornstalk and ISI. Measurement Skills • Perform basic digital tests • Relate test results to theoretical predictions • Perform basic interpretation of test results. TR520 Light/Laser Theory 5 • Describe analog and digital signals and the limitations on information transmission • Explain the main principles of light • Perform calculations on the propagation of light • Analyse optical devices such as lenses, diffraction gratings, and optical fibres. • Describe and analyse photonic devices such as Bragg cells, Etalons and filters. Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for Safety when working with optic fibres and Lasers. • Perform detailed calculations on optical fibre [propagation • Implement optical fibre system design and budgeting • Describe WDM and TDM optical systems • Indicate and ascertain optic fibre performance characteristics. Lasers/Leds • Describe performance characteristics of lasers and leds • Explain the main principle of operation of the laser • Explain the principle of operation of the Led • Relate characteristics and limitations in performance to principles of operation in the Laser and the led • List typical Laser/Led values Systems • Provide a detailed description of Networks • Describe FDDI and its operation • Explain in detail the elements of SDH, SONET and compare to PDH Skills • Characterise a Laser and a Led. • Use an OTDR • Perform loss measurements



TR530 Modulation Theory and Techniques 5 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes. • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in

the presence of noise. • Calculate system requirements of modulation systems. TDM • Describe multiplexing • Describe the different approaches to multiplexing indicating the methods of framing, signalling and error

correction. • Describe typical system applications. TR540 Narrow and Wideband Principles 5 The Fundamental Limitations on Information Transmission Speed • State Hartley's law. and Shannon's law • Calculate maximum transmission speeds using Hartley's law and Shannon's law. • Explain inter symbol interference and its relationship to the Shannon limit on transmission speed. • Explain raised cosine/Gaussian pulse shaping, modulation and coding methods to increase transmission

speeds(e.g. T-QAM). Signal Degradation Effects on Transmission Channels and Methods Used to Minimise these Effects • Sketch the frequency spectrum of a periodic pulse (Fourier Series) • Sketch the amplitude and phase response of an ideal transmission channel and a practical channel • Describe the effects of group delay and purpose of equalisation in practical channels. Basic Information Theory Concepts • Describe how information is measured and its relationship to the probability of an event occurring. • Define entropy of text and telemetry signals • Describe the signal redundancy inherent in human text language and that further caused by coding. • Calculate the information content of a simple text message and telemetry signal. • Describe redundancy reduction (data compression) techniques. Variable length codes, Huffman codes, adaptive


loop, line drivers, opto-couplers). • State the limits on LAN standards AS4804.3, 4804.4.



Error Correction and Detection • Explain the general principles and application of CRC's as FCS on data blocks. • Explain the application of FEC techniques. • Describe a 3 out of 7 Hamming code used for FEC and its error correction capabilities TR560 Spectrum Management 5 Radio Spectrum • Use a scanner to check and log "traffic" on a spot frequency. • Describe the principles of two way radio communications. • Describe the operation of a radio repeater • Describe the principles of trunked radio systems • Describe the principles of Selcal radio paging for dispatching messages and establishing a voice channel. • Use a spectrum analyser to check the performance of a two way radio. • Describe the steps to be used to find the source of a spurious radio emission. Filters–Classification • Specify the properties of band stop filters, low pass filters, high pass and band pass filters. • Define all the filter parameters of a low pass, high pass filter and band pass filter.. • Measure the frequency response of an electronic filter. • Describe the uses and characteristics of Butterworth, Tchebychev, Caur, and Bessel filters. • Sketch the circuit diagrams of low pass and high pass filters of orders up to 5 for Butterworth, Tchebychev and

Bessel. Filters–Design • Determine the required order number of a Butterworth low pass or high pass filter having been given the



measures which must be used to overcome these difficulties.

TR570 Transmission Technologies and Products 5

Fibre Optic Safety and Overview • Review the safety principles for Fibre optics as previously learnt • Briefly describe the history of telephony from the narrowband single channel bearers to broadband bearers, and

early optical communications through to fibre optic communications. • Briefly describe the development of basic telephone (narrowband) systems, the FDM broadband bearer systems

and the current TDM broadband bearer systems, • Compare fibre optic signal paths to those offered by copper cables, microwave links and satellite links.

Transmission Technology • Compare fibre optic links with copper cable links, microwave links and satellite links • Briefly describe the likely future trends for fibre optic communications. • Describe the advantage and technology offered by the "fibre amplifier". • Describe the advantage offered by the "synchronous coherent" light modulation. • Define the concept and perform calculations on the velocity of light in a transparent material, angle of

incidence, angle of reflection, critical angle, Snell's law and numerical aperture, coupling efficiency. • Describe the following: total internal reflection, wavelength dispersion, • fibre propagation modes and their advantages and disadvantages, fibre index profiles and their advantages and

disadvantages and common fibre optic cables. • Describe and perform calculations on a fibre optic link within a wide area network. • Describe the function of amplifiers (underground and undersea), regenerators (underground and undersea) in

fibre optic systems. • Sketch a typical customer access network using fibre optic multiplexers.



LANS and WANS • Describe the function of the components of a metropolitan area network. • Describe the function and indicate the typical position of: hubs, routers and exchanges. • Describe the main local area network systems which use optical fibres. • State the name and briefly describe the three types of Ethernet available for operation with fibre optic cables. • Briefly describe the main functions of an Ethernet LAN. • Describe the operation and show the configuration of an FDDI network. • State typical data rates, terminal separation and cable types used for the networks above. TR580 Transmission Hierarchy 5 Products and Services • Explain and differentiate between commonly used telecommunication products and services, including their










information transfer rate. • Explain the role, function and implementation of circuit, packet and fast packet switching. • Explain why voice communications cannot use packet switching but can be accommodated on ATM. Transmission Backbones • Explain the role and function of transmission backbones with respect to commonly used transmission mediums. • Analyse and compare the function of commonly used high speed transmission backbones. Transmission





TR590 Transmission Test Instruments 5 • Outline the structure of a system • Outline Logistics support functions • Explain the role of quality systems • Describe maintenance philosophy • Describe test philosophy and the role of testing • List and explain testing terminology • List the essential elements of a quality system which relate to test equipment • Explain standards, calibration and methods to achieve these • Use a test procedure to perform measurements • Analyse measurement and produce a test report • Identify and compute errors in various transmission measuring equipment • Use various test instruments in automatic and manual modes to acquire measurements • Interpret instrument specifications for testing application • Produce a simple test procedure VO510 Video Network Techniques 5 • Explain the differing requirements of broadcast video distribution and video telephony. • Describe the transport of digital video signals over various transmission systems and media:- SDH, ATM,



• Investigate and write a report on video switching, multiplexing and transport equipment. VO520 Video and Sound Principles 5 The Perception of Light and Colour to the Eye • The Glass Prism and the Colour Spectrum

• Draw a diagram showing the splitting of white light into the colour spectrum • Explain the function of "Rods" and "Cones" in relation to Light entering the eye • Describe the following terms:

• Hue • Brightness • Saturation • Chromaticity

• Describe the eye's sensitivity to various colours using a general response curve The Electromagnetic Spectrum 1. List the groups of frequencies that make up the electromagnetic spectrum 2. State the frequencies / wavelengths of the Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue and Purple/Violet visible light



The Colour Vidicon Tube • Describe the Light Characteristics of Colour Striped Filters

• Draw the four lines generated from the filters (N line, N+1line, N+2 line, line ) • Explain the development of the colour image by the vidicon tube The Charge-Coupled Device (CCD) Image Sensor • Explain the operation of the ccd sensor using a simplified diagram • "Charge Packet" transfer using digital transfer techniques • Briefly describe three (3) methods by which the image is transferred to the output terminals of the ccd camera.






UNIT ICTTC091B - Analyse and organise repair of the most complex telecommunications network faults



1 Establish background information 1 All available data relating to both the fault and previous action taken in the fault diagnosis process is obtained and analysed

2 Personnel involved with the fault repair to date are questioned in some detail as to action taken and results achieved

3 Fault history and patterns are ascertained

4 Areas of similarity to likely fault are researched

5 Problem is discussed with industry specialists to determine their experiences with similar faults

6 Problem is discussed in detail with system/equipment vendor for likely solutions

7 Commercial and technical strategies are put in place for identification and repair

8 The problem and strategies developed for overcoming the problem are discussed with the network management centre

9 Access to appropriate hardware, software and firmware codes are obtained where necessary

2 Undertake fault diagnosis 1 Approach to fault identification is methodical and suitable for system and problem type

2 Fault is simulated in a captured environment as appropriate


4 Fault is identified in the shortest time possible

5 Back up support from the vendor is sought at the appropriate time

6 Instructions to on-site repairer where required are clear and methodical



3 Organise fault rectification 1 Options to rectify fault including any downtime are determined and presented to network management for decision

2 Vendor assistance and support is sought at the appropriate time

3 Faulty parts and/or equipment are identified and arrangements made for replacement or repair

4 Equipment is reprogrammed as required

5 On-site repair staff are provided with clear and precise instructions on fault rectification where appropriate

4 Document fault details 1 Details of fault and actions taken to both find and repair are recorded and stored for future reference

2 Vendors are advised of fault and repair details if applicable

3 Changes to equipment design are recommended where appropriate.

4 Problem is passed to vendor where repair has proved either not practical or not commercially viable

5 Cause and effect studies are undertaken and results forwarded to the appropriate area for necessary action

6 Fault details and details of repair action are provided to all areas associated with fault/problem action

7 Fault histories are updated

8 Final tests are undertaken to ensure ongoing repair and to check for other likely faults in the system


A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support

The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority.



Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Fault escalation procedures are defined by the enterprise and usually relate to appropriate repair times Tests may include; DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, antenna sweep measurements Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer Tools may include: screwdrivers, pliers, cutters, wire strippers, soldering iron, insulation displacement tools, cable termination tools Transmission medium may be: fibre, cable, radio, satellite, microwave, video Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarms could result from: new installation, planned outage, network failure, faulty circuits, security breaches, animal damage Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR,door, over temperature Conditions that may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors Hardware faults may include: blown fuses, connectors, wiring, cards and card components, antennas, feeders, cable, weather damage, lightning damage Conditions that may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors, animal damage A captured environment is usually a network or network element model and may exist within the enterprise or with the vendor Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate's: • methodical approach identification and ranking of likely causes of the most complex faults • use of fault history including details of all investigations undertaken on a first in basis, in identification of the

most complex faults Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to read, interpret and use equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and documentation. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's interaction with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors, customer focus and consideration of customer needs. Candidate submits hard copy of at least two written reports demonstrating: • analysis of tests already undertaken • conduct of further tests appropriate to the type of fault identified • interpretation of test results • recognition of potential causes Mentor/assessor observes candidate operating in a timely manner, reporting progress, prioritising, and considering financial/commercial implications. Mentor/assessor observes rectification of Tier 3 fault within service assurance guidelines and conduct of tests to verify outcomes applying: • all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • enterprise escalation and outage procedures Candidate submits hard copy of at least two documentations of the most complex fault repairs including: nature, location, likely causes and repair methodology.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 CS620 Service Agreements 6 DI610 Digital Theory 6 DI630 Digital Radio 6 EN610 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 EN630 Enterprise Organisational Policy 6 EN650 Enterprise Operations Policy 6 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN640 Workplace Networking 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 NE630 Network Signalling 6 NE650 System Protocols 6 OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PR610 Problem Solving 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 RA610 Antennas 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 SC610 Science 6 SU620 Leadership 6 SW620 Packet Data Switching 6 SW630 Switch Networks 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TO610 Use of Tools 6 TO620 Anti-static Procedures 6 TR610 Transmission Theory 6 TR620 Light/Laser Theory 6 TR630 Modulation Theory 6 TR640 Narrow and Wideband Principles 6 TR660 Spectrum Management 6 TR670 Transmission Technologies and Products 6 TR680 Transmission Hierarchy 6 TR690 Transmission Test Instruments 6 VO610 Video Network Techniques 6 VO620 Video and Sound Principles 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,




CO610 Computer Skills 6 Assumed - C0510 Computer Skills 5 • Demonstrate specialist knowledge in the use of software and available data to analyse network design, manage







Note: This topic has units relating to network security codes, access, system platforms - which belong to another topic C0660, Forecasting in C0640, Planning in C0630. CS610 Customer Relations 6 • Components of communication (verbal, non-verbal, written, visual, audio-visual, emotional factors). • Effective customer service. • Identify Internal/external customers. • Describe formal and informal networks relating workgroup to customers. • Customer requirements determined using customer terminology. • Describe customer characteristics in relation to product and service requirements. • The features and benefits of products and services relevant to customer requirements and characteristics are



advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. CS620 Service Agreements 6 • Service agreements need to be implemented according to enterprise standards. • This topic is best addressed within the workplace.








recommendations for converting an unreliable transmission link. Note: This topic may overlap with Fault Finding, Test Equipment, Test Analysis and Diagnosis,Network Equipment, Network Management Principles and Capabilities. DI630 Digital Radio 6 Minimum Shift Keying Digital Modulation Techniques • Explain the differences between MSK and GMSK. • Describe the phase trajectory of MSK/GMSK. • Explain the need for differential encoding in GMSK. • Compare GMSK and DAMPS digital modulation techniques. Speech Coding Techniques • Revise 64kbit/second digital speech coding for telephony. • Discuss alternative speech coding techniques, ADPCM, AVSD/CVSD, APC. • Describe the concept of voice coding based on modelling of the human voice. • Describe the Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) technique. GSM Speech Coding • Explain the history behind the selection of the GSM coder algorithm. • Describe the three main requirements for GSM speech coding as, exploiting redunduncyin human speech,

exploiting pauses in natural flow, and maintaining speech quality as good as analog cellular. • Explain the operation of the Long Term Predictor (LTP) part of the GSM coder. • Explain the operation of the Regular Pulse Excitation (RPE) process. • Fully explain the operation of the LTP LPC/RPE coding process used in GSM. • Examine the bit allocation of the GSM speech coder. • Explain the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) technique. • Describe how ciphering is achieved in GSM. • Determine the encoded voice bit rate. • Determine the gross bit rate after forward error correction and channel coding bits are • Added to speech transmission.

GSM Enhancements • Compare phase 1 GSM with phase 2 GSM. • Describe enhanced full rate speech coding. • Describe half rate speech coding and its future impact on system capacity. • Compare data services offered by GSM. • Describe the use of CDMA in GSM networks. • List supplementary services available now and in the future, such as, call barring, • Call waiting, call hold, conference calls, calling party ID.

Computer Simulation • Simulate the interleaving process and forward error correction process with a computer. • Program and comment on its effectiveness with burst errors of varying length.



EN610 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 6 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 3 and 4. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events. EN630 Enterprise Organisational Policy 6 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. Direction of personnel on the basis of policy. EN650 Enterprise Operations Policy 6 Covered in EN610 to EN640. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as







layout, insertion and removal of components, wiring, earthing, supply decoupling and safe power-on sequence. • Devise tests and measurements in order to analyse and verify all the parameters specific to these devices. IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise



Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members. IN640 Workplace Networking 6 Global Networking Assumed IN540 Workplace Networking 5 • Demonstrate a basic understanding of Australia's international economic and political position. • Suggest future world trends that are likely to have significant impact on Australia's international economic and

political position. • Define the enterprise's current role within this context and speculate to its possible future role. • Cultivate a tolerance and understanding for cultural diversity in the workplace at local and global levels. MA620 Mathematics 6 Minimum • Statistical analysis








NE650 System Protocols 6 Assumed NE620 Network Architecture 6 International Standards Setting Bodies • List the international standards setting bodies, such as:

• ITU-TSU (CCITT) • EIA • ANSI • ETSI • ECMA • ISO

• Explain the role of the standards bodies in developing system protocols. Data Communications Protocols • List and discuss popular data communications protocols, such as:

• X-ON/X-OFF • BSC • ENQ-ACK • SDLC • HDLC • CSMA/CD Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) • Token Ring ( IEEE 802.5) • FDDI • GPIB (IEEE.488) • Token Bus (IEEE 802.4) • TCP/IP (Internet) • X.25

Telecommunications Protocols • Describe the protocols used in the following telecommunications networks and their relation to the ISO/OSI

model, such as: • common channel signalling number 7 • ISDN • B-ISDN (ATM) • Frame Relay (WAN Network) • PDH • SDH

Alarm and Network Management Protocols • Describe the use of X.25 protocol in alarm networks. • Describe the use of network management protocols, such as,

• SNMP • TMN

OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing



OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6

Assumed OH510 Occupational Health & Safety 5

• Develop processes, procedures and documentation to satisfy all the requirements of the Occupational Health & Safety legislation relevant to the workplace.

• Organise and select appropriate staff for First Aid training, and major functions of safety committees and representatives.

• Prepare a brief and ongoing safety awareness training program for the work force. • Evaluate site area and project plan, note all the safety aspects; list safety equipment required, resources and






PR610 Problem Solving 6

Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3

PS610 Plans and Specifications 6

Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications

RA610 Antennas 6

Microwave Antenna Systems • Discuss reasons for upgrading microwave antenna systems. • Explain that variable factors in antenna parameters are gain, front-to-back ratio, cross-polar response,






vertically polarised and the other horizontally polarised. • Explain the need for system balance. • Define the requirements for antennas in umbrella cells. • Describe the radiation characteristics of leaky coaxial cable. • Compare the effectiveness of yagi antennas and leaky coaxial cables in various situations. • Discuss intermodulation and possible causes at cellular antenna locations.



RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns

and site costs. Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner. Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites. Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference. SC610 Science 6 Covered in SC510 Science 5 SU620 Leadership 6 Covered in SU520 Team Leadership SW620 Packet Data Switching 6 X25 Packet Details • List the different packet types used in X25 virtual channel communications, and show how they are employed. • Describe in detail the different fields in X25 packet headers and explain their functions. LAPB Details • List the different HDLC frames used in link layer supporting X25 packet layer. • Describe in detail the different fields in the HDLC frame header and explain their function.



Fast Packet Switching–Frame Relay • Describe the limitations of X25 in handling high speed, real time communication required with ISDN. • Explain the advances in reliable transmission technology that allow reduced overheads in packet switching. • Describe how frame relay, driven by N-ISDN, was conceived to overcome restrictions of conventional packet




ISDN) with 64Kb/s N-ISDN switching into their products.


Narrow band ISDN Structure/Operation details • Explain ISDN protocol architecture for user-network interface and intra-network interface. • Explain services provided by ISDN. • Explain the use of ISUP signalling protocol to carry ISDN services across the network. • Identify the implications to the network of the different bearer types that can be carried as part of ISDN bearer

services. • Describe call set-up signalling procedures.

Digital Switching and System Software • Describe software architecture of digital switching systems, identifying major functional modules. • Explain the evolution of switching software technology and design process. • Describe functions of Operating System, Call Handling, Administration and Maintenance software.

Intelligent Networks • Explain aims of an Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of IN conceptual model. • Describe the physical components of IN. • Describe functional components of IN. • Explain the historical evolution of IN concept. • Describe IN services provided in Australia. • Explain operation of free phone, VPN, card calls and other IN services. • Explain service creation concept of IN, using SIB's. • Explain advantage and limitations of service provision by IN. • Describe signalling function, using CCS7 / TCAP to support IN. • Describe role of adjuncts and service node.

Operate a Protocol Analyser • Use a protocol analyser to analyse a protocol interaction, such as ISUP, SS7/TCAP, TUP. Draw the flow

diagram for a recorded period. • Define signalling messages of a normal call set up. • Configure information elements of a signalling message. • Emulate signalling procedures: DSSI, TUP, ISUP, TCAP. • Understand signalling procedure of a call set up.



Digital Switching Systems Architecture • Explain technological reasons justifying a distributed control architecture. • Identify major DSS manufacturers and their products, worldwide and in Australia. • Describe architecture and functionality of main components of the following:



















however, manufacturers have not standardised on MTBF measurement. • Explain the terms Mean Time To Restore (MTTR), Availability and Unavailability. TO610 Use of Tools 6 Safety with Optical Fibres • List the three basic safety precautions when working with optical fibres, namely:

• do not look into the end of a fibre unless absolutely certain a laser is not connected to • the other end. • do not touch the end of a glass fibre as a small splinter of glass may pierce the skin and • ultimately enter the blood stream. • do not touch epoxy (used in connectors) as it is a hazardous chemical.

Fibre-Optic Hand Tools • List common fibre optic hand tools used for splicing and fitting connectors to optical fibres, such as:

• crimpers • buffer strippers • cleavers • mechanical/finger splices • inspection microscopes • polishing pucks • cable strippers • fusion splicers

• Demonstrate the correct technique for using fibre optic hand tools listed. Fibre Optic Connectors and Splices • Define a connector and a splice, as used with optic fibres. • Explain why splices are preferred in the field compared to the fitting of connectors. • Discuss the desirable features of a connector or splice, such as:

• low loss • easy installation • repeatability • consistency • economy

• Demonstrate the correct technique to mechanically splice two ends of optical fibres together. • Demonstrate the correct technique to fusion splice two ends of optical fibres together. • Demonstrate the correct technique to install a SC connector on a 0.9 mm buffered • Optical fibre patch lead. • Examine the end of the SC connector and check for correct polish and finish.












TR610 Transmission Theory 6 • Describe the principle techniques and elements of digital signal transmission • Analyse the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Determine the requirements for digital transmission • Analyse advantages and disadvantages of codes. • Discuss the mechanisms of degradation and of control of digital signals on transmission lines • Describe DCPM, PM • Describe DSI systems • Determine BER vs S/N requirements



Measurements • Perform representative PCM tests • Determine errors in measurements • Describe jitter measurements • Perform jitter measurements • Examine test procedures and relate to measurement methods. Systems • Describe SDH, PDH in detail • Describe ATM in detail • Compare representative digital transmission schemes. • Describe ISDN and its implementation. • Describe and analyse a number of recent developments in transmission techniques. TR620 Light/Laser Theory 6 • Describe analog and digital signals and the theory of information transmission • Utilise the principles of light to analyse optical components • Analyse range of photonic components • Discuss Solitons, Chromatic dispersion and advanced theories of light. (Quantum theory) Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for safety when working with lasers and fibre optics • Describe and analyse WDM and TDM systems • Predict optical fibre performance based on knowledge of fibre characteristics • Implement a fibre optic system using a performance specification • Analyses optical fibres in detail Photonics • Describe and analyse a range of photonic devices. • Analyse modern optical systems using photonic components Laser/Leds/Detectors • Explain the principle of the laser • explain and indicate the performance of three laser types • Describe the operation of the Led • List practical performance limitations • Describe typical detectors • Describe the principle of operation of detector types and the limitations on them Systems • Describe practical optical fibre systems such as SDH • Calculate system margins and data rates • Analyse system test methods Measurements • Use optical measurement equipment such as OTDRs, power measurement. attenuators and OSAs. • Explain the principles and limitations of optical measuring equipment. TR630 Modulation Theory 6 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication



Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits • Analyse the effect of interference on digital signals. Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits • Analyse the performance of demodulator signals in the presence of noise and interference Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in


correction. • Describe typical system applications. Spread Spectrum • Describe the advantages of spread spectrum systems • Describe and analyse the performance of typical spread spectrum systems. Advanced Modulation Schemes • Describe and analyse the [performance of TDMA, CDMA Systems • Describe satellite systems, local area networks and GSM in detail. • Compare the performance of satellite systems, GSM, LANs and other modern implementations. TR640 Narrow and Wideband Principles 6 Spectrum Utilisation • Calculate the spectrum of various modulation schemes including raised cosine, PSK, OOK, QPSK, MSK, FM

using a computer program. • Explain the advantages of MSK and GMSK as a modulation method versus FM and/or PSK • Explain the features and advantages of CDMA systems • Explain and demonstrate the use of Walsh codes Satellites • Describe typical satellite based transmission systems and their operating principles. • Define what is meant by uplink and downlink frequency bands and the respective differences in transmission

power. • Using basic satellite transmission principles determine the various orbital relationships, receiver/transmitter

power levels and antenna area coverage. • State the range of frequency bands being used in satellite systems and how they are allocated on an

international basis. • Perform satellite link budget calculations.



Transmission Impairments • Describe the source of transmission line echo and its adverse effects. • Explain the difference between speaker and listener echo paths and state which of these is usually most severe. • Describe the operation of echo suppressors with reference to the ITU recommendation G.164. • State the advantages and disadvantages of echo suppressors. • Describe the operation of echo cancellers with reference to the ITU recommendation G.165. • Simulate a simple adaptive echo canceller and verify its performance characteristics using a simulation package

such as MATLAB. • Describe the problem and recommended solutions of echo cancellation when a modem is used to transmit data

over a normal telephone voice channel. • State why channel equalisation is necessary. • Explain why adaptive channel equalisers are necessary and what benefits they yield. TR660 Spectrum Management 6 Radio Spectrum Characteristics • Describe the propagation characteristics of the commonly used mobile radio bands and calculate expected






frequency spectrum. Radio Path • Write a program to simulate the carrier to Interference ratio for a simple cellular re-use Network • Produces graphs (from your own spreadsheet) and describe the effects of antenna height and reflection



TR670 Transmission Technologies and Products 6 Practical • Configure an FLM150 (or similar) for an AddDrop configuration in a network using the appropriate

configuration software. • Configure a sub rate digital multiplexer for data service on a 2 Mbps service. Technology and Product Research (current) • Perform an internet search to list at least 10 major vendors of transmission products • From the list of transmission products above completely compare two of them and recommend one for

purchase given the network specifications and requirements. • List the most commonly used criteria for selection of transmission products and argue for your ranking of these

criteria (at least 8 criteria required).



Technology and Product Research (New and Emerging Technologies) • Describe the essential features of ADSL and xDSL transmission technology • Describe the essential features of WDM and optical Amplifier technology • Describe the essential features of the proposed UMTS systems • Research, provide a report and deliver a presentation on one of the latest technical products on the market in

the transmission or related fields. TR680 Transmission Hierarchy 6 PDH versus SDH • Briefly review PDH characteristics • Describe the limitations of PDH in terms of present and future transmission system requirements. • Examine the functional architecture of transport networks based on Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) and

its characteristics. • Establish the functional relationship between SDH and SONET. • Describe the main features of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) and SONET. SDH • Describe the SDH frame structure including such aspects as, synchronous transport modules, tributary units,

tributary unit groups, administrative units, pointers and section overheads • Explain the SDH-based multiplexing process • Describe the structural configuration of an SDH layered transport network • Analyse and investigate the various sources of timing errors in both PDH and SDH transmission networks. • Explain the terms phase variation, regular clocks, gapped clocks and frame phase. State how these are used

within an SDH transport network. • Describe the characteristics and sources of various timing impairments including, frequency offset, clock noise,

quantised phase variation, regenerator jitter, diurnal wander and desynchronised justification jitter. • Explain administrative and tributary unit pointers mechanisms and how these are used to overcome clock

impairments. • Describe the structural configuration of clock synchronising networks for PDH and SDH. • Examine and understand transmission system performance including the underlying principles and basic

requirements. Review the monitoring capabilities and mechanisms available for establishing SDH transmission network performance.

• Explain general transmission network performance parameters including error performance and availability measures.

• List the sources of transmission error and their relative importance in an SDH network. • Identify the transmission error detection mechanisms available within SDH including loss of frame phase and

block error monitor. • Explain SDH based error performance and unavailability parameters and how they are determined. ATM • Establish the functionality and implementation of transmission systems based on Asynchronous Transfer Mode

(ATM). • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaptation layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options.



TR690 Transmission Test Instruments 6 • Outline the levels of a system, the levels of documentation and the position of test documentation in a system • Describe system maintenance and testing documentation • Differentiate the acceptance test from ongoing testing • Explain quality systems • Develop and implement maintenance philosophies • Develop a test program based on logistic inputs • List, explain and use testing terminology • Describe in detail a calibration program • Outline a standards system and its relationship to quality systems • Prepare test procedures, perform measurements and produce reports and recommendations • Analyse system measurements and testing errors • Critically implement a test setup • Use higher level transmission test equipment, automatic and manual , to test systems • Explain the operation and principles of a number of transmission test equipment • Indicate the limitations and capabilities of particular approaches to test equipment • Implement an ATE set up • Equipment to be studied should include OTDR, power measurement, TDR, OSA, counters, mechanical

metrology equipment, BER test sets, sam[pling oscilloscopes, network analysers, SLMS, data analysers • Interpret CCITT recommendation, O series. VO610 Video Network Techniques 6 • Set up and commission a video distribution system which incorporates a switching element and a network

node. • Demonstrate the remote management of the switching element and any other manageable elements connected

to the video distribution system. • Write a report detailing the setting up and commissioning of the video distribution network, including that of

the switching element. • Write a report detailing the remote management of the manageable elements of the video distribution network,

including the switching element. Sources can include work experience or training laboratory. • Write a report on current and emerging trends in digital video distribution, such as HDTV, etc. VO620 Video and Sound Principles 6 Television Transmission Systems. • Draw a block diagram of a television transmission system and identify the following blocks:

• Video In (from a variety of sources) • Audio In (from a variety of sources), Master Control Room, • Video Amplifier, Video Modulator, Modulation Amplifier, Oscillator, • Frequency Multipliers, Power Amplifiers, Audio Amplifier, • Varactor control Oscillator and Diplexer

• Describe the standards for the Australian Television



High Definition / High Fidelity Television • Digital Television • Analogue to Digital Conversion • encoding (video and sound) • Time-division multiplexing • Time compression of analogue signals Transmission Modes • Describe MPEG-2 • Discuss the signal format Produce a block diagram of the format






UNIT ICTTC092B - Undertake outage management

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths i.e. cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units This unit covers the operational role associated with a planned or unplanned outage and must be read in conjunction with: ICTTC044B 'Co-ordinate fault rectification and restoration of service following network outages' and, ICTTC045B 'Ensure that network changes are implemented as planned with minimal impact to the customer'.


1 Identify outage details 1 Reason for a planned outage is clearly established in line with enterprise policy

2 Details relating to an unplanned outage are identified

3 Extent, timing and likely impact of the outage is determined

4 Designated outage co-ordinator is advised of the outage details and authority sought to proceed where outage is planned

5 Arrangements are initiated to advise affected customers of outage details including timing, duration and likely impact

6 Timeframes are determined to cause minimum disruption to the customer in the event of a planned outage

7 Patching and network strategies are developed in accordance with prescribed procedures

8 Outage conditions are simulated where possible to assist with strategy development

9 Contingency plans are developed, including alternate testing arrangements should they be needed

10 All parties affected by the outage planned or unplanned are notified and organised

2 Implement planned outage 1 Checks are made with all parties involved with the outage immediately prior to the event

2 Communications between near and distant ends are established

3 Temporary rearrangements are implemented where needed and possible

4 Outage is implemented in accordance with strategy plan

5 Contingency plan is implemented where needed



3 Assess and arrange repair of unplanned outage

1 Alarms are isolated and analysed

2 Alarm priority is determined

3 Likely causes of outage are determined

4 Consultation with network management centre as to proposed action for repair is undertaken

5 Repair action is initiated in accordance with approved enterprise maintenance regime

4 Normalise system 1 Patch or network changes are restored as necessary

2 Tests are conducted to verify the normal operation of the system

3 Faults detected are diagnosed, repaired or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

4 Alarms are checked and action taken as dictated by any alarm condition

5 Configuration of the network is standardised in accordance with specification and operational requirements

6 Performance checks are undertaken and action taken where performance levels not in accordance with requirements

7 Customers are notified of service normalisation

5 Undertake administrative tasks 1 Designated outage co-ordinator is advised as to service restoration

2 Quality audit is undertaken on the strategy plan and the success or otherwise of its implementation

3 Cause and effect studies are undertaken into reasons for unplanned oputage or where problems occurred both during a planned outage and upon service restoration

4 Test results are recorded and filed in accordance with enterprise requirements

5 Software/hardware changes necessary are recorded and advised to the appropriate area

6 Appropriate records/data bases are updated in accordance with enterprise policy

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite



Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS A four (4) tier maintenance regime exists within the industry. This consists of: Tier 1 - remote and/or first in repair/rectification Tier 2 - specialist repair/rectification Tier 3 - network support - network/system/equipment specialist Tier 4 - vendor support The level of fault rectification varies from enterprise to enterprise, but revolves around fault clearance time, customer impact and alarm priority. Alarm priorities are enterprise specific but generally consist of four (4) levels Priority 1 impact - demanding immediate attention Priority 2 degradation - decision to be made as to attention given and depends on impact on both network and customer Priority 3 hazardous - attention given as part of normal activities Priority 4 no action - alarm noted Escalation is usually through the tiers, but can vary again depending in the nature and impact of the problem. Decision for vendor involvement rests with tier 3 alone, and generally tier 3 and tier 4 work together on problem resolution Alarm/fault handling procedures are clearly specified within enterprise instructions and guidelines, along with the enterprise policy relating to fault/problem escalation Each component of the network has its own alarm management systems which are self monitoring and usually have built in error counters. Such systems are normally centralised and are physically monitored Alarms could result from: new installation, planned outage, network failure, faulty circuits, security breaches, animal damage Alarm types are usually equipment/product or vendor specific and can include: high errors, low errors, loss of signal, AIS, power supply failure, degraded performance, alarm indicating system, loss of optic receiver, laser shutdown/failure, receive signal fail, pilot failure, transmit failure, modulator failure, demodulator failure, digital alarms, low transmitter power, loss of line, high and low deviation, data, VSWR,door, over temperature Conditions that may not generate an alarm may be: no dial tone, cut offs, noise, clicking, hums, one way transmission, fading, errors, animal damage Transmission systems are governed by international standards set by the ITU Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor: • analysing the likely impact of outage on both the customer and the network • identifying patch capabilities and equipment operating margins • developing a contingency plan • applying interpersonal skills related to customers, employer, work associates, team members, individuals and

other contractors Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least one oral report to mentor/assessor describing: • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • building a temporary system Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to comply with all related occupational health and safety requirements, service assurance guidelines and work practices. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to: • operate within service assurance guidelines • apply enterprise escalation and outage procedures • maintain customer focus and consideration of customer needs Candidate submits hard copies of at least two sets of test results and sets of records.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 CS430 Repair and Maintenance Obligations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 5 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 IN440 Workplace Networking 4 MA420 Mathematics 4 NE410 Network Equipment 4 NE420 Network Architecture 4 NE430 Switch Networks OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 PS420 Basic Building Trades 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 SC410 Science 4 SU410 Planning 4 SU420 Leadership 4 SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 TE410 Basic Telephony 4 TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 TR430 Modulation Theory 4 TR440 Narrow and Wideband Principles 4 TR450 Signalling Principles 4 TR460 Spectrum Management 4 TR470 Transmission Technologies and Products 4 TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 VO420 Video and Sound Principles 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English



Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:


Communicate to Secure a Job • Investigate employment opportunities • Evaluate yourself • Prepare a professional resume • Write a letter of application • Make a telephone application • Perform effectively in a job interview CO410 Computer Skills 4 Assumed C0310 Computer Skills 3 • Demonstrate broad knowledge of the operation of personal computers and application programs as they are







material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction



EN410 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 4 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 1 and 2. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 5 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. EN440 Enterprise Operations Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace operations. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as








IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4

• Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination

IN420 Teamwork 4

Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members.



IN440 Workplace Networking 4 Meeting Procedures and Participation • Determine the meeting's purpose • Recognise the difference between formal and informal meetings • Identify the roles of chairpersons, secretary and member • Draw up and distribute an agenda that covers all the business of the meeting • Record decisions of the meeting clearly and concisely • Use meeting conversation and processes to conduct a structured meeting • Use communication skills and strategies to maintain the smooth running of the meeting • Employ problem solving strategies • Organise the venue and arrange the environment appropriately MA420 Mathematics 4
















Satellite Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of the Home Access Community Broadcast • Satellite Service (HACBSS). • Draw and describe the distribution of television programmes via satellite. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a WAN via satellite. Transmission Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of a co-axial cable transmission network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a digital microwave radio transmission • network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a fibre optic transmission network. NE430 Switch Networks Covered in the Switching series (SW codes) OH212 Safe Work Practices–Optical Fibre Cable • Optical fibre cabling installations • Safe handling practices • Termination cleanliness • Safety associated with cable end viewing OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.







• Perform basic first-aid functions in an emergency including EAR and CPR. PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3







PS420 Basic Building Trades 4 Covered in PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 RA410 Antennas 4 Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields. Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate. Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors. Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and




Describe the Principles of Series Resonant Circuits as Band Pass Filters • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a series resonant band pass filter. • Describe the principles of parallel resonant circuits as band pass filters. • Sketch the graph of output voltage vs frequency for a parallel resonant band pass filters. • Explain the operation of filters using more than one resonant circuit. Specialised Band Pass Filters Used in Radio Communication Systems • Describe the basic operating principle and characteristics of, quartz crystals, crystal filters, mechanical filters,

comb filters, SAW filters and cavity resonators. Oscillators Used in Radio Communication Systems • Explain the basic requirements for oscillation. • Describe the operation of LC oscillator circuits–Hartley and Colpitts. • Describe the operation of crystal oscillators–Pierce and Miller types. • Explain the operation of Phase-Locked loop block diagrams. • Describe the use of a programmable frequency-divider to provide frequency synthesis. Amplitude and Frequency Modulation Techniques • List the frequency products at the output of an amplitude modulator. • Draw the time and frequency domain diagrams of an AM signal. • Calculate the AM modulation index. • List the frequency products at the output of a frequency modulator. • Determine the bandwidth of an FM signal. • Sketch the time and frequency domain diagrams for an FM signal. • State the carrier deviations for TV sound, FM broadcasting, two-way radio and analogmobilephones. AM Transmitters and Receivers • Draw the block diagram of an AM high level modulated transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an AM superheterodyne receiver (single conversion). • List the function of each block in the receiver and output frequencies. • Calculate the output power from an AM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated.



SC410 Science 4 • Demonstrate the ability to make accurate observations and measurement on various physical quantities. Record







SU410 Planning 4 • Organise resources and time • Set objectives • Develop work plans • Safe work practices • Employment conditions • Communicating plans to employees and customers SU420 Leadership 4 Covered in SU320 Workplace Leadership SW420 Packet Data Switching 4 Packet Switching and Data Communication • Describe data communication principles via analogue and digital networks. • Explain need for communication protocols. • Describe the OSI layered protocol suite for open systems. Data Multiplexing • Explain the difference between synchronous time division multiplexing and statistical multiplexing. • List advantages and disadvantages of statistical multiplexing. Packet Switching Principles • Explain data segmentation and reassembley. • Compare packet switching with circuit switching and with message switching. • Perform calculations for optimum packet size, and message transmission time. • Define virtual circuit, logical channel, datagram, connectionless and connection oriented procedures.

Packet Switch Network Elements • Explain the function of NTU's, PAD's, PAD concentrators, packet switching nodes.

Packet Switch Networks • Explain routing and addressing and the differences for virtual circuits and datagrams. • Explain congestion, error recovery and queuing delays










List the advanced features introduced by the electronic telephone. Cordless Telephones • Draw the basic block diagram of a typical cordless phone, and describe its operation. • Determine the typical operating range and frequency of operation of the cordless set.

TE420 Outage and Hazard Processes 4

Hazard Management Operations • Describe safe working practices in the work environment. • Identify electrical/chemical/electromagnetic radiation hazards in the work environment. • State the correct procedures for the isolation of an electrical circuit. • Describe safe and appropriate methods of rescuing a shock victim who is in contact with energised conductors



construction.

Outage Management Operations • Determine the procedures involved in case of malfunction, for outages depending upon the telecommunication


reported/detected to when it is rectified. • Determine the functions of a test desk in dealing with fault correction. • Determine some types of network alarms that may used even before a system becomes faulty.









Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR420 Light/Laser Theory 4 • Describe the principle theories of light • Perform calculations on wavelength, velocity and refraction of light • Describe chromatic dispersion

Fibre Optic Concepts • Describe the requirements for safety when working with fibre optics and lasers. • Apply the theory to optical fibre propagation • Identify sources of loss in optical fibres • Identify the advantages of fibre optics compared to metallic and wireless techniques. • Describe degradation of signals in fibres • Describe fibre optic types

Lasers/Leds • Describe the difference between a laser and a led. • Illustrate the spectrum, beamwidth and other characteristics of lasers and eds • Describe modulation types used with Lasers and leds.





networks. • Describe digital networks, including switching and transmission of signals in two-state form • Describe sampling, quantising and encoding techniques. • State the principle of time-division multiplexing, including synchronisation and alignment concepts. • Recognise the basic architecture of a PCM-based 4-wire digital switching system. • State the role and main functional blocks of a typical 'pair-gain' system in the Customer-Access network. TR450 Signalling Principles 4 Basic Principle of Signalling • Outline the basic concepts of signalling in telecommunications networks, its purpose and functions, and identify




signalling (CCS). • Explain the signalling procedure in a PCM system (TS16). ISDN Overview • Briefly explain the three types of services for end-to-end communications available in an ISDN. • Identify the reference points and functional groupings of ISDN user-network interface and relate the functions




over the SS7 network. TR460 Spectrum Management 4 Spectrum Management Overview • Describe the principles behind managing the resource known as the radio spectrum. • Describe the general characteristics and names of the ITU approved radio bands from 30 Hz to 30 GHz • Compare where radio spectrum appears within the entire Electromagnetic Spectrum • Consult a database of allocated frequencies to find the services in use at that frequency.










tables. TR470 Transmission Technologies and Products 4 Optical Overview • State the relevant Occupational Health and Safety standards for Optical Systems. • Describe the development of fibre-optics and the LASER (opto-electronics). • Estimate the potential informationcarrying capacity of lightwave transmission (at a single wavelength). • List the advantages of optical fibre systems over wireline. • Define the EMR spectrum and preferred wavelengths for optical fibre devices. Optical Transmission • State the main characteristics of Single mode and Multimode fibre optic media. • Describe fibre index profiles (step and graded). • State advantages and disadvantages for Mode/Index types. • Describe types of losses in expected for fibre optic technologies • Describe operating wavelengths, losses and regeneration limits. • Describe typical configuration for SDH TDM multiplexers up to STM16 level TDM Multiplexers • State the main characteristics of TDM multiplexers • Calculate typical losses in transmission paths and multiplexer technologies • Describe typical configuration for PDH TDM multiplexers up to E3 level Terrestrial Microwave Systems • State the main characteristics of terrestrial Microwave systems • Calculate typical losses over transmission paths for terrestrial Microwave systems • Describe typical configurations for TDM multiplexers paths used with Terrestrial Microwave systems.



TR480 Transmission Hierarchy 4 Transmission Hierarchy Overview • Briefly explain the principle of pulse code modulation. • State the Nyquist sampling theorem and the sampling rate for telephony. • State the number of quantising levels for an eight bit PCM system and the data rate for telephony. • Explain, using diagrams, how compounding improves quantising error at low signal levels. • Draw the basic block diagram of a codec (one-way) and indicate which block is the anti-aliasing filter. • State the reasons for using digital line transmission codes and explain RZ, NRZ, AMI, HD3B & CMI line


synchronising time slot allocation (FAS and NFAS) • Compare the E1 frame with the T1 frame Overview of SDH • State the meaning of 'synchronous' network. • Recognise the hierarchical structure of SDH. • State the method of accessing 2M Bit/second tributaries in a SDM optical fibre trunk network. • Describe the concept of interworking PDH derived signals across the SDH. • State the advantages and disadvantages of SDH. TR490 Transmission Test Instruments 4 • Describe the phases of system lifetime • Describe the difference between the operation and support functions • Describe the difference between installation, commissioning and acceptance testing and maintenance • Describe system performance requirements • List test terminology and explain the terms • Describe the levels of maintenance • Explain the purpose of a Quality system • Explain the concepts of standards, calibration and regulation • Explain the purpose of test equipment • Use a test procedure to perform measurements • Produce a test report based on measurement • Perform error analysis computations • Utilise a number of transmission test instruments to perform measurements on BER, S/N, bandwidth, loss and

crosstalk. • Use a OTDR and an optical power meter • Describe conventional instrument and specific test equipment • Use automatic test equipment • Set up and program instrument control to perform a measurement



VO410 Video Network Techniques 4 • Describe the differences between analogue and video distribution techniques over common media, such as fibre













UNIT ICTTC093B - Manage spare parts

This unit may apply to switching, transmission and radio (both fixed and mobile) network and the various transmission paths, i.e., cable, optic fibre, radio, microwave and satellite Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units This unit covers the operational role associated with a planned or unplanned outage and must be read in conjunction with: ICTTC044B 'Co-ordinate fault rectification and restoration of service following network outages', and ICTTC045B 'Ensure that network changes are implemented as planned with minimal impact to the customer'.


1 Identify requirements 1 Standard procedures and relevant documentation is obtained

2 Current holdings are monitored and checked against levels determined by procedures

3 Each holding location is checked as to needs

4 Regular assessments are made as to usage and necessary holding levels

2 Procure parts 1 Current holdings are matched with need

2 Requests for additional parts are enacted in accordance with enterprise procedures

3 Checks are made as to surplus holdings in other locations

3 Initiate replacement process 1 Need for spare parts is determined

2 Data base is activated to check possible location of specific parts required

3 Appropriate checks are initiated to ensure that the part is latest issue and configuration

4 Arrangements are put in place to deploy the part to the site where it is required

5 Part is changed over with the faulty part

6 Faulty part is recovered and disposed of or returned for repair as determined by condition and enterprise policy



4 Reorder part replacements 1 Relevant part request is completed and forwarded to the appropriate enterprise area

2 Delivery of replacement is followed up on a regular and ongoing basis

3 Alternate spares are sought where difficulties are experienced with replacement

5 Complete administrative tasks 1 Relevant documentation is completed, signed and forwarded to the appropriate area

2 Regular audit of stock holdings is conducted in accordance with enterprise policy

3 Checks are made to ensure that all parts are latest issue and are compatible with installed systems and equipment

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Spare parts may include: panels, cards, sub racks, systems, components, connectors, wiring, harnesses, software, filters, antennas, power equipment Management of spare parts is enterprise specific Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety



EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. ssessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence • identification of the relevant network systems/equipment and features and associated components • ordering of spare parts • application of spare parts management procedures • accurate records and housekeeping • spare parts storage ensuring most efficient and economical arrangement • ability to read, interpret and use equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy

and documentation • interpersonal skills related to customers, employer, work associates, team members, individuals and other

contractors • all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • customer focus and consideration of customer needs Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI310 Communication 3 CO310 Computer Skills 3 EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 IN320 Teamwork 3 IN440 Workplace Networking 4 MA320 Mathematics 3 NE310 Network Equipment 3 NE320 Network Architecture 3 OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 SP310 Spare Parts 3 TO310 Use of Tools 3 CI310 Communication 3 Communicate • Identify how communication takes place • Select an appropriate communication channel • Recognise the barriers to communication • Interpret and comprehend information • Use non-discriminatory language Listen • Develop active listening skills • Eliminate bad listening habits



Write • Draft clear, concise written communication with attention to use of words, sentences, grammar and expression • Correctly prepare different forms of short business communication including memos, letters, facsimiles and e-


needs Speak • Reflect before speaking • Develop a pleasant, effective speaking style • Adapt to audience needs • Make appropriate social and business introductions CO310 Computer Skills 3 • State the basic features, facilities, fundamental hardware and the basic operational procedures of a typical PC. • Operate a keyboard using typing techniques and practiced manual skills. • Recognise and use terminology associated with word processing and file management. • Access the Internet to retrieve information and use e-mail for communication. • Access an established database file, use appropriate software functions to search, sort and select data.





EN320 Enterprise Information Systems 3 Information systems related directly to recording competency unit outcomes. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. IN310 Interpersonal Relationships 3 Create a Positive Communication Climate • Interact in a supportive way • Use assertive communication • Construct "I" statements • Use different types of feedback appropriately • Give accurate, clear and comprehensive instructions • Prepare different types of questions • Follow a set of instructions. Develop Non-verbal Skills • Analyse non-verbal communication • Use body language to communicate • Promote a prompt, positive, professional image • Send corporate messages • Recognise cultural differences and avoid gender bias.



IN320 Teamwork 3 Work-team Communication • Participate in a small group discussion to reach agreement on a workplace related issue. • Cooperate with team members to plan and prepare a simple job related presentation. • Make the presentations. IN440 Workplace Networking 4 Meeting Procedures and Participation • Determine the meeting's purpose • Recognise the difference between formal and informal meetings • Identify the roles of chairpersons, secretary and member • Draw up and distribute an agenda that covers all the business of the meeting • Record decisions of the meeting clearly and concisely • Use meeting conversation and processes to conduct a structured meeting • Use communication skills and strategies to maintain the smooth running of the meeting • Employ problem solving strategies • Organise the venue and arrange the environment appropriately MA320 Mathematics 3 Minimum: • Use charts, graphs and tables to analyse data • Use paper and electronic spreadsheets to record information • Estimate and measure lengths, volumes and area Additional - Select from: • Use charts and graphs to obtain data / information: tally, histogram, pie • Use charts and graphs to present data / information: tally, histogram, pie • Use tables to obtain required information: conversion, nomogram • Use paper and electronic spreadsheets to record information: Excel, Works, Lotus or equivalent • Use co-ordinate geometry: Cartesian • Solve linear equations in 2 variables • Plot linear and quadratic information on graphs • Sketch objects • Sketch visualisations of objects in plan and elevation • Use geometry to interpret simple plans: parallel lines, interior angles, opposite angles • Use geometry to estimate areas enclosed by triangles: Cosine rule, sine rule, ½.b.h • Use circumference formula to calculate length of circumference, partial circumference: degrees and radians • Use volume formulas: cube, cylinder, sphere, cone, pyramids, cubic centimetres, litres, cubic metres • Estimate and measure volumes of various common objects and piles of material: litres, cubic metres. • Use co-ordinate geometry and terms: Polar, azimuth, elevation • Plot data on polar paper • Interpret tables for locating geostationary satellites and aiming receiving dishes • Interpret tables for locating LEO satellites and tracking










network. • State that there are two categories of networks, public and private. Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a hierarchical PSTN. Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a PABX network . Television Distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a TV distribution network • Via terrestrial and satellite. Pay TV distribution Network • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Pay TV distribution hybrid • Fibre-cable (HFC) network. Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a GSM network. Packet Switched Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Packet Switched Public • Data Network (PSPDN).



Shared Access Data Networks • Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form shared access data networks in LANs using the


Dedicated Data Network Draw and label the basic elements that interconnect to form a Digital Data Network (DDN). OH310 Occupational Health and Safety 3 • Select the appropriate tools for the task. • Demonstrate the correct use of hand tools and operation of power tools in order to reduce the risk of injury. • Describe the causes of injuries due to incorrect work practices–ranging from personal behaviour to site



protection to self, fellow workers and the public at large. SP310 Spare Parts 3 • Enterprise policy and procedures • Stock levels–monitoring and replacement • Sourcing replacement parts • Transport of parts • Recording and reporting TO310 Use of Tools 3 Basic Hand Tools • Identify a range of general hand tools, such as:






UNIT ICTTC094B - Verify new software/hardware releases



1 Plan the testing of new software releases

1 All manuals, specifications and instructions associated with new releases are studied and areas of uncertainty are discussed with the vendor

2 Decision is undertaken as to whether to test the release in a simulated or live environment

3 Details relating to testing of release including time, location and likely impact are discussed with network management centre

4 Resources required to assist with the test are determined and their availability negotiated

5 Impact on the network and its impact on customers during the test are notified through the appropriate channels

6 Outage requirements are determined, planned and notified as appropriate in conjunction with network management

7 Contingency plans are developed to cater for likely problems during the test

2 Undertake tests 1 New software is loaded in accordance with specification

2 Tests are undertaken in accordance with specification

3 Functionality and features are assessed against vendor documentation, discrepancies noted and discussed with the vendor

4 Compatibility with old software/hardware is tested and problems identified, corrective action taken and/or discussed with vendor as required

5 Contingency plans are implemented in conjunction with network management where difficulties arise which impact on the integrity of the network



3 Undertake administrative work 1 Test results are documented and stored in accordance with enterprise policy

2 Ongoing or likely problems are discussed with the vendor and follow up arrangements initiated to ensure permanent solution

3 Software/hardware release is cleared for input to the system in accordance with enterprise procedures

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks .Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Impact of new software/hardware releases is assessed on: network, network management tools, new vendor network elements Decision as to testing of first release software in a simulated (controlled ) environment or in a live situation may depends on: the nature of the release availability of suitable location for testing compatibility of existing software and hardware Tests, both type and extent are normally detailed in the manufacturers specifications but can and usually is varied by the tester during the testing process, depending on the findings of the tests and their compatibility with design specifications Tests may include; DC/AC measurements,error, continuity, noise level, return loss, spectrum analysis, radio on receiver sensibility, surveys - mobile phones/pager, end to end, line levels both in and out, transmitter power, transmitter frequency, transmitter deviation, receiver frequency and sensitivity, level and quality of demodulated output - audio/bit error rate, full test Functions and features related to software releases are equipment/system specific and are detailed in the vendor documentation Test equipment may include: multi meters, communication testers, transmission measuring sets, directional couplers, lap top computer, mobile test phones



Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Telecommunications Act and associated codes

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor—demonstrating: • recognition of potential causes of problems and impact on service levels • analysis of impact of integration of new hardware/software release on the network • communication with organisations/people affected by the change and use of these resources in the most

effective manner • identification of key performance indicators and the service agreements with customers impacted by the new

release • development of a contingency plan Mentor/assessor observes candidate competently: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors, while maintaining a customer focus and


documentation Candidate implements test regime and submits hard copies of at least two sets of test results with interpretation, and mentor/assessor observes candidate: • identifying equipment/system specifications and required performance standards • adopting a systematic approach to test and analysis of problems arising • adhering to all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices Candidate submits detailed hard copy change/improvement recommendations, demonstrating candidate's problem analysis skills.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 CS620 Service Agreements 6 DI610 Digital Theory 6 DI630 Digital Radio 6 EN610 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 EN630 Enterprise Organisational Policy 6 EN650 Enterprise Operations Policy 6 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN640 Workplace Networking 6 MA610 Basic Mathematics 6 NE610 Network Equipment 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PR610 Problem Solving 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 RA610 Antennas 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 SC610 Science 6 SU620 Leadership 6 SW620 Packet Data Switching 6 SW630 Switch Networks 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF610 Test Equipment 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TR610 Transmission Theory 6 TR630 Modulation Theory 6 TR640 Narrow and Wideband Principles 6 TR660 Spectrum Management 6 TR680 Transmission Hierarchy 6 VO610 Video Network Techniques 6 VO620 Video and Sound Principles 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,














advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. CS620 Service Agreements 6 • Service agreements need to be implemented according to enterprise standards. • This topic is best addressed within the workplace.








recommendations for converting an unreliable transmission link. Note: This topic may overlap with Fault Finding, Test Equipment, Test Analysis and Diagnosis,Network Equipment, Network Management Principles and Capabilities. DI630 Digital Radio 6 Minimum Shift Keying Digital Modulation Techniques • Explain the differences between MSK and GMSK. • Describe the phase trajectory of MSK/GMSK. • Explain the need for differential encoding in GMSK. • Compare GMSK and DAMPS digital modulation techniques. Speech Coding Techniques • Revise 64kbit/second digital speech coding for telephony. • Discuss alternative speech coding techniques, ADPCM, AVSD/CVSD, APC. • Describe the concept of voice coding based on modelling of the human voice. • Describe the Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) technique. GSM Speech Coding • Explain the history behind the selection of the GSM coder algorithm. • Describe the three main requirements for GSM speech coding as, exploiting redunduncyin human speech,

exploiting pauses in natural flow, and maintaining speech quality as good as analog cellular. • Explain the operation of the Long Term Predictor (LTP) part of the GSM coder. • Explain the operation of the Regular Pulse Excitation (RPE) process. • Fully explain the operation of the LTP LPC/RPE coding process used in GSM. • Examine the bit allocation of the GSM speech coder. • Explain the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) technique. • Describe how ciphering is achieved in GSM. • Determine the encoded voice bit rate. • Determine the gross bit rate after forward error correction and channel coding bits are • Added to speech transmission.

GSM Enhancements • Compare phase 1 GSM with phase 2 GSM. • Describe enhanced full rate speech coding. • Describe half rate speech coding and its future impact on system capacity. • Compare data services offered by GSM. • Describe the use of CDMA in GSM networks. • List supplementary services available now and in the future, such as, call barring, • Call waiting, call hold, conference calls, calling party ID.

Computer Simulation • Simulate the interleaving process and forward error correction process with a computer. • Program and comment on its effectiveness with burst errors of varying length.



EN610 Enterprise Escalation Procedures 6 Industry recognises a 4 tier escalation system. Candidates at this level will operate at tiers 3 and 4. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events. EN630 Enterprise Organisational Policy 6 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. Direction of personnel on the basis of policy. EN650 Enterprise Operations Policy 6 Covered in EN610 to EN640. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as







layout, insertion and removal of components, wiring, earthing, supply decoupling and safe power-on sequence. • Devise tests and measurements in order to analyse and verify all the parameters specific to these devices. IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise



Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members. IN640 Workplace Networking 6 Global Networking Assumed IN540 Workplace Networking 5 • Demonstrate a basic understanding of Australia's international economic and political position. • Suggest future world trends that are likely to have significant impact on Australia's international economic and

political position. • Define the enterprise's current role within this context and speculate to its possible future role. • Cultivate a tolerance and understanding for cultural diversity in the workplace at local and global levels. MA610 Basic Mathematics 6 Minimum • Calculus

• transient/steady state analysis • Fourier Theory

• discrete • continuous

• Database management systems • data analysis • normalisation • selective query



Additional - Select from: • Explain the purpose of alternate routing in networks and the design concepts of alternate routing in circuit

switched and packet-switched networks. • Demonstrate how the high-usage traffic capacity tables are used to evaluate the traffic overflowing to the

alternate group. • Demonstrate how the weighted mean peakedness factor is calculated. • Explain the method used to evaluate the number of circuits in the final group. • Define the reference connections for circuit-switched services and for packet-switched services and relate user

demands to traffic variables. • List the traffic forecasting models and demonstrate the familiarity with the techniques for forecasting the traffic

and services used by Australian carriers. • Describe the theoretical basis for data compression of various telecommunications services used in speech, text

data, fax, video and GSM services. Discuss at length, compression techniques applied to one of these services, showing the theoretical foundations of concepts such as Discrete Fourier Transform, Huffman encoding, etc. Describe the principles and application of convolution, and be able to use it.

• Generate sequences using - 'q' notation block diagrams of tapped delay line filters, push down stack implementation of delay line.

• Demonstrate the filtering effect of these implementations on an input sequence. • Derive the discrete convolution equation from a push down stack filter implementation. • Produce the continuous convolution equation from a push down stack filter implementation. • Define, give applications for, and use appropriately the following extensions - Cross-correlation, Monte Carlo

Methods • Demonstrate filtering by an orthogonal function. • Show that complex exponentials are the eigenvectors of differential equations. • Demonstrate the redundancy in dynamic systems eigenvalue/eigenvector relation. • Show how the Laplace transform produces a similarly redundant constant/variable relationship. • Give justification for use of Laplace transform, in terms of simpler algebraic manipulation of constants. • Find and manipulate Laplace transforms of dynamic systems. • Form the transfer function including finding poles and zeros, with CAD assistance. • Manipulate block diagrams, including block reduction. • Invert simple Laplace transforms. • Produce pole-zero plots of a transfer function. • Find and plot the step response of a system. • Develop the Fourier transform by restriction of the Laplace transform. • Develop the Fourier transform by extension of Fourier series to period = ¥ • Use a CAD system to produce Nyquist, Bode, Nichols plots from transforms • Develop the discrete Fourier transform from the continuous Fourier transform • Show, with the aid of a sketch, the redundancy on which the FFT efficiency depends • Outline points of usage, including 2n points in & out, last input point has a value of 0 bandwidth & resolution, • List FFT applications, including spectrum analysis, system identification, analysis in the presence of noise • Correctly produce FFTs from given data • Calculate signal modulation using Fourier transforms • Describe and use z Transform. • Develop the z-transforms from the Laplace transform of a delay. • Produce pole-zero plots from z-transforms, with CAD assistance, and give ¥d ¥n & z • Use a CAD system to produce the discrete forms of Nyquist, Bode, Nichols plots from z-transforms • Detail the effects of sampling, including bandwidth, aliasing, phase lag, etc. • Convert continuous to sampled state space • Find optimum sample time for a given continuous system • Describe and use Transformations. • Interconvert state space « transfer function forms of systems, with CAD assistance. • Interconvert transfer function « pole-zero forms of systems. • Convert between discrete (sampled) « continuous descriptions of systems. • Use bilinear transforms to warp sampled frequencies. • Describe and use Filters & Windowing. • Describe the use of non-recursive filters. • Describe the use of recursive filters.



• Find, with CAD assistance, analog filter pole/zero specification, VCVS implementation, DSP implementation • Describe the effects of windowing a signal, including rectangular « sinc transformation. • Correctly perform, with the aid of a CAD package, Decimation, Over-sampling on a sampled signal • Describe correctly noise amplification within a filter, autocorrelation of filtered noise • Describe and use Quadratic Forms • State Parsevals relation. • Produce power spectra from Fourier transforms. • Perform least squares fitting of polynomials to a sequence. • Develop the matrix form of least squares. • Use CAD matrix routines to perform basic least squares analysis. NE610 Network Equipment 6 Assumed NE410 Network Equipment 4 Switching Network Equipment • Identify the main Digital Switching System (DSS) manufacturers and their products. • Describe the AXE 10 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the 5ESS DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the System 12 DSS and functions of its main components. • Describe the DMS 100/200 DSS and functions of its main components. Transmission Network Equipment • Identify the main transmission equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DM2 and DM8 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main components. • Describe the FLM-150, FLM-600 and FLM-2400 multiplexer/demultiplexer and functions of their main

components.

GSM Network Equipment • Identify the GSM network equipment manufacturers and their products. • Describe the DE34 and DF34 BTS and functions of their main components. • Describe the DX200 switching system and how it is implemented in the BSC. • MSC/VLR, and HLR.

NE620 Network Architecture 6

Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4

Switching Network Architecture • Discuss network clock synchronisation and clock hierarchy structure. • Explain the concept of,







various layered network functionality.



GSM Network Architecture • Describe the GSM network timing configuration. • Describe the implementation of the DE 34/DF 34 BTS, DX200 MSC/VLR and DX200 • HLR into a GSM network. • Describe the implementation of new generations of cellular antennas in GSM networks, namely,










PR610 Problem Solving 6 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications RA610 Antennas 6 Microwave Antenna Systems • Discuss reasons for upgrading microwave antenna systems. • Explain that variable factors in antenna parameters are gain, front-to-back ratio, cross-polar response,





SC610 Science 6 Covered in SC510 Science 5 SU620 Leadership 6 Covered in SU520 Team Leadership SW620 Packet Data Switching 6 X25 Packet Details • List the different packet types used in X25 virtual channel communications, and show how they are employed. • Describe in detail the different fields in X25 packet headers and explain their functions. LAPB Details • List the different HDLC frames used in link layer supporting X25 packet layer. • Describe in detail the different fields in the HDLC frame header and explain their function. Fast Packet Switching–Frame Relay • Describe the limitations of X25 in handling high speed, real time communication required with ISDN. • Explain the advances in reliable transmission technology that allow reduced overheads in packet switching. • Describe how frame relay, driven by N-ISDN, was conceived to overcome restrictions of conventional packet




ISDN) with 64Kb/s N-ISDN switching into their products. SW630 Switch Networks 6 Narrow band ISDN Structure/Operation details • Explain ISDN protocol architecture for user-network interface and intra-network interface. • Explain services provided by ISDN. • Explain the use of ISUP signalling protocol to carry ISDN services across the network. • Identify the implications to the network of the different bearer types that can be carried as part of ISDN bearer

services. • Describe call set-up signalling procedures. Digital Switching and System Software • Describe software architecture of digital switching systems, identifying major functional modules. • Explain the evolution of switching software technology and design process. • Describe functions of Operating System, Call Handling, Administration and Maintenance software.



Intelligent Networks • Explain aims of an Intelligent Network. • Describe the four planes of IN conceptual model. • Describe the physical components of IN. • Describe functional components of IN. • Explain the historical evolution of IN concept. • Describe IN services provided in Australia. • Explain operation of free phone, VPN, card calls and other IN services. • Explain service creation concept of IN, using SIB's. • Explain advantage and limitations of service provision by IN. • Describe signalling function, using CCS7 / TCAP to support IN. • Describe role of adjuncts and service node. Operate a Protocol Analyser • Use a protocol analyser to analyse a protocol interaction, such as ISUP, SS7/TCAP, TUP. Draw the flow

diagram for a recorded period. • Define signalling messages of a normal call set up. • Configure information elements of a signalling message. • Emulate signalling procedures: DSSI, TUP, ISUP, TCAP. • Understand signalling procedure of a call set up. Digital Switching Systems Architecture • Explain technological reasons justifying a distributed control architecture. • Identify major DSS manufacturers and their products, worldwide and in Australia. • Describe architecture and functionality of main components of the following:












PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility. TF610 Test Equipment 6 Network Analysers • Compare the features of scalar and vector network analysers. • List typical parameters, such as, frequency range, resolution, dynamic range, sensitivity and time domain

options. • List applications of network analysers in telecommunications, such as, group delay, swept measurements and

transmission losses/gains. • Perform a search on captured data from the output of a network analyser (SDH, CCS#7, PDH). • Perform a simple "hand" disassembly of a captured frame from a typical network analyser (PDH, SDH, CCS#7,

X25) of at least 256 bits in length. PDH Network Analysers • List the features of a typical PDH network analyser, such as BER, jitter, wander, bit rates and network alarms. • List which tests are carried out in-service and out-of-service. • List the telecommunications network equipment which can be tested using PDH network analysers. SDH Network Analysers • List the features of a typical SDH network analyser, such as, BER, jitter, wander, bit rates, WDM, add/drop

PDH payloads and network alarms. • List which tests are carried out in-service and out-of service. • List the telecommunications network equipment which can be tested using SDH network analysers. ATM/Frame Relay Network Analysers • List the features of a typical ATM/Frame Relay network analyser, such as, injected cell impairments, cell

measurements, alarms, errors and frame relay interworking. • List which tests are carried out in-service and out-of-service. • List the telecommunications network equipment which can be tested using ATM/Frame Relay network

analysers. TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 Transmission Network Impairments • Clock signal impairments.










however, manufacturers have not standardised on MTBF measurement. • Explain the terms Mean Time To Restore (MTTR), Availability and Unavailability. TR610 Transmission Theory 6 • Describe the principle techniques and elements of digital signal transmission • Analyse the fundamental limits on information rate. Digital • Determine the requirements for digital transmission • Analyse advantages and disadvantages of codes. • Discuss the mechanisms of degradation and of control of digital signals on transmission lines • Describe DCPM, PM • Describe DSI systems • Determine BER vs S/N requirements Measurements • Perform representative PCM tests • Determine errors in measurements • Describe jitter measurements • Perform jitter measurements • Examine test procedures and relate to measurement methods. Systems • Describe SDH, PDH in detail • Describe ATM in detail • Compare representative digital transmission schemes. • Describe ISDN and its implementation. • Describe and analyse a number of recent developments in transmission techniques. TR630 Modulation Theory 6 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits • Analyse the effect of interference on digital signals.



Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits • Analyse the performance of demodulator signals in the presence of noise and interference Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in


correction. • Describe typical system applications. Spread Spectrum • Describe the advantages of spread spectrum systems • Describe and analyse the performance of typical spread spectrum systems. Advanced Modulation Schemes • Describe and analyse the [performance of TDMA, CDMA Systems • Describe satellite systems, local area networks and GSM in detail. • Compare the performance of satellite systems, GSM, LANs and other modern implementations. TR640 Narrow and Wideband Principles 6 Spectrum Utilisation • Calculate the spectrum of various modulation schemes including raised cosine, PSK, OOK, QPSK, MSK, FM

using a computer program. • Explain the advantages of MSK and GMSK as a modulation method versus FM and/or PSK • Explain the features and advantages of CDMA systems • Explain and demonstrate the use of Walsh codes

Satellites • Describe typical satellite based transmission systems and their operating principles. • Define what is meant by uplink and downlink frequency bands and the respective differences in transmission

power. • Using basic satellite transmission principles determine the various orbital relationships, receiver/transmitter

power levels and antenna area coverage. • State the range of frequency bands being used in satellite systems and how they are allocated on an

international basis. • Perform satellite link budget calculations.

Transmission Impairments • Describe the source of transmission line echo and its adverse effects. • Explain the difference between speaker and listener echo paths and state which of these is usually most severe. • Describe the operation of echo suppressors with reference to the ITU recommendation G.164. • State the advantages and disadvantages of echo suppressors. • Describe the operation of echo cancellers with reference to the ITU recommendation G.165. • Simulate a simple adaptive echo canceller and verify its performance characteristics using a simulation package

such as MATLAB. • Describe the problem and recommended solutions of echo cancellation when a modem is used to transmit data

over a normal telephone voice channel. • State why channel equalisation is necessary. • Explain why adaptive channel equalisers are necessary and what benefits they yield.



TR660 Spectrum Management 6

Radio Spectrum Characteristics • Describe the propagation characteristics of the commonly used mobile radio bands and calculate expected


various performance parameters.

Media Access • Describe how channel access and resource sharing techniques enable spectrum limitations and propagation




frequency spectrum.


coefficient on receiver signal strength at a particular frequency • Describe the ways of reducing fade in a typical cellular radio system.

Spectrum Management for Maximum Return on Investment • Prepare a business plan to purchase spectrum for a cellular system based on potential revenue by using a


TR680 Transmission Hierarchy 6

PDH versus SDH • Briefly review PDH characteristics • Describe the limitations of PDH in terms of present and future transmission system requirements. • Examine the functional architecture of transport networks based on Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) and

its characteristics. • Establish the functional relationship between SDH and SONET. • Describe the main features of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) and SONET.

SDH • Describe the SDH frame structure including such aspects as, synchronous transport modules, tributary units,

tributary unit groups, administrative units, pointers and section overheads • Explain the SDH-based multiplexing process • Describe the structural configuration of an SDH layered transport network • Analyse and investigate the various sources of timing errors in both PDH and SDH transmission networks. • Explain the terms phase variation, regular clocks, gapped clocks and frame phase. State how these are used

within an SDH transport network. • Describe the characteristics and sources of various timing impairments including, frequency offset, clock noise,

quantised phase variation, regenerator jitter, diurnal wander and desynchronised justification jitter. • Explain administrative and tributary unit pointers mechanisms and how these are used to overcome clock

impairments. • Describe the structural configuration of clock synchronising networks for PDH and SDH. • Examine and understand transmission system performance including the underlying principles and basic

requirements. Review the monitoring capabilities and mechanisms available for establishing SDH transmission network performance.

• Explain general transmission network performance parameters including error performance and availability measures.

• List the sources of transmission error and their relative importance in an SDH network. • Identify the transmission error detection mechanisms available within SDH including loss of frame phase and

block error monitor. • Explain SDH based error performance and unavailability parameters and how they are determined.



ATM • Establish the functionality and implementation of transmission systems based on Asynchronous Transfer Mode

(ATM). • Identify the components of an ATM cell and explain the function of each component. • Calculate the Bit Error Rate (BER) requirements of a transmission system required for successful use by ATM. • Explain the relationship between ATM service classes and ATM adaptation layer functions. • Identify the transmission options for ATM and their associated framing and coding characteristics. • Explain how cell delineation is achieved for each of the available ATM transmission options. VO610 Video Network Techniques 6 • Set up and commission a video distribution system which incorporates a switching element and a network

node. • Demonstrate the remote management of the switching element and any other manageable elements connected

to the video distribution system. • Write a report detailing the setting up and commissioning of the video distribution network, including that of

the switching element. • Write a report detailing the remote management of the manageable elements of the video distribution network,

including the switching element. Sources can include work experience or training laboratory. • Write a report on current and emerging trends in digital video distribution, such as HDTV, etc. VO620 Video and Sound Principles 6 Television Transmission Systems. • Draw a block diagram of a television transmission system and identify the following blocks:

• Video In (from a variety of sources) • Audio In (from a variety of sources), Master Control Room, • Video Amplifier, Video Modulator, Modulation Amplifier, Oscillator, • Frequency Multipliers, Power Amplifiers, Audio Amplifier, • Varactor control Oscillator and Diplexer

• Describe the standards for the Australian Television High Definition / High Fidelity Television • Digital Television • Analogue to Digital Conversion • encoding (video and sound) • Time-division multiplexing • Time compression of analogue signals Transmission Modes • Describe MPEG-2 • Discuss the signal format Produce a block diagram of the format






UNIT ICTTC095B - Conduct radio frequency measurements

In the event of a problem/fault occurring or being identified as a result of the measurement, repair/rectification is covered by units ICTTC085B–091B. Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Plan and prepare for measurements 1 The need for and the type of measurements required is established

2 Appropriate tools/test equipment are identified and obtained

3 Tools and test equipment are checked for accuracy and calibration organised where required

4 Checks are conducted to ensure that built in tests associated with particular test equipment have run and action taken in accordance with manufacturers specifications in the event of failure

5 Required resources are identified and obtained

6 Impact of measurements on the network are assessed and appropriate personnel, including customers are advised accordingly

7 Previous measurement data is obtained where appropriate

8 Installation specifications and appropriate vendor documentation is obtained

9 In place management frequency data is accessed

10 Necessary safety gear is obtained and checked to be in good working order

2 Conduct radio frequency and level measurements

1 Configuration of test gear is selected appropriate to the measurements to be undertaken and in accordance with specifications

2 Appropriate measurement are undertaken in accordance with planned requirements

3 Measurements are continually checked against specified frequency criteria

4 Number and time span over which measurements are taken is sufficient to enable validity of results




3 Conduct radio frequency hazard measurements

1 Source of the potential radio frequency hazard is identified

2 Previous radio frequency level measurements are obtained

3 Configuration of test gear is selected appropriate to the measurements to be undertaken and in accordance with specifications

4 Appropriate measurements are undertaken in accordance with planned requirements

5 Measurements are continually checked against specified frequency criteria

6 Number and time span over which measurements are taken is sufficient to enable validity of results

7 Radio frequency levels are assessed at both occupational and non occupational distances


4 Analyse measurement outcomes 1 Measurements are checked against relevant standards and specifications

2 Specifications are checked with the vendor where spurious results are obtained

3 Problems identified are either fixed or escalated in accordance with enterprise procedure

4 Negotiations are undertaken with relevant Spectrum Management Authority where there is a conflict as to the frequency measurement reading

5 Results are documented and reports prepared and forwarded to appropriate area where resolution of a frequency dispute cannot be resolved

6 Variations to radio frequency hazard levels are assessed and recorded

7 Reasons for radio frequency hazard level variance is determined and appropriate corrective action initiated or escalated to appropriate level in accordance with enterprise policy

8 Appropriate checks are initiated to ensure that prescribed safety arrangements associated with radiation are in place and corrective action taken if not



5 Document measurement results 1 Appropriate proforma is obtained

2 Details of measurement and the time and date of reading is recorded on the correct proforma

3 Test configurations and all other relevant data are recorded in accordance with enterprise policy or spectrum management requirements

4 Measurement results are located in an appropriate location on site for future reference

5 Test results are recorded on a central data base as required in accordance with enterprise policy

6 Results are on forwarded to the Spectrum Management Agency where required by legislative requirements

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Tools and test equipment may include: Power meter, frequency analyser, spectrum analyser, dummy loads, constellation analysers, radio frequency connectors tests and cords, radiation meter Radio frequencies are allocated under licence by the relevant Spectrum Management Authority Measurements may be undertaken as a routine, a complaint from another frequency user, on request by the relevant Spectrum Management Authority or other government bodies Safety precautions associated with radiation hazards are defined by legislation Details of operating frequency and radiation levels associated with wireless/radio equipment is held securely on site Tests are undertaken in accordance with specification and/or enterprise policy but can be varied to suit the conditions and the uncertainty surrounding validity of results



Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law Spectrum Management legislation

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • identifying measurements required and expected outcomes • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • focusing on the customer and consideration of customer needs • using test equipment including: power meter, frequency analyser, spectrum analyser, dummy loads,

constellation analysers, radio frequency connector tests and cords • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • analysing test results. Candidate submits hard copy of at least three sets each of radio frequency measurement results and radio frequency hazard measurement demonstrating successful completion of the procedures. Candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor reporting on findings complete with recommendations. Candidate submits hard copy of at least three written reports documenting measurement results.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 MA420 Mathematics 4 NE410 Network Equipment 4 NE420 Network Architecture 4 OH320 Safe Handling OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 OH420 Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 4 PR410 Problem Solving 4 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 PS420 Basic Building Trades 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 RC310 Riggers Certificate 3 SC410 Science 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR410 Transmission Theory 4 TR460 Spectrum Management 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:












material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction DI410 Digital Theory 4 • Identify various digital logic Integrated Circuits and MSI packages. Outline the operation , their applications




diagnose and identify affected elements, given a variety of common faults. Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology DI430 Digital Radio 4 Analog Radio Transmissions and Digital Radio Transmissions • List the advantages of analog radio transmission. • List the advantages of digital radio transmission.



Digital Modulation Techniques for Radio Transmission • Use diagrams to describe ASK, FSK, PSK,4PSK, 8PSK, 16QAM and 64QAM • Modulation techniques. • List the advantages of the various digital modulation techniques. Factors which Influence System Implementation in Digital Radio Networks • Define the term 'free space path loss' (FSPL). • Calculate the FSPL of a single hop radio link. • Define the term 'system gain'. • Calculate the received signal level of a radio link. • Define the term 'bit-error-rate' (BER). • Determine, from a graph, the fade margin of a digital radio system and still maintain a specified BER. • Explain, using diagrams, time, space and frequency diversity. The Radio Propagation Phenomena Which Affect Space Wave Paths • Explain, using a diagram, how the space wave consists of two waves, the direct and • reflected. • State advantages of space wave over rugged terrain compared to over water or desert. • List the types of fading encountered in UHF/SHF radio systems. • State the cause and effect on digital radio performance of each type of fading. Basic Commissioning Tests of Digital UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Measure transmitter carrier frequency. • Measure transmitter carrier power. • Measure AGC level and determine receiver input signal level. • Measure receiver input level. • Measure BER. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 • Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination



IN420 Teamwork 4 Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members.

MA420 Mathematics 4
















Satellite Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of the Home Access Community Broadcast • Satellite Service (HACBSS). • Draw and describe the distribution of television programmes via satellite. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a WAN via satellite. Transmission Network Architecture • Draw and describe the interconnection of a co-axial cable transmission network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a digital microwave radio transmission • network. • Draw and describe the interconnection of a fibre optic transmission network. OH320 Safe Handling • Select the appropriate ladders, scaffolding, hoists, harness and fastening to access the structures.




• Apply measures to prevent such substances being absorbed into the body. OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.










OH420 Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 4 Assumed OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 • Describe the general aims and objectives of existing Commonwealth and State Occupational Health & Safety

legislation. • Identify policies and agreements which are relevant to the installation, repair and testing of telecommunication

equipment. • List employer and employee responsibilities, rights and obligations relating to OH & S. • State the major functions of safety committees and representatives. • Establish a Designated Work Group in the workplace. • Keep up-to-date with policies, agreements and safety issues published by relevant Workcover Authority. PR410 Problem Solving 4 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 • Manufacturers specifications




PS420 Basic Building Trades 4 Covered in PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 RA410 Antennas 4 Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields.



Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate. Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors. Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and





FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. RC310 Riggers Certificate 3 • Refer to the relevant state authority for the type of qualification and training required. • If a recognised licence or certificate is not required refer to TC310 and TC510. SC410 Science 4 • Demonstrate the ability to make accurate observations and measurement on various physical quantities. Record










gate, etc )



Complex Signal Flow Paths • List the six different types of signal flow paths found in electronics and telecommunications, namely,










output.

Complex Signal Flow Path Test Analysis • List applications of each of the six signal flow paths in telecommunications. • Discuss test analysis methods of each of the six signal flow paths

TO410 Use of Tools 4

Electronic Hand Tools • Identify a range of electronic hand tools, such as:










Transmission Lines • Describe the requirements for distortionless transmission • Describe the expected performance of a transmission line • Describe a model of the transmission line and identify the causes of degradation. Measurements Skills • Perform BER tests • Perform EYE pattern tests • Identify ISI degradation • Perform echo testing on lines TR460 Spectrum Management 4 Spectrum Management Overview • Describe the principles behind managing the resource known as the radio spectrum. • Describe the general characteristics and names of the ITU approved radio bands from 30 Hz to 30 GHz • Compare where radio spectrum appears within the entire Electromagnetic Spectrum • Consult a database of allocated frequencies to find the services in use at that frequency. Filters for Managing Spectrum • Plot the frequency response and Bode approximation of a simple low pass and High pass filter • Explain the terms decade, octave, bandwidth, roll off, delay, phase plot, 3db point • Define roll off characteristics of typical filters (R-C, R-C-L, mechanical, SAW, crystal) • Determine the transfer function for a composite network of two or three single time constant networks. • Sketch the Bode plots for gain and Phase by adding together the Bode plots of gain and phase of each of the






sinusoidal signal suffers non linear distortion in a non linear network.



Spectrum Utilisation • Sketch a typical FDM system • Explain how frequency reuse is achieved in a digital microwave network by space division • Explain the process under which a spectrum is allocated by the SMA to a carrier • Explain the need for Guard bands • Use a program or spreadsheet to calculate the IMD products of up to order 7 and 2 or 3 main input frequencies. • Calculated the maximum bandwidth of an AM and a FM radio systems given the modulation index and Bessel

tables.






UNIT ICTTC096B - Conduct field tests of radio/wireless networks

This unit applies to both cellular and trunked radio systems Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Plan tests 1 Need for tests and the particular types of tests to be undertaken are identified

2 Area to be tested is clearly identified

3 Location and number of tests are determined

4 A pre determined route is established

5 Current data is is obtained from a print out from the switch(es)

2 Obtain tools 1 Appropriate tools/test equipment are identified and obtained

2 Tools and test equipment are checked for accuracy and calibration organised where required

3 Checks are conducted to ensure that built in tests associated with particular test equipment have run and action taken in accordance with manufacturers specifications in the event of failure

3 Conduct tests 1 Tests specific to equipment, area and test purpose are conducted in accordance with specification

2 Sufficient test calls are made to achieve an adequate statistical sample

3 Validity of tests is ensured by comparison with current and previous data as required




4 Analyse test results 1 Test results are analysed against specified standards

2 Variations to standards are investigated and reasons identified

3 Faults are diagnosed and either repaired or escalated in accordance with enterprise policy

4 Design faults are documented and recommendations for change are submitted to the appropriate enterprise area

5 Service degradation is noted and action initiated to optimise or reconfigure equipment in accordance with specifications and/or enterprise directions

5 Undertake administrative tasks 1 Test results are recorded on the appropriate proforma and/or data base

2 Results are distributed in accordance with enterprise policy

3 Tools and test equipment is checked and returned for recalibration or stored in accordance with enterprise policy


RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Tools and test equipment may include: GPS System, lap top computer, motor vehicle, in vehicle and hand held phone, test software, fixed antenna on vehicle, frequency plans, geographic maps Test equipment self calibrates, but primary/secondary calibration is undertaken by appropriate specialists Types of tests undertaken include: integration, quality of signal, comparison with other carriers, optimisation, coverage Tests are undertaken in accordance with specification and/or enterprise policy but can be varied to suit the conditions and the uncertainty surrounding validity of results



Reason for tests may include: validation e.g base station, optimisation, comparison, coverage confirmation, signal level Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Private property law Spectrum management

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor—planning relevant tests, including: • driving and navigation capability • identification of tests required and likely outcomes • interaction with enterprise staff, customers and contractors Mentor/assessor observes candidate obtaining and using test tools, including GPS system, lap top computer, test software and hand held phone Mentor/assessor observes candidate: • complying with all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation Candidate submits hard copy of at least three test result analyses and reports detailing outcomes with recommendations as to action to be taken. Mentor/assessor observes candidate's customer focus and consideration of customer needs. Candidate submits at least three sets of hard copy test results, recorded on the appropriate proforma and/or database.



Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI410 Communication 4 CO410 Computer Skills 4 CS410 Customer Relations 4 DI410 Digital Theory 4 DI430 Digital Radio 4 EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 IN420 Teamwork 4 MA410 Basic Mathematics 4 OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 PE320 Remote Work PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 PS420 Basic Building Trades 4 RA410 Antennas 4 RA420 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 4 TE460 Pager Operation 4 TE480 CMTS 4 TF420 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 4 TO410 Use of Tools 4 TO420 Anti-static Procedures 4 TR430 Modulation Theory 4 TR460 Spectrum Management 4 CI410 Communication 4 Write • Understand the advantages of using plan English in the workplace • Develop writing strategies using plain English to deliver good and bad news, to inform and persuade • Edit according to the principles of plain English Graphical Communication • Use and interpret graphics in the workplace documents including:












material list, and cost estimates, analysis of various options. • Print out drawings, documented reports and cost data. CS410 Customer Relations 4 Client Interaction Identify internal and external customers Identify customer needs and expectations and the organisation's role in providing the service or product to fill these needs. Establish and maintain an effective working relationships with customers: • Consider customer needs • Consult with customers • Inform customer of any services impact • Analyse customer complaints Assess customer satisfaction DI410 Digital Theory 4 • Identify various digital logic Integrated Circuits and MSI packages. Outline the operation , their applications




diagnose and identify affected elements, given a variety of common faults. Note: Digital + Microprocessor Technology DI430 Digital Radio 4 Analog Radio Transmissions and Digital Radio Transmissions • List the advantages of analog radio transmission. • List the advantages of digital radio transmission.



Digital Modulation Techniques for Radio Transmission • Use diagrams to describe ASK, FSK, PSK,4PSK, 8PSK, 16QAM and 64QAM • Modulation techniques. • List the advantages of the various digital modulation techniques. Factors which Influence System Implementation in Digital Radio Networks • Define the term 'free space path loss' (FSPL). • Calculate the FSPL of a single hop radio link. • Define the term 'system gain'. • Calculate the received signal level of a radio link. • Define the term 'bit-error-rate' (BER). • Determine, from a graph, the fade margin of a digital radio system and still maintain a specified BER. • Explain, using diagrams, time, space and frequency diversity. The Radio Propagation Phenomena Which Affect Space Wave Paths • Explain, using a diagram, how the space wave consists of two waves, the direct and • reflected. • State advantages of space wave over rugged terrain compared to over water or desert. • List the types of fading encountered in UHF/SHF radio systems. • State the cause and effect on digital radio performance of each type of fading. Basic Commissioning Tests of Digital UHF/SHF Radio Systems • Measure transmitter carrier frequency. • Measure transmitter carrier power. • Measure AGC level and determine receiver input signal level. • Measure receiver input level. • Measure BER. EN420 Enterprise Information Systems 4 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for specific operations.. EN430 Enterprise Organisational Policy 4 Observing policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as










IN410 Interpersonal Relationships 4 • Self management • Personal presentation • Verbal/non-verbal skills • Sexual harassment • Copyright and licensing paramenters: software, hardware,data • Mutual respect and reciprocal efforts • Kinds of discrimination IN420 Teamwork 4 Improving Team Performance • Establish a supportive communication climate for the team. • Identify Tuckman's stages of team development. • Differentiate between task-related and maintenance-related roles within a team. • Identify the advantages and disadvantages of team decisions. • Identify how decisions are made in teams by authority, consensus, majority and compromise. • Draw up a decision making agenda. • Facilitate effective decision making in teams by using brainstorming and nominal group techniques. • Identify factors affecting participation of team members. • Recognise the individual needs, reactions and feelings within the team. • Encourage participation of all team members. MA410 Basic Mathematics 4 Minimum: • Interpret tables for locating geostationary satellites • Plot data on ploar graph • Errors in measurement and estimations • Decibels - graphical plots: log, linear OH410 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Assumed -OH310 Occupational Health & Safety 3 & OH320 Safe Handling Procedures 3 • Identify potential hazards which exist at the various worksite environments.










PE320 Remote Work Maintain Personal Well Being and Safety • Determine physical and psychological status • Undertake first aid training • Demonstrate outdoor survival skills • Develop navigational skills • Demonstrate competent driving ability for the terrain and environmental conditions to be encountered • Plan appropriately for transport, food, accommodation communication and social support • Apply time management techniques • Use stress management techniques • Document and communicate personal routine to others regularly • Use emergency communication if necessary Perform Professional Duties • Prepare comprehensive checklist for all material and equipment to be supplied • Plan and implement secure transit of material equipment • Develop contingency plan for delays and obstacles encountered due to distance and environmental factors. • Use appropriate communication to give and receive feedback from clients, enterprise and relevant authorities PS410 Plans and Specifications 4 • Manufacturers specifications




PS420 Basic Building Trades 4 Covered in PS220 Basic Building Trades 2 RA410 Antennas 4 Site Access and Safety Requirements of a Radio Transmission Site • List radio site access considerations. • List security issues at local and remote sites. • List general issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List safety issues which should be observed and reported, if at fault, at a radio site. • List precautions to be observed when working at heights. • List precautions to be observed with electromagnetic fields. Principles of Radio Wave Propagation from a Transmitting Antenna to a Receiving Antenna • Explain the basic conversion process that occurs in an antenna. • Describe how electromagnetic waves propagate.



Installation Procedure for VHF, UHF, SHF and Cellular Antennas and Feeders • Describe the physical differences between various antennas and feeders. • Describe the techniques used to install antennas on buildings, rooftops, towers and masts. • Install a pipe mast, antenna, feeder and connectors. Orientation of a Parabolic Antenna for Terrestrial and Satellite Reception • Determine the optimum orientation for a terrestrial receiving antenna using a receiver signal strength reading. • Determine the optimum azimuth and angle of elevation for a satellite receiving antenna, given the locations, and





FM Transmitters and Receivers • Explain the function of each block in a FM transmitter. • Draw the block diagram of an FM superheterodyne receiver. • List the function of each block in the receiver, and output frequencies. • Explain the advantages of FM radio systems compared to AM radio systems. • Calculate the output power from an FM transmitter, modulated and unmodulated. TE460 Pager Operation 4 • Describe briefly the functions, principles and operation of a basic paging system. • Draw the block diagram of both a basic VHF and a UHF pager receiver, and describe the operation of the

receiver section and the decoder section. • For the above receivers, determine the frequencies used, the channel spacing, the frequency deviation, paging

sensitivity, display characteristics, and the power consumption. • Describe these following early paging coding formats used:-

• GSC (Golay Sequential Code) code, and • POCSAG (Post Office Code Standardisation Advisory Group) code.

• Investigate the codes and coding capacity, and describe how a pager can be addressed using the above codes. • Investigate and compare the ERMES (European Radio Messaging Service) digital radio system with the

existing POCSAG system. Comment on the improved error detection and correction. • Determine what enhancements Low Earth Orbit Satellite (LEOS) systems such as Iridium, will provide to radio

paging systems. • Perform some basic tests such as DC voltages, Pager Sensitivity Check, Audio Measurement Check, Decoder

Checks, Clock Waveform and Amplitude Measurements. TE480 CMTS 4 Basic CMTS Architecture. • State two main limitations of the hard-wired (PSTN) telephone system. • Describe the features and benefits of the Mobile Telephone Service over hard-wired traditional telephone

services. • Explain the "Cellular" concept, and describe "Cell" configuration in terms of Omni Cells, Cell Clusters, Sector

Cells, and Co-channel cells. • Explain the main differences between GSM and AMPS systems in terms of features, modulation techniques

used, number range and frequency allocation between Telstra, Optus and Vodaphone. • Sketch the basic block diagram of a GSM system showing the various transmission and switching elements,

and describe the functions of the Master Switching Centre (MSC), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), and the Mobile Station (MS).

GSM System Operation • State the purpose of the HLR, VLR, AUC, EIR database registers used in the MSC. • Describe what is meant by the following numbering systems: IMSI, TMSI, IMEI, MSISDN, ESN, and KI. • Draw a timing diagram to show the basic steps involved in a Mobile Originated Call to the PSTN, and a Mobile

Terminated Call from the PSTN. • Explain the concept of "handover". • Explain the concept of "roaming", and determine the international roaming agreements between the various

carriers and overseas countries. GSM Mobile Station Operation • Describe the facilities provided by the SIM card in the GSM phone, and explain the purpose of the PIN number

and the PUK code. • Explain how the mobile station can automatically adjust its own power output to allow for transmission

characteristics to the BTS. • Perform basic tests a GSM mobile station using a test set to evaluate its performance characteristics.






TR430 Modulation Theory 4 Describe the Communication System • Manipulate frequency and wavelength relationships • Describe the freq spectrum • Identify various communication mediums • Describe noise and its effects Modulation Concepts • Analyse signals in the time and frequency domains • Define linier modulation • Describe AM/SSB/DSB and VSB signals • Perform basic calculations on non linier modulation signals • Construct and explain the operation of linier modulation circuits • Interpret spectral and time domain waveforms of linier modulated signals • Describe non linier modulation • Describe typical non linier modulation circuits • Perform basic calculations on non linier modulated signals Demodulation Concepts • Describe demodulation • Identify and describe demodulator circuits Multiplexing • Identify and describe the basic multiplexing methods Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation using PCM • Analyse PCM performance • Compare digital and analog signals Noise • Describe methods of characterising noise • Describe the effect of noise on analog and digital signals. • Perform basic calculations on noise • Perform noise measurements TR460 Spectrum Management 4 Spectrum Management Overview • Describe the principles behind managing the resource known as the radio spectrum. • Describe the general characteristics and names of the ITU approved radio bands from 30 Hz to 30 GHz • Compare where radio spectrum appears within the entire Electromagnetic Spectrum • Consult a database of allocated frequencies to find the services in use at that frequency.










tables.






UNIT ICTTC097B - Conduct tests on handset enhancements and international roaming agreements

This unit applies to both cellular and trunked radio systems Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Identify need for tests 1 Details of new mobile equipment and associated features are obtained and analysed

2 Details of new roaming agreements are received

3 SIM cards associated with phones are received and programmed into test equipment

2 Plan tests 1 Testing conditions are established

2 Details and location of tests to be conducted are developed

3 Resource needed to conduct tests are identified and organised

4 Routing information for international carriers is received and studied

5 Contact details for international carriers is identified

6 Translation of international carrier SIM card information is arranged

7 Specific details relating to agreement such as restricted access is established

8 Network management centre is advised of the test details and work permit obtained where necessary

3 Initiate test calls 1 Test calls are made to specified areas of the network in accordance with ITU regulations and in accordance with the roaming agreement

2 All enhancement/features are fully tested against manufacturers specifications

3 Tests are undertaken to ensure billing integrity

4 Sufficient test calls are made to ensure the validity of the test

5 A drive test is organised where appropriate



4 Analyse results 1 Performance results on mobile phone enhancements and new features are documented and checked against manufacturers stated specifications

2 Impact of enhancements and new features on the network are established with network management staff

3 Tests associated with roaming agreements are documented and discussed with international carrier where appropriate

5 Finalise action 1 Recommendations are made to marketing people relating to results of tests associated with enhancements/new features on mobile phones

2 Results of tests are forwarded to mobile phone manufacturer where appropriate

3 Full details of tests associated with roaming agreements are documented and forwarded to international company concerned

RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Mobile phone enhancements may include: message waiting indicators, receipt messages, fax/data Tests on enhancements/ new phones and features include: operational capability, compatibility with normal features provided by carriers, impact on the network, check against manufacturers standards, battery life, aerial, phone durability, cyphering, authentication International roaming agreement testing is conducted under the auspices of ITU regulation 24 and standards defined therein Testing conditions may include: acceptance to network, establishing path, CCS signalling Translation of international carrier SIM cards can involve: language, software loading and switch changes such as additions, network growth and upgrades



Tests involve talking to HLR for both billing purposes and enabling for roaming Frequency of tests associated with roaming agreements are specific to enterprise but can be done at least twice a week Test calls can be made to directory assistance, emergency numbers and dedicated numbers on the PSTN. The are made mobile to fixed phone and mobile to mobile Information provided to international carrier includes: Test time, date recorded, call success, call quality Tests may involve special test software Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International Standards ISO 9000 and 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Privacy Act Frequency management

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor—identifying relevant tests, including: • operational capability • compatibility • network impact • check against manufacturer's standards • battery life • aerial • phone durability • likely outcomes Mentor/assessor observes candidate's competency in: • interacting with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation • translating of international SIM cards including: language, software loading, switch changes • all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices



Mentor/assessor observes candidate's ability to: • maintain customer focus and consideration of customer needs • conduct international roaming agreement testing in accordance with ITU recommendations • use test equipment, conduct tests Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor: • reporting on findings • applying international roaming agreements • interpreting results Candidate to submit at least three written reports containing analyses of new handsets/features and detailed findings. One of these reports to be on a type of handset not previously encountered in supervised training. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 DI610 Digital Theory 6 DI630 Digital Radio 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 EN630 Enterprise Organisational Policy 6 ET420 Amplifiers 4 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN640 Workplace Networking 6 MA610 Basic Mathematics 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PR610 Problem Solving 6 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 RA610 Antennas 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RA630 Mobile Equipment 6 RE670 ITU and International Agreements 6 SC610 Science 6 SU620 Leadership 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TE680 CMTS 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TF640 Radio Tests 6 TR630 Modulation Theory 6 TR660 Spectrum Management 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,







advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. DI610 Digital Theory 6 Assumed - DI510 Digital Theory 5 • Analyse fault reports of existing telecommunications systems. • Devise tests and measurements to identify deficiencies in designs both software and hardware of new and





recommendations for converting an unreliable transmission link. Note: This topic may overlap with Fault Finding, Test Equipment, Test Analysis and Diagnosis,Network Equipment, Network Management Principles and Capabilities. DI630 Digital Radio 6 Minimum Shift Keying Digital Modulation Techniques • Explain the differences between MSK and GMSK. • Describe the phase trajectory of MSK/GMSK. • Explain the need for differential encoding in GMSK. • Compare GMSK and DAMPS digital modulation techniques. Speech Coding Techniques • Revise 64kbit/second digital speech coding for telephony. • Discuss alternative speech coding techniques, ADPCM, AVSD/CVSD, APC. • Describe the concept of voice coding based on modelling of the human voice. • Describe the Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) technique.



GSM Speech Coding • Explain the history behind the selection of the GSM coder algorithm. • Describe the three main requirements for GSM speech coding as, exploiting redunduncyin human speech,

exploiting pauses in natural flow, and maintaining speech quality as good as analog cellular. • Explain the operation of the Long Term Predictor (LTP) part of the GSM coder. • Explain the operation of the Regular Pulse Excitation (RPE) process. • Fully explain the operation of the LTP LPC/RPE coding process used in GSM. • Examine the bit allocation of the GSM speech coder. • Explain the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) technique. • Describe how ciphering is achieved in GSM. • Determine the encoded voice bit rate. • Determine the gross bit rate after forward error correction and channel coding bits are • Added to speech transmission. GSM Enhancements • Compare phase 1 GSM with phase 2 GSM. • Describe enhanced full rate speech coding. • Describe half rate speech coding and its future impact on system capacity. • Compare data services offered by GSM. • Describe the use of CDMA in GSM networks. • List supplementary services available now and in the future, such as, call barring, • Call waiting, call hold, conference calls, calling party ID. Computer Simulation • Simulate the interleaving process and forward error correction process with a computer. • Program and comment on its effectiveness with burst errors of varying length. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events. EN630 Enterprise Organisational Policy 6 Interpreting policy in workplace interaction with other personnel. Direction of personnel on the basis of policy. ET420 Amplifiers 4 Assumed - ET410 Electronics 4 • Describe the operation of an amplifier in terms of the power supply as the source of energy, the input signal as










IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members. IN640 Workplace Networking 6 Global Networking Assumed IN540 Workplace Networking 5 • Demonstrate a basic understanding of Australia's international economic and political position. • Suggest future world trends that are likely to have significant impact on Australia's international economic and

political position. • Define the enterprise's current role within this context and speculate to its possible future role. • Cultivate a tolerance and understanding for cultural diversity in the workplace at local and global levels.



MA610 Basic Mathematics 6 Minimum • Calculus

• transient/steady state analysis • Fourier Theory

• discrete • continuous

• Database management systems • data analysis • normalisation • selective query

Additional - Select from: • Explain the purpose of alternate routing in networks and the design concepts of alternate routing in circuit

switched and packet-switched networks. • Demonstrate how the high-usage traffic capacity tables are used to evaluate the traffic overflowing to the

alternate group. • Demonstrate how the weighted mean peakedness factor is calculated. • Explain the method used to evaluate the number of circuits in the final group. • Define the reference connections for circuit-switched services and for packet-switched services and relate user

demands to traffic variables. • List the traffic forecasting models and demonstrate the familiarity with the techniques for forecasting the traffic

and services used by Australian carriers. • Describe the theoretical basis for data compression of various telecommunications services used in speech, text

data, fax, video and GSM services. Discuss at length, compression techniques applied to one of these services, showing the theoretical foundations of concepts such as Discrete Fourier Transform, Huffman encoding, etc. Describe the principles and application of convolution, and be able to use it.

• Generate sequences using - 'q' notation block diagrams of tapped delay line filters, push down stack implementation of delay line.

• Demonstrate the filtering effect of these implementations on an input sequence. • Derive the discrete convolution equation from a push down stack filter implementation. • Produce the continuous convolution equation from a push down stack filter implementation. • Define, give applications for, and use appropriately the following extensions - Cross-correlation, Monte Carlo

Methods • Demonstrate filtering by an orthogonal function. • Show that complex exponentials are the eigenvectors of differential equations. • Demonstrate the redundancy in dynamic systems eigenvalue/eigenvector relation. • Show how the Laplace transform produces a similarly redundant constant/variable relationship. • Give justification for use of Laplace transform, in terms of simpler algebraic manipulation of constants. • Find and manipulate Laplace transforms of dynamic systems. • Form the transfer function including finding poles and zeros, with CAD assistance. • Manipulate block diagrams, including block reduction. • Invert simple Laplace transforms. • Produce pole-zero plots of a transfer function. • Find and plot the step response of a system. • Develop the Fourier transform by restriction of the Laplace transform. • Develop the Fourier transform by extension of Fourier series to period = ¥ • Use a CAD system to produce Nyquist, Bode, Nichols plots from transforms • Develop the discrete Fourier transform from the continuous Fourier transform • Show, with the aid of a sketch, the redundancy on which the FFT efficiency depends • Outline points of usage, including 2n points in & out, last input point has a value of 0 bandwidth & resolution, • List FFT applications, including spectrum analysis, system identification, analysis in the presence of noise • Correctly produce FFTs from given data • Calculate signal modulation using Fourier transforms • Describe and use z Transform. • Develop the z-transforms from the Laplace transform of a delay.



• Produce pole-zero plots from z-transforms, with CAD assistance, and give ¥d ¥n & z • Use a CAD system to produce the discrete forms of Nyquist, Bode, Nichols plots from z-transforms • Detail the effects of sampling, including bandwidth, aliasing, phase lag, etc. • Convert continuous to sampled state space • Find optimum sample time for a given continuous system • Describe and use Transformations. • Interconvert state space « transfer function forms of systems, with CAD assistance. • Interconvert transfer function « pole-zero forms of systems. • Convert between discrete (sampled) « continuous descriptions of systems. • Use bilinear transforms to warp sampled frequencies. • Describe and use Filters & Windowing. • Describe the use of non-recursive filters. • Describe the use of recursive filters. • Find, with CAD assistance, analog filter pole/zero specification, VCVS implementation, DSP implementation • Describe the effects of windowing a signal, including rectangular « sinc transformation. • Correctly perform, with the aid of a CAD package, Decimation, Over-sampling on a sampled signal • Describe correctly noise amplification within a filter, autocorrelation of filtered noise • Describe and use Quadratic Forms • State Parsevals relation. • Produce power spectra from Fourier transforms. • Perform least squares fitting of polynomials to a sequence. • Develop the matrix form of least squares. • Use CAD matrix routines to perform basic least squares analysis. NE620 Network Architecture 6 Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4 Switching Network Architecture • Discuss network clock synchronisation and clock hierarchy structure. • Explain the concept of,






various layered network functionality.



GSM Network Architecture • Describe the GSM network timing configuration. • Describe the implementation of the DE 34/DF 34 BTS, DX200 MSC/VLR and DX200 • HLR into a GSM network. • Describe the implementation of new generations of cellular antennas in GSM networks, namely,










PR610 Problem Solving 6 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 PS610 Plans and Specifications 6 Covered in PS510 Plans and Specifications RA610 Antennas 6 Microwave Antenna Systems • Discuss reasons for upgrading microwave antenna systems. • Explain that variable factors in antenna parameters are gain, front-to-back ratio, cross-polar response,





RA630 Mobile Equipment 6 GSM System Architecture • Draw a block diagram of a GSM network interconnected into the PSTN. • Explain the terms GMSC, EIR, HLR, VLR, AC, OMC, MSC, BSC, BTS and MS. • Briefly describe interconnection of the GSM network. Air Interface • Define the data structures, slot, frame, multiframe and hyperframe. • List the logical channel types. • Describe the synchronisation procedure and timing advance. Mobile Station Equipment • Explain the SIM card and IMSI. • Describe power control of the MS transmitter. • Discuss the GSM frequency spectrum usage. • Describe the burst structures used in GSM. GSM Call Setup • Describe the mobile registration procedure. • Describe the call establishment procedure. • Describe mobile station handover between BTSs, BSCs and MSCs. Security Parameters • Explain the 'authentication' procedure. • Explain GSM ciphering and the application of keys and algorithms. • Describe the use of a TMSI. Layer 1–The Physical Layer • Explain FDMA, TDMA, SDMA as applied to GSM. Layer 2–The Data Link Layer. • State the tasks of the Data Link Layer • Briefly describe the four different frame formats used in Layer 2 GSM. • Briefly describe the four different fields used in Layer 2 GSM. Layer 3–The GSM Network Layer • Describe the Radio Resource Management sublayer. • Describe the Mobility Management sublayer. • Describe the Connection Management sublayer. Mobile Station Testing • Connect a GSM mobile station to a GSM mobile station test set and prepare for testing. • Perform basic tests to confirm operation of GSM mobile station. • Perform advanced tests on a GSM mobile station to evaluate operating parameters. RE670 ITU and International Agreements 6 • Role of ITU • ITU recommendations • International roaming agreements and applications



SC610 Science 6 Covered in SC510 Science 5 SU620 Leadership 6 Covered in SU520 Team Leadership TE610 Telephony Principles 6 Basic ISDN principles. • Briefly explain what is meant by the term ISDN, and state the primary advantages of such a system. • State the data rate used for the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), and indicate the number of B and D channels.







PABX industry. • Describe any advantages and disadvantaged this system may have compared to an ISDN based PABX facility. TE680 CMTS 6 GSM Radio Link • Describe the terms FDMA,TDMA as used by cellular mobile radio as a multiple access technique. • Describe what is meant by Uplink and Downlink frequencies when referring to the duplex transmission used on

the mobile phone system.



GSM Network Planning • Explain how frequencies are used and reused. • Explain how channels are assigned to cells. • Explain what Adjacent Channel Interference, Co-channel Interference, and Dispersion or Reflection mean. • Explain how a radio survey can be used to monitor the performance of the network by using a vehicle fitted

with mobile radio equipment and Global Positioning Satellite System (GPSS). • Describe network planning of GSM network as traffic capacity increases, and hence examine methods of

increasing traffic capacity. • Explain the operation of micro cells and underlaid cells. GSM Evaluation Tests • Perform advanced tests a GSM mobile station using a test set to evaluate its performance characteristics. • Measure transmitter carrier power and frequencies on all channels of a base station. • Measure BER at all receivers of a base station using a loop back mobile station. • Determine the predicted co-channel interference using a simulation program. • Determine the predicted path loss using a simulation program. • Determine the predicted traffic capacity given the relevant data and using a simulation program. GSM Enhancements • Describe the main features of Low Earth Orbit Satellite (LEOS) cellular radio. • Explain how the current GSM system can double its capacity by the use of a double rate transcoder. • Describe the main features of the DCS1800 (1800MHz) system, and the need for dual-band cellular mobile

phones. TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 Transmission Network Impairments • Clock signal impairments.











TF640 Radio Tests 6 Microwave Link Commissioning Tests (Advanced) • Sweep measurements.

1. Return loss. • Measure the return loss of all antenna/feeder combinations using a directional coupler. 2. Transmitter IF/RF spectrum. • Measure all transmit IF and RF spectrums whilst modulated. • Transmitter spurious measurements. • Measure all transmitter outputs for harmonics and intermodulation products.

Protection Switching • Check correct functioning of switching and redundancy equipment. • Check 'hitless' switching if fitted. Add/drop multiplexers. • Check correct functioning of all add/drop multiplexers. • GSM base station commissioning tests (advanced). Sweep Measurements • Return loss.

• Measure the return loss of all antenna/feeder combinations. • Transmitter RF spectrum.

• Measure all transmitter RF spectrums whilst modulated. • Transmitter spurious measurements. • Measure all transmitter outputs for harmonics and intermodulation products.

Transmitter Ramp Measurements • Perform mask test for transmitter ramp on/off power envelope. Miscellaneous tests. • Check all redundant equipment for correct operation. • Place test calls and have them traced and monitored by the switch TR630 Modulation Theory 6 Communication Theory • Describe the concept of communication, information and analyse the type s of interference to communication Concepts • Describe the frequency and time domains • Use Fourier series to determine signal components • Analyse linier and non linier modulated signals • Analyse cross modulation, intermodulation and and FM conversion processes • Describe signal quality in terms of noise sidebands, FM modulation and spectral density. • Describe and analyse modulation circuits • Analyse the effect of interference on digital signals. Demodulation • Analyses demodulator circuits • Analyse the performance of demodulator signals in the presence of noise and interference Digital Modulation • Describe digital modulation schemes • Compare different modulation methods for efficiency of information transfer, bandwidth and performance in

the presence of noise. • Calculate system requirements of modulation systems • Analyse the effect on digital signals of presence of noise and interference



TDM • Describe multiplexing. • Describe the different approaches to multiplexing indicating the methods of framing, signalling and error

correction. • Describe typical system applications. Spread Spectrum • Describe the advantages of spread spectrum systems • Describe and analyse the performance of typical spread spectrum systems. Advanced Modulation Schemes • Describe and analyse the [performance of TDMA, CDMA Systems • Describe satellite systems, local area networks and GSM in detail. • Compare the performance of satellite systems, GSM, LANs and other modern implementations. TR660 Spectrum Management 6 Radio Spectrum Characteristics • Describe the propagation characteristics of the commonly used mobile radio bands and calculate expected






frequency spectrum. Radio Path • Write a program to simulate the carrier to Interference ratio for a simple cellular re-use Network • Produces graphs (from your own spreadsheet) and describe the effects of antenna height and reflection








UNIT ICTTC098B - Monitor the capacity of and recommend changes to the mobile network

Prerequisite Units None Equivalent Units None


1 Identify current data 1 Details of current traffic levels are obtained

2 Customer forecast data is obtained from marketing group

3 Planned network growth is identified from approved enterprise plans

4 Capacity trigger criteria is obtained from marketing

2 Analyse data 1 Identified data is applied against trigger criteria

2 Coverage and cell parameters are determined

3 Requirements for additional capacity is identified

3 Make recommendations relating to capacity changes

1 Changes to frequency parameters are identified and recommendations submitted to frequency planners

2 Recommendations relating to capacity are developed and submitted to planning personnel

3 Ability of transmission path and switch resources to carry increased capacity is assessed and recommendations for improvement are submitted to planning personnel

4 Traffic is manipulated through switch parameter settings as a means of relieving traffic congestion

5 Cost of proposed changes is determined and appropriate return on investment studies undertaken

4 Assess capacity changes 1 Tests and studies are organised to ensure that increased capacity adequately caters for traffic flow

2 Recommendations for further change to network is made in the event that the increase does not fully meet need or provides other problems



RANGE OF VARIABLES Traditional network technology boundaries are now being crossed with technologies such as Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Digital European Cordless Telephone (DECT), ISDN, and intelligent networks. Network systems and products vary considerably across the specific technologies and are usually unique to a particular vendor In broad terms technologies can be described as: switching, transmission, radio (fixed and mobile), video and satellite Transmission medium may be: copper cable, coaxial cable, optic fibre cable, radio, video, satellite Network Architecture can be described as; Analogue (to be phased out by 2000), PDH (plesiochrynous digital hierarchy), SDH (synchronous digital hierarchy), ATM Network hierarchy can be described as backbone, transport, broadband, data, HLS, CLS Capacity trigger can be formula, erlangs, feature effect, forecast method Frequency plans include: interference levels, frequencies, signal levels, frequency reuse, degree of separation Traffic data is generally available from; network management tool, switch Relevant legislation, codes, regulations and standards include: International standards ISO 9000, 9001 ACA Standards TS 14 ITU recommendations Occupational Health and Safety Spectrum Management

EVIDENCE GUIDE Assessment Location A switching, transmission or radio facility. Assessment Resources Switching, transmission or radio equipment in live operating state, enterprise information systems, alarm systems, vendor manual. Evidence of Competency Candidates will provide evidence of their performance and their underpinning skills and knowledge. • Performance evidence may be demonstrations, documents or work samples. • Skills and knowledge evidence may be completion of training courses or on-the-job learning. Evidence Mentor/assessor observes candidate's competency in: • source identification, collection and analysis of relevant data • preparing of a plan indicating growth potential and recommendations for meeting such growth within

timeframes which meets customer demands • all related occupational health and safety requirements and work practices



Mentor/assessor observes candidate—and candidate delivers at least three oral reports to mentor/assessor explaining: • using tools and software packages for forecasting and measurement • identifying site/ channel capacity, relevant network growth and forecasting growth • reading, interpreting and using equipment/system manuals and specifications and relevant enterprise policy and

documentation Candidate delivers at least two oral reports to mentor/assessor explaining: • interaction with enterprise personnel, customers and other contractors • customer focus and consideration of customer needs Candidate submits hard copy of a report containing assessment of required capacity changes. Skills and Knowledge Summary Code Title CI610 Communication 6 CO610 Computer Skills 6 CS610 Customer Relations 6 DI610 Digital Theory 6 DI630 Digital Radio 6 EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 IN620 Teamwork 6 IN640 Workplace Networking 6 MA620 Mathematics 6 MA630 Mathematical Modelling 6 NE620 Network Architecture 6 OH610 Occupational Health and Safety 6 PR610 Problem Solving 6 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 RA640 Mobile Traffic Management Principles 6 SC610 Science 6 SU610 Planning 6 TE610 Telephony Principles 6 TF620 Test Analysis and Diagnosis 6 TR650 Traffic Management 6 TR660 Spectrum Management 6 CI610 Communication 6 Reports and Submissions Plan and write a long report and/or submission: • Define the purpose of a submission • Develop an effective plan to produce a long report or submission • Use an appropriate format to write a long report or submission that gives the reader information and evidence,














advised. • Processes to obtain client feedback on product quality and service levels provided. DI610 Digital Theory 6

Assumed - DI510 Digital Theory 5

• Analyse fault reports of existing telecommunications systems. • Devise tests and measurements to identify deficiencies in designs both software and hardware of new and





recommendations for converting an unreliable transmission link. Note: This topic may overlap with Fault Finding, Test Equipment, Test Analysis and Diagnosis,Network Equipment, Network Management Principles and Capabilities.



DI630 Digital Radio 6 Minimum Shift Keying Digital Modulation Techniques • Explain the differences between MSK and GMSK. • Describe the phase trajectory of MSK/GMSK. • Explain the need for differential encoding in GMSK. • Compare GMSK and DAMPS digital modulation techniques. Speech Coding Techniques • Revise 64kbit/second digital speech coding for telephony. • Discuss alternative speech coding techniques, ADPCM, AVSD/CVSD, APC. • Describe the concept of voice coding based on modelling of the human voice. • Describe the Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) technique. GSM Speech Coding • Explain the history behind the selection of the GSM coder algorithm. • Describe the three main requirements for GSM speech coding as, exploiting redunduncyin human speech,

exploiting pauses in natural flow, and maintaining speech quality as good as analog cellular. • Explain the operation of the Long Term Predictor (LTP) part of the GSM coder. • Explain the operation of the Regular Pulse Excitation (RPE) process. • Fully explain the operation of the LTP LPC/RPE coding process used in GSM. • Examine the bit allocation of the GSM speech coder. • Explain the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) technique. • Describe how ciphering is achieved in GSM. • Determine the encoded voice bit rate. • Determine the gross bit rate after forward error correction and channel coding bits are • Added to speech transmission. GSM Enhancements • Compare phase 1 GSM with phase 2 GSM. • Describe enhanced full rate speech coding. • Describe half rate speech coding and its future impact on system capacity. • Compare data services offered by GSM. • Describe the use of CDMA in GSM networks. • List supplementary services available now and in the future, such as, call barring, • Call waiting, call hold, conference calls, calling party ID. Computer Simulation • Simulate the interleaving process and forward error correction process with a computer. • Program and comment on its effectiveness with burst errors of varying length. EN620 Enterprise Information Systems 6 Information systems related to obtaining information and recording outcomes for a wide range of operations. Detailed interpretation of the impact of new information on future events.



IN610 Interpersonal Relationships 6 Speaking in Public Plan to make an effective oral presentation: • impromptu • prepared • formal • informal Identify the purpose of the address: • to inform • to persuade • to introduce • to sell • to entertain Prepare the presentation: • research topic • identify audience prior knowledge, interests, and expectations • write the presentation • rewrite for the ear • practice and revise Deliver the speech: • incorporate relevant and effective audio/visual aids • encourage audience participation where appropriate • present an impressive image through non-verbal communication • overcome anxiety and stage-fright IN620 Teamwork 6 Leadership in Teams Assumed IN320 Teamwork 3 • Plan and prepare for the team to work effectively • Clarify team goals and purposes • Represent the work team to others if required • Differentiate between types of power • Describe different leadership styles and their impact on the flow of communication • Employ strategies to motivate team members where appropriate • Assist team members to identify their roles and tasks • Interact supportively and constructively with team members. IN640 Workplace Networking 6 Global Networking Assumed IN540 Workplace Networking 5 • Demonstrate a basic understanding of Australia's international economic and political position. • Suggest future world trends that are likely to have significant impact on Australia's international economic and

political position. • Define the enterprise's current role within this context and speculate to its possible future role. • Cultivate a tolerance and understanding for cultural diversity in the workplace at local and global levels.



MA630 Mathematical Modelling 6 • Use techniques of statistics to analyse the presentation of data, determine confidence limits, define, design and

perform statistical tests and gather, process and present data. • Methods covered will include 'alpha' levels of confidence, H0 and H1 tests of hypotheses, etc. NE620 Network Architecture 6 Assumed NE420 Network Architecture 4 Switching Network Architecture • Discuss network clock synchronisation and clock hierarchy structure. • Explain the concept of,


















PR610 Problem Solving 6 Covered in PR310 Problem Solving 3 RA620 Radio Frequency Theory and Hazards 6 Planning a Radio Network • Discuss radio site considerations including, availability of power, all weather access,environmental concerns

and site costs. Radio System Design • List performance and availability objectives. • Conduct path profile investigation between two antennas. • List possible obstructions in path profile between antennas, such as buildings or trees. • Explain path clearance using 'k' factor for earth bulge. • Explain path clearance using Freznel zones. • Calculate link budgets and fade margins. • Explain frequency and polarisation choices. • Explain how interference from other radio networks can be reduced. • Explain why multiple hop microwave systems should be installed in a zigzag manner. Radio Link Reliability • Revise the term 'multipath or frequency selective' fading. • Discuss how space diversity, or frequency diversity, or a combination of both can reduce • The effects of multipath fading. • Describe how the use of twin-path, hot standby or N+1 arrangements can improve reliability. • Explain methods to combat vandalism. • List possible power backups in the events of mains failure (include battery, solar cells. • diesel motor generator set). • Discuss possibility of local arrangements to connect trailer mounted motor generator set • To external connection on radio hut if mains power lost for extended time periods. • Discuss need for airconditioning in radio huts. • List the need for remote alarms at unmanned radio sites.



Radio Link Availability • Discuss causes of outrages. • Explain flat (rain) fading effects if frequency above 10Ghz. • Discuss outages from noise and interference. RA640 Mobile Traffic Management Principles 6 Assumed RA630 Mobile Equipment 6 Free Space Propagation • Calculate FSPL, EIRP and electric field strength over typical GSM radio paths. • Compare point to point and propagation prediction models. • Discuss fading variables. • Discuss fading countermeasures. GSM Frequency Spectrum • Determine the effects of noise, FSPL, obstruction effects and noise on GSM spectrum. • Compare GSM spectrum performance in rural and city environments. • Discuss the reason for 35 km maximum range with GSM. GSM Cellular Radio System Basics • Describe concepts of cellular radio frequency reuse. • Describe network planning of GSM cellular networks as capacity increases. • Explain operation of microcells and umbrella cells. • Discuss interference management of GSM cellular systems. • Calculate cell radius re-use distance. • Examine methods of increasing traffic capacity. GSM Network Management • Discuss implementation of frequency hopping. • Describe remote software down loading to GSM radio sites. • Evaluation of busy hour traffic measurements. • Evaluation of quality of service measurements. • Evaluation of availability measurements. • Describe the self checking nature of the GSM network. • Describe the role of the Operations and Maintenance Centre. • Describe the role of the Network Management Centre. • Describe the role of the Administration Centre. Computer Simulation Tasks • Determine the predicted co-channel interference using a simulation program. • Determine the predicted path loss using a simulation program. • Find the predicted traffic capacity given the necessary data using a simulation program. SC610 Science 6 Covered in SC510 Science 5 SU610 Planning 6 Covered in SU510 Planning 5






however, manufacturers have not standardised on MTBF measurement. • Explain the terms Mean Time To Restore (MTTR), Availability and Unavailability. TR650 Traffic Management 6 Basic Principles • Derive Equations of State from first principles • Solve queuing problems using the equation of states. • Write and demonstrate a program to simulate a single server, single queue packet system (i.e. a discrete event





linear and/or an exponential equation. Management Functions • Analyse typical day to day variations and seasonal variation in traffic flow in order to prepare a traffic

management plan to improve the traffic flow (maximise revenue) • Describe typical traffic management functions performed on a day to day basic by network operations staff. TR660 Spectrum Management 6 Radio Spectrum Characteristics • Describe the propagation characteristics of the commonly used mobile radio bands and calculate expected






frequency spectrum.